tcatb's flDobern language Settee
A SPANISH GRAMMAR
BY
E. C. HILLS AND J. D. M. FORD
UNIVERSITY OP CALIFORNIA HARVARD UNIVERSITY
WITH ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
D, C. HEATH & CO., PUBLISHERS
BOSTON NEW YORK CHICAGO
COPYRIGHT, 1904, 1915,
BY D. C. HEATH & Co.
4J2
PRINTED IN U. S. A.
PREFACE
IN this grammar the authors have aimed to present to
English-speaking students the more important facts of pro-
nunciation, inflection, and syntax in a clear and adequate
way. No attempt has been made to separate inflection and
syntax : it is hardly necessary to keep them asunder in an
elementary text-book. An abundance of exercise material
has been given, and the exercises have been made as prac-
tical as possible. The verb list is very full, and has been
provided with ample references, in the hope that it may
encourage drill upon one of the most difficult divisions of
elementary Spanish grammar.
To no slight degree drill work has been made a conscious
feature in the preparation of the composition material. It
will be seen, particularly in the later exercises of the book>
that the sentences of the English part are based on the words
and the turns of phrase occurring in the Spanish part pre-
ceding. On this account the student needs to resort but
rarely to the Vocabulary, when translating from English into
Spanish.
The grammar has been prepared with a view to facilitat-
ing the early reading of easy Spanish texts. Teachers do
not agree as to when reading should begin, and there can be
iii
M186416 '
iV PREFACE
no fixed rule where conditions vary so greatly. But experi-
ence has led us to believe that in most college classes it is
best to begin reading almost immediately, and certainly not
later than the end of the fourth week, and to give to reading
at least one-half of the time thereafter during the school
year. Accordingly, the most essential elements of inflection
and syntax are set forth, in so far as it seemed practicable,
in the first few lessons, the inflection of verbs, for instance,
being taken up with the first lesson, and an explanation
of the use and meaning of each tense being given along
with the inflection.
In classes composed of advanced college students it may
be well to take an entire lesson at a time ; but in many col-
lege classes it will be best to divide each lesson into two
parts, and in high and preparatory school classes it may be
best to divide each lesson into three parts. The divisions
may be made as follows : —
First part, — inflection and syntax, and Spanish-English
exercises.
Second part, — English-Spanish exercises, and a review
of inflection and syntax.
First part, — inflection and syntax, with much oral
drill based thereon.
II.
Second part, — Spanish-English exercises, and a review
of inflection and syntax.
Third part, — English-Spanish exercises.
In each lesson-period there should be as much oral drill as
time will permit.
PREFACE V
In some lessons there are rules, usually in small type, that
may well be omitted on going through the grammar the first
time. It has not been indicated definitely which rules should
be thus omitted, as it was thought best to leave it to the good
judgment of the individual teacher. As an illustration, in
Lesson XXIII the following could be omitted : §§ 109, c and
?; in ; 115 ; and 116.
Teachers will differ as to whether it is best to take or omit
the English-Spanish exercises, on going through the grammar
the first time. Some successful teachers prefer to omit them
at first and to take them up with a review. By following this
method, the student is the sooner prepared for reading, and
he may have an abundance of written work by copying dic-
tated passages taken from the text that is read. After going
through the grammar once, the student may then review it,
taking at a lesson one or more of the English-Spanish
exercises.
We wish to acknowledge our indebtedness to Professor
E. S. Joynes, of South Carolina College, for reading the first
proofs and making many valuable suggestions ; and we can-
not sufficiently express our thanks to Mr. S. W. Clary, whose
kindly and helpful interest in our book has far transcended
mere business considerations.
E. C H. AND J. D. M. F.
JULY, 1904.
In revising for the second edition (March, 1905), we gratefully acknow-
ledge valuable suggestions from a number who have used the book, in
particular Ur. N. F. Hall, of Simmons College, Boston.
CONTENTS
PAGl
PRONUNCIATION I
LESSONS
> , I. Gender of nouns. Indefinite article. Present indicative
of regular verbs . . . . . . . .21
II. Plural of nouns. Definite article. Negation ... 24
III. Feminine and plural of adjectives. Present indicative of
radical-changing verbs of the first and second conju-
gations 28
IV. Present indicative of radical-changing verbs of the third
conjugation, and of tener and haber. Meaning and
use of tener and haber. Participles. Idioms . . 32
^V. Personal subject-pronouns. Usted. Possessive and de-
monstrative adjectives 36
- VI. Present indicative of ser and estar. Meaning of ser and
estar. Idioms . 39
VII. Possessive case. Indirect object. Personal d. Inter-
rogative sentences 42
VIII. Imperfect and preterite indicative of regular verbs. Use
of imperfect and preterite indicative .... 46
IX. Neuter article lo. Use of the definite article ... 49
X. Omission of the definite and indefinite articles. Preterite
of radical-changing verbs. Idioms .... 54
XI. Position of descriptive adjectives. Agreement of adjectives 58
XII. Imperfect and preterite indicative of tener, haber, ser, and
estar. Pluperfect and preterite perfect. Idioms . 62
XIII. Apocopation of adjectives. Numerals .... 66
vii
Vlll
CONTENTS
LESSONS
XIV.
XV.
XVI.
XVII.
XVIII.
XIX.
XX.
XXI.
XXII.
XXIII.
XXIV.
XXV.
XXVI.
XXVII.
XXVIII.
XXIX.
Future and conditional indicative of regular verbs.
Idioms. Present, imperfect, and future indicative to
denote an act or state that continues from one period
into another
69
74
79
84
Comparison of adjectives and adverbs. "Than." Tan
. . . como
Adjectives used substantively. Plural number. Future
and conditional indicative of tener, haber, ser, and
estar. Future perfect. Future of probability
Imperative mood and present subjunctive. Present sub-
junctive to express command or entreaty
Personal pronouns 89
Tu and usted. Ello and lo. Imperative and present
subjunctive of tener, haber, ser, and estar. Perfect
subjunctive 93
Subjunctive in dependent clauses. Idioms ... 98
Prepositional forms of personal pronouns. Imperfect
subjunctive of regular and radical-changing verbs.
Use of imperfect subjunctive. Sequence of tenses . 102
Personal pronoun-objects. Imperfect subjunctive of
tener, haber, ser, and estar. Pluperfect subjunctive.
Conditions " contrary to fact." Idioms . . . 109
Se and si. Reflexive construction. Hypothetical sub-
junctive. Use of hypothetical subjunctive. Com-
moner forms of conditional sentences . . . .114
Possessive adjectives. Infinitive. Present participle.
Past participle. Idioms 123
Possessive pronouns. Regular verbs. Orthographic
changes 128
Demonstratives. Radical-changing verbs, first class . 131
Relative pronouns. Radical-changing verbs, second and
third classes 135
Relative pronouns. Inceptive and -uir verbs . . 139
Interrogative pronouns. Ir and venir. Idioms . . 143
CONTENTS
IX
LESSONS
XXX.
Negation. Querer and
Indefinite adjective pronouns.
poder. Idioms 147
XXXI. Numerals. Hacer and decir. Idioms . . . . 155
XXXII. Adverbs. For and para. Nouns used adjectively.
Preposition d with verbs meaning " to take from,"
"to ask of," etc. Preposition retained before a
substantive clause. Idioms. Dar, saber, oir, and ver.
Meaning of conocer and saber. Idioms . . . 162
XXXIII. Conjunctions. Agreement of subject and verb. Word
order. Andar, caber, poner, asir, valer, salir, caer,
traer, and -ducir. Meaning of andar and ir. Idioms 170
XXXIV. Qualifying suffixes. Idioms 176
THE VERB 184
ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS 232
VOCABULARY 245
INDEX 287
SPANISH GRAMMAR
PRONUNCIATION
THE ALPHABET
1. The Spanish alphabet has thirty different signs :
a, b, c, ch, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, 11, m, n, n, o, p, q, r, rr, s,
t, u, v, w, x, y, z.
The Castilian pronunciation of these is taken as the norm by
cultured speakers in Spain. It is therefore the pronunciation
adopted here. It is fair to state, however, that certain dialect
peculiarities (especially Andalusian) have passed over to the
former Spanish colonies in America and the Philippines and
now represent the pronunciation of the larger proportion of the
Spanish-speaking peoples. The signs k and w occur mainly
in words from foreign languages, and in them receive their
foreign values.
2. The following table is intended to convey a general idea
of the Spanish sounds. Hardly any of the English or other
equivalents mentioned are more than approximate ; yet, taken
in connection with the more exact description to be given
later, they should aid the student to acquire a good Spanish
pronunciation.
varies in quality between the a
of far and that of fat.
usually like German (bilabial)
TV. try to pronounce English
b and v in one breath.
like k, when the Spanish letter
stands before a, o, u or a
consonant, or is final.
like /// of thin, when the Span-
ish letter stands before e or i.
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Ch like ch of church.
d usually approximate to tne th
of that,
e varies between the vowel sound
in mate and that in met.
f usually like English f.
g usually like " hard " g of gate,
gilt, etc., when the Spanish
letter stands before a, o, u,
or a consonant,
like a strong English h pro-
duced far back in the mouth
(or like German ch of nach),
when the Spanish letter
stands before e or i.
Jl usually silent. Before ue it may
be pronounced like a weak
English h.
i varies between the vocalic
sound in meet &nd that in mit.
j like the variety of Spanish g
occurring before e or i. The
j has this value everywhere.
k like English k.
1 like English / pronounced on
or close to the teeth.
3. Vowels. — The vowel sounds of the speech are denoted
by a, e, i, o, u, and occasionally y (which is a vowel in the
conjunction y, ' and,' as well as at the end of a word, as in
rey, 'king'). The vowel y has the same sound as Spanish i.
There is in English a tendency to convert all long vowels into
diphthongs ; that is, to add a final glide sound to the original
vowel. This tendency must be avoided in Spanish, where the
individual vowel denotes a simple vocalic sound.
a is approximate to English a in ' far,' or to a sound between the a of
far ' and that of ' fat ' : it is never so " broad " as English a (open back
11 approximate to Hi of million.
m like English m.
n like English n pronounced on
or close to the teeth.
H approximate to ni of onion.
0 varies between the vocalic sound
in note and that in not.
p like English/.
C[ found only with a following u\
qu = English k.
1 like English r carefully uttered.
rr like English r much prolonged.
S usually like English ss.
t like English / pronounced on
or close to the teeth.
U varies between the vocalic sound
in pool and that in pull.
V the same in sound as Spanish b.
W as in foreign languages.
X usually like English x ; occa-
sionally like s.
y like English y\ occasionally
a vowel like Spanish i.
Z like English th of thin / cf. Span-
ish c before e or i.
PRONUNCIATION 3
variety of the vowel) in * all ' nor so " flat " as a (close forward variety of
the vowel) in 'fat.'
e is usually closed, but is moderately open in most closed syllables, or
when followed by 11 or rr, as in 61, ser, ten, este, ella, perro, etc., and
very open in the diphthong ue (here e approximates the French eu of
seuT).
i in stressed syllables is always closed; in unstressed syllables it approx-
imates English t in ' pin.'
Open 0 is the only one that is normal in Castilian, but it is not so open
as open Italian o. It is like French o in nord, .and not very different
from English o in * north.' It is more closed after labials (as in amor}
and in open syllables, but is never so closed as in French beau.
Stressed U is almost equal to English oo in 'food' (not so rounded as
French ou) ; in a closed syllable it generally approximates to English oo
in 'book.' The caution is to be given that Spanish u should never be
pronounced like the diphthongal u of English ' tune ' or ' cube.'
It would be futile to attempt to give here any more precise definition
of the vowel sounds than has been given. As has been intimated, each
vowel may have an open or a close value, similar to the open and close
qualities of the vowels in French and Italian. But in Spanish these
differences of quality are not of so marked importance as in those other
languages.
Moreover, Spanish vowels are not so " rounded " or " closed " as in
French, but more so than in English.
Quantity. — In Castilian there are no long vowels, properly speaking,
all being short or of medium length. English-speaking students must
avoid prolonging vowels, especially final vowels, as occurs so generally in
English when the vowel is stressed.
Elision. — Elision is common in spoken Spanish, where a vowel is
repeated, as in de 61 (pronounced d'el), la altura (1'altura), de este
(d'este), ya lo oigo (ya 1'oigo).
4. Diphthongs and Triphthongs. — The vowels may be
divided into two chief classes : the strong, a, e, o ; and the
weak, i (y) and u.
A combination of two or three adjacent vowels may form a
single syllable in pronunciation ; such a combination constitutes
SPANISH GRAMMAR
a diphthong or a triphthong. The individual elements of a
diphthong or a triphthong are all to be pronounced, but more
rapidly than when they stand outside such a combination.
i. Diphthongs. — A Spanish diphthong, properly so called,
consists of a combination into a single syllable of one of the
strong vowels (a, e, o) with one of the weak vowels (i or y, u),
or of one (i) of the weak vowels with the other (u). The
stress, if the syllable be the accented one of the word, will fall
upon the strong vowel, or upon the second of the weak vowels
where the diphthong consists of two of these latter.
The possible combinations, governed by the relative position
of the vowels, are given in the following list. The vowel of the
diphthong that may bear the stress is the one in heavy type.
ai (ay), as in baile, dance (hay, there is,
there are).
au, as in flauta, flute.
ci (ey), as in reina, queen (rey, king).
eu, as in deuda, debt.
Oi (Oy), as in Oigo, I hear (doy, I give}.
ou, as in bou, fishing-boat (a rare
diphthong).
iu, as in triunfo, triumph.
ia, as in fiar, to trust (often a
dissyllable).
ua, as in cuatro, four.
ie, as in sien, temple.
ue, as in fuerte, strong.
io, as in naciones, nations.
uo, as in cuota, quota.
ui, as in huir, to flee.
a. The vowels of these combinations are of approximately equal force
in a diphthong not bearing the accent of the word, as in bailar, 'to
dance ' ; flautero, ' flute-player ' ; reinar, ' to reign ' ; deudor, ' debtor ' ;
oigamos, ' let us hear ' ; triunfar, ' to triumph ' ; fiaremos, ' we shall
trust,' etc.
b. Two adjacent strong vowels are normally regarded as forming two
distinct syllables, and not a diphthong; as in faena, 'labor'; caoba, 'ma-
hogany ' ; loa, ' prologue ' ; reo, ' defendant ' ; leer, ' to read ' ; roer, ' to
gnaw,' etc. So also a combination of two weak vowels with the stress on
the first of them (as in fluido, 'fluid'), or of a strong and a weak vowel
with the stress on the weak vowel (as in traido, ' bought ' ; roido, ' gnawed ' \
forms not a diphthong, but two separate syllables. In these two latter
PRONUNCIATION 5
cases the stress is usually indicated by a written accent. For metrical
purposes even these adjacent vowel? ma> occasionally count as ?. single
syllable.
2 Triphthongs. — A triphthong consists of a combination
jf a stressed strong vowel with two weak vowels, between which
it is always placed. There are but four possible combinations,
all of which end in i (written y in the final position or before
the vowel of another syllable).
iai, as in estudidis, you study.
iei, as in principieis, you may begin.
uai (way), as in fraguais, you forge (guay woe}.
uei >.«iey), as in continues, may y-ju continut (buey, ox; bueyes, oxen)
NOTE. — Spanish words cannot properly begin with a diphthong or a
triphthong. Where the normal development of a Latin word into Spanish
involved the passage of initial stressed e to ie, or of initial stressed o to
ue (for Spanish usually broke up the short Latin vowels into these diph-
thongs), the i was changed to^ and an h was prefixed to the u : e.g. Latin
errat, Spanish yerra (for terra), 'he errs' (cf. Latin errdre, Spanish
errar, 'to err ') ; Latin ovum, Spanish huevo, ' egg.'
5. Consonants.1 — For the sake of convenience the conso-
nants will be considered in several groups, determined, in
the main, by the kind of organs that produce the sounds in
question.
6. Labials and labio-dentals, that is, sounds produced by the
action, upon a current of air, of the lips alone or of the upper
teeth and the lower lip working together •
b, v, p, f, m, w (u in hiatus).
1 The Spanish names of the consonants are these : be, ce, chet de, efe, ge
hache,jota, ka, ele, elle, erne, ene, e»e, pe, cut ere, erre, ese, te, ve (also called u dt
corazon or u consonance), ve doble, egws,ye (also called y gnega,, zeta. To the
consonants and vowels of these names are of course, to be given their Spanish
value.
6 SPANISH GRAMMAR
b and v denote the same sound. This (a voiced l bilabial
spirant) is ordinarily one not used in English, but is akin to
the German (bilabial) w. It is most easily pronounced by
seeking to utter the English b without closing the lips entirely
(as is requisite in the true English ^), and permitting the air
to pass out constantly through a narrow slit between the lips ;
as in beber, ' to drink ' ; vivir, ' to live.' The sound of the
English v (labio-dental) does not exist in Castilian.
After m or n (whether n be in the same word or at the end of the pre-
ceding word) both the b and the v receive a sound like that of the
English b (a voiced labial stop); as in tambiSn, 'as well,' 'also'; en-
vidia, 'envy' (often spelled embidia in Old Spanish); con valor, 'with
courage.' In such cases the n, even though retained in spelling, receives
the value of m. Moreover, the English sound of b is often given to both
b and v when initial and emphatic, as in j basta ! ' enough ! ' j villano !
'villain! ' Before t or s, a b approximates sometimes to p in sound (i.e.
becomes voiceless), as in subterraneo, 'subterranean'; abstenerse, 'to
abstain,' etc.; and in such cases it is often slighted entirely in popular
speech, as in substancia, obscuro,2 etc.
p. Approximately the English sound (a voiceless labial
stop) ; as in papel, ' paper.'
f. Usually like the English f (a voiceless labio-dental spi-
rant) ; as in favor, ' favor.'
Although the fact is denied by some observers, it is a question whether
the f does not occasionally have a voiceless value corresponding to the
voiced one of b and v (i.e. whether it is not a voiceless bilabial spirant).
m resembles the English m (a voiced labial nasal) ; as in
mimar, ' to fondle.'
1 A voiced consonant is one in the production of which the vocal cords
vibrate, as may be ascertained by touching the throat in front of the larynx
during the utterance of b, d, g in English. There is no such vibration in the
production of the corresponding voiceless stop consonants, p, t, k.
2 The b of obscuro, substancia, etc., is commonly omitted in writing, and is
pronounced only by the pedantic.
PRONUNCIATION 7
w occurs usually in words from foreign languages, and in
them it has the foreign pronunciation : thus it has the English
sound in Wellington and the German sound in Wagner. Un-
accented u in hiatus, as in fuerte, ' strong,' or cuando, * when,'
is, in Castilian pronunciation, only a semi-vowel ; that is, it is
partly a consonant, and as such it approximates in value to the
English w.
W is found in Spanish in a few proper names that are by no means
recent importations, but go back to the period of Visigothic dominion in
Spain : Wamba, Witiza. In these it receives the usual value of Spanish
b and v : cf. the spellings Vamba and Vitiza sometimes found.
7. Dentals or lingua dentals, that is, sounds produced by
the united action of the tongue and the teeth upon a current
of air.
t, d, c (followed by e or i), z, 1, n. Along with these may be
considered 11, n, and a variety of n occurring before " hard " c,
qu, or " hard " g, etc., although these 1 and n sounds are not
properly dentals.
t, Not unlike English /, except that it, as well as all the
Spanish dentals, is produced farther forward in the mouth than
the English dentals.
In Spanish the point of the tongue often touches the teeth when the t
and other dentals are produced, whereas in English the tongue is allowed
to touch the roof of the mouth somewhat back of the roots of the upper
teeth. There is, therefore, a very appreciable difference between the
Bounds of / and n in English ten and those in Spanish ten, ' hold.'
d. There is a marked difference between the sound of Eng-
lish d and that of Spanish d, for the latter, without being inter-
dental, somewhat resembles the th of English then. It may be
compared to an English d prolonged, and uttered with the
tongue touching the upper teeth. Ex., seda, nadie, todo.
8 SPANISH GRAMMAR
The English d (a voiced dental slop} is produced by the escape of air
from the mouth after the passage of the air has first been stopped by con-
tact between the tongue and the roof of the mouth back of the upper teeth.
The common Spanish sound (a voiced dental spirant) is produced during
contact between the tongue and the teeth, and the passage of the air is
not wholly cut off.
At the beginning of a breath-group, or after 1 or n, d has some of the
explosive effect or the English d, as in | diablo ! ' the deuce ! ' ; espalda,
'shoulHer'; andando. 'walking.' At the end of a word the Castilian
sound of d resembles that of th in English thin (a voiceless dental spirant.
— z}, as in sed, 'thirst', while in Andalusia and Spanish America it
tends to disappear entirely, as in usted, ' you,' which is usually pronounced
uste. Between vowels, d nas disappeared largely in the pronunciation of
untrained speakers, and even those who pronounce carefully show a de-
cided tendency to suppress this intervocalic d, saying, for example, amao
for amado, ' loved.' Moreover, both the written and the spoken language
have already accepted the loss ot the intervocalic d of the reflexive imper-
ative second person plural: e.g. amaos, 'love one another' (for amad,
* love,' 4 OS, 'you, -each, other'),
c followed by e or i ; \
[These nave a common value (a voice-
z in all positions. J
less dental spirant) in Castilian speech, viz. a lisping sound
approximate to that of th in English thin, as in cielo, ' heaven ' ;
cena, 'supper'; zapato, 'shoe.* Compare the value of final
Spanish d as already described. In Southern Spain and in
Spanish America and the Philippines, both c (e, i) and z are
pronounced like s.
According to some observers, a z followed by a voiced consonant (i.e.
such a consonant as n, 1, g, etc.) may itself become voiced and have
approximately the value of English th in then; as in portazgo, 'toll';
hazlo, ' do it '; gozne, ' hinge.'
1 and n have usually values resembling the English values
(1, a voiced lateral fricative ; n, a voiced dental nasal), but they
are produced farther forward in the mouth than the English
sounds, so that there is a perceptible difference between the
PRONUNCIATION 9
sounds of / and n in English lance and those in its Spanish
equivalent lanza, as there is between the n of English ten and
that of Spanish ten, ' hold.'
Final 1 in Spanish never has the semi-vocalic, " hollow " sound of final
English /. Compare English ' dell ' with Spanish del.
When followed by the so-called " hard " g or k sound, by g (before e
or i), by j, or by aspirated h (in hue-), as in vengo, 'I come'; bianco,
« white'; banquero, ' banker'; rengifero, 'reindeer'; naranja, 'orange'; un
hueso, ' a bone/ n ceases to be dental, and acquires a value similar to that
of ng in English sing (i.e. a velar nasal value).
In some parts of Spain and of Spanish America the velar sound of final
n is common, as in pan (pronounced pang); but this pronunciation
should be avoided.
11 has a sound most nearly represented in English by that
of Hi in million (i.e. it is a palatalized form of /, not a doubled
/, in sound).
It should be noted that while the English sound of lli in million is that
of / followed by that of y, the Spanish sound is that of 1 infected by y
throughout the duration of its enunciation; i.e. it is 1 no longer dental,
but produced with the tongue in the y position, or, in other words, with
the middle of the tongue touching the hard palate. There is, therefore,
some difference between the pronunciation of Hi in million and that ot 11
in its Spanish equivalent mill6n. In some parts of Spain and Spanish
America, 11 has become iy in sound, e.g. caballo, ' horse,' is pronounced
cabaiyo , in the vulgar speech of certain regions, this y has disappeared
entirely when immediately following the stressed syllable, e.g. cabai-0 fot
caballo, si-a for silla, etc. (but cabai-yito for caballito, si-yita for sillita,
etc.). This omission of y, while very common in some parts of Mexico,
the Argentine Republic, etc., is everywhere considered as vulgar.
n. This (a palatalized form of n) is similarly n produced
with the tongue in the y position. It is only approximately
rendered by the ni of onion or the ny of canyon : this latter
expresses in a measure, but yet not perfectly, the n of the Span-
ish original can6n. The mark over the n is termed the tilde
JO SPANISH GRAMMAR
8. Gutturals,1 i.e. throat sounds.
f followed by a, o, or u ;
C -! followed by any consonant except b;
( at the end of a word.
qu always followed by e or i*
k in foreign words.
f followed by a, o, or u ;
[ followed by a consonant,
gu when followed by e or i.
The first three of these, i.e. c in the positions indicated,
qu, and k, have approximately the sound of English k or
"hard" c (a voiceless guttural or palatal stop); as in carro,
' cart ' ; conde, ' count ' ; culto, ' cult ' ; creador, ' creator ' ; frac,
' frock coat ' ; quedo, ' quiet ' ; quilla, ' keel ' ; kiosko, « kiosk ' ;
ki!6metro, ' kilometre.'
The last two in the list, i.e. g before a, o, u, or a consonant,
and gu before e or i, have approximately the sound of the
" hard " English g (a voiced guttural or palatal stop) of got
or get; as in galante, 'gallant'; golfo, 'gulf ; gutural, * gut-
tural ' ; gruta, ' grotto ' ; guarda, ' guard ' ; guerrilla, ' guer-
rilla' ; guia, 'guide.'
In such cases as these last two (guerrilla, guia) the u is not itself pro-
nounced, but is merely a ?ign that the g has the " hard " sound before the
following e or i. Where the gu is followed by another vowel than these,
the g has its " hard " sound, but the u is now pronounced, having to some
degree the value of English w, as in guano, ' guano.' Occasionally, even
before e or i, the u has a pronounceable value, but in such cases it must
be written with a diaeresis, as in antigiiedad, 'antiquity'; lingiiisttco,
1 linguistic.'
1 Conventionally called gutturals, the k (i.e Spanish qu) and " hard " g
sounds may be more properly termed palatal stops when they are followed by
9 or i.
PRONUNCIATION 1 1
In the speech of many, perhaps most, Spaniards and Spanish Americans,
intervocalic " hard " g tends to become slightly spirant (i.e. a prolonged g:
cf. b and d), except after n, as in ha go, ' T make', hormiga, 'ant'; droga,
'drug,' etc. (but not in tengo, ' I have,' etc.). In some parts of southern
Spain and Spanish America, g before u -f vowel, and gu before i -f-
rowel, tend to disappear in the vulgar speech, as awa for agua, * water,'
siyendo for siguiendo, ' following,' etc.
9. Sibilants, i.e. hissing sounds. In Castilian s is the only
simple sign denoting a sibilant value, but there are two signs
denoting a compound sound into which an s value enters, viz.
ch and x.
s. The Spanish 6 commonly has the sharp hissing sound of
English initial s, as in ' sing,' and of English ss, as in ' hiss ' ;
thus, saco, 'sack'; sal, 'salt'; pasar, 'to pass' ; notas, 'notes.'
Caution must be taken not to give to Spanish s between vowels the
sound of English z (a voiced sibilant) or of intervocalic English s as in
'rose.'
With regard to the s before a voiced consonant, usage varies. In some
parts of the Spanish-speaking world it remains unvoiced, in other parts it
becomes voiced, as in desde, * since'; sesgo, 'slope'; mismo, 'same,'
'self,' etc.
In Andalusia and parts of Spanish America, s before a consonant, and
final in stressed syllables, becomes in the vulgar speech a soft aspirate,
approximating to, but softer than, German ch in ich. Ex. : las bonitas
muchachas becomes la' bonita* muchachas ; el compds, el compa'; dos
ninos, do* ninos, etc. This pronunciation is rather widespread.
ch, a compound sound (a voiceless dental plus a voiceless
palatal sibilant), not much unlike the ch of ' church.' ' It ib made
up of the sound of the Spanish dental t, followed by a sound
similar to that of English sh ; as in mucho, ' much.'
x, a compound sound (a voiceless guttural stop plus a
voiceless sibilant s), usually quite like the x of English •' six '
or ' lax.' It consists of a k sound followed by the sibilant s
12 SPANISH GRAMMAR
sound, as in axioma, ' axiom.' When the x stands before a con-
sonant, the Spanish Academy insists that it be still pronounced
as ks ; but the generality of speakers pronounce it there as s
simply ; thus, in extranjero, ' stranger ' ; sexto, ' sixtn.' In such
cases there is a manifest tendency to write s instead of x, i.e
sstranjero, sesto, etc.
Between vowels x is, according to certain authorities, sometimes pro-
nounced like English gs (i.e. as a voiced guttural stop plus a sibilant), so
that the x of Spanish examen may resemble the a of its English equiva-
lent ' examination.'
10. Aspirates, or well-breathed sounds.
j in all positions.
g followed by e or i.
h followed by ue.
j in all positions and g before e or i denote the one sound
(a voiceless guttural or velar spirant) which is most closely
approximated in English by pronouncing the h of ' hot ' very
far back in the mouth and in a very forcible way ; as in jamas,
' never ' ; gente, ' people ' ; girar, ' to turn.' The sound of the
German ch in nach, dock, etc., affords a still closer parallel to
the Spanish sound.
In the production of this Spanish sound, the velar (or soft) palate
vibrates against the back of the tongue, which is withdrawn as much as
possible into the rear of the mouth. The Castilian sound is a harsh one
but it is softened in Andalusia and Spanish America to the value of a strong
English h or the German ch of ich.
h followed by the diphthong ue may have a slight aspiration,
equal to that of a weak utterance of English h ; as in huerto,
' garden ' ; hueso, ' bone.' By many speakers, however, this h
is not pronounced at all, and, in fact, for the generality oi
Castilians h never denotes a sound.
PRONUNCIATION 13
11. Tongue- trilled Consonants : r and rt. These denote a
sound not very dissimilar to that of the English r carefully pro-
nounced, and, upon occasion, having a well-prolonged trill.
The sound is produced by making the forward part of the tongue vibrate
against the palate, just back of the upper teeth. The point of contact be-
tween the tongue and the palate is a little faither forward than in English
!<inal r in Spanish never has the semivocalic glide sound of final Eng-
lish r. Compare English ther(e} and Spanish ser.
There are two varieties of the sound :
a. A weaker variety, i.e. one not very forcibly trilled, and
yet fully as strong as a carefully pronounced English r. This
is denoted in Spanish by a single r between voweU, as in
pcro, ' but,' and by a single r after the consonants bx c, d, f, g,
p, t ; as in bravo, ' wild ' ; cristiano, ' Christian ' ; Iadr6n, ' rob-
ber'; fresno, 'ash tree'; grano, 'grain'; prado, l meadow ';
trato, 'behavior.' The final r, as in amar, 'to love,' may be
of this variety, or it may be a trifle more prolonged in its trill.
In any event it is to be carefully uttered, and not slurred as it
so often is in English , cf. ' paper,' ' mother,' etc., in which the
r sound is barely discernible,
b. A reenforced variety, i.e. one with a well-prolonged trill.
It is not a doubled consonant, but rather a prolongation of the
other variety. It is denoted by rr between vowels, as in perro,
* dog ' ; parra, ' vine (cf. pero, ' but,' and para, ' for,' in which
the weaker variety occurs), and by single r at the beginning
of a word, as in roble, ' oak,' or within a word after n or s, as
in enredo, ' entanglement ' ; Israel: ta, ' Israelite. Within a word,
after b or 1 marking the end of a prefix, this same strong r oc-
curs, as in subrayar, ' to underline ' (cf. raya, * line,' with initial
strong r), and malrotar, 'to squander.' The fact that initial
single r denotes the same reenforced variety as intervocalic n
is shown by words like rota, ' rout,' and its derivative derrota.
14 SPANISH GRAMMAR
12. Spirant y (a voiced palatal spirant or fricative), not
much unlike English y in sound, except that its enunciation
is somewhat stronger, as in ya, ' already ' ; yo, ' I ' ; yeso,
f gypsum.'1
Unaccented i in hiatus is often but a semivowel ; /.<?., it is
partly consonantal and tends to become y. This is especially
so in the case of the diphthong ie : cf. yerra, ' he errs,' for ierra,
and the spelling yerba, ' herb,' and hierba, side by side. As
already stated, y is a vowel in the conjunction y, ' and ' ; it is a
vowel (or at least a semivowel) wherever it occurs in a diph-
thong or triphthong, as in bocoy, ' hogshead ' ; buey, ' ox.'
13. Non-phonetic Orthography.
(1) Spanish orthography is not consistently phonetic, though
much more so than English orthography. According to the
rules of the Spanish Academy, only two letters are ever mute,
viz. h and u, as follows :
h is regularly silent, as in hado, ' fate ' ; hilo, ' thread ' ; but
before ue it may be slightly aspirated, as in hueso, ' bone.' In
the digraph ch it has no individual value.
u is silent, or at least has no individual value, in the combi-
nation qu. It is also not pronounced in the combination gu
followed by e or i ; it is there but a sign of " hard " g : cf.
sigue, 'he follows,' sigui6, 'he followed,' with sigo, 'I follow,'
siga, ' let me follow.' If it happen that the u of the combination
gue or gui is actually pronounced, a diaeresis is written over
it ; e.g. argiiir, ' to argue ' ; averigiiS, ' I ascertained ' (cf. the
infinitive averiguar, in which the u is of course pronounced).
(2) In addition to h and u, there are several letters that, in certain
combinations, are usually not pronounced in colloquial Spanish, viz.:
1 The tongue should not touch the palate, in the production of Spanish y,
in such a way as really to stop the breath. In dialect pronunciation it does so,
and the result is a sound similar to that of English/.
PRONUNCIATION 1 5
b is mute in obscuro, obsceno, obstdculo, obstinarse, etc. ; abstraccidn,
abstener, etc. ; substancia, subscriber, etc. That is, b before s is usually
silent; if it is pronounced, it is as p, eg. absolute > apsoluto (cf. bt > pt,
as in subterrdneo) . In written Spanish also this b is commonly omitted in
obscuro, substancia, etc.
C, before a consonant, is often mute, as in diccionario, leccidn, afectisimo,
etc. Students are advised to pronounce this c.
d is often silent in the final position, and between vowels when it follows
stressed a, 0, or u (less often after e or i), as in Madrid, arnado, nada, todo,
toda, d menudo, etc. ; also before s, as in adscribir, adstringir, etc. The
student should pronounce medial d. As to final d, see § 7.
g, before a consonant, is often mute, as in digno, magndnimo, etc. The
student had best pronounce this g.
j is mute only in reloj (occasionally written rel6}. In the plural, relojes,
j is pronounced.
n is usually mute in the prefix trans- before a consonant, as in tran-
scribir, transmitir, etc.; but it is often pronounced in transatldntico, etc.
p is mute usually in subscripcidn, septinio, Septiembre, pseudo, psicologia,
etc. (*'.<?., before t or s, p is usually silent). In written Spanish also this p
is commonly omitted in septimo, Septiembre, etc.
t is usually mute in isttno.
(3) Some other non-phonetic peculiarities of Spanish orthography are
as follows :
b = v. See § 6.
n, before p or v, has the sound of m, as in un perro, un vaso, etc. ; cf. § 7.
X. before a consonant, is usually pronounced as s, as in extreme, expo-
sicidn, etc. Regularly between vowels, and often before C, X = CS, as in
exito, excelente, etc. (but in exacto, x = s).
NOTE. — The Spanish Academy has attempted of late years to put back
into Spanish many sounds that had disappeared or changed, as the x of
experiencia in place of s, the b of obscuro, the / of septimo, the d of adscri-
bir, the t of istmo, etc., and the Academy has asked the Spanish people to
use these restored sounds in their speech. To some extent the sounds have
been adopted, and they may be heard on the stage and in the pulpit, but
practically never in colloquial Spanish (except x, which is making headway),
jnd in some cases their use would be considered ridiculously pedantic.
Similarly, the Academy asks that b and v be p 'onou.iced like English or
16 SPANISH GRAMMAR
French b and v, but no Spaniard can do this unless he knows English
or French. The coming together of b and v into one sound is very old
in Spain, for even in the days of ancient Rome a Latin wit said that for
the Spaniards vivere was the same as bibere.
14. Doubled letters. — The general statement may be made
that the doubling of consonants is not favored in Spanish. LI
and rr do not represent double sounds, and they figure in the
alphabet as distinct signs, for 11 denotes a peculiar quality of
1 (the palatalized 1), and rr denotes a prolongation of the
simple r sound. Two consonants, however, may be written
double, viz. c and n, and in the refined pronunciation of Castile
each cf the two c's or two n's is carefully articulated : as in
accidente, ' accident ' (of which the first c sounds like k, and
the second like th of thin), and in innoble, ' ignoble.'
No other consonant is doubled in writing or pronunciation in modern
Spanish. To the frequent mm of English (mostly in words of Latin and
Romance origin) there corresponds the Spanish nm; as in inmenso, ' im-
mense.' Of the vowels only e occurs doubled with any frequency, and
each e is pronounced in a distinct syllable: as in creer, 'to believe'; leer,
'to read.' Some of the double e's of early Spanish are now reduced to
single e: cf. ser, 'to be,' for original seer; ver, 'to see,' for original veer.
We occasionally find a and 0 doubled and pronounced accordingly; the
first a or o usually belongs to a prefix, as in contraalmirante, 'rear
admiral'; cooperar, 'to cooperate.'
ACCENTUATION
15. For certain words it is necessary to indicate the place
for the stress of the voice by a written accent put over the vowel
of the syllable bearing it ; for many others this written accent is
not necessary, as, in accordance with rules laid down by the
Spanish Academy, the mere aspect of the word clearly indi-
cates the place of the chief stress. Tne leading rules are
these :
PRONUNCIATION 1 7
(1) Words ending in a vowel, or in the consonants n or s,
normally stress the second last syllable (the penult), and they
require no written accent, as in :
carta, letter. respire, / breathe. hablan, they speak.
palabra, word. sollozo, sob. cartas, letters.
dulce, sweet. tribu, tribe. naciones, nations.
hijo, son.
Words ending in n or s normally receive the same treatment as those
ending in a vowel, because the n or s is often but a sign of pluralization,
or of verbal inflection, and is added to forms that regularly end in a vowel :
cf. carta, 'letter,' and cartas, 'letters'; ama, 'he loves,' and aman,
•they love.'
(2) Words ending in a consonant except n or s (cf. Rule I)
normally stress the last syllable and need no written accent, as :
verdad, truth. igual, equal.
For accentual purposes, final y (which can never be accented itself)
may be regarded as a consonant : hence, bocoy, ' hogshead'; mwy, ' very.'
(3) All words stressed on a syllable preceding the second
last, and all not obeying the two rules already given, must have
a written accent over the vowel bearing the stress ; e.g. :
ejercito, army. mama, mamma. interes, interest.
higado, liver. rubi, ruby. lapiz, lead pencil,
telegrafo, telegraph. nacion, nation. marmol, marble.
sofa, sofa. amais, you love (cf. amas, thou loves f).
As a result of the addition of the plural sign -es (but not -s), a word
not bearing a written accent in the singular may now have to take one;
as in cr/men, 'crime ' (cf. Rule i), pi. crimenes (cf. Rule 3); or, again,
an accent written in the singular may not need to be written in the plural,
asjn naci6n (cf. Rule 3), pi. naciones (cf. Rule i). It is the general
principle that the addition of the plural sign should not affect the place
of the accent. This principle is violated in the case of cardcter, ' char-
acter' (cf. Rule 3), and rigimen, 'regime' (cf. Rule 3), which in the
plural shift their accent one syllable farther on : caracteres (Rule i) and
regimenes (Rule 3).
1 8 SPANISH GRAMMAR
16. Diphthongs and Triphthongs. — If the stressed syllable
of the word have a diphthong, this will bear the accent (written
or unwritten) on the strong vowel, if there be one, or on the
second of two weak vowels, as in :
baile, dance. buitre, vulture. argiii's, you argue*
amais, you love. huis, you flee.
A triphthong will always bear the accent (written or unwritten)
on the strong vowel :
averigudis, yoit ascertain. fieis, may you trust.
17. Monosyllables normally take no written accent :
huis, you flee. plan, plan. ruin, -vile. fieis, may you trust.
Occasionally, however, a written accent is found in monosyllables
(or in some dissyllables), where its use is (i) that of a diacritic,
intended to distinguish the sense or the particular employment of words
written and pronounced identically alike, as in c6mo, ' how,' as distinguished
from como, 'as'; in mi, 'me,' as distinguished from mi, 'my'; in 6ste,
*this one' (a pronoun), as distinguished from este, 'this' (an adjective);
in qui£n, 'who' (an interrogative), as distinguished from quien, 'who'
(a relative), etc.; or (2), merely arbitrary, as u, 'or,' and a, 'at,' and 6,
•and' (which do not need the accent to distinguish them from ha, *he
has,' and he, ' I have.')1 The analogy of other preterites explains the use
of the accent in certain monosyllabic preterites, such as ful, ' I was.1
f u6, ' he was.' When aim, ' still,' ' yet,' is emphatic, it may become a
dissyllable, and will then stress its u, which (cf. § 15, Rule 3) must bear a
written accent, aun.
18. Compound words, felt as such, normally stress the proper
syllable of each component part, especially in the case of ad-
verbs in -mente (the equivalent of English -ly} and of com-
pound numerals ; any accent required in one of the parts
standing alone will continue to be written in the compound :
fdcilmente, easily (cf. facil, easy}. decimoseptimo, seventeenth (cf. d6-
dulcemente, sweetly. cimo, tenth, and slptimo, seventh) .
l A recent rule of the Spanish academy makes it unnecessary to write the
accent on a, ' to,' 'at,' o, u, ' or/ and e, ' and.'
PRONUNCIATION 1 9
The addition of a pronoun-object to a verb form will not lead to the
omission of any written accent that the verb form had when standing alone,
as in amele, * I loved him' (cf. ame", ' I loved '), even though without the
writing of the accent its position is clear enough.
On the other hand, a verb form which does not normally need a written
accent will take one if, by the addition of one or more object-pronouns, its
stress is placed more than tv\o syllables from the end of its whole combi-
nation, thus : diciendo, ' saying,' but diciendomelo, * saying it to me ' ;
haga, 'do' (polite imperative), but hdgalo, 'do it.'
NOTE. — The accent of the -tressed syllable of a word is as strong as in
English ; but the unstressed voweis must not be slurred in pronunciation,
as they so often are in English.
SYLLABIFICATION
19. A single consonantal character and the digraphs ch, 11,
rr (these three being inseparable combinations) are, in a syl-
labic division, passed over to the following vowel ; so, also, are
most combinations of a consonant with an ensuing 1 or r (ex-
cept rl, si, tl, and sr, which are separable) :
la-bio, lip. cu-brir, to cover. cua-tro, four.
ja-ca, pony. su-frir, to sujfer. no-ble, noble.
la-do, side. re-pri-mir, to repress, mo-fle-tu-do, chubby-cheeked
ne-xo, knot. la-cre, sealing-wax. su-plir, to supply.
mu-cho, muck. ma-gro, meagre. te-cla, key.
bu-llir, to boil. ma-dre, mother. si-glo, century.
pa-rra, vine.
Cf. mer-lu-za, cod. es-la-bon, link.
At-lan-ti-co, Atlantic. Is-ra-e-li-ta, Israelite.
20. With the exception of the inseparable combinations
mentioned in the foregoing rule, two consonants between vowels
are so divided that one remains with the preceding, the other
goes to the following vowel :
ap-to, //. mas-til, mast. in-no-ble, ignoble, etc.
cor-te, court. ac-ci-den-te, accident.
2O SPANISH GRAMMAK
Where the combination of consonants between vowels is oi
more tnan two, there is a tendency to pass over to the second
vowel only a single consonant or one of the inseparable com-
binations mentioned in § 19 ; e.g.:
par-che, plaster. cons-true- cion, construction.
pers-p i-ca-cia, perspicacity.
21. Prefixes felt as such are usually kept intact, contrary to
the rule in § 19 ; t.g. :
des-es-pe-rar, to despair (cf. esperar, to hope).
sub-le-var-se, to rebel (cf. levar, to raise).
ab ro-ga-cion, abrogation (cf. rogar, to as£).
PUNCTUATION
22. The only notable points here are the double use of
question marks and exclamation points, which not only end
their clause, but in an inverted form usually precede it (e.g.
<*C6mo esta Vd.? 'How are you?' jQue* hermosa mujer!
' What a beautiful woman ! ') and the frequency of suspension
points (...) in narrative or dramatic style.
CAPITALIZATION
23. Capitals are less commonly used in Spamsn than in
English. Unless they begin a sentence, a line ot verse, or a
quotation, proper adjectives and the pronoun yo, ' I,' are not
capitalized. National or other locative adjectives used as nouns
may take a capital when they denote persons (although usage
varies in this respect) : when they denote languages, they
usually take no capital, even though used substantively : los
Franceses (or franceses) hablan francos, * Frenchmen speaf
French/
LESSON I
24. Gender of Nouns. — All Spanish nouns are eithei
masculine or feminine ; thus, grammatically speaking,
drbol, 'tree/ is masculine, and casa, 'house,' is feminine.
(1) Names of male beings are masculine, and names of
female beings are feminine, as in English.
(2) Names of things are masculine if they end in o, and
feminine if they end in a. If they end otherwise, it is usually
best to learn the gender of each noun separately.
libro, masc., book. pluma, fern., pen.
plato, masc., plate. taza, fern., cup.
a. But mano, 'hand,' is feminine ; and dia, «day,' mapa, 'map,* and
several words of Greek origin ending in -ta and -ma are masculine. l
25. Many names of living beings have both a masculine and
a feminine form, the latter ending in a.
hijo, son. hija, daughter.
hermano, brother. hermana, sister.
gato, cat (male). gata, cat (female).
monje, monk. monja, nun.
hu6sped, guest (male). hu6speda, guest (female).
26. Indefinite Article. — The Spanish indefinite article
is un before a masculine, una before a feminine noun.
un hombre, a man. una mujer, a woman.
un arbol, a tree. una casa, a house.
*E.g.: cometa, comet; planeta, planet; poema, poem; programa, pro-
gramme ; sistema, system.
21
22 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. In Spanish the indefinite article must be repeated before each noun
to which it refers : una casa y un jardin, ' a house and garden.'
b. Una sometimes loses its a before a noun beginning with stressed a
or ha : un alma, ' a soul.' In Spain the full form is more usual.
27. The Regular Conjugations. — Spanish verbs are
conveniently divided, according to the infinitive endings
-ar, -er, and -ir, into three conjugations :
i ii in
hablar, (to) speak. temer, (to) fear. vivir, (to) live.
Like these are inflected all regular verbs with corre-
sponding infinitive endings.
28. Indicative. Present Tense.
Hablar
SINGULAR
1. hablo, I speak, I do speak, I am speaking.
2. hablas, you speak, do speak, are speaking.
3. habla, he, she, or it speaks, does speak, is speaking.
PLURAL
1. hablamos, we speak, do speak, are speaking.
2. hablais, you speak, do speak, are speaking.
3. hablan, they speak, do speak, are speaking.
Temer
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. temo, I fear, do fear, etc. i. tememos
2. temes 2. tem6is
3. teme 3. temen
Vivir
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. vivo, I live, do live, etc. I. vivimos
2. vives 2. vivls
3. vive 3. viven
LESSON I
Note that the Spanish verb may be expressed in English in three
different ways ; thus, hablo means « I speak,' ' I do speak,' or ' I am
speaking.' Note also that the subject-pronouns may be omitted in
Spanish though required in English.
Vocabulary
A, to.
amigo, -a, m. and f., friend.
Antonio, #/., Anthony.
aprender, (to) learn.
bien, well.
carta,/, letter.
comprar, (to) buy.
con, with.
en, in.
escribir, (to) write.
Espanol, -ola, m. and f., Spaniard,
Spanish woman,
espanol, -ola, Spanish.
estudiar, (to) study;
ingles, -esa, English.
Juan, m., John.
lapiz, m.t pencil.
leer, (to) read.
mal, badly.
Maria,/, Mary.
mucho, much, a-great-deal.
muy, very.
papel, m., paper.
papel secante, m., blotting paper.
para, in-order-to.
pero, but.
pluma,/, pen.
poco, little.
Senor, -ora. m. and/., Sir, Madam.
si, yes.
sobre, m., envelope.
tambien, also.
tinta,/, ink.
trabajar, (to) work.
Exercise I
A. i. Escribimos mucho. 2. Compro papel y un lapiz.
3. Juan compra tinta y una pluma. 4. Maria compra papel
secante y un sobre. 5. <; Escribes l una carta? 6. Si, senor ;
escribo una carta a un amigo. 7. Maria escribe tambien
una carta a una amiga. 8. Escribo a un Espanol. 9. Maria
escribe a una Espafiola. 10. Escribo con una pluma.
ii. Maria escribe con un lapiz. 12. <;Le£is mucho?
13. Si, senora; leemos mucho para aprender. 14. <iAprend£is
mucho? 15. Si, senora; aprendemos a leer y a escribir.
1 6. Leemos y escribimos mucho para aprender a leer y a
escribir. 1 7. Juan, <i estudias mucho ? 18. Si, senor; estudio
24 SPANISH GRAMMAR
mucho y aprendo bien. 19. Antonio estudia poco y aprendc
mal. 20. Juan trabaja mucho, pero Antonio trabaja muy poco.
21. Hablo ingles y espanol.2 22. Aprendemos a leer en
espanol.
B. i. I speak Spanish.2 2. Do you speak English? 3. Yes,
sir; I speak English and Spanish. 4. Mary reads and writes in
English. 5. John and Anthony read and write in Spanish.
6. Are you (pi.) writing a letter? 7. Yes, sir; we are writing a
letter to a Spaniard. 8. Are you (sing.} buying a pen and ink?
9. Yes, madam ; I am buying a pen, ink, and paper. 10. Mary
is buying an envelope and blotting paper. n. We are writing
a letter to a friend (few.}. 12. Do you (pi.) write much?
13. We write very little. 14. John writes with a pencil and
Anthony writes with a pen. 15. We study much in-order-to
learn to 3 speak Spanish. 16. Mary studies much and learns well.
17. Anthony studies little and learns badly 18. We work a great
deal in-order-to learn. 19. We learn much and we work much.
1 Note that an inverted interrogation mark is required in Spanish at the
beginning of an interrogative sentence or clause. 2 Note that a Spanish
name of a language, like a Spanish proper adjective, is written with a small
initial letter. 3 Use 4, see § 120 (i), a.
LESSON II
29. Plural of Nouns. — The plural of nouns is formed
by adding s or es to the singular.
(i) If the noun ends in an unstressed vowel or diphthong,
B is added.
amigo, friend. amigos, friends.
rosa, rose. rosas, roses,
labio, lip. labios, lips,
eepecie, species, sg. cspecies, species, //.
LESSON II 25
(2) If the noun ends in a consonant or in a stressed vcwel
or diphthong, es is added.1
flor, flower. flores, flowers.
mes, month. meses, months,
rubi, ruby. rubies, rubies.
baja, pashaw. bajaes, pashaws.
rey, king. reyes, kings.
Exceptions : —
a. Nouns ending in stressed -e add s to form the plural: pie, 'foot';
pies, 'feet.'
b. Nouns ending in unstressed -es or -is have the same form in the plural
as in the singular : lunes, * Monday'; lunes, ' Mondays'; but Ingles, ' Eng-
lishman'; Ingleses, 'Englishmen'; crisis, 'crisis'; crisis, 'crises.'
Family names, especially those ending in z, generally remain unchanged
in the plural; e.g., Gonzalez, los Gonzalez.
c. Some nouns ending in stressed 0 or u take either -s or -es. PapA
and mama add -s. There a«:e a few other exceptions, which are best
learned by observation.
NOTE. — Final z is changed to c before es.- cruz, 'cross'; cruces,
crosses '; voz, * voice ' ; voces, ' voices.'
30. Definite Article. — In Spanish the definite article
changes its form according to the gender and number
of the noun it modifies.
SINGULAR PLURAL
Masculine : el los
Feminine: la (el) las
el padre, the father. los padres, the fathers.
la madre, the mother. las madres, the mothers,
el plato, the plate. los platos, the plates.
la taza, the cup. las tazas, the cups.
* In pluralizing, y final may be regarded as a consonant: it is really the last
element of a stressed diphthong or triphthong, as in bocoy, ' hogshead,' and
Duey, ' ox.'
26
SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. When el is preceded by de, ' of,' or by £, ' to,' the preposition and
the article are contracted into one word : de and el become del, and a
and el become al : del padre, ' of the father '; al padre, ' to the father.'
b. El is used instead of the form la before a feminine singular noun
beginning with stressed & or ha: el agua, 'water'; el hacha, 'the axe.'
NOTE. — Observe that el is not used before a feminine noun beginning
with a or ha unless the first syllable is stressed, nor is it used before a
feminine adjective : la hacienda, ' the estate ' ; la alta casa, 'the high house.'
31. Negation. — A sentence is made negative by
placing no, ' not,' before the verb.
no hablo, I do not speak, or I am not speaking.
no vendo flores, I do not sell flowers, or I am not selling flowers.
32. The English auxiliary 'do,' which is usual in
negative or interrogative constructions, is ordinarily not
translated into Spanish. Compare hablas, ' you speak ' ;
110 hablas, ' you do not speak ' ; <ihablas? ' do you speak ? '
In past tenses, 'did' is similarly not expressed in Spanish.
Vocabulaj y
agua, /., water.
aritmStica,/., arithmetic.
beber, (to) drink.
cafe1, ;«., coffee.
comer, (to) eat.
con, with.
desear, (to) desire, wish,
ensenar, (to) teach.
escuela, /, school.
Espana,/, Spain.
francos, -esa, French,
geografia,/, geography.
gramatica, /., grammar.
huevo, m., egg.
Inglaterra, /., England.
leche,/, milk.
libro, /«., book.
llevar, (to) carry, take,
maestro, m., teacher,
mantequilla, /, butter.
manzana, /, apple.
ni, nor.
no, no, not-
6, or.
Pablo, m., Paul,
pan, m., bread,
pizarra,/!, slate.
por, for, through.
qu6, what (interrog^
tambiSn. also.
te", m., tea.
viajar, (to) travel.
LESSON II 27
Exercise II
A. i. Compramos lapices y plumas. 2. ^Escribis las
cartas con las plumas 6 con los lapices? 3. Escribimos las
cartas con pluma y tinta. 4. Juan y Maria compran libros
para leer. 5. Leen los libros para aprender a leer. 6. Deseo
aprender a hablar espanol. 7. Deseamos viajar por Espana.
8. Hablamos ingle's y aprendemos a leer y a escribir en
ingle's. 9. En Espana hablan espanol : en Inglaterra hablan
ingle's. 10. Deseamos aprender a hablar espanol para viajar
por Espana. n. Llevo a la1 escuela libros, una pizarra, y
un lapiz. 12. Leo en los libros. 13. Escribo en la pizarra
con el lapiz. 14. Tambie"n llevamos a la escuela pan y
mantequilla, huevos, y manzanas. 15. Comemos el pan, la
mantequilla, los huevos, y las manzanas. 16. Bebemos agua
6 leche : no bebemos cafe" ni te. 17. <jQue" estudiais en la1
escuela? 18. Estudiamos ingle's, aritme"tica, gramatica, y geo-
grafia. 19. Pablo, <i no estudias el1 espanol? 20. Si, sefior ;
el maestro ensena el1 espanol y el1 trance's. 21. Aprendo el1
espanol, pero no aprendo el1 Trance's. 22. Juan aprende tam-
bie"n el1 Trance's.
B. i. Do youf//.) wish to travel through Spain? 2. We wish
to speak Spanish in-order-to travel through Spain. 3. A Spanish
woman is learning to speak English. 4. She is learning to speak
English in-order-to travel through England. 5. Do they speak
English or Spanish in Spain? 6. They speak English in England
and Spanish in Spain. 7. We take bread, butter, and apples to
school.2 8. We eat the bread, the butter, and the apples, and
drink milk. 9. Paul and John take bread and eggs to school.2
10. They eat the bread and the eggs, and drink water. n. 1
drink milk. 12. We do not drink tea nor coffee. 13. Do
you (pi-} not take books to school?2 14. Yes, sir; we take
books, slates, and pencils. 15. Do you (//.) write letters at
school?2 1 6. No, sir; we do not write letters. 17. We read
in the books in order to learn to3 read. 18. We write on the
28 SPANISH GRAMMAR
slates in order to learn to8 write. 19. What do you (sing.} study
at school ? * 20. I study Spanish, grammar, arithmetic, and geog-
raphy.
l Do not translate. 2 Use the definite article. For the article before the
name of a language, cf. § 55 (4). 3 Use d.
LESSON III
33. Feminine of Adjectives. — Many Spanish adjec*
tives change their form according as the noun they
modify is masculine or feminine, singular or plural.
(1) Adjectives ending in -o in the masculine singular change
-o to -a to form the feminine.
un caballo bianco, a white horse. una vaca blanca, a white cow.
(2) But adjectives ending in a consonant or in a vowel other
than -o have the same form for the masculine and the feminine.
un libro azul, a blue book.
una casa azul, a blue house.
un hombre cort6s, a polite man.
una mujer cortSs, a polite woman.
un muchacho inteligente, an intelligent boy.
una muchacha inteligente, an intelligent girl.
Exceptions : —
a. Adjectives of nationality ending in a consonant add -a to form the
feminine: ingle's, inglesa, 'English'; espanol, espanola, 'Spanish.'
b. Adjectives ending in -an, -on, or -or (except comparatives in -or) add
•a to form the feminine: holgazan, holgazana, 'lazy'; burl6n, burlona,
' roguish ' ; traidor, traidora, ' treacherous.'
Note that in Spanish a qualifying adjective usually follows its
noun.
LESSON III
29
34. Plural of Adjectives. — The plural of adjectives,
like the plural of nouns, is formed by adding -s or -es to
the singular.
bianco, blancos, blanca, blancas, white. azul, azules, blue.
35. Radical-changing e and o Verbs.1 — Many verbs
of the first and second conjugations, while otherwise
regular, change the radical vowels e and o to ie and ue
respectively, whenever the stress falls on the stem.
The following will serve as models of these verbs.
Present Indicative.
Temblar, (to) tremble
SINGULAR
1. tiemblo
2. tiemblas
3. tiembla
SINGULAR
1. pierdo
2. pierdes
3. pierde
SINGULAR
1. cuento
2. cuentas
3. cuenta
SINGULAR
1. vuelvo
2. vuelves
3. vuelve
Perder, (to) lose
Contar, (to) count
Volver, (to) return
PLURAL
1. temblamos
2. temblais
3. tiemblan
PLURAL
1. perdemos
2. perdSis
3. pierden
PLURAL
1. contamos
2. centals
3. cuentan
PLURAL
1. volvemos
2. volvSis
3. vuelven
Note that e becomes ie and 0 becomes ue only in the singular and the
third person plural, since the stress falls on the inflectional endings of the
first and second persons plural, and not on the stem.
1 All verbs that make these phonetic changes will be found iti the list of
verbs, § 271.
SPANISH GRAMMAR
amarillo, -a, yellow.
correr, (to) run.
cuando, when.
Cuba,/, Cuba.
Cubano, -a, m. and /., Cuban.
deber, ought (to), should.
demasiado, too, too much.
dif icil, difficult.
discipulo, -a, m. and/., pupil.
ejercicio, ;//., exercise.
encarnado, -a, (bright) red.
error, m., mistake.
escuchar, (to) listen.
Vocabulary
Ingl6s, -esa, m. andf., Englishman,
Englishwoman.
Juana, /, Jane.
jugar,1 (to) play.
Iecci6n, /, lesson.
Mejicano, -a, m. andf., Mexican.
Mexico, m., Mexico,
negro, -a, black.
Norte-Americano, -a, m. and /,
American, North-American,
palabra,/, word,
pequeno, -a, small.
querer,2 (to) wish.
Estados Unidos,
States.
facil, easy.
frio, w., cold,
grande, large.
hallar, (to) find.
m. //., United
rojo, -a, red.
senalar, (to) mark.
tanto, so much, as much,
tiempo, m., time,
verde, green.
| vivir, (to) live.
Exercise III
A. i. Tiemblo de (with) frio. 2. No estudio : pierdo
el1 tiempo. 3. Deseo estudiar : no deseo perder el1 tiempo.
4. Cuento los libros, las plumas y los lapices. 5. Vivo en
una casa blanca. 6. Juan y Maria viven en una casa ama-
rilla. 7. Escribes mucho con el lapiz azul. 8. Juan
escribe con tinta negra en papel bianco. 9. Los Espanoles,
los Mejicanos, y los Cubanos hablan espanol. 10. Quiero
aprender el2 espanol para viajar por Espafia, Mejico, y Cuba.
11. Los Ingleses y los Norte-Americanos3 hablan ingles.
12. Los Espanoles, los Mejicanos, y los Cubanos aprenden el
1 Radical-changing: see note 4 on page 32.
2 Radical-changing in the present tenses, and also otherwise irregular in
some other tenses.
LESSON III 31
ingles para viajar por Inglaterra y por los Estados Unidos.
13. Los Ingleses y los Norte-Americanos viajan mucho, pero
ios Espanoles no viajan tanto. 14. Los discipulos de la
escuela no quieren estudiar mucho. 15. Quieren correr y
jugar. 1 6. Corren y juegan4 mucho, pero trabajan poco.
17. El discipulo no debe estudiar demasiado. 18. Debe
correr y jugar, pero debe tambie'n estudiar. 19. El disci-
pulo corre y juega mucho : la discipula corre y juega poco.
20. Cuando no trabajo, juego ; y cuando no juego, trabajo.
21. No quiero estudiar demasiado, ni jugar demasiado.
22. Juana escribe con una pluma pequena, y Juan escribe con
una pluma grande. 23. Estudia mucho, pero no aprende
la Iecci6n. 24. Cuando el maestro de espafiol habla, escu-
chamos para aprender las palabras. 25. Escribimos los
ejercicios con tinta negra, pero el maestro senala los errores
con tinta encarnada (roja).
B. i. I am buying a white horse and a black cow. 2. An
intelligent boy learns to count. 3. I study a-great-deal, but
John loses his 5 time. 4. I live in a white house and John lives
in a green house. 5. Are you trembling with the cold ? 6. I
am not trembling with the cold. 7. I buy English books arid
Spanish books in-order-to read in English and Spanish. 8. Paul
does not study Spanish ; * he studies French.5 9. The teachers
teach French5 and Spanish.5 10. I study Spanish5 and French.5
II. Do they speak French or Spanish in Cuba? 12. They speak
Spanish in Cuba and Mexico. 13. The Cubans and the Mexi-
cans do not speak English. 14. They wish to learn English6 in
order to travel through the United States. 15. The Americans
wish to learn Spanish5 in order to travel through Cuba and Mexico.
1 6. The pupils run and play too much, but they do not study too
much. 17. The pupil (fern.} should not study too much.
1 8. We run and play and study a great deal, but not too much.
19 The Spanish books are 9 yellow, blue, or red. 20. Are you
{sing.) writing the Spanish exercises?6 21. Yes, sir; and I find
che Spanish exercises very difficult. 22. I find the Spanish 10
32 SPANISH GRAMMAR
lessons very easy. 23. The Spanish teacher speaks, reads, and
writes Spanish 7 well.7 24. He does not speak, read, and 8 write
English well.
1 Translate ' my.' 2 Do not translate. 8 In Spanish-America the people
of the United States are usually called Norte- Americanos (" North Americans ").
4 In jugar the u becomes ue when stressed. 5 Use the definite article.
« Say : ' the exercises in Spanish.' 7 Translate : 'well the Spanish.' 8 Use
ni (lit. 'nor'). 9 son. 10 Say :' of Spanish.'
LESSON IV
36. Radical- changing Verbs. — Some verbs of the
third conjugation change the radical e to ie or to i, and
o to ue, whenever the stress falls on the stem.1 The fol-
lowing will serve as models of these verbs: —
Present Indicative.
SINGULAR
1. siento
2. sientes
3. siente
SINGULAR
1. pido
2. pides
3. pide
SINGULAR
1. duermo
2. duerm.es
3. duerme
Sentir, (to) feel
PLURAL
1. sentimos
2. sentis
3. sienten
Pedir, (to) ask for
PLURAL
1. pedimos
2. pedis
3. piden
Dormir, (to) sleep
PLURAL
1. dormimos
2. dormis
3. duermeff
i Cf. §§ 229, 230.
LESSON IV 33
37. The Irregular Verbs Tener and Haber*
Indicative. Present Tense.
Tener, (to) have
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. tengo i. tenemos
2. tienes 2. tennis
3. tiene 3. tienen
Haber, (to) have
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. he i. hemos
2. has 2. hab£is
3. ha (hay) 3. han
38. Meaning and Use of Tener and Haber.
1 i ) Tener means ' (to) have ' in the sense of ' (to) possess ' ;
tengo una pluma, ' I have a pen.' It also retains its Latin
sense of ' (to) hold.'
(2) Haber is chiefly used as an auxiliary verb with past
participles in the formation of compound tenses. Thus, the
perfect tense of hablar is :
' I have spoken,' or < I have been speaking.'
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. he hablado i. hemos hablado
2. has hablado 2. habeis hablado
3. ha hablado 3. han hablado
a. Hay1 means 'there is,' or 'there are'; hay uno, 'there is one';
hay dos, ' there are two.' The form hay is used only as an impersonal
verb; ha, not hay, is used in the formation of compound tenses, as,
ha habido, 'there has been,' and in temporal expressions, as mucho
tiempo ha, « there is much time,' i.e. ' long ago.'
1 Composed of ha, ' it has,' and y, an old adverb meaning ' there.' Cf
French il y a.
34 SPANISH GRAMMAR
39. Participles.
hablar : hablando, speaking, hablado, spoken.
temer : temiendo, fearing, temido, feared.
vivir : viviendo, living, vivido, lived.
tener : teniendo, having, tenido, had.
haber : habiendo, having, habido, had.
40. Idiomatic Expressions.
(1) tengo que, I have to, or I must.
tengo que estudiar mucho, I have to (or ' I must ') study a great deal,
he de, I am to, I shall.1
ha de partir manana, he is to leave tomorrow.
(2) tengo calor, I am warm. tengo cuidado, I am careful,
tengo mucho calor, I am very tengo los ojos cansados, my eyes
warm. are tired.
tengo frfo, I am cold. tengo rota la pierna derecha, my
tengo hambre,3 I am hungry. right leg is broken.
tengo sed,3 I am thirsty. tengo diez anos, I am ten years
tengo sueno, I am sleepy. old (lit., ' I have ten years'),
tengo miedo, I am afraid. <; cuantos anos tienes ? how old
tengo prisa, 1 am in a hurry. are you ?
Note that these expressions refer to the physical or mental condition
of a person or animal, not of inanimate objects; e.g. 'the water is hot,'
el agua esta (from estar, ' to be ') caliente, and not el agua tiene calor.
Vocabulary
preferir,2 (to) prefer,
todavia, still, yet.
vender, (to) sell.
corregir,2 (to) correct.
empezar,2 (to) begin,
lengua,/, language,
muchos, -as, many.
Exercise IV
A. i. Tengo papel bianco y tinta negra. 2. Tenemos
plumas grandes y plumas pequenas. 3. Tengo una Iecci6n
facil, pero tengo un ejercicio dificil. 4. <i Habeas compradc
1 Or, ' I have to,' not indicating external obligation. 2 Radical-changing
3 hambre and sed are feminine.
LESSON IV 35
un libro espanol? 5. Si, senor ; hemos comprado un libro
espanol y un libro ingles. 6. Tengo libros espanoles muy
dificiles y libros ingleses muy faciles. 7. <; H alias la lengua
espanola muy dificil? 8. Para aprender a hablar espanol,
he tenido que estudiar mucho. 9. Hemos aprendido
muchas palabras espafiolas, pero no hablamos bien : hablamos
muy mal. 10. Juan tiene un libro azul, y Maria tiene un
libro amarillo. n. Hemos comprado muchos libros, y
tenemos libros azules, amarillos, rojos, verdes, y negros ; pero
no tenemos libros blancos. 12. He vendido los libros
ingleses, pero tengo todavia los libros espanoles. 13. £ Has
escrito1 la carta con tinta negra 6 con tinta encarnada (roja)?
14. He escrito la carta con tinta negra : no tengo tinta encar-
nada (roja). 15. Cuando tengo sueno, no puedo 2 estudiar
mucho: quiero dormir. 16. Juan duerme mucho, y trabaja
poco. 17. No puedo leer ni escribir cuando tengo los ojos
cansados. 18. Maria ha leido mucho, pero no tiene los
ojos cansados. 19. Antonio tiene diez anos, y no puede
leer bien. 20. Tengo hambre y sed, y quiero comer y
beber. No tengo calor : tengo mucho frio.
B. i. I am cold, hungry, and thirsty. 2. I must eat and drink.
3. When I have eaten, I am sleepy. 4. You are ten years old,
and you do not speak Spanish. 5. I must learn Spanish3 in
order to read Spanish books. 6. I have sold the English books,
and I have bought Spanish books. 7. I have white paper and
blue paper. 8. I have bought black ink and red ink. 9. I write
on the white paper and on the blue paper with black ink. 10. The
teacher must correct the mistakes with red ink. n. We have
found the English exercises very easy. 12. Do you (//•) find
the Spanish lessons4 difficult? 13. When the teachei speaks
Spanish, I listen in order to learn to speak well. 14. Have you
(/A) written a Spanish letter5 to the Spaniard? 15. Yes; and
we have written an English letter to the Englishwoman. 16. John
writes with a large pen, but Mary writes with a small pen. 17. I
36 SPANISH GRAMMAR
study much ; but, when I am sleepy, I cannot study. 18. I do not
eat a great deal ; but, when I am hungry, I wish to eat. 19. When
I am thirsty, I drink water or milk ; I do not drink tea or 6 coffee.
1 Escrito. past part, of escribir. 2 Poder, ' to be able,' ' can,' is irregular
(cf. § 243). 8 Use def. art. 4 Say: ' lessons of Spanish." & Say: ' letter
in Spanish.' 6 Use ni.
LESSON V
41. Personal Subject-Pronouns.
yo, I. nosotros (-as), we.
tu, you. vosotros (-as), you.
ellos •»
a. Note that nosotros, vosotros, and ellos have the feminine forms
nosotras, vosotras, and ellas.
b. El and ella also mean ' it ' when referring to things ; thus, speaking
of arbol, ' it ' is 61 ; and speaking of casa, * it ' is ella.
c. In Spanish, the subject-pronouns may usually be omitted.
42. Usted. — In familiar address, 'you' is tu (sing.), or
vosotros (pi.) ; but in formal address, 'you' is usted (sing.),
or ustedes (pi.), used with the third person singular or plural
of the verb. Thus, in the singular, ' you have ' is tii tienes, or
ubced tiene, and in the plural it is vosotros ten&s, or ustedes
tienen. Usted is usually not omitted, although with a series of
verbs of address it occurs only at intervals.
43. Possessive Adjectives.
mi (mis), my. nuestro (-a, -os, -as), our.
tu (tus), your. vuestro (-a, -os, -as), your.
su (sus), his, her, its, your. su (sus), their, your.
a. 'Your ' : tu corresponds to tii, vuestro to vosotros (-as), and su tc
usted or ustedes.
LESSON V 37
44. Demonstrative Adjectives.
jste (-a, -os, -as), this, these (near to or appertaining to the speakei
or writer}, this ... of mine, etc.
cse (-a, -os, -as), that, those (near to or appertaining to the person
addressed}, that . . . of yours, etc.
aquel (aquella, -os, -as), that, those (remote from the person ad-
dressed}, that ... of his, hers, etc., or that . . . over there.
a. The possessive and demonstrative adjectives are usually repeated
before each noun to which they refer.
mi padre y mi madre, my father and mother,
este hombre y esta mujer, this man and woman.
Vocabulary
alto, -a, high,
ancho, -a, wide.
bola,/, marble.
cantar, (to) sing.
dibujo, m., drawing,
edificio, m., building.
flor,/, flower.
hablador, -ora, talkative.
musica,yC, music.
nino, -a, m. and f., (small) boy, girl ;
child.
pelota,/, ball.
piano, m., piano.
tio, -a, m. and f., uncle, aunt.
tocar, (to) play (a musical instru-
ment).
tomar, (to) take.
ventana,/, window.
Exercise V
A. i. Yo estudio, pero tu pierdes el tiempo. 2. Usted
cuenta bien, pero yo cuento mal. 3. Juan y Maria hallan la
Iecci6n dificil. 4. Ellos no estudian mucho. 5. Nosotros
estudiamos mucho y hallamos la Iecci6n facil. 6. Esta mu-
chacha grande corre y juega mucho. 7. Ella no desea
estudiar sus libros. 8. Pero la nina pequena estudia mucho
y aprende bien. 9. Usted escribe sus cartas con tinta encar-
nada. 10. Maria y yo escribimos nuestras cartas con tinta
negra. 1 1 . Este hombre lee mucho y tiene los ojos cansados.
38 SPANISH GRAMMAR
12. Aquella mujer habladora habla mucho. 13. Este horn-
bre inteligente habla poco. 14. Mi padre y mi madre ban
vivido en Espana. 15. Ellos hablan espanol, ingles y
Trance's. 16. Yo tomo lecciones de dibujo; tu tomas lee-
ciones de musica. 17. fil toca bien el piano, pero ella
toca mal. 18. Este edificio tiene ventanas altas y anchas.
19. Hay muchas flores en aquellas ventanas. 20. <jQuieres
tu tambien jugar a la pelota? 21. No ; yo prefiero jugar a
las bolas. 22. Mi padre y mis tios ban estudiado en esta
escuela. 23. Esta mujer canta muy bien, pero aquella mujer
canta mal.
B. i. You (fam., sing.*} run and play, but he studies. 2. You
(form., sing.} talk much, but she talks little. 3. You (fam., pi.)
study much, and we study little. 4. You (form., pi.) count well,
and they count badly. 5. This large man does not wish to play
with that small boy. 6. This large woman plays with that small
girl. 7. I lose my books, but you (fam., sing.) do not lose your
books. 8. I write with black ink, but you (form, sing.) write
with red ink. 9. We speak Spanish well, but you (fam. , pi.)
speak badly. 10. We buy Spanish books, but you (form., pi.)
buy French books. 1 1 . My father and mother are cold and hungry.
12. When my father has eaten, he is sleepy. 13. When I am
thirsty, I drink milk. 14. When you (fam., sing.) are thirsty,
you drink water. 15. This boy plays much, but that boy plays
little. 1 6. This book (of mine) is * English ; that book (of yours)
is French; and that book (of his) is Spanish. 17. We (masc.)
play ball, and you (fern, pi., fam.) play the piano. 18. These
boys prefer to play marbles. 19. He wishes to take drawing
lessons, but she prefers to take music lessons.
1 ' Familiar singular ' refers to the ad pers. sing., with or without hi ; ' familial
plural ' to the 2d pers. pi., with or without vosotros (-as) ; 'formal singular* to
*stedt and ' formal plural ' to ustedes. 8 es-
LESSON VI 39
LESSON VI
45. The Irregular Verbs Ser and Estar.
(1) Indicative. Present Tense :
Ser, (to) be
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. soy i. somos
2. eres 2. sois
3. es 3. son
Estar, (to) be
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. estoy i. estamos
2. estas 2. estais
3. esta 3. estdn
(2) Participles:
ser : siendo, being, sido, been.
estar : estando, being, estado, been.
46. Meaning of Ser and Estar.
Ser and estar both mean ' (to) be/ Ser expresses wbat is
inherent or permanent ; estar, what is accidental or temporary.
Ex. la taza es de oro, the cup is of gold.
la taza esta limpia, the cup is clean,
soy viejo y estoy enfermo, I am old and ill.
es cojo, he is (permanently) lame.
hoy esta cojo, he is lame today,
soy libre, I am free (a free man),
ahora estoy libre, I am now free (disengaged).
<7. Estar is also used to express position, whether temporary or per-
manent : mi hermano estd en Mexico, ' my brother is in Mexico '; Mexico
estd en la America del Norte, ' Mexico is in North America.'
b. Ser alone permits of a predicate noun with it : su hermano es
SOldado, 'his brother is a soldier.'
4o
SPANISH GRAMMAR
c. Some adjectives have one meaning when used with ser and another
meaning when used with estar.
ser bueno, (to) be good.
ser malo, (to) be bad.
ser cansado, (to) be tiresome.
47. Idiomatic Expressions.
(1) yo soy,1 it is I.
tii eres, it is you.
61 es, it is he. \
ella es, it is she. >
usted es, it is you.
(2) es lastima, it is a pity,
es mentira, it is false.
es verdad or es cierto, it is true.
estar bueno, (to) be well,
estar malo, (to) be ill.
estar cansado, (to) be tired.
nosotros (-as) somos, it is we
vosotros (-as) sois, it is you.
ellos (-as) son, it is they.
ustedes son, it is you.
£ no es verdad ? isn't it so ?
esta bien, it is well, all right.
; esta bueno ! good !
Vocabulary
A causa de, on account of.
activo, -a, active.
alegre, merry, joyous.
amable, kind, lovable.
c6mo, how (interrog.}.
decidido, -a, decided, determined.
dejar, (to) leave.
d6nde, where (interrog?).
fresco, -a, fresh.
frio, -a, cold.
fuerte, strong.
gracias,///., thanks, thank you.
haragan, -ana, lazy.
hermano, -a, m. andf., brother, sister.
hijo, -a, m. and f., son, daughter.
invalido, -a, disabled.
invierno, m., winter.
joven, young.
Julio, m., Julius.
1 Or, soy yo,
llamar, (to) call.
llegar, (to) arrive.
otro, -a, other, another.
pals, in., country.
perezoso, -a, idle.
porque, because.
preguntar, (to) ask.
pregunt6n, -ona, inquisitive.
puesto, m., situation, position
que, that.
quie"n, who (interrog^}.
regalo, ;#., present, gift.
severo, -a, severe.
si, if.
siempre, always.
soldado, ;«., soldier.
triste, sad.
viento, m., wind.
viudo, -a, m. and f., widower, widow
eres tu, etc.
LESSON VI 41
Exercise VI
A. i. Los maestros de nuestra escuela son muy severos.
2. Los discipulos de la escuela no son malos. 3. El maestro
pregunta si tu estas enfermo. 4. Nosotros estudiamos
mucho, pero vosotras sois muy perezosas. 5. fil es viejo,
y esti hoy muy triste. Ella es joven y esta alegre. 6. Este
soldado es viejo y esta invalido. 7. Esta senora es viuda
y estd enferma. 8. Este pan no esta fresco : es demasiado
viejo. 9. Estoy decidido a dejar el puesto que tengo.
10. Julio es muy fuerte y activo, y quiere jugar con los otros
ninos. n. Antonio es haragan, y dice1 siempre que esta
cansado. 12. Esa nina es haragana, habladora, y pre-
guntona. 13. <iC6mo2 esta usted? Estoy muy bien ;
gracias. 14. <r Quien2 es? Soy yo. <: Quien llama? Es ella.
15. Tengo un regalo para su hijo, senora. Gracias ; es usted 3
muy amable. 16. <iD6nde ha estado usted, senor, este in-
vierno? He estado en Madrid. 17. <iC6mo estan ustedes,
senoras? Estamos buenas, senor. 18. Somos americanas, y
en nuestro pais estamos siempre buenas. 19. Pero en Madrid
hemos estado muy malas a causa del viento frio.
B. i. Are you (sing., form.} sad today? 2. Yes, sir; I am
sad because I am old. 3. He is old and (is) ill. 4. She is young
and (is) well. 5. This water is very cold. 6. I am very cold and
very hungry. 7. He is lazy, but he says that he is tired. 8. Are
you (fern, sing., fam.} well today? No, I am ill. 9. How
are your (pi., fam.} friends? They are very well, thank you.
10. Who has arrived? It4 is my father. 11. Who is it4? It4 is
he. 12. We are English, but we are always ill in England.
13. You (pi., form.} work much and play little, do you not?5
14. Those windows are high and wide. 15. This building is large
and high. 16. I am a pupil fmasc.} in 6 this school, and you (sing.)
fam.} are a pupil (fern.} in6 that school. 17. This teacher is
very severe when I am bad. 18. Your (sing., fam.) brother
42 SPANISH GRAMMAR
has a gift for your sister. He is very kind. 19. My friend has
been in Madrid this winter. 20. He has been very ill, but he is
now well.
1 dice, pres. ind. of decir, ' to say.' z Note that interrogative adverbs and
interrogative pronouns take the accent mark. 3 In Spanish, the subject often
follows its verb. 4 This ' it ' cannot be translated into Spanish. 5 Say : ' is
it not so? ' 6 Use de.
LESSON VII
48. Possessive Case (Genitive). — Spanish nouns have
only one form for the singular and one for the plural :
they have no ending that corresponds to the English 's.
Possession is denoted by the preposition de, 'of/
el libro del hombre, the man's book (lit., « the book of the man1),
la hermana de Maria, Mary's sister (lit., « the sister of Mary1).
a. The English possessive case is sometimes elliptical for ' the house,
church, or shop of ' ; in Spanish the full construction occurs.
est£ en casa de mi tio, he is at my uncle's.
voy £ la iglesia de San Pablo, I am going to Saint Paul's.
en la tienda de Garcia, at Garcia's.
49. Indirect Object (Dative Case). — The indirect ob-
ject is always expressed by a before the noun, without
regard to its position.
Maria di6 un libro & Pedro, Mary gave Peter a book, or Mary gave
a book to Peter.
a. In Spanish, verbs meaning to take from or ask of are followed by
the dative of the person.
pido un favor i mi madre, I ask a favor of my mother,
compre el caballo £ mi primo, I bought the horse of my cousin.
LESSON VII 43
50. Personal a. — In Spanish the preposition a, * to,'
is often required before the direct object of a verb. It
is so required whenever the object is a proper noun, or
any noun or pronoun 1 that denotes a specific person,
higher animal, or personified thing.
Ex. Pablo ama £ Sofia, Paul loves Sophia.
he visitado a Paris, 1 have visited Paris,
llama a su hijo, he is calling his son.
Compare the following :
ha!16 el libro, I found the book.
hal!6 al nino, 1 found the child.
busco un hombre (not specific) que hable3 espanol, I am looking for
a man who speaks Spanish.
conozco a un hombre que habla espanol, I know a man who speaks
Spanish.
a. The " personal a " is usually omitted after tener, ' to have ' : tengo
an padre y una madre, ' I have a father and a mother.' Observe also the
following:
querer, to wish. perder, to lose.
querer a, to like, to love. perder a, to ruin.
b. The " personal a " is sometimes omitted when the verb governs an
indirect object also : llevo el nino a su papa, ' I am taking the child to
his father.' Also before a word beginning with the a sound : conozco
aquel hombre, ' I know that man.'
c. The preposition a is sometimes placed before the direct object
merely to distinguish the latter from the subject : a la guerra sigue la
paz, ' peace follows war.'
51. Interrogative Sentences. — In an interrogative
sentence the subject, if expressed, usually follows the
1 Except the personal pronouns me, te, etc., and the relative que.
2 Present subjunctive.
44
SPANISH GRAMMAR
verb, and if a compound tense is used, the subject
usually follows the past participle.
Ex. £ habla Juan? does John speak? is John speaking?
i hab!6 Pablo ? did Paul speak?
£ha vendido usted su caballo ? have you sold your horse?
Vocabulary
barato, -a, cheap.
biblioteca,/, library.
casa,/, house; en casa, at home.
Ciudad,/, city.
cocina,/, kitchen.
comedor, /;/., dining room.
c6modo, -a, comfortable.
contener,1 (to) contain.
cosa, /., thing.
costoso, -a, costly, expensive.
criado, -a, tn. and f.y servant.
cuadro, »/., picture.
demas, others.
estatua, /, statue.
estudio, m., study.
magnifico, -a, magnificent, splendid.
molestia,/, trouble.
muebles, m. pi., furniture, pieces-of-
furniture.
nuevo, -a, new.
pasar, (to) pass.
pedir,2 (to) ask (a favor, etc.).
pensar,2 (to) think, intend.
perd6n, ;//., pardon.
piso, m.y floor, story.
primer (o), -a, first.
rico, -a, rich,
segundo, -a, second.
Sevilla,/, Seville.
sombrero, /»., hat.
todo, -a, all.
Exercise VII
A.
i. Tienes tu libro? — No; tengo el libro de mi her-
mano. 2. <jD6nde esta tu madre? — Esta en casa de mi tio-
3. <J D6nde compra usted sus sombreros? 4. Compro mis
sombreros en la tienda de Herrera. 5. £l vende los som-
breros muy baratos. 6. <iNo pode"is hallar a vuestro padre?
7. Si ; hemos hallado a nuestro padre, pero no a miestra
madre. 8. He perdido todos mis libros. 9. Yo he ha-
llado tus libros en la biblioteca. 10. <jBusca usted a sus her-
Inflected like tener.
2 Radical-changing.
LESSON VII 45
manos? n. No; busco una pluma que he perdido.
12. <;Esta Juan en casa? — No, senor; esta en casa de Pablo
Martinez. 13. Pido a usted perd6n por la molestia.
14. Tengo en Sevilla un amigo muy rico. 15. Este amigo
tiene una casa magnifica. 16. En su casa hay muchas
cosas costosas. 17. Ha viajado raucho. 18. Siendo
rouy inteligente, ha comprado libros, muebles, cuadros y
muchas estatuas. 19. La casa de mi amigo es grande y
c6moda. 20. La biblioteca esta en el segundo piso. 21. El
comedor y la cocina estan en el primer piso. 22. La biblio-
teca contiene muchos libros en ingles, espanol y francos.
23. Mi amigo prefiere los libros en espanol a todos los demas
libros.
B. i. Have you (f am., sing.} found your books? 2. Yes;
I have found my books, but I can't1 find my father. 3. Where
do you buy your pens? 4. I buy my pens at Montejo's. 5. I
buy my pens from my uncle John. 6. Where is your brother?
7. He and my sister are at their aunt's. 8. Paul loves his
brother and sister, but he does not love his books. 9. How is
your (form., sing.) friend, sir? 10. He is very well. He is in
this city, and he is buying many things. n. Your friend is rich,
is he not? 12. Yes; he has a costly house. 13. Being rich,
he has travelled and has bought many pieces-of-furniture and books.
14. He is an2 American, and he intends to pass this winter in
America. 15. He has splendid pictures, it is true; but I prefer
his statues. 16. He has books in many languages. 17. But
he prefers the English and French books to all the others.
18. His library is on the first floor; it is large and comfortable.
19. Have you (fam., sing.} a servant that speaks3 Spanish?
20. No, sir; I have a servant who speaks English. 21. John
loves his father and his mother ; but he does not love his studies,
22. Where is your brother ? He is at our uncle's.
1 no puedo. 2 Omit. * Use hable (pres. subj.).
46
SPANISH GRAMMAR
LESSON VIII
52. Indicative. Imperfect and Preterite.
Hablar :
IMPERFECT TENSE
SINGULAR
1. hablaba, I was speaking or used to speak.
2. hablabas
3. hablaba
PRETERITE TENSE
SINGULAR
I. hab!4, I spoke or did speak.
z. hablaste
3. hab!6
Temer :
IMPERFECT TENSE
SINGULAR
1. temia, I was fearing or used to fear.
2. temias
3. temia
PRETERITE TENSE
SINGULAR
1. temi, I feared or did fear.
2. temiste
3. temi6
Vivir:
IMPERFECT TENSE
SINGULAR
1. vivla, I was living or used to live.
2. vivias
3. vivia
SINGULAR
1. vivf, I lived or did live.
2. viviste
3. vivi6
PRETERITE TENSE
PLURAL
1. hablabamos
2. hablabais
3. hablaban
PLURAL
1. hablamos
2. hablasteis
3. hablaron
PLURAL
1. temiamos
2. temiais
3. temian
PLURAL
1. temimos
2. temisteis
3. temieron
PLURAL
1. viviamos
2. viviais
3. vivian
PLURAL
1. vivimos
2. vivisteis
3. vivieron
Note that the accent remains on the same vowel throughout the imper
tcct tense; and that, in both tenses, the stress never falls on the stem
LESSON VIII 47
53. Use of the Imperfect and Preterite Indicative. —
The imperfect indicative is used (i) to tell what was
happening when something else intervened, or (2) to
represent a state or action as protracted or habitual.
The preterite is used to tell what happened on one or
more occasions in the past without involving duration
or extension of time.
llovia, y los caminos estaban malos, it was raining, and the roads
were bad.
el a2o pasado fumaba mucho, last year I used to smoke a great deal.
no fume ayer, I did not smoke yesterday.
vendi mi casa y compre otra, I sold my house and bought another.
yo escribia cuando Juan entr6, I was writing when John entered.
mi padre tenia dos hermosos perros, pero los vendi6, my father had
two handsome dogs, but he sold them.
a. Sometimes ' I spoke,' ' I did speak,' or ' I would speak,' mean ' I
used to speak.' They are then to be expressed in Spanish by the imper-
fect : hablaba espanol todos los dias cuando estaba en Cuba, ' I spoke
(' did speak,' ' would speak,' or ' used to speak ') Spanish every day when
I was in Cuba.'
b. In Spanish the perfect indicative is sometimes used instead of the
preterite to express an act that occurred recently : ayer he matado un
lobo, ' I killed a wolf yesterday'; ha partido anteayer, ' he left day before
yesterday'; he creido que usted era francos, 'I thought that you were
French.' This construction is not so common in Spanish America as it is
in Spain.
Vocabulary
aleman, -ana, German,
avariento, -a, m. and f., miser,
ayudar, (to) help,
bicicleta,/, bicycle,
calle,/, street.
cinco, five,
como, as.
comun, common; por lo comun,
commonly, usually.
cortar, (to) cut.
cuarto, m., room.
dia, m., day; todos los dias, everj
day.
dinero, .«?., money.
SPANISH GRAMMAR
encontrar,1 (to) meet.
favor, m., favor.
idioma, m., language.
Iadr6n, -ona, m. and/., thief.
lavar, (to) wash.
lena, /, wood.
partir, (to) depart ; trans., to split.
planchar, (to) iron.
primo, -a, m. and f., cousin.
profesor, -ora, m. and f., professor
prometer, (to) promise.
remendar,1 (to) mend, repair.
ropa,/!, clothes.
tren, m., train.
varies, -as, several, various.
1 Radical-changing.
Exercise VIII
A. i. Juan escribia cuando yo entre* en el cuarto.
2. Ahora no fumo, pero he fumado mucho. 3. Cuando
vivia en Cuba, fumaba demasiado. 4. Vendi mi bicicleta y
compre" otra al senor Martinez. 5. Ella leia un libro
cuando llegue".1 6. For lo comun comia mucho, pero ayer
no comi6 nada.2 7. Mi padre Ham6 al criado un Iadr6n.
8. Buscabamos un hombre que hablase 3 espanol. 9. Halla-
mos a un hombre que hablaba aleman. 10. Buscamos un
criado. n. Ayer buscamos a un criado por toda la ciudad.4
12. Los ladrones mataron varios hombres, <ino es verdad?
13. Si, senor; mataron a dos hombres que iban5 a tomar el
tren. 14. El profesor de idiomas ha llegado ayer.
15. El hab!6 ayer con mi padre. 16. El profesor y yo
hablabamos espanol todo el tiempo. 17. Estudiabamos las
lecciones cuando tu llegaste. 18. Por lo comun, el avariento
contaba todos los dias su dinero ; pero ayer no lo 6 cont6.
19. Como pasabamos por la calle de Peregrines, encontramos
i nuestro tio, 20. Todos trabajaban : el padre cortaba y
partia lena. 21. La madre remendaba la ropa. 22. Las
hijas lavaban y planchaban.
B. i. I was not working when you (form., sing.) entered.
2. When I lived in Mexico, I smoked every day. 3. I did not
smoke yesterday. 4. I sold my French books, and bought Spanish
LESSON IX 49
books at Garcia's. 5. I bought the book from a Spaniard.
6. When she entered (into) the room, I was writing a letter.
7. Did you (form., pi.) find your father? 8. Yes, we found
our father and mother at our cousin's. 9. I was looking for a
friend who promised to help me.10 10. He was looking all over
town for the child. n. He found many children ; but he did not
find the child that he was looking for. 12. My father used to call
me n at six o'clock in the morning.7 13. But yesterday he called
me u at five o'clock. 14. I was reading a Spanish book when my
cousin arrived. 15. I spoke Spanish when I lived in Mexico, and
I spoke English when I lived in England. 16. I used to srnoke
a great deal ; but I do not smoke now. 17. Did you (/am., pi.}
not have8 expensive pieces-of-furniture ? 18. Yes; but we sold
them9 to our rich friend. 19. Have you sold your house also?
20. No, sir ; we have sold the furniture, but not the house. 21 . Did
you (form., sing.) buy your new hat at Garcia's? 22. No; I
bought the hat of a friend. 23. John used to ask many favors of
his teacher. 24. But today the teacher has asked a favor of John.
1 Pret. of llegar (see $ 214 (2)). 2 ' anything.' 8 ' spoke,' imp. subj. oi
hablar. 4 'all over town." 5 ' were going," imp. ind. of ir. 6 'it.'
7 a las sets de la manana. 8 ten'tais. 9 los vendimos. 10 'help me,'
ayudarme. n Put me before the verb.
LESSON IX
54. Neuter Article Lo. — In addition to the forms of
the definite article already given, there is another form,
lo, which is required before the masculine form of an
adjective, when the adjective is used substantively as
the name of a color or as an abstract noun. This is
generally called the neuter article, since it cannot be
used with a masculine or a feminine noun.
se ruboriz6 hasta lo bianco de los ojos, he colored to the white of his
eyes.
lo infinite y lo eterno, the infinite and the eternal.
JO SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. Note also the following idiomatic expressions :
conocemos lo buenas que son ellas, we know how good they are.
sabemos 1 lo mucho que nos quiere, we know how much he loves us.
55. Use of the Definite Article. — The definite article
is used oftener in Spanish than in English. It is re-
quired in the following cases :
(1) Before an abstract noun, or one used in a general sense
to denote all of the thing or class it names.
la ambici6n es peligrosa, ambition el hierro es litil, iron is useful,
is dangerous. ama las flores, he loves flowers.
But, if ' some ' or ' any ' is expressed or understood before the
English noun, the article is omitted in Spanish.
no tiene ambici6n, he hasn't any ambition.
compra hierro, he is buying (some) iron.
compra flores, he is buying flowers.
(2) Before a title, or a proper noun modified by a descrip-
tive adjective.
el senor Morales, Mr. Morales. la pequena Maria, little Mary,
el general Martinez, General Martinez, el Asia rusa, Russian Asia.
But in direct address the article is omitted, and senor, senora,
or senorita is usually prefixed to a title.
buenos dias, senor general Martinez, good day, General Martinez-
a. The article is never used before Don or Dona 2 : Don Antonio
habla, ' Anthony is speaking.'
1 Conocer means 'to know' in the sense of 'to be acquainted with,' 'to
realize ' ; saber is ' to know ' in the sense of ' to be aware of,1 ' to have learned
by study.'
2 Don and Dona are used only before the Christian or given name (nombre
3e bautismo), as Dona Maria, ' Miss (or Mrs.) Mary.' One also meets with
Senora Dona Maria, Senora Delia Maria Martinez, etc.
LESSON IX 51
b. The article is required before a noun used in apposition with a
personal pronoun (expressed or understood) : nosotros los americanos
creemos, or los americanos creemos, ' we Americans believe.'
(3) Before a word or expression of time that is modified.
Ueg6 el martes de la semana pasada, he arrived (on) Tuesday of last
week.
la semana pr6xima, next week.
(4) Before an adjective of nationality used to denote a language.
el ingles no es dificil, English is not difficult.
^ensena usted el espanol? do you teach Spanish?
But after hablar, 'to speak' (sometimes after aprender), the
article is usually omitted except before castellano.1 After en,
' in,' the article is usually omitted.
hablamos trance's, we speak French ; en alemdn, in German :
b11^ i hablas el castellano ? do you speak Spanish ?
(5) Usually before the names of countries and continents,
except when the name is used with en, a, de, para, etc., to form
an adjectival or adverbial phrase.
la Inglaterra, England ; la Francia, France, etc. ;
but,
vivo en Espana, I live in Spain ; voy a Italia, I am going to Italy
a. The article is always required before the names of some countries
and cities.
el Brasil, Brazil. la China, China.
el Canadd, Canada. la Florida, Florida.
el Ecuador, Ecuador. la Gran Bretana, Great Britain.
el Jap6n, Japan. la Habana, Havana.
el Paraguay, Paraguay. la Suiza, Switzerland.
el Peru, Peru.
1 Several languages are spoken in Spain : Castilian (el castellano), Catalan
(el Catalan), Galician (el gallego), etc.; but Castilian is the official language
of Spain, and is therefore often called Spanish (el espanol) , although in most
Spanish-speaking countries the name Castilian (el castellano) is considered
more correct.
SPANISH GRAMMAR
(6) Usually before a noun denoting a bodily characteristic,
when the object of tener, ' to have.'
tiene el pelo negro, he has black hair.
tengo los pies frios, my feet are cold.
(7) The masculine article sometimes modifies an infinitive
or a subject clause.
el comer demasiado es malo, it is bad to eat too much.
no puede ser mera casualidad el que scan todas bonitas, it cannot be
mere chance that they are all pretty.
(8) The definite article is sometimes used instead of a pos-
sessive (see § 119), as in
he perdido el sombrero, 1 have lost my hat.
Vocabulary
agradable, pleasing, agreeable.
agradar, (to) please.
alguno, -a, some.
bello, -a, beautiful.
brazo, m., arm.
creer, (to) believe.
dedo, m., finger.
deleitar, (to) delight.
desgracia, /, misfortune.
familia,/, family.
felicidad, /, happiness.
feo, -a, ugly.
fuegO, m., fire.
guantes, m. //., gloves.
guerra,/, war.
izquierdo, -a, left.
juez, m., judge.
lirio, m., lily.
lunes, m.t Monday.
mano,/, hand.
manana, tomorrow.
mundo, />/., world; todo el mundo.
everybody.
odiar, (to) hate,
oro, m., gold.
paz,/~, peace.
pobre, poor.
presente, present.
probar,1 (to) prove, test,
salud,/., health.
saludable, healthful,
sano, -a, healthy.
uno, -a, one.
Una,/, finger-nail.
vano, -a, vain.
vecino, -a, m. and f., neighbor,
visitar, (to) visit.
ya, already.
Radical-changing verb.
LESSON IX 53
Exercise IX
A. i. El senor Martinez ensenaba el castellano y el francos.
t. Hablaba el castellano, pero no hablaba Trance's. 3. El
castellano es facil, pero el aleman es dificil. 4. Puedo es-
cribir cartas en espanol (castellano), pero no en aleman.
5. He vivido en Tnglaterra y en Francia, pero no he vivido en
el Canada. 6. Visile* a Cuba, pero no a la Habana.
7. Los Cubanos y los Mejicanos hablan el castellano.
8. Los Norte-Americanos y los Ingleses hablan ingle's.
9. El francos es el idioma de Francia. 10. Cuando uno
sabe ya algunas lenguas, no es dificil aprender el castellano.
11. Amo la paz, y odio la guerra. Dejame1 en paz.
12. El fuego prueba el oro ; la desgracia prueba al hombrft
y a los amigos. 13. La paz y la salud, y no el dinero, con-
stituyen2 la felicidad de la familia. 14. Tengo las manos y
los pies frios. 15. El pobre muchacho se ha caido,3 y tiene
roto el brazo izquierdo. 16. El discipulo tiene que escribir
dos ejercicios en frances para mafiana, y ya tiene los ojos can-
sados. 17. El senor Siguerroa ha perdido el sombrero.
1 8. En lo pasado estudiaba poco : en lo presente estudio
mucho. 19. Lo bueno agrada : lo bello deleita. 20. Pre-
fiero lo bueno a lo malo, lo bello a lo feo. 21. Odiaban lo
malo, y amaban lo bueno. 22. Todo el mundo deja lo 6 til,
y busca lo vano,
B. i. Have you lived in Cuba? 2. Yes ; I have lived in
Cuba, but not in Havana. 3. In England and in Canada they
speak English. 4. In Mexico and in Peru they speak Spanish.
5. Spanish is an easy language, but German is difficult. 6. Mr.
Herrera and his daughter Jane speak English and Spanish.
7. When I lived at Mr. Herrera's, I spoke Spanish every day.
8. Mr. Herrera departed for4 Spain last Tuesday. 9. His soq
and daughter are in France 10. Mr. Herrera does not speafe
French. n. Women love flowers. This little girl sells flowers.
54 SPANISH GRAMMAR
12. He prefers what is beautiful and agreeable 5 to what is good and
useful. 13. The North Americans desired6 peace, and not war.
14. They desired to live in peace with their neighbors. 15. The
judge feared wickedness7 and loved goodness. 16. Lilies are
beautiful flowers. 17. Little Paul is the son of Mrs. Morales.
1 8. He arrived last Tuesday, and leaves next Monday. 19. He
has found his hat; but he has not found his gloves. 20. My
finger is broken,8 and I have lost the finger-nail. 21. Do you
(fam., sing.} not drink tea or9 coffee ? 22. No ; I drink water.
1 ' leave me.' 2 Pres. Ind. of constituir, ' to constitute.' 8 ' has fallen.
* para. 5 Say : 'the beautiful and the agreeable.' 6 Use Imp. Ind.
7 Say: 'The wicked (= bad) and the good.' 8 Say: «i have the finger
broken.' 9 ni.
LESSON X
56. Omission of the Definite Article. — The definite
article is omitted in Spanish, although required in
English.
(1) Usually before a noun in apposition.
Washington, capital de los Estados Unidos, Washington, the capita]
of the United States.
(2) Before a numeral modifying a title.
Carlos quinto, Charles the Fifth.
Luis diez y seis, Louis the Sixteenth.
57. Omission of the Indefinite Article. —The indef^
nite article is used less often in Spanish than in Eng-
lish : it is regularly omitted before an unmodified noun
in the predicate used like an adjective to denote nation-
ality, occupation, rank, etc.
es americano, he is an American, es sastre, he is a tailor.
es general, he is a general.
LESSON X
55
It is also usually omitted,
a. Before a noun in apposition : Sevilla, ciudad en Andalucia, « Se-
rille, a city in Andalusia.'
b. Before otro, ' another '; cierto, ' a certain'; ciento, ' a hundred';
mil, ' a thousand '; after tal, ' such a,' etc.
c. Note also such expressions as the following : dos pesos la botella,
'two dollars a bottle '; tres veces al dia, 'three times a day'; mil pesos
por ano, ' a thousand dollars a (or per) year.'
38. Radical-changing Verbs. — The radical-changing
e and o verbs of the third conjugation change the
radical vowels e and o to i and u respectively in the
third person singular and plural of the preterite.
SINGULAR
1. senti
2. sentiste
3. sintid
SINGULAR
1. pedi
2. pediste
3. pidi6
PRETERITE
Sentir
Pedir
PLURAL
1. sentimos
2. sentisteis
3. sintieron
PLURAL
1. pedimos
2. pedisteis
3. pidieron
Dormir
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. dormi i. dormimos
2. dormiste 2. dormisteis
3. durmi6 3. durmieron
It should be noted that the radical-changing e and 0 verbs of the first
and second conjugations are regular in the preterite.
59. Idiomatic Expressions.
buenos dias, good morning, or good day.
buenas tardes, good afternoon, or good evening (until dark).
buenas noches, good evening (after dark), or good night.
SPANISH GRAMMAR
hasta manana, farewell until tomorrow,
hasta luego, farewell for a while.
adi6s, good-by.
Vocabulary
mandar, (to) send.
mantener, 1 (to) support.
medicamento, /»., drug, medicine.
medico, /«., physician.
mentir, 2 (to) lie.
miedo, m.t fear.
pagar, (to) pay ; pague", I paid
resfriado, tn., cold.
salir,3 (to) go out.
saludable, healthful.
sanar, (to) cure.
sano, -a, healthy.
soldado, ///., soldier.
tres, three.
vino, m., wine.
abrigo, w., wrap, overcoat.
anoche, last night.
bobO, -a, m. and/., fool.
botella,/, bottle.
cerveza,/, beer.
cielo, ;«., sky, heaven.
COger, (to) catch.
comerciante, /«., merchant.
enfermedad,/!, illness.
esperar, (to) hope.
esposo, -a, m. and f., husband, wife.
ganar dinero, (to) make money.
gastar, (to) spend.
grave, serious.
guardar cama, (to) stay in bed.
intenci6n, /, intention.
1 Inflected like tener. 2 Radical-changing ; cf. sentir. 8 Irregular.
Exercise X
A. i. He vivido en Toledo, ciudad de Espana. 2. Pero
no he vivido en Madrid, capital del pals. 3. Compre" el
vino al senor Martinez. 4. Pagu£ tres pesos la botella por
el vino. 5. El es frances, pero vive en los Estados Unidos.
6. El senor Gonzalez es sastre, y su hermano es comerciante.
7. Don Juan Siguerroa habla bien ingle's y Trance's. 8. Juana
pidi6 un favor a su madre. 9. Anoche dormi en el cuarto
de mi hermano. 10. ^Es hombre 6 mujer? — Es hombre,
y es un hombre inteligente. n. <:Es bobo? — Si, senor; es
un bobo.1 12. <;Erespobre? — Si, senor ; soy una pobre.
13. El hombre debe beber agua, leche, cafe" 6 t£, y no vino
ni cerveza. 14. El nino debe beber agua 6 leche. 15. Me
LESSON X 57
puse3 el abrigo, el sombrero y los guantes, y sail d. la calle.
1 6. Buenos dias, senor General; <ic6mo esta usted hoy?
17. Buenos dias, Don Luis, <Jes usted? Estoy bueno. 18. Y
la senora L6pez esta buena tambi6n, <; no es verdad ? 19. No ;
esta enferma : la semana pasada cogi6 un resfriado, y ahora
tiene que guardar cama. 20. Es lastima. Yo tenia siempre
la intenci6n de visitar a la buena senora. 21. Oh, no hay
miedo. La enfermedad no es grave. 22. Con los medica-
mentos esperamos sanar a la enferma. 23. El hermano de la
senora L6pez es me'dico, y ha mandado buenos medicamentos.
B. i. Did you sleep well last night? No; I slept badly.
2. Did you (form., sing.} ask a favor of little Paul ? 3. No ; I
asked several favors of his father. 4. Last year we lived in To-
ronto, a city in Canada. 5. Our cousin was living in Havana, a
city in Cuba, when he died. 6. My brother is a physician.
7. My father and my uncles are merchants. 8. Did you (form.,
pi.} pay two or three dollars a bottle for the wine ? 9. I bought
the wine of my uncle. 10. I paid three dollars a bottle for the
wine. ii. This gentleman is a Spaniard. He lives in Barcelona,
a city in Spain. 12. That man is a merchant. He makes a
great deal of money, but spends little. He is a regular miser.
13. Medicines are good for the sick. 14. We love the blue (color)
of the heavens. 15. Mr. Garcia died last year. His wife is a
poor woman,8 and works hard4 to5 support her family. 16. Last
week my father slept well; but last night he did not sleep much.
17. I believe that water and milk are healthful, and that tea and
coffee are not healthful. I wish to be healthy. 18. Do you
(form., sing.} believe that Mr. Mene'ndez lied? No, sir; he did
not lie. 19. Good evening, Mrs. L6pez. How are you (form.}t
20. Oh, is that you (/am.), Mary? I am not very well. I caught
a cold last Tuesday. 21. That's a pity. My brother is also ill.
22. His illness is serious, and he has to stay in bed. 23. He is
a physician, is he not? No; he is a judge. 24. We visited my
mother yesterday. She has been ill, but is now well.
1 Translate :' he is a regular fool.' 2 'I put on.' 8 Omit. 4 mucho.
* Para.
$8 SPANISH GRAMMAR
LESSON XI
60. Position of Descriptive Adjectives.1 — In English
a descriptive adjective used with a noun nearly always
precedes it; in Spanish a descriptive adjective com-
monly follows its noun.
un muchacho fuerte, a strong boy. agua fria, cold water,
una muchacha cubana, a Cuban girl. ojos azules, blue eyes.
61. Most Spanish descriptive adjectives, however, may pre-
cede their noun, if the quality named by the adjective is charac-
teristic of the noun, or if the language is poetic or figurative.
la Santa Biblia, the Holy Bible. la blanca nieve, the white snow,
el ronco trueno, the hoarse thunder.
a. Many adjectives may usually be placed either before or after their
noun, although an adjective is more literal and distinctive when it follows i
bueno, ' good '; malo, ' bad '; bonito or Undo, * pretty '; hermoso, ' beau-
tiful' or « handsome '; pequeno, ' small'; viejo, * old,' etc.
una pequena nina or una nina pequena, a little girl.
un hermoso caballo or un caballo hermoso, a handsome horse.
b. The position of the adjective is sometimes determined by euphony,
or the necessity of avoiding ambiguity; and an adjective which ordinarily
follows its noun may stand before a noun modified by an adjective phrase.
cuatro magnificos caballos blancos, four splendid white horses.
los escasos honorarios del gobierao, the inadequate salaries of the gov-
ernment,
an patri6tico libro de lectura cubano, a patriotic Cuban reader.
c. A few adjectives have one meaning before, and another after, their noun.
un grande amigo, a great friend. diferentes personas, different
una manzana grande, a large apple. (= several) persons.
el pobre hombre, the poor man (an vestidos diferentes, different
object of pity). (= dissimilar) costumes.
1 Or " qualifying " adjectives.
LESSON XI 59
in hornbre pobre, a poor (poverty- un nuevo libro, anothei (or a
stricken) man. different) book.
mi cara madre, my dear mother. un libro nuevo, a new book
una silla cara, a dear (expensive) (fresh from the press.)
chairc varies hombres, several men.
cierta e"poca, a certain period. papeles varios, miscellaneous pa-
noticia cierta, authentic news. pers; eic.
d. When the adjective precedes, it is usually repeated before each
noun to which it refers.
mi viejo padre y mi vieja madre, my old father and mother.
e. An English noun used as an adjective is usually expressed in
Spanish by a noun preceded by de (or para).
un reloj de oro, a gold watch.
una estatua de marmol, a marble statue.
un vaso para vino, a wineglass (un vaso de vino is a glass of wine).
62. Agreement of Adjectives.
(1) If an adjective modifies several singular nouns, the plural
form of the adjective is used.
el padre y el hijo son buenos, the father and the son are good.
la madre y la hija son buenas, the mother and the daughter are good.
(2) If some of the nouns are masculine and some are femi-
nine, the adjective is usually in the masculine plural.
el padre y la madre son buenos, the father and the mother are good.
la plata y el oro americanos, American silver and gold.
a. If the nouns denote inanimate things, and the noun nearest the
adjective is feminine plural, the adjective takes the feminine plural form.
el escritorio y las sillas estaban rotas, the desk and chairs were broken;
su sombrero y sus botas son viejas, his hat and boots are old;
but,
mi coraz6n y mi alma son suyos, my heart and my soul are his.
b. Sometimes a plural noun is modified by several singular adjectives.
This occurs when each adjective modifies only one of the individuals
6o
SPANISH GRAMMAR
denoted by the noun: las lenguas inglesa y castellana, 'the English
and Spanish languages.'
c. An adjective usually agrees in gender and number with the nearest
noun if the nouns are disconnected : muestra un valor, una capacidad
un talento extraordinario, ' he displays extraordinary courage, ability,
talent.'
d. When an attributive adjective precedes its noun, it is repeated before
each noun if the nouns denote distinct persons or things ; if the nouns
denote collectively a state or action, a group of persons or things, or desig-
nate the same person or thing, the adjective is not repeated, and agrees
with the nearest noun.
la madre y la hija, the mother and (the) daughter.
el cuchillo y el tenedor, the knife and fork.
una bella casa y un bello jardin, a beautiful house and garden,
su extremado talento y habilidad, his unusual talent and skill,
todos los maestros y discipulos, all the teachers and pupils.
el pie y pierna de los animales se llaman ' pata,' the foot and lower
part of the leg of animals are called 'pata.'
e. In Spanish a predicate adjective is often used where an adverb is
used in English : parti6 alegre, ' he departed joyfully.'
Vocabulary
Alejandro, m.y Alexander.
aqui, here.
aunque, although.
billete, m., ticket; billete directo,
through ticket.
cinco, five.
costar,1 (to) cost,
cuchara,/, spoon.
cucharita,/, teaspoon.
cuchillo, m., knife.
despacho, ///., office.
estaci6n, /, station.
Industrie so, -a, industrious.
1 Radical-changing verb.
2 Irregular verb : cf, § 247.
instante, m., instant; al instante,
at once.
ir,2 (to) go.
mesa,/, table,
milla,/, mile
pertenecer,3 (to) belong,
plata, /, silver.
porque, because.
porque", why (interrog?).
primo, -a, m. and/., cousin,
sopa,/, soup.
taza,/, cup.
tenedor, m., fork.
8 Verb with inceptive endings : cf. § 220
LESSON XI 6 1
Exercise XI
A. i. <*Qu6 compraste? — Compre* un reloj de plata.
2. <J Porque no compraste un reloj de oro? 3. Porque
los relojes de oro cuestan mucho. 4. Quiero una cucha-
rita : no quiero una cuchara para sopa. 5. Traigame 1 usted
un vaso de agua. 6. <iNo quiere usted una taza de cafe?
7. Si ; traigame una taza de cafe" con leche. 8. Traigame
tambien un cuchillo de mesa y un tenedor. 9. El viejo
soldado tiene mucha hambre y mucha sed. 10. Leo todos
los dias en la Santa Biblia. n. La casa blanca pertenece a
Don Alejandro. 12. La blanca nieve es muy linda. 13. El
senor Morales compr6 dos magnificos caballos negros. 14. Sus
nuevos caballos son muy hermosos. 15. Mi vieja tia vivia
en aquella casa verde. 16. Ahora vive en la casa amarilla.
1 7. La muchacha alemana tiene ojos azules. 18. La mucha-
cha espanola tiene ojos negros. 19. El pobre hombre esta
muy enfermo y tiene que guardar cama. 20. Este mucha-
cho italiano es muy pobre, pero es industrioso y quiere trabajar.
21. Compramos una mesa grande para la cocina. 22. El
senor Martinez es un grande amigo de nuestra familia.
23. Mi primo tiene que ir a Malaga, y teniendo prisa quiere
partir al instante. 24. Hay tres millas de aqui a la estaci6n
donde toma el tren. 25. Aunque tiene hambre, no quiere
comer antes de llegar2 a Malaga. 26. Ayer compr6 un
billete directo en el despacho de billetes.
B. I. Bring me a soup spoon and a table knife. 2. Bring me
also a cup of black coffee and a teaspoon. 3. Tea cups are large,
but coffee cups are small. 4. I sold my silver watch and bought a
gold watch. 5. Bring me a wine glass. I wish a glass of wine.
6. Bring me a coffee cup. I wish a cup of coffee with milk. 7. The
white house is covered with8 the white snow. 8. Bring me the
black ink and the blue paper. 9. Bring me also a small pen and
blotting paper. 10. When I am hungry I eat a large apple and
SPANISH GRAMMAR
take a glass 01 milk. 11. The little Mexican girl has black
eyes. 12. I wish to buy four handsome black horses. 13. Hand-
some biack horses are dear. 14. This white house is ugly. The
white snow is beautiful. 15. The other day we bought two
splendid black horses. 16. He is a great man; but he does not
live in a large house. 17. He sold my silver knife and bought a
gold spoon. 1 8. She got4 a coffee cup and took a cup of coffee.
19. Have your cousins bought through tickets for5 Malaga?
'io. Yes ; they were taking the train when we arrived at the station.
21. Being in a hurry, we passed through Peregrinos Street.
22. The station is in that street.
1 ' bring me.' 2 ' before arriving.'
lit., ' went to look for '). * para.
* estd cubierta de. *fue a buscat
LESSON XII
63. Indicative. Imperfect and Preterite.
Tener:
IMPERFECT TENSE
SINGULAR
1. tenla, I was having, or used to have.
2. tenias
3. tenia
SINGULAR
1. tuve, I had, or did have.
2. tuviste
3. tuvo
Haber:
PRETERITE TENSE
IMPERFECT TENSE
SINGULAR
1. habia, I had.
2. habias
3. habia
PLURAL
1. teniamos
2. teniais
3. tenian
PLURAL
1. tuvimos
2. tuvisteis
3. tuvieron
PLURAL
1. hablamoa
2. habiais
3. habian
LESSON XII
PRETERITE TENSE
SINGULAR
I hube, I had.
2. hubiste
3. hubo
Ser:
IMPERFECT TENSE
SINGULAR
1. era, I was, or used to be.
2. eras
3. era
PRETERITE TENSE
SINGULAR
1. fui, I was.
2. fuiste
3- fu*
Estai :
IMPERFECT TENSE
SINGULAR
1. estaba, I was, or used to be.
2. estabas
3. estaba
SINGULAR
1. estuve, I was.
2. estuviste
3. estuvo
PRETERITE TENSE
PLURAL
1. hubimos
2. hubiste is
3. hubieron
PLURAL
1. 6ramos
2. erais
3. eran
PLURAL
1. fuimos
2. fuisteis
3. fueron
PLURAL
1. estabamos
2. estabais
3. estaban
PLURAL
1. estuvimos
2. estuvisteis
3. estuvieron
64. The Pluperfect and Preterite Perfect.
(i) The pluperfect tense is formed with the imperfect tens6
of haber.
Hablar:
PLUPERFECT TENSE
i. habiamos hablado
1. habia hablado, { I ^d spoken,^
I had been speaking.
2. habias hablado 2. habiais hablado
3. habia hablado 3. habian hablado
SPANISH GRAMMAR
(2) The Preterite Perfect is formed with the preterite ol
haber : hube hablado, ' I had spoken,' etc. This tense is used
only after expressions meaning * as soon as,' ' after,' etc. In
colloquial Spanish the preterite usually replaces the preterite
perfect.
luego que hube leido (or luego que lei) la carta, la devolvf, as soon as
I had read the letter, I returned it.
Note also the following idiom :
llegado que hubo a" la costa, as soon as he had arrived at the coast;
terminado que hubo su discurso, as soon as he had finished his speech-, etc,
a. Habia also means ' there was,' * there were,' or « there used to be ' ;
hubo, 'there was' or 'there were'; habia (hubo) habido, * there had
been.'
65. Idiomatic Expressions.
(1) hace1 calor, it is warm.
hace mucho calor, it is very
warm.
(2) hay sol (or hace sol), it is
sunny; the sun is shining.
hay luna, the moon is shining.
hace frfo, it is cold,
hace fresco, it is cool,
hace viento, it is windy.
hay neblina, it is foggy,
hay polvo, it is dusty.
hay lodo, it is muddy.
Note that these expressions have to do with the state of the weather.
Vocabulary
asesinar, (to) assassinate.
haul, m.t trunk.
bien de salud, in good health.
Bruto, m., Brutus.
buz6n, m.y letter box.
carb6n, m., coal.
ciego, -a, blind.
c6mplice, m. and f., accomplice.
descansar, (to) rest.
diez, ten.
echar, (to) throw, put.
falta,/, lack, scarcity.
feliz, happy.
Godo, -a, m. and f.t Goth.
hierro, m., iron.
huelga, /I, strike.
1 hace is Pres. Ind., 3d. sing., of the irregular verb hacer, ' to make": cf. j 246
LESSON XII 65
foven, m. and /., young man, young
woman.
junto, -a, together.
lima,/, moon.
Hover,1 (to) rain.
maleta, /, travelling-bag.
iievar,1 (to) snow.
ni . . . ni, neither . . . nor.
ocupado, -a, busy.
redondo, -a, round,
regalar, (to) present, give.
Romano, -a, m. andf.> Roman,
salida, /, rising.
salir,2 (to) go out.
sol, tn.f sun.
sordo, -a, deaf,
tierra,/, earth.
tomo, m.t volume.
* Radical-changing verb. 2 Irregular verb : cf. § 250.
Exercise XII
A. i. El sol es redondo, y la tierra y la luna son tambidn
redondas. 2. Este nino es industrioso, pero no es corte"s :
aquella nifia es industriosa y corte"s. 3. 6l esta enfermo y
triste : ella no esta ni enferma ni triste. 4. Los j6venes
partieron alegres. Ahora viven felices. 5. Los Godos y los
Romanes vivieron juntos en Espana. 6. Su padre era viejo,
y su madre era ciega y sorda. 7. Ella era siempre buena
con (or, para con) los pobres, 8. Cuando Maria estaba en-
ferma, le l regalaban muchas flores. 9. Siempre era usted
mi amiga, Senora. 10. <iQuie!n Ileg6 en el tren? — Era la
senora (la esposa) de Don Alejandro. n. Julio C£sar me*
asesinado por Bruto y sus c6mplices. 12. Estuve diez anos
en Madrid, y estaba bien de salud. 13. Eran las cinco de
la manana cuando Ileg6 el tren. 14. Creo que es rico
Creia que era rico. 15. Ya habia leido yo la carta, cuando
Ileg6 mi hermano. 16. Luego que hubo escrito las cartas,
las2 ech6 al buz6n. 17. Teniamos mucho frio a causa de
la huelga y la falta de carb6n. 18. Hace frio ; el nino tiene
frio ; el agua esta fria. 19. Hace calor ; el nino tiene calor ;
el agua esta caliente. 20. En el invierno, cuando hace
mucho frio, no hay lodo. 21. A la salida del sol hay mucha
ncblina.
66 SPANISH GRAMMAR
B. i. The sun is shining and it is warm. 2. The wind is
blowing and it is snowing. 3. Bring me a large glass of water.
I am very thirsty. 4. Bring me also some apples. I am hungry.
5. This man and this woman are tired and wish to rest. 6. Gold
and silver are more costly than8 iron. 7. The trunks and the
travelling-bags were (Imp. Ind.) broken. 8. We have read the
first and second volumes. 4 9. They (/<?;>/.) lived happily 5 in
Madrid for many years.6 10. John and his sister Mary were very ill.
When they were ill, they did not go out on7 the street. n. It
was six o'clock in the morning when my father called me. 12. The
mother had been so 8 busy that 9 she had not had time to 10 mend
the clothes. 13. As soon as the father had cut and split the
wood, he brought it u into the house. 14. In Colorado it is warm
in winter 18 when the sun shines. 15. When the sun is not shining
and the wind is blowing, it is very cold. 16. It is usually warm
when it is raining or when it is foggy. 17. It is so12 windy and
so l'2 cold this week that everybody is catching cold.14 1 8. When
I am very cold, I do not wish to drink very cold water. 19. My
cousin's wife was very sleepy, and she wished to rest a little in the train.
1 ' her.' 2 ' them.' 3 mds costosos (costosas?) que. 4 Say : ' the volumes
first and second.' 6 Say :' happy.' 6 Say :' many years in Madrid ' (do
not translate * for '). 7 d. 8 tan. » que. 1° de or para. U la trajo.
12 tanto. 13 el invierno. 14 un resfriado.
LESSON XIII
66. Apocopation of Adjectives. — The following adjec-
tives lose the final o of the masculine singular when they
precede their noun :
bueno, good. ninguno, no, none,
malo, bad. primero, first.
uno,1 one, an or a. tercero, third,
alguno, some. postrero,2 last.
1 The numeral uno and the indefinite article are the same word.
2 Postrero is little used ; ' last ' is usually ultimo (but ' last month/ for in-
stance, is el mes pasado).
LESSON XIII 67
an buen hombre, a good man. algiin dla, some day.
mal cafe", bad coffee. el primer tomo, the first volume.
a. If bueno and malo are separated from their noun, they retain the
final o : mi bueno y carinoso padre, * my good and affectionate father.'
67. Grande, used in the sense of ' grand ' or ' great/ usually
becomes gran before a singular noun of either gender.
un gran presidente, a great president. una gran cosa, a grand affair.
a. Before a noun beginning with a vowel, or when the adjective is em-
phatic, the full form is sometimes used.
un grande acto de caridad, a grand act of charity.
un grande sacrificio, a great sacrifice.
b. When grande means ' large ' or * big,' it follows its noun.
un muchacho grande, a big boy. una casa grande, a large house.
68. Santo, ' saint,' ' holy/ usually becomes san before the
masculine name of a saint. The full form remains before a
name beginning with To- or Do-.
San Pablo, Saint Paul. Santo Tomas, Saint Thomas.
San Pedro, Saint Peter. But the name of the island
Santo Domingo, Saint Dominick. is San Tomas.
Otherwise the full form is used.
Santa Ana, Saint Anne. un hombre santo, a holy man-
69. Ciento, 'one hundred/ becomes cien before the noun
it modifies, even if an adjective intervenes.
cien soldados, one hundred soldiers.
cien hermosos caballos, one hundred handsome horses.
cien mil pesos, one hundred thousand dollars.
But the full form ciento is required in form ing numerical expres-
sions above one hundred (except cien mil, cien millones, etc.),
ciento y diez, one hundred and ten.
ciento veinte y cinco, one hundred and twenty-five.
68 SPANISH GRAMMAR
70. Numerals. — Learn the Cardinal Numerals, § 168;
and the Ordinal Numerals from 'first' to 'twelfth/
§169.
Exercise XIII
A. i. Las manzanas grandes cuestan diez centavos la
docena. 2. Las pequenas cuestan s61o cinco centavos la
docena. 3. Las buenas naranjas de la Florida cuestan 30
centavos la docena. 4. Yo tengo 10 naranjas y tu tienes
15. <jQiantas tenemos? 5. 10 y 15 son 25. 6. El afio
tiene 12 meses y 365 dias. 7. El mes tiene desde 28 hasta
31 dias. 8. La semana tiene 7 dias. 9. El dia tiene 24
horas 10. Cada hora tiene 60 tninutos. n. Cada
minuto tiene 60 segundos. 12. ^Cuantos segundos hay en
unahora? 13. <iCuantas horas hay en una semana? 14. Los
meses siguientes tienen 31 dias: enero, marzo, mayo, Julio,
agosto, octubre, y diciembre. 15. Los meses que tienen s61o
30 dias son: abril, junio, se(p)tiembre, y noviembre. 16. El
mes de febrero tiene generalmente s61o 28 dias. 17. En el afio
bisiesto el mes de febrero tiene 29 dias. 18. Los dias de la
semana son: domingo, lunes, martes, mie'rcoles, jueves, viernes
y sabado. 19. El domingo es dia de descanso. 20. Los
demas dias son dias de trabajo. 21. Un nino estudia, y uno
no estudia. 22. Tengo uno 6 dos limones y una 6 dos
naranjas. 23. Un hombre grande no es siempre un gran
hombre.
(In this exercise write out all numerals in full.)
B. I. We do not work Sundays.1 2. Mondays, Wednesdays,
and Fridays we have lessons in2 English, Spanish, and mathematics.
3. Tuesdays, Thursdays, and Saturdays we have lessons in Latin,
Greek, and philosophy. 4. The months of3 Spring are : March,
April, and May. 5 . How many days are there in 8 Spring ? 6. The
months of3 Summer are: June, July, and August. 7. The
months of8 Autumn (Fall) are : September, October, and November,
8. And the months of3 Winter are: December, January, and Feb-
LESSON XIV 69
ruary. 9. January is the first month of the year. 10. Decem-
ber is the last month. n. February has only twenty- eight or
twenty-nine days. 12. In8 leap year it has twenty-nine days.
13. Mr. Martinez used to sell oranges at ten cents a dozen.
14. Now he sells oranges at from twenty to thirty cents a dozen.
15. And his oranges are not good. 16. They are not sweet and
they are too small. 17. If John had twelve books and Mary
had thirteen, how many did they have? 18. Twelve and thirteen
are twenty-five. 19. How many days has January? 20. How
many minutes are there in a day? 21. My good grandfather,
my good and kind father, and my dear mother have just arrived.4
22. The enemy lost one 5 hundred horses, one 5 hundred and twenty-
one mules, and one5 hundred thousand rifles. 23. We used-to-
have good neighbors when we were in Mexico. 24. When (= as
soon as) they had sold the books, they bought a copy of the Holy
Bible. 25. The boy's cap and coat were soiled: he had fallen6
into the mud of the street.
1 los domingos (why Def. Art.?) , * de. « Use Def. Art. * acaban dt
Uegar. & Omit. 6 se habia caido.
LESSON XIV
71. Indicative. Future and Conditional.1
Hablar :
FUTURE TENSE
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. hablar6, I shall speak, or shall be speaking. I. hablaremoa
2. hablards 2. hablar6is
3. hablara 3. hablaran
1 The Spanish indicative future tense is formed by postfixing to the infinitive
the indicative present tense of haber, the conditional by postfixing the imperfect
tense.
hablar(h)6 hablar(h)emos hablar(habKa hablar(hah)iamos
hablar(h)as hablar(hab)e"is hablar(hab)ias hablar(hab)fais
hablar(h)a hablar(h)an hablar(hab)ia hablar(hab)ian
Note the disappearance of nab-.
SPANISH GRAMMAR
CONDITIONAL TENSE
SINGULAR
i. hablarla, I should speak, or should be speaking.
hablarias
hablaria
2.
3-
Temer :
SINGULAR
1. temerS, I shal
2. temeras
•\. temera
FUTURE TENSE
fear, or shall be fearing.
CONDITIONAL TENSE
SINGULAR
1. temeria, I should fear, or should be fearing.
2. temerias
3. temeria
Vlvir: FUTURE TENSE
SINGULAR
1. vivire", I shall live, or shall be living.
2. viviras
3. vivira
CONDITIONAL TENSE
SINGULAR
I. viviria, I should live, or should be living.
vivirias
viviria
PLURAL
1. hablaiiamos
2. hablariais
3. hablarian
PLURAL
1. temeremos
2. temereis
3. temeran
PLURAL
1. temeriamos
2. temeriais
3. temerian
PLURAL
1. viviremos
2. vivir6is
3. viviran
PLURAL
i. viviriamos
viviriais
vivirian
2.
a. The English auxiliary verb ' will ' may denote future time, as in ' he
will go tomorrow,' or it may express willingness, as in ' I will go if you
wish.' When ' will ' means ' to be willing,' it is generally to be translated
into Spanish by the proper form of querer: i quiere usted venir COD
nosotros ? « will you come with us ? ' comprar6 la casa si quieres ven-
derla, ' I shall buy the house if you will sell it.'
b. The auxiliary verb ' should ' may be merely conditional, as in ' I
should speak if 1 knew what to say,' or it may mean * ought to,' as in ' I
realize that I should ( = ought to) speak, but I do not wish to do so.1
When ' should ' means ' ought to,' it is usually expressed in Spanish by
the proper form of deber : yo debo (debiera) hablar, ' I should, or ough/
to, speak/
LESSON XIV 71
72. Idiomatic Expressions.
es temprano, it is early. a las dos de la tarde, at twc o'clock
es tarde, it is late. in the afternoon.
a la una,1 at one o'clock. es la una, it is one o'clock.
a las dos, at two o'clock. son las nueve, it is nine o'clock.
a las tres y media, at half-past £ qu6 hora es ? what time is it ? what
three. o'clock is it?
a las cuatro y cuarto, at a quarter- en ocho dias, in a week.
past four. hace quince dias, two weeks (a fort-
a las cinco menos cuarto, at a night) ago.
quarter to five. el primero de enero, the first of
a las seis y diez (minutos), at ten January.
minutes past six. el dos (tres, cuatro, etc.) de fe-
a las siete de la manana, at seven brero, the second (third, fourth,
o'clock in the morning. etc.) of February.
Note that, except the first, the cardinal numbers are used to denote the
days of the month.
73. In order to denote an act or state that continues from
one period into another, the present, imperfect, and future
tenses are used in Spanish ; while in English the perfect, plu-
perfect, and future perfect tenses are used. Ex. :
hace quince anos que vivimos en hard 2 un ano que viviremos en
Madrid, we have been living Madrid, we shall have been
in Madrid for fifteen years. living in Madrid for a year.
hacla seis meses que viviamos en mucho tiempo ha que vivimos en
Madrid, we had been living Madrid, we have been living
in Madrid for six months. in Madrd for a long time,
desde entonces viviamos en Madrid,
we had been living in Madrid
since then.
Compare these sentences with the following :
1 After la una and media, hora is understood; after las dos, las ties, etc,
horas is understood. Cuarto is a noun.
2 Future indicative of hacer: cf. $ 246.
72 SPANISH GRAMMAR
hace un mes que partieron, it is hace ocho dias que no he fumado,
a month since they left, or it is a week since I have
they left a month ago. smoked, or I have not smoked
hacia ocho dias que habian par- for a week.
tido, it was a week since they hacia diez anos que no habia fu-
had left. mado, it was ten years since I
hara un ano que partieron, it had smoked, or I had not
will be a year since they left. smoked for ten years.
poco ha que partieron, they left desde entonces no he fumado, I
a little while ago. have not smoked since then.
a. In expressions of time ha (sometimes written hi) is generally
used as an impersonal verb instead of hay; but hace is used much
oftener than ha. As a rule, ha follows and hace precedes the noun (or
adjective) denoting time. Ha is generally used in indefinite expressions
of time, as poco ha, 'a short time ago'; while hace is more correct in
definite expressions, as hace ocho dias, ' a week ago.'
Exercise XIV
A. i. La reina parti6 antes de ayer. El rey partird pasado
manana. 2. Esta noche dormire' aqui, y partire" manana.
3. Dijo1 que dormiria aqul esta noche y partiria manana.
4. Me escriben que volveran pronto. Me escribieron que
volverian pronto. 5. <jSupongo2 que el senor Garcia no
tardara en volver a casa? 6. Poco ha que parti6, y volvera
dentro de media hora. 7. ^Cuanto tiempo hace que usted
vive aqui? — Hace tres meses. 8. £ Caanto tiempo hace que
estudias el espanol? — Hace s61o quince dias. 9. Hace dos
dias que no la veo.3 — Yo la vi4 hace dos horas. 10. Mi vida
desde hace algunos dias es una lucha constante. n. Nohemos
recibido cartas desde que estamos en Sevilla. 12. Hacia
ocho dias que mi hermano y yo estabamos en Sevilla cuando
Ileg6 mi padre. 13. <: Desde cuando esta su amigo en
Toledo? 14. Desde hace dos anos, y tiene la intenci6n
de quedar alii. 15, Hace ocho dias que estoy en Malaga.
LESSON XIV 73
— Hace ocho dias que no he estado en Malaga. 16. Desde
entonces no he fumado. — Desde entonces fumo todos los dias.
17. Desde aquella noche no he vuelto5 a su casa. — Desde
aquella noche vuelvo a su casa todos los dias. 18. Mi reloj
esta parado. <>Qu£ hora es en tu reloj? 19. Tengo las diez y
veinte ; pero mi reloj no anda bien : adelanta. — Mi reloj atrasa.
20. Crist6bal Col6n descubrio la America el 12 de octubre
de 1492. 21. La carta empieza asi : "Madrid, 21 de enero
de 1904." 22. (jCuando es tu cumpleanos (dia de cum-
pleanos)? — El 17 de marzo. 23. <iCuando es el dia de tu
santo6? 24. Mi nombre de bautismo es Silvestre, y resulta
que mis dias son el 31 de diciembre. 25. Los dias de Jacinto
son el ii de setiembre.
B. I. Will you (farn., sing.} sell your horse? 2. I will sell
the horse if you {fain., sing.} will pay five hundred American dollars
for him.7 3. I shall pay five hundred dollars for the horse
tomorrow.8 4. I should pay one thousand dollars for that horse
if you asked it.9 5. What time is it by your (fam., sing.) watch?
It is half-past one. 6. By my watch it is a quarter to two ; but
my watch is fast. 7. The father used-to-call his children at
quarter-past five in the morning. 8. He calls them 10 now at ten
minutes to six. 9. Will it be long before your (/am., sing.}
brother returns u to Madrid ? He will return in a week. 10. They
left for ia Paris a month ago, and they have not arrived yet. 1 1 . It
will be a month tomorrow since they left. 12. I wrote to my friend
two days ago. 13. I am fifty-five years old, and I have lived in
this house fifty-one years. 14. Since then I have written daily to
my mother; but I have not written to my father. 15. He had
spoken Spanish for many years ; but he had not learned to 13 speak
it18 well. 16. How long had you {form., pi.} been in Malaga
when I arrived? Only two weeks. 17. Have you {fa m.,pl.} not
received a letter from your mother since you have been in Spain?
18. No, sir; we have written to our mother every day since we have
been here; but we have not received letters from her.14 19. My
birthday is the 28th of June, and my saint's day is the first of May.
74 SPANISH GRAMMAR
20. If the owner will sell the horse, I shall buy it.15 21. He said
that if the owner would 16 sell the horse, he should buy it. 22. He
should write his Spanish exercises instead of playing 1T ball ; but he
prefers to play ball.
1 ' he said.' 2 Pres. Ind., ist pers. sing., of suponer, ' to suppose." 3 Pres.
Ind. of ver, ' to see.' 4 Pret. of ver, 6 Past Part, of volver, ' to return.' 6 in
Spain and Spanish America, the day of the saint after whom one is named is
celebrated much oftener than one's birthday. ' My saint's day ' is el dia de mi
santo, or mis dias. ~ por el, 8 Place manana first in the sentence. 9 si
lo pidieras. 10 los (placed before the verb). n Say : ' will your brother be
slow (fardard] in returning ?' (Infin.). 12 para. 13 d hablarlo. l* ella.
15 lo (placed before the verb). 16 Use queria (Imp. Ind. of qutrer). 17 Use
Infin.
LESSON XV
74. Comparison. — Spanish adjectives form their com-
parative by prefixing mas, ' more,' to the positive, and
their superlative by prefixing the definite article to the
comparative.
rico, mas rico, el mas rico,
rica, mas rica, la mas rica, . , . . . .
, . ' . . [ rich, ncher, nchest.
ricos, mas ricos, los mas ricos,
ricas, mas ricas, las mas ricas, .
a. A possessive adjective may be used instead of the article, to form
the superlative : su amigo mas rico, * his richest friend.'
b» The article or the possessive adjective precedes the noun when the
superlative adjective follows it: la flor mas hermosa, 'the most beautiful
flower.'
c. When several comparatives or superlatives modify the same word,
mas (or el mas, la mas, etc.) is placed before the first and omitted before
the others : el arbol mas alto y viejo, ' the tallest and oldest tree.'
d. Correlative 'the . . . the,' followed by comparatives, is expressed in
Spanish by cuanto . . . tanto,1 or by mientras ... — : cuanto mas dinero
1 The tanto may sometimes be omitted, as in cuanto mds tiene, nias quiere,
the more he has, the more he wants.'
LESSON XV 75
gana, tanto mas gasta, 'the more money he earns, the more he spends';
cuanto mas viejo es el vino, tanto mas vale, ' the older the wine is, the
more it is worth'; mientras mas tiene, mas quiere, ' the more he has, the
more he wants.'
e. The English preposition ' in ' after a superlative is usually expressed
in Spanish by de : el rfo mas largo del mundo, ' the longest river in the
world.'
f. The article is omitted before a superlative adjective in the predicate
when its noun is compared with itself: esta mujer sonrie cuando est4
mas triste, ' this woman smiles when she is saddest.'
g. When the noun is in apposition, both the article and the superlative
follow the noun : Nueva York, ciudad la mas opulenta de los Estados
Unidos, ' New York, the wealthiest city in the United States.'
h. When there is no real comparison, * most ' is usually expressed by
muy, ot the suffix -isimo : es muy litil, or utilisimo, * it is most useful.'
75. (i) The adjectives bueno and malo are irregularly com-
pared.
bueno, mejor, el mejor, good, better, best.
malo, peor, el peor, bad, worse, worst.
The regular comparative forms mas bueno and mas malo are some-
times used.
(2) Grande and pequeno, while usually compared regularly,
have also the irregular comparative forms mayor and menor.
When applied to persons, mayor means ' older,' and menor,
' younger.' Mas grande and mas pequeno are preferred for the
literal and physical use.
Juan es mas grande que Pedro, John is taller than Peter.
Juan es mayor que Pedro, John is older than Peter.
(3) Mucho and poco are compared irregularly, and in the
superlative they are used only in the neuter singular and in
the plural.
mucho, mas, lo (los, las) mas, much (many) , more, most
poco, menos, lo (los, las) menos, little (few), less, least.
76 SPANISH GRAMMAR
las mds noches, or las mas de las noches, most nights,
lo menus que he perdido, the least that I have lost.
en vano buscan los mas el bien que gozan los menos, in vain do tht
many seek for the happiness which the few enjoy.
a. ' Most,' used with a noun, is usually best expressed by la mayoi
parte de : la mayor parte de mis amigos, ' most of my friends ' (lit.,
Jthe greater part of my friends').
76. Spanish adverbs form both their comparative ?.nd
superlative by prefixing mas to the positive. There is
usually no difference in form between the comparative
and the superlative.
despacio, slowly. mas despacio, more (m most) slowly.
a. The neuter article lo is often prefixed to a superlative adverb when
it is followed by a word or clause expressing possibility.
lo mds pronto posible, the soonest possible, or as soon as possible.
lo mas pronto que pudo, as soon as he could.
77. The following adverbs are compared irregularly ;
bien, mejor, well, better or best.
mal, peor, badly, worse or worst.
mucho, mas, much (a great deal), more or most.
poco, menos, little, less or least.
a. Mas bien means « rather ' : estd cansado mds bien que enfermo,
'he is tired rather than ill.'
78. Than is usually expressed in Spanish by que.
61 es mds alto que usted, he is taller than you.
tiene mas libros que dinero, he has more books than money.
a. Before a numeral, 'more than ' and 'less than,' meaning 'a greater
number than ' and ' a smaller number than,' are expressed by mds de and
menos de: hay mds de cinco, 'there are more than five'; tiene menos
de veinte anos, ' he is less than twenty years old ' ; but el caballo es mds
fuerte que cinco hombres, ' a horse is stronger than five men,' since mas
does not here mean ' a greater number.'
LESSON XV 77
b. No m/is ... de or que usually means ' only.' Compare :
HO gastaron mas de cien pesos, they did not spend more than one hun'
dred dollars.
DO gastaron mas que cien pesos, they spent only one hundred dollars.
c. Before a clause, 'than' is usually expressed by del (= de + el) que,
and its declined forms, de la que, de los que, de las que, when the com-
parison is with a noun (expressed or understood) of the main clause; 01
by de lo que when the comparison is wi<h a statement or idea.
me ha dado mas dinero del que le prdstS, he has given me more money
than (that which) I lent him.
tiene mas libros de los que tenia, he has more books than (those which)
he had.
cs mas rico de lo que crees, he is richer than (what) you believe.
d. But, if the action of one verb is compared with that of another,
'than' before a clause is que: habla mas que trabaja, he talks more
than he works.
79. Tan . . . como = as ... as, or so . . . as.
Tanto (-a) . . . como = as much ... as, or so much ... as.
Tantos (-as) . , como = as many ... as, or so many ... as,
tan bianco como la nieve, as white as snow.
tanto oro como plata, as much gold as silver.
no tiene tanta plata como oro, he hasn't so much silver as gold.
tantas manzanas como peras, as many apples as pears.
Exercise XV
A. i. Tu eres mayor que £1, pero e"! es el mas alto.
2. Si; e"! es mas alto de lo que yo creia. 3. Juan dijo1
que cuanto mas gastaba, tanto mas tenia. 4. La verdad es
que cuanto mas tenia, mas gastaba. 5. Ya ha gastado la
mayor parte de su fortuna. 6. Yo tengo tres hermosos
perros. 7. Don Jorge tenia cinco perros el afio pasado.
8. En este momento Don Jorge tiene mas perros que
yo. 9. Pero tiene menos de los que tenia el ano pasado.
78 SPANISH GRAMMAR
^Cuantos tiene? 10. ^Cuantos afios tiene su senor padie?
ii. Tiene 75 afios, — 45 mas que yo. 12. He escrito2 lo
mas de prisa posible. 13. Pero no he tenido tiempo de acabar
la carta. 14. <iEsta usted cansada, senora? 15. Estoy
enferma mas bien que cansada. 16. Ella pesa mas que el,
y e"! pesa mas de cien libras. 17. El caballo es el animal
mas util, y el perro es el animal mas fiel. 18. El oro vale
mas que el hierro, pero el hierro es el mas util. 19. La
muchacha mas linda de la ciudad se cas6 con3 el joven mis
feo. 20. El mayor mal de los males es tratar con animales
(refran espanol). 21. Costaba mas trabajo de lo que parecia ;
pero de lo peor ha sucedido lo mejor. 22. La vaca da mas
leche de la que daba el ano pasado. 23. Tenemos menos
criados de los que teniamos cuando usted nos visit6.4 24. 6l
no sufre tanto como usted cree : no sufre tanto como ella.
B. I. You (/tfw., sing.) are the best friend in the world.
2. No, I am not the best friend in the world. 3. I am the
best friend that you have or have had. 4. He has more friends
than I. 5. I have more books than he. 6. And my books
are, and have always been, my best friends. 7. This house is
larger than that house, but that house is the higher. 8. He is
older than I, but not so old as my brother. 9. He is richer and&
more independent than you (form., sing.), but he is not so happy.
10. The more he works, the more he has; and the more he has, the
more he spends. 11. London is the largest and the wealthiest
city in the world, but it is not the most beautiful. 12. She is older
than I, but I am taller than she. 13. He is the most unfortunate
man that I know 5 ; he has lost most of the money that he earned last
month. 14. He is writing more slowly than you (form., sing.},
but he is writing as fast as he can.6 15. The firm of Gonzales 10
Brothers has more employe's than the firm of Herrera and Com-
pany. 1 6. Gonzales Brothers employ more than two hundred men.
17. Herrera and Company do not employ more than one hundred.
1 8. Bat the firm of Gonzales Brothers has less employes this year
than it had last year. 19. He lent me7 five dollars more than 1
LESSON XVI 79
asked-for. 20. But he did not lend me so much as 1 wished.
21. I have more than seven cents and less than nine. How many
have I ? 22. It is colder outdoors than I thought.8 23. But it
is not so cold today as yesterday.
1 Pret. of decir. 2 Past part, of escribir. 3 ' married.' 4 ' visited us.'
5 que conozco. 6 puede. 7 me (before the verb). 8 creia. 9 e (if mas
is not repeated) : cf. § 188. !0 Gonzalez.
LESSON XVI
80. Adjectives used Substantively. — In English, ad-
jectives are sometimes used substantively ; as, 'the old
and the young.' This construction is commoner in
Spanish than in English. If a noun is understood,
the adjective takes the gender and number of the noun
it represents. 'One,' or 'ones,' after the English adjec-
tive, is usually not to be translated into Spanish.
los ricos y los pobres, the rich prefiero el caballo negro al bianco,
and the poor. I prefer the black horse to the
el viejo, the old man. white one.
a. If the adjective is used substantively as the name of a color or as an
abstract noun, it requires the article lo. See § 54.
81 . The Plural Number. — ( i ) The masculine plural form
of adjectives and pronouns may denote male and female beings
considered collectively.
los viejos, the old men and the old women, or the old man and the
old woman, or simply the old men.
ellos tienen miedo, they are afraid (referring to men and women, or
to a man and a woman, or to men alone).
The plural of most nouns denoting male beings may be used
in the same way.
SO SPANISH GRAMMAR
los hermanos, the brothers and sisters, or the brother and the sister,
or the brothers.
los padres, the fathers and mothers, or the father and the mother
(= the parents), or the fathers.
(2) In treating collectively of a number of persons or
things, a singular noun is generally used in Spanish to denote
something that belongs to every member of a group if, in the
case of each member, but one object of the kind is concerned.
los niSos se lavaron la cara y las manos, the children washed their
faces and hands.
todos los disclpulos levantaron la mano, all the pupils raised their
hands (i.e. each raised one of his two hands).
(3) Abstract nouns are frequently used in the plural in a
concrete sense.
terneza, tenderness. ternezas, tender words or deeds.
82. Indicative. Future and Conditional.
Tener :
FUTURE TENSE
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. tendr6, I shall have, or shall be having. i. tendremos
2. tendras 2. tendrils
3. tendra 3. tendran
CONDITIONAL TENSE
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. tendria, I should have, or should be having. i. tendrlamos
2. tendrias 2. tendriais
3. tendria 3. tendrlan
Hater:
FUTURE TENSE
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. habre", I shall have. i. habremos
2. habras 2. habrlis
3. habra 3. habran
LESSON XVI
81
CONDITIONAL TENSE
SINGULAR
PLURAL
I.
habrfa, I should have.
I. habria mos
2.
habrias
2. habriais
3-
habria
3. habrian
Ser
: FUTURE TENSE
SINGULAR
PLURAL
i.
ser6, I shall be.
i. sere mos
2.
seras
2. serais
3.
sera
3. seran
CONDITIONAL TENSE
SINGULAR
PLURAL
I.
seria, I should be.
i . seriamos
2.
serias
2. serials
3-
seria
3. serian
Estar: FUTURE TENSE
SINGULAR
PLURAL
I.
estare", I shall be.
i. estaremos
2.
estaras
2. estar6is
3.
estara
3. estaran
CONDITIONAL TENSE
SINGULAR
PLURAL
I.
estaria, I should be.
i. estaria mos
2.
estarias
2. estariais
3-
estaria
3. estarian
83. Indicative. Future Perfect.
Hablar :
I shall have spoken, or I shall have been speaking.
SINGULAR
1. habre hablado
2. habras hablado
3. habra hablado
PLURAL
1. habremos hablado
2. habrlis hablado
3. habran hablado
a. Habra also means, 'there will be'; habr£ habido, 'there will
have been.'
82 SPANISH GRAMMAR
84. The future may be used instead of the present, and the
conditional instead of the imperfect, to denote probability or
conjecture.
£ qu6 hora es ? — seran las once. * what time is it ? it is probably
(about) eleven o'clock.'
i qu6 hora era ? — serian las doce. « what time was it ? it was probably
(about) twelve o'clock.'
a. Similarly the future perfect may be used instead of the perfect:
I quien ha abierto la puerta? — habra sido Jos6. * who opened the door?
it was probably Joseph.'
Exercise XVI
A. i. <jPrefiere usted la casa blanca a la amarilla? 2. Si,
senor; prefiero la blanca a la amarilla. 3. Los ncos viven
bien : los pobres sufren. 4. Un viejo y una vieja han en*
trado aqui, y quieren hablar a usted. 5. ^Cuantos hijos tiene
usted, senora? 6. Tengo tres, dos hijos varones y una hija.
7. <jCuantos gatitos tiene la gata? 8. Tiene cinco, dos
machos y tres hernbras. 9. Alfredo tiene cuatro abuelos, los
dos padres de su papa y los dos padres de su mama. 10. <t A
quie"n tendre" por companero? — A mi,1 que sere" siempre tu
amigo. ii. ^Quie'n llama a la puerta? — Probablemente
sera el me'dico. 12. <jCua.nt.os afios tiene el nino? — Tendri
unos2 diez anos. 13. <;Cuantos anos tenia el muchacho
cuando muri6? — Tendria unos diez y seis anos. 14. No
dudo que sera rico. 15. \ Habra desgracia mayor para un
joven de talento ! 16. <fQu£ hora era cuando parti6? —
Serian las once de la noche. 1 7. Serian las cuatro de la tarde
cuando oimos un gran ruido por3 la calle. 18. Serian las diez
de la manana cuando Ileg6 el general. 19. Parecia un hombre
que tendria unos cincuenta anos. 20. <?Cuanto perdi6? —
Perderia mas de mil pesos. 21. Juan es muy bobo : dice que
cuanto mas estudia, tanto menos sabe, y cuanto menos estudia,
tanto mas sabe. 22. ^ A qu£ distancia de aqui estd la casa
LESSON XVI 83
deusted? — A una manzana (cuadra) y media. 23. No es tan
lejos como yo creia. 24. Miguel Cervantes, autor inmortal de
" Don Quijote de la Mancha," era, es, y sera uno de los au tores
mas ce"lebres de Espafia. 25. Cervantes naci6 a mediados
del siglo diez y seis, y muri6 a principios del siglo diez y siete.
B. I. God loves the old (pi.) and the young, the large and the
small, the good and the bad. 2. The red book is prettier than
the black one. 3. The black one is more interesting than the red
one. 4. Alfred lives with his parents, his grandparents, and his
brothers-and-sisters. 5. He has three grandparents, the father-
and-mother of his father and his mother's mother. 6. He has
four brothers-and-sisters, two brothers and two sisters. 7. Now
that I am a man, I have more friends and more enemies than I had
when I was a boy. 8. I haven't so much money nor so many
friends as you (form., sing.) ; but I have more books than you
have. 9. Asia is the largest continent, and Australia is the largest
island, in the world. 10. North America is twice as large as4
Europe. n. He has more influence than he had five years ago.
12. You (fam., sing.} were, are, and always will be5 my best
friend. 13. What o'clock is it ? I t-is-probably-about four o'clock.
14. What time was it when you returned home ? 6 It-was-probably-
about ten o'clock at night. 15. How old is he ? I-should-say-
that-he-is-probably-about fifteen years old. 16. How old was he
when he came * to this country ? He was-about six years old.
17. This parrot will live perhaps one hundred years; but we shall
not live so long a time.8 18. There are one hundred and seventy-
five pages in this book. 19. 1 have read as-far-as the eighty-ninth
page.9 20. The horse is more useful than the dog; but the dog
is the most faithful of all animals.10 21. I do not suffer more
than you (fam., sing.) ; but I suffer more than I used-to-suffer,
22. The Mexican dollar has one hundred cents ; the Spanish peseta
has one hundred centimes. 23. The Mexican dollar is worth two
and a half Spanish pesetas, or the half of an American dollar.11
1 ' me.' 2 ' some.' * * in.* * Say : ' is two times \veces} larger than.'
*> Say: ' will be always.' 6 d casa. 1 vino. 8 Say: ' so much time.'
9 Say: the page eighty-nine, ' 10 Say :' of all the animals.' uSay:'oi
half dollar American,'
84 SPANISH GRAMMAR
LESSON XVII
85. Imperative Mood.
Hablar
SINGULAR PLURAL
2. habla 2. hablad
Temer
SINGULAR PLURAL
2. teme 2. temed
Vivir
SINGULAR PLURAL
2. vive 2. vivid
With habla, teme, and vive, tii is understood; while vosotros (-as I
is understood with hablad, temed, and vivid.
86. The imperative mood is limited to the second person
singular and plural. It is also limited to positive commands or
entreaties. See § 87, a.
a. The 6nal -d of the plural imperative is lost before the object-pronoun
OS, 'you, yourselves' (cf. § 89): preparaos (for preparad-os), 'prepare
yourselves ; ' except in idos, 'go away,' from irse, ' to go away.'
87. Subjunctive Present Tense.
Hablar
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. hable I. hablemos
2. hables 2. habl6is
3. hable 3. hablen
Temer
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. tema i. temamos
2. temas 2. temais
3. tema 3. teman
Vivir
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. viva i. vivamos
2. vivas 2. vivais
3. viva 3 vivan
LESSON XVII 85
The present subjunctive is often used in Spanish to
express command or entreaty.
hable 61, let him speak. hablemos, let us speak.
hable ella. let her speak. que Juan hable, let John speak.
Note that the present subjunctive in these expressions is usually to be
translated into English by ' let ' and the infinitive ; but when used with
usted (or ustedes), it is translated by the imperative.
hable usted, speak. abra usted la puerta, open the door.
a. In the second person, singular and plural, the present subjunctive is
used to express a negative command or entreaty, while in a positive com-
mand or entreaty the imperative is used; thus:
habla, or hablad, speak. no hables, or no hab!6is, do not speak.
b. The final -S of the first person plural of the present subjunctive is
omitted before the object-pronoun nos, ' us,' * ourselves ' : sente" monoa (foi
senteraos-nos), 'let us seat ourselves.'
88. Radical-changing Verbs.
Imperative :
FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS
Temblar
SINGULAR PLURAL
2. tiembla 2. temblad
Perder
SINGULAR PLURAL
2. pierde 2. perded
Contar
SINGULAR PLURAL
2. cuenta 2. contad
Volver
SINGULAR PLURAL
2. vuelve 2. volved
86
SPANISH GRAMMAR
THIRD CONJUGATION
Sentir
SINGULAR
2. siente
SINGULAR
2. pide
SINGULAR
2. duerme
Pedir
Dormir
PLURAL
2. sentid
PLURAL
2. pedid
PLURAL
2. dormid
Present Subjunctive:
FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS
Temblor
SINGULAR
1. tiemble
2. tiembles
3. tiemble
SINGULAR
1. pierda
2. pierdas
3. pierda
SINGULAR
1. cuente
2. cuentes
3. cuente
SINGULAR
1. vuelva
2. vuelvas
3. vuelva
Perder
Contar
Volver
PLURAL
1. temblemos
2. temble'is
3. tiemblen
PLURAL
1. perdamos
2. perddis
3. pierdan
PLURAL
1. contemos
2. conteis
3. cuenten
PLURAL
1. volvamoa
2. volvais
3. vuelvan
LESSON XVII 87
THIRD CONJUGATION
Sentir
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. sienta i. sintamos
2. sientas 2. sintdis
3. sienta 3. sientan
Pedir
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. pida i. pidamos
2. pidas 2. pidais
3. pida 3. pidan
Dormir
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. duerma i. durmamos
2. duermas 2. durmais
3. duerma 3. duerman
Note that the radical-changing verbs of the third conjugation change
e to z, and o to u, in the first and second persons plural of the present
subjunctive, even though the syllables in question are not accented.
Exercise XVII
A. i. Evita la mala compania, y buscala buena. 2. Nino;
no hables tan alto : habla bajo. 3. Silvestre ; cierra la ven-
tana. La luz del sol me ciega. 4. Enciende la vela, que *
ya es tarde : no enciendas la lampara. 5. Apaga la vela, pero
no apagues la lampara. 6. Tomemos el tranvia (el carro elec-
trico). No puedo andar mas. 7. Dios quiera que tus
anos scan2 colmados de toda prosperidad. 8. No tema
usted nada: aqui esta usted en seguridad. 9. No mientas,
nino. Siempre es laverdad mejor que la mentira. 10. Suba
Usted a la biblioteca. Alii hallara una carta para usted.
ii. No dejes de estudiar la Iecci6n para manana, porque es
bastante dificil. 12. El orador dijo : temed £ los traidores
88 SPANISH GRAMMAR
de la patria, pero no temdis a los enemigos. 13. Ni-
nos, bebed agua pura : no bebais cafe, te, vino, ni cerveza.
14. Leamos la carta. Tengo ganas de saber lo que dice.1
15. Sent£monos aqui, y hablemos. Yo no entiendo de suavi-
dades y hablo con mucha franqueza. 16. Madrid es una
hermosa ciudad : tiene muchos edificios magnificos y calles y
paseos esple"ndidos. 17. En la parte antigua las calles son
estrechas y tortuosas; pero en la parte nueva son anchas y
derechas. 18. La peseta espanola tiene cuatro reales 6 cien
centimes. 19. El peso mejicano tiene cien centavos.
20. Una peseta espanola tiene el valor de veinte centavos
americanos. 21. Un peso mejicano tiene el valor de
cincuenta centavos americanos.4 22. En Espana, toman
generalmente el cafe" 6 el chocolate a las ocho de la ma-
nana. 23. Almuerzan a las once 6 a las doce, y comen
& las seis de la tarde. 24. Cenan despue's del teatro 6 de
la 6pera.
B. I. Let us avoid the bad (neut. sing.} and seek the good.
2. Children, wash 5 your ears, eyes, and noses, and clean your finger-
nails. 3. Work (fam., pi.}, but do not work too long ; sleep, but
do not sleep more than nine hours. 4. Eat (fam., pi.} enough, but
do not eat too much ; eat healthful foods, but do not eat sweets and 6
pastry. 5. Drink (fam., pi.} water and milk, but do not drink
coffee, tea, wine, beer, or6 brandy. 6. Read (/am., sing.} this
letter, if you wish ; but do not read the other. 7. Write (fam.,
sing.} to your friends, but do not write to your enemies. 8. Run
{fam., sing.} and play, but do not run and6 play when you should
be-studying. 9. Buy (form., sing.} the white horse, but do not
buy the black one. 10. Sell (form., pi.} the large house, but do
not sell the small one. II. Let us light the lamp, and put, out
the candle. 12. Let us shut the door, and open the window.
13. Let7 John shut the door, and open the window. 14. May1
the boys avoid bad company, and seek good company.8 15. Let
us write to our uncles-and-aunts, but let us not write to our cousins.
16. Write {fam.tpl.} to your broth ers-and-sisters, but do not write
LESSON XVIII 89
to your uncles-and-aunts or6 your cousins. 17. Write (fam.,
sing.} short letters; do not write long letters. 18. Write (form.,
sing.} Spanish letters; do not write English letters.
l ' for.* 2 « may be.' » ' what it says.' < This is, of course, only
approximate. 6 lavaos. 6 Say: ' nor.' 7 Use que* 8 Say: ' and
seek the good.'
LESSON XVIII
89. Personal Pronouns. — The Spanish personal pro-
nouns used as the subject or object of verbs are1:
SINGULAR
SUBJECT DIRECT OBJECT INDIRECT OBJECT
1. yo, I. me, me. me, to me.
2. tii, you, thou. te, you, thee. te, to you, to thee.
( m. 61, he, it. le or lo, him, it. le, to him, to her, to it
^' f /. ella, she, it. la, her, it. (la), (to her).
PLURAL
SUBJECT DIRECT OBJECT INDIRECT OBJECT
1. nosotros (-as), we. nos, us. nos, to us.
2. vosotros (-as), you, ye. os, you. os, to you.
. ellos, > los, > les, to them.
. ellas,jthe>'- las,ftV:m- (las), (to them,/.).
a. In English a subject-pronoun is rarely omitted ; in Spanish it
ts regularly omitted unless required for emphasis or clearness : hablo,
* I am speaking' ; yo hablo, < / am speaking.1 The pronoun is some-
times required when the form of the verb would not make it clear
what pronoun is understood ; thus, yo (61, ella) hablaba, ' I (he, she)
was speaking.'
1 Usted and ustedes, the neuter pronouns ello and lo, and the reflexive
pronouns se and si, will be treated separately in subsequent paragraphs.
90 SPANISH GRAMMAR
b. In English an object-pronoun regularly follows the verb; in
Spanish it usually precedes.
nos aman, they love us.
ella me teme, she fears me.
Antonio te da un libro, Anthony gives you a book.
If the sentence is negative, no immediately precedes the object-
pronoun : ella no me teme, ' she does not fear me. '
c. But sometimes the object-pronoun follows the verb, and is
attached to it so that the verb and pronoun form one word. This
occurs when the pronoun is the object of an infinitive, a present
participle, or a positive imperative (including the positive subjunc-
tive used with imperative force) .
temerle, (to) fear him ; llamandome, calling me ;
c6mpralo, buy it ; sent6monos, let us sit down j
but
no lo compres, do not buy it ; no nos sentemos, let us not sit down.
d. When a present participle or an infinitive is used with an auxiliary
verb, the object-pronoun may usually either precede the auxiliary or follow
its main verb.
me esta aguardando or esta aguardandome, * he is waiting for me.'
la quiero ver or quiero verla, ' I wish to see her.'
e. If the sentence (or clause) begins with the verb, the object-pronoun
may follow ; but this rarely occurs if the verb is future, conditional, or the
second person of the preterite.
amame, he loves me ; am<5me, he loved me ;
amabame, he used to love me ;
etc. (but rarely amarame, amariame, amasteme, etc.).
f. In English one may say, 'give me the book,' or 'give the book ta
me ' ; both expressions are to be translated into Spanish by dame el libro,
tf the 'me' is not emphatic: cf. § 103, a.
g. It should be noted that the English pronouns 'him,' 'her,' and
'them ' may be used as either direct or indirect object ; and that, if used
LESSON XVIII 91
BS direct object, they should be expressed in Spanish by one set of pro-
nouns, while if used as indirect, they should be expressed by another set.
la teme, he fears her.
le da un libro, he gives her a book.
los ama, he loves them.
les da el libro, he gives them the book.
The masculine singular le, however, is used as either direct or indirect object.
h. In order to avoid ambiguity by indicating gender, the feminine direct
object-pronoun (accusative) is sometimes used instead of the indirect
object-pronoun (dative): 61 la (or las) qued6 fiel hasta la muerte, 'he
remained faithful to her (or them,y£w.) till death.'
*. The masculine singular pronoun of the third person has two forms,
le and lo. It is usually considered best to use le when referring to a
person, and lo when referring to a thing ; but some speakers and writers
use only le, while others prefer lo.
Exercise XVIII
A. i. Ella me teme, pero no me ama. 2. Yo la amo yla
temo Iambic" n. 3. Yo los buscaba, y ellos me buscaban.
4. Yo no los halle", y ellos no me hallaron. 5. Tii las
aborrecias, y ellas te aborrecian. 6. Juan las apreciaba, y ellas
le (or lo) apreciaban. 7. <j Quiere usted vender su bicicleta?
8. Si, seiior; quiero venderla. <iNo quiere usted comprarla?
9. No, senor; yo no la quiero comprar. 10. Ve"ndala a su
primo Don Jos£ : no la venda al senor Morales. n. Lla-
male. No ; espera un momento : no le (or lo) llames ahora.
12. La encontr6 en la calle de Preciados, y le di1 la carta.
13. Le (or lo) hall£ en su casa, y le devolvi el libro. 14. Los
vi2 esta manana, y les dije3 que usted estaba en la ciudad.
15. Las buscaba por todas partes para decirles que usted estaba
aqui. 1 6. Pero no las halle, y por consiguiente no les dije
nada.4 17. <iNos aguarda Juan? — Si; os aguarda hace
dos horas. 18. Quiere pagaros lo que* os debe. 19. <iTe
pag6 la cuenta? — No la pag6, y creo que no quiere pagarla.
92 SPANISH GRAMMAR
20. <i Me busca el sefior Santilla ? — Si ; te busca para pedirte un
favor. Evitale. 21. <i Haescrito usted el ejercicio? 22. No
lo (or le) he escrito todavia. Lo (or le) escribir£ esta tarde.
23. <iCuando escribiras la cartaatu mama? 24. La escribir£
manana por la manana. 25. <J D6nde ha comprado usted estas
naranjas? 26. Las compre" esta manana en la tienda de Garcia.
B. I.I wish to see him and to speak to him. 2. You (fam..
sing.} wish to see her and speak to her, do you not ? 3. We
wish to see them (masc.} and speak to them as soon as possible.
4. Do you (form., pi.) not wish to see them (fern.) and speak to
them today ? 5. We have already seen them (fern.) and have
spoken to them. 6. Did you (fam., sing.} see 6 the girl? I saw7
her. 7. Did you see the boy ? I saw him. 8. Did you (fam.,
sing.} see the boys ? I saw them. 9. Did you sec the girls ? I
saw them. 10. Did you (fam., pi.} find the book? We found
it. ii. Did you find the pen? We found it. 12. Did you
(fam., pi.} find the pens? We found them. 13. Did you find
the books ? We found them. 14. Did you (form., sing.} sell
the house? I did not sell it, and I do not wish to sell it. 15. Did
you (form., pi.} buy the carriage ? We did tiot buy it, but we wish
to buy it. 1 6. If you (fam., sing.} wish to buy the hat, buy it;
if you do not wish to buy it, do not buy it. 17. If you (fam.,
pi.} wish to sell the bicycle, sell it ; if you do not wish to sell it, do
not sell it. 18. If you (form., sing.} prefer to sell the horses, sell
them ; if you do not prefer to sell them, do not sell them. 19. If
you (form., pi.} prefer to buy the cows, buy them ; if you do not
prefer to buy them, do not buy them. 20. Did you (fam., sing.}
speak to John? I did not speak to him, and I do not wish to speak
to him. 21. Did you (fam., pL} speak to Mary? We did not
speak to Mary, but we wish to speak to her. 22. If you (form.,
sing.} wish to lend the boys ten dollars, lend them ten dollars ; do
not lend them more. 23. If you (form., pi.} prefer to lend the
girls the pens, lend them the pens. 24. If you do not prefer to
lend them the pens, do not lend them the pens.
1 ' I gave,' Pret. of dar. * ' I saw,' Pret. of ver. « ' I said/ Pret. of decir.
* ' anything.' & * what.' 6 visit. ? vi.
LESSON XIX 93
LESSON XIX
90. Tu and usted. — English 'you* may be expressed in
Spanish by tu, //., vosotros (-as), or by usted, //., ustedes.
Usted (//., ustedes) is a contraction of vuestra merced, ' youi
grace'; it is treated as a noun and requires the verb, object-
pronouns, and possessives in the third person singular or plural.
Thus, addressing a woman one would say :
£ c6mo estd usted ? how are you? (lit., ' how is your grace? ').
yo la vi esta manana, I saw you this morning (lit., * I saw her,'
referring to the noun element in usted).
vi tambiSn a su hermana, I saw your sister also (lit., 'I saw her
sister').
It will be observed that usted has all the attributes of a noun
except gender : it assumes the gender of the person addressed.
Usted and ustedes may be abbreviated in writing to V. and VV.,
or to Vd. and Yds.
When 'you' stands for the name of a near relative, an intimate friend,
a small child, an animal, or an inanimate object, it is usually to be trans-
lated by tu. The word tu corresponds also to English ' thou,' used in
poetic and sacred language. The plural of tu is vosotros (-as). In all
other cases 'you' should be expressed by usted (//., ustedes). Thus it
would be rude to address a stranger or mere acquaintance as tu ; while, on
the other hand, to address an intimate friend as usted would indicate scorn
or anger.1
a. Vosotros, instead of ustedes, is sometimes used by orators in ad-
dressing an audience.
1 In some parts of the Spanish-speaking world vosotros and the corre-
sponding form of the verb are no longer used in colloquial language. Thus, a
Cuban or Mexican father would address one child as tu, but two or more as
ustedes.
94 SPANISH GRAMMAR
b. Nos and vos may occur, instead of yo and tu, in royal proclamations
and official documents : nos el rey mandamos . . ., ' I, the king, com-
mand.' Vos instead of usted occurs commonly in the older Spanish
works.
91. Ello and Lo. — There is no pronoun in Spanish exactly
corresponding to English 'it.' All Spanish nouns are either
masculine or feminine ; hence, if ' it ' represents a noun, it is
expressed in Spanish by a masculine or feminine pronoun, ac-
cording to the gender of the noun represented. Thus, speak-
ing of el libro, ' it ' would be 61, lo, or le ; while speaking of
la pluma, ' it ' would be ella, la, or le, according as ' it ' is sub-
ject, direct object, or indirect object.
If 'it' does not represent a noun, but a whole phrase, sen-
tence, or idea, it may be expressed by ello (subject-pronoun or
object of a preposition) or lo (object-pronoun), as in convengo
en ello, ' I agree to it,' no lo creo, ' I do not believe it.'
But 'it,' when the subject of a verb, is usually not expressed
in Spanish at all. Thus, speaking of la casa, one would say,
es muy alta, ' it is very high ' ; or speaking of something that
happened, one would say, no es importante, 'it is not im-
portant.' If 'it' represents nothing definite, but is merely
expletive, it can not be expressed in Spanish: llueve, 'it is
raining ' ; nieva, ' it is snowing.'
a. As a subject-pronoun the neuter ello occurs commonly only in the
expression ello es que (cf. the French <?est que} = 'the fact is that.'
b. Lo is often used in the predicate to refer to a preceding noun or
adjective : £ es 61 huerfano ? — Si, lo es, ' Is he an orphan ? Yes; he is
(one) '; sus ojos parecen negros sin serlo, 'his eyes appear black with-
out being so.'
But if the preceding noun refers to a definite person, the personal
pronoun agrees in gender and number with the noun: £ eres tu la hija
del senor Garcia ? — Si, la soy, ' Are you the daughter of Mr. Garcia ?
Fes; lam.'
LESSON XIX 95
92. Imperative: Tener, Haber, Ser, Estar.
Tener
SINGULAR
PLURAL
2. ten
Haber
SINGULAR
2. tened
PLURAL
2. W1
Ser
SINGULAR
2. habed1
PLURAL
2. se
Estar
SINGULAR
2. sed
PLURAL
2. esta
2. estad
93. Subjunctive Present: Tener,
Haber, Ser, Estar.
Tener
SINGULAR
PLURAL
i. tenga
2. tengas
3. tenga
Haber
SINGULAR
i. tengamos
2. tengdis
3. tengan
PLURAL
i. haya
2. hayas
3. haya
Ser
SINGULAR
i. hayamos
2. hayais
3. hay an
PLURAL
i. sea
2. seas
i. seamos
2. seals
3. sea
Estar
SINGULAR
3. sean
PLURAL
i. est6
2. estes
3. este"
i. estemos
2. este"is
3. este"n
'• Rarely used. Some regard he as not a part of haber,
96 SPANISH GRAMMAR
Subjunctive. Perfect Tense.
Hablar
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. haya hablado i. hayamos hablado
2. hayas hablado 2. hayais hablado
3. haya hablado 3. hayan hablado
a. Haya, used as an impersonal verb, means ' there may be,' ' let there
be,' etc.; haya habido, 'there may have been.'
Exercise XIX
A. i. Paguele listed lo que le debe, pero no le pague un
real mas. 2. Amigo mio1 : pre"stame diez pesos. 3. No puedo
prestarte diez pesos, porque no los tengo. 4. La quiero ver
para hablarle de un asunto iraportante. 5. <jTe gustau las
manzanas ? — Si ; me gustan mucho. 6. <i Os gustaba el clima
de Madrid? — No nos gustaba : era malisimo. 7. Desperte"-
mosla, que ya es tarde. 8. No la despertemos todavia. La
pobre nina no esta buena. 9. ^Vendiste los caballos? — •
Si; los vendi a mi primo Onofre. 10. <iVendiste las vacas
tambie"n? — Si; las vendi. n. <jQuieres llamar a los nifios?
— Yalosllame" hace dos horas. 12. Bueno ; ten la bondad
de llamarlos otra vez. 13. Quitaronme el uniforme de militar.
; Dios tenga piedad de mi !2 14. Ten los oidos y los ojos
abiertos; pero no tengas miedo de nada.3 15. Tenga usted
la bondad de cerrar la ventana. Tengo frio. 16. Haya
paces, y dejen ustedes de disputar. 17. Sean francos, y
diganme4 la verdad. 18. Hemos de estudiar desde la linea
diez de la pagina cincuenta hasta la linea veinte y ocho de la
pagina cincuenta y siete. 19. Caballero ; usted habla dema-
siado aprisa. No le (or lo) puedo entender. 20. Caba-
lleros ; ustedes hablan demasiado aprisa. No los puedo
entender. 21. Buenos dias, Don Jorge. iComo esta usted?
LESSON XIX 97
Yb le (or lo) busque" ayer sin poder5 hallarle (or hallarlo).
22. Desee" pagarle lo que 6 le debo. 23. Senora ; perd6neme
usted. Quiero hablarle de un asunto desagradable, pero no
quiero irritarla. 24. Hable usted ; caballero. Digame 4 lo
que6 quiera decir : no me irritara ello. 25. Senoras;
£ustedes me permiten que las acompafie?
B. Write the first four sentences twice, making * you ' masculine
in one set and feminine in the other.
I. Good day! How are you (fam., sing.}} I met you yester-
day, but I did not speak to you. Are you well? 7 2. Good day!
How are you (form., sing.} ? I met you yesterday, but I did not
speak to you. Are you well?7 3. Good day! How are you
(fam.,pl.)l I met you yesterday, but I did not speak to you.
Are you well?7 4. Good day! How are you (form., pi.} ? I
met you yesterday, but 1 did not speak to you. Are you well?7
5. Did you (form., sing.} buy the hat? I bought it. 6. Did you
(form., sing.} sell the chair? I sold it. 7. Do you (fam., sing.}
believe it? I believe it. 8. Do you (fam., sing.} agree to 8 it?
9. Is the door higher than I ? It is higher than you (fam., sing.}.
10. Is the trunk larger than I? It is larger than you (fam..
sing.}. ii. I saw him, and I spoke to him; but I did not
see her, and consequently I did not speak to her. 12. I found
them (masc.}, and I gave them the letter; I did not find them
(fern.}, and I did not give them the book. 13. Did you (fam.,
sing.} ask pardon of your uncle? I did not ask pardon of-him,
and I do not intend to ask pardon of-him. 14. Have (form.,
sing.} the kindness to burn the letter. I do not wish to keep it.
15. Do (form., sing., masc.} not be foolish ; tell us the truth. Do
not lie to us ever.9 16. Be (fam., sing.} afraid of traitors ; but
do not be afraid of your enemies. 17. He found us, and he gave
the letter to us. 18. Did she meet you (fam., pi.} and give the book
to you? 19. He met me and asked me for twenty-five pesetas.™
20. I did not have them, and, moreover, I did not want to lend him
a. real. 21. Do you (fam., sing.} like oranges11? Yes; but I
like peaches better.12 22. Do you (fam., pi.} like to read Span-
98 SPANISH GRAMMAR
ish books ? 23. Yes ; we like to read Spanish and English books
very much.13 24. Read (form., pi.} from page twenty -seven,
line fifteen, to page thirty-three, line twenty-two.
1 * rny friend.' 2 ' on me.' 3 ' anything.' 4 ' tell me,' Pres. Subj. of
decir. 5 ' being able.' 6 ' what.' ? Use bueno. 8 convicnes en.
9 nunca. 1° Say: ' asked of-me (dative) twenty-five pesetas* ^Say: 'do
the oranges please {gustar) you ? ' 12 Say : ' but please me more the
peaches.' 18 ' very much,' muchisimo.
LESSON XX
94. Subjunctive in Dependent Clauses. — The general
difference between the Spanish indicative and subjunc-
tive moods is that the indicative states or denies a fact,
while the subjunctive expresses (i) a wish, (2) doubt or
uncertainty, or (3) the cause of emotion.
95. The Spanish subjunctive may be used independently to
express command or entreaty (as explained in Lesson XVII),
but it is used much oftener in dependent clauses. There is no
mood (or but few survivals of one ; cf. ' if I were ') in English
corresponding to the Spanish subjunctive. In cases where the
Spanish language requires the subjunctive in subordinate clauses,
the English has generally the indicative, but sometimes the
infinitive, the present participle, or the compound forms with
'should,' 'may,' or 'might.'
96. Some of the commoner uses of the dependent
subjunctive are :
(i) After expressions of willing ox forbidding.
quiero que £1 escriba la carta, I wish him to write the letter-1
prohibo que entres, I forbid your entering.
LESSON XX 99
(2) After expressions of doubting or fearing.
dudo que seas feliz, I doubt that (whether) you will be happy, or
I doubt your being happy.
temo que no llegue a" tiempo, I fear that he will not arrive in time.1
A negative or an interrogative verb may express doubt : no creo que
seas culpable, *I do not believe that you are guilty'; £ crees que yo sea
culpable ? ' do you believe that I am guilty ? '
(3) After expressions of joy or sorrow.
siento que usted este" enfenno, I am sorry that you are ill.
me alegro de que estudies el ingle's, I am glad that you are studying
English.
(4) After expressions of necessity, and after impersonal
expressions not stressing a fact.
es necesario que usted estudie mucho, it is necessary that you should
study a great deal.2
cs posible que yo vaya, it is possible that I may go ; cf., es verdad
que fue", it is true that he went.
(5) After certain conjunctions when the verb denotes future
or indefinite time. The commonest of these conjunctions
are :
para que, in order that. antes que, before.
cuando, when. hasta que, until.
mientras or mientras que, while, as long as. aunque, although, even if.
luego que, as soon as.
para que lo creas, in order that you may believe it.
mientras dure la vida, as long as life lasts.
l But, yo quiero escribir la carta, ' I wish to write the letter ' ; temo no llegar
a tiempo, ' I fear that I shall not arrive on time," etc. Here the infinitive is
used because the main and the dependent verbs have the same subject.
3 But, es necesario estudiar mucho, ' it is necessary to study much.'
The infinitive is used here because its subject is not expressed and the obli«
gation is a general one.
IOO SPANISH GRAMMAR
iio lo vendas antes que yo llegue, do not sell it before I arrive.
no lo acabar6 aunque trabaje todo el dla, I shall not finish it although
(even if) I work all day.1
(6) After a relative with an indefinite antecedent (subjunc-
tive of characteristic).
busco un hombre que hable espa- no encuentro a nadie que liable
Sol, I am looking for a man espanol, I do not find any one
who speaks Spanish. who speaks Spanish.
Note also the following :
a. The present subjunctive may denote either present or future time.
b. Que is rarely omitted in Spanish : teme que no lleguemos A tiempo,
'he fears (that) we shall not arrive on time.'
But it is sometimes omitted after verbs denoting request, permission, etc.
te suplico tengas la bondad de declrmelo, I beg you to be kind enough
to tell me.
permita le diga que no es verdad, let me tell you that it is not so.
97. Idiomatic Expressions.
por malo que sea, however bad he sea lo que sea, whatever it may
may be. be.
por m&s dinero que gane, lo gasta dure que dure, however long it may
todo, whatever money he earns, last; let it last as long as it will.
he spends it all.
Exercise XX
A. i. fil esta enamorado : y si lo esta, £que" mal hay en
ello? 2. Ella prefiere vivir sola aunque para ello tenga que
trabajar dia y noche. 3. Este nino es mi hijo, 6 lo mismo
que si lo fuera.1 4. Siento estar enfermo ; siento que tu
este"s enfermo; tu sientes que yo este* enfermo. 5. No
quiero escribir la carta : quiero que Pablo la escriba. Digale
usted que la escriba. 6. El sastre quiere que tu pagues el
1 But the indicative, not the subjunctive, is used if the verb does not denote
future or indefinite time. Compare: ire aunque llueva, ' I shall go even if it
should rain '; ire aunque lluev», ' I shall go even if it is raining (now).'
LESSON XX 10 1
vestido manana. — Bueno ; lo pagare manana. 7. Tengo
miedo de morir. Tengo miedo de 2 que ella muera, y ella tiene
miedo de 2 que yo muera. 8. Yo no deseo perder un mo-
mento, y deseo que tu no pierdas tampoco un momento.
9. Yo no puedo consentir en2 que estos j6venes gasten el di-
nero, pierdan el tiempo, y no aprendan nada.3 10. Cortare'
todos estos arboles para que tengamos lena para el in-
vierno. i\. Yo no he nacido para amar, ni para que me
amen. 12. <»Partira usted manana? — Es posible que yo
parta manana. 13. <; Cree usted que sea ella feliz ? — Parece
serlo : tal vez lo sera tambie'n. 14. <; Crees que nuestro padre
llegue hoy? — No; creo que llegara manana. 15. <iQuie"n
habra que resista al invencible poder de Dios? 16. <J Conoce
usted alguna persona de este pueblo que hable y escriba bien
el castellano ? 1 7. Si, senor ; conozco a una mujer que habla
y escribe muy bien el castellano. 18. Llamar£ un criado
que lleve esta carta al correo. 19. Segun dice4 el refran, no
hay mal que dure cien anos. 20. Pedid lo que querais, y
os lo dare"5 si lo tengo. 21. Voy6 esta noche a la 6pera
aunque llueva, pero creo que no llovera. 22. Pero, j hom-
bre ! Ya llueve. — Bueno ; voy a la 6pera aunque llueve.
B. i. It is lightening (it lightens), and I fear that it will rain.
I do not think7 so. 2. Is she unhappy? She appears to
be [so], but I can not believe that she is [so]. 3. Is your (fam.,
sing.) mother very ill ? Yes; she is [so]. 4. I regret that she is
ill, and I hope that she will be well soon. 5. He is sorry (he
regrets) that he is ill, and I also am sorry that he is ill. 6. I wish
to write the letter. I do not wish you (fo+-m., sing.) tojwrite it.
7. My father has forbidden my smoking, and I shall not smoke any 2
more. 8. Do you (fam., sing.) believe that they are happy?
9. I believe that he is happy, but I fear that she is unhappy.
10. I doubt whether8 he will arrive on time, but I do not doubt
that he will try9 to do so. n. Have (form., sing.) the kindness
to wait here until I return. 12. I desire to speak to you, and }
know 10 that you desire to speak to me. 13. As soon as you (fam.t
102 SPANISH GRAMMAR
ting.} read this letter, throw it into the fire. 14. As soon as 1
had read the letter, I threw it into the fire. 15. He says n that he
will work even if12 he may be tired. 16. He is working nov»
although he is very tired. 17. I shall give you the money so that
(in order that) you may buy whatever13 you wish. 18. It is
necessary to work hard to14 earn one's15 living. 19. It is not
necessary for Mr. Montejo to work hard16 to earn his15 living.
20. Who is there that will help me? I know n one person that will
help you (/am., sing.}. It is I. 21. Can you (fam., sing.} find
a boy to take18 this letter to the postoffice? 22. I have found a
boy who will take the letter to the postoffice. 23. I beg you
(form., sing.} not to be angry with your brother. There is no
cause for 19 it. 24. Do (form., sing.} not worry, Madam. Your
son will accompany you if you will permit him to accompany you.
25. Who has arrived? I do not know10 who has arrived. You
ought to know [it] : it is your father.
1 ' were. ' '2 Do not translate. 3 « anything.' 4 pres. Ind. of decir.
5 ' I shall give it to you.' 6 ' I am going.' 7 Use creer. 8 Use gU6t
8 Use the Ind. Mood after ' I do not doubt.' 1° se. u dice. & aunque.
18 lo que. 14 para. 16 Use the Def. Art. 16 Say : ' that Mr. Montejo
should-work hard.' 17 conozco. 18 Say :' that may-take.' 19 motive para.
LESSON XXI
98. Prepositional Forms of the Personal Pronouns. —
When personal pronouns are governed by a preposition,
the following forms are used :
SINGULAR PLURAL
1st Pers. mi, me. nosotros (-as), us.
id Per s. ti, you, thee. vosotros (-as), you.
f Masc. £1, him, it. 1
"\dPers. { \ ellos (-as), them.
t Fern. ella, her, it. j
ello, it (referring to an idea or statement},
Note that these are the same in form as the subject-pronouns, with thi
exception of mi and ti.
LESSON XXI
103
Usted and si, 'himself/ 'herself,' etc., are also used with
prepositions.
compre el caballo para ti (para usted), I bought the horse for you.
quiero hablar con el (con ella), I wish to speak with him (with her).
a. When con, ' with,' governs mi, ti, or si, the preposition and the
pronoun unite to form one word, and the combination ends with the syllable
•go : conmigo, * with me '; contigo, ' with you '; and consigo, ' with him-
self (herself, etc.).1
99. Subjunctive. Imperfect Tenses,
(i) Regular Verbs.
Hablar :
Temer
SINGULAR
1. hablase
2. hablases
3. hablase
1. hablara2
2. hablaras
3. hablara
SINGULAR
1. temiese
2. temieses
3. temiese
1. temiera
2. temieras
3. temiera
First Form
Second Form
First Form
Second Form
PLURAL
habldsemos
hablaseis
hablasen
habldramos
hablarais
hablaran
PLURAL
temie'semos
temieseis
temiesen
temie'ramos
temierais
temieran
1 In early Spanish, 'with me,' ' with thee * ' with himself (etc.), were migo,
tlgo, sigo (from Latin, mecum, tecum, securn]. Later, con was prefixed, so
that the modern forms conmigo, contigo, consigo, express ' with ' twice.
2 The imperfect subjunctive in -ra is derived from the Latin pluperfect in-
dicative \_ama(ve)ra(m} > amard\, and it is sometimes still used in Spanish,
Vith the force of an indicative pluperfect or preterite.
104
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Vivir
SINGULAR
1. viviese
2. vivieses
3. viviese
1. viviera
2. vivieras
3. viviera
First Form
Second Form
PLURAL
1. vivie'semos
2. vivieseis
3. viviesen
1. vivie"ramos
2. vivierais
3. vivieran
Note that the imperfect subjunctive has two forms, that in -se and that
in -ra. In dependent clauses there is usually little choice between the
two. The form in -se is perhaps used the oftener in Spain, while in some
parts of Spanish America only the form in -ra is in common use.
(2) Radical-changing Verbs.
THIRD CONJUGATION
Sentir ;
Pedir
SINGULAR
1. sintiese
2. sintieses
3. sintiese
1. sintiera
2. sintieras
3. sintiera
SINGULAR
1. pidiese
2. pidieses
3. pidiese
1. pidiera
2. pidieras
3. pidiera
First Form
Second Form
First Form
Second Form
PLURAL
sintiSsemos
sintieseis
sintiesen
sintie'ramos
sintierais
sintieran
PLURAL
pidiesemos
pidieseis
pidiesen
pidieramos
pidierais
pidieran
LESSON XXI
105
Dormir:
SINGULAR
1. durmiese
2. durmieses
3. durmiese
1. durmiera
2. durmieras
3. durmiera
First Form
Second Form
PLURAL
1. durmiesemos
2. durmieseis
3. durmiesen
durmi6ramo8
durmierais
durmieran
a. The subjunctive imperfect tenses are built up on the same stem as
that of the third person, singular or plural, of the preterite. This is true
of all irregular verbs.
b. The radical-changing e and 0 verbs of the first and second conju-
gations are regular in the imperfect subjunctive.
c. The -ra subjunctive is sometimes called the Conditional Subjunctive.
Note that the accent remains on the same vowel throughout the two im-
perfect subjunctives.
100. In dependent clauses the imperfect subjunctive
is used instead of the present, when the verb of the
main clause is past. Compare the following sentences :
deseo que 61 escriba la carta, I wish him to write the letter.
desear6 que 61 escriba la carta, I shall wish him to write the letter.
deseaba que 61 escribiese, or escribiera, la carta, I wished (was wish-
ing) him to ivrite the letter.
dese6 que 61 escribiese, or escribiera, la carta. I wished him t<> write.
the letter.
prohibo que entres, I forbid your entering.
prohibir6 que entres, I shall forbid your entering.
prohibfa que entrases, or entraras, I forbade (was forbidding) your
entering.
prohibi que entrases, or entraras, I forbade your entering.
temo que usted no llegue a tiempo, I fear that you will not arrive OB
time.
106 SPANISH GRAMMAR
temerS que usted no llegue a tiempo, I shall fear that you will not
arrive on time.
temia que usted no llegase, or llegara, a tiempo, T feared (was fear-
ing) that you would not arrive on time.
teml que usted no llegase, or llegara, a tiempo, I feared that you
would not arrive on time.
101. Sequence of Tenses. — A present or future tense
in the main clause is followed by the present subjunc-
tive, and a past tense by the imperfect. (See the ex-
amples given in the preceding paragraph.)
a. The perfect and the conditional are followed by the present or
imperfect subjunctive according to the meaning of the sentence.
el general ha mandado que los prisioneros scan fusilados, the general
has commanded that the prisoners (should) be shot.
ayer he escrito a Juan que volviese (volviera) a casa, yesterday I
wrote to John to return home.
preferiria que usted la escribiese (escribiera), I should prefer that you
(should) write it.
podria creer que est6 enfermo, I could believe that he is ill.
b. After a present or a future tense the imperfect is used to denote a
past action : siento que usted no llegase, or llegara, a tiempo, I am
sorry that you did not arrive on time.
Exercise XXI
A. i. Nuestra madre compr6 este libro espanol para ti y no
para mi. 2. Quiere trabajar contigo y conmigo, pero no con
61. 3. Cartero ; <i tiene usted algo para ml? 4. Si, sefior;
tengo cartas para usted y peri6dicos y un paquete grande para
su senor padre. 5. <iTe permitieron las senoras que las
acompanases (or acompanaras) ? 6. Si ; me permitieron que
las acompanara (or acompanase). 7. Tengo miedo de morir,
y tengo miedo de1 que mi madre muera. 8. Dijo2 que tenia
miedo de morir, y tenia miedo de que su madre muriera (or
LESSON XXI IO7
muriese). 9. Hoy vendi mi casa de campo, y siento muchi-
simo que tu padre no la comprase (or comprara). 10. Dijo
que sentia mucho que mi padre no la comprara (or comprase).
ii. Yo no desearia perder el tiempo, y no desearia que
usted lo perdiera tampoco.3 12. El maestro de idiomas no
podia consentir en1 que sus discipulos gastasen (or gastaran)
el dinero, y no aprendieran (or aprendiesen) el castellano.
13. Le pregunte" si partiria manana, y me respondi6 que
era posible que partiera (or partiese) hoy. 14. Mi hermano
creia que nuestra madre llegaria hoy, pero yo no creia que
ella llegase (or llegara) tan pronto. 15. Yo lo sentia
muchisimo, y le suplique" que me perdonara (or perdonase).
16. Dijo que iba4 a la 6pera aunque lloviese (or lloviera), y
fue5 aunque llovia. 17. Tu madre y yo rogabamos a Dios
todos los dias que te conservase (or conservara) la vida y que
protegiese (or protegiera) tu alma. 18. Yo he prohibido que
tu fumes tabaco, <; no es verdad ? 19. Si, sefior ; usted prohibi6
que yo fumara (or fumase) tabaco, y no fumare" mas. 20. Les
aconseje" que estudiasen (or estudiaran) el castellano; pero
no querian estudiar ningun6 idioma extranjero. 21. Mi tio
me aconsej6 que no llevara (or llevase) todo mi dinero conmigo.
22. Me dijo que no llevaba nunca7 todo su dinero consigo.
23. Copiare" la carta para que mi padre la lea. 24. Dijo que
copiaria la carta para que su padre la leyese8 (or leyera).
25. Cuando llegamos al palacio, no habia portero ni criados
que impidiesen (or impidieran) la entrada. 26. Prometi6
pagarme cien pesos cuando tuviese (or tuviera) 18 el dinero.
27. Le escribi que no vendiese (or vendiera) el ganado antes
que yo llegara (or llegase) ; pero lo vendi6 antes que yo llegue".
B. I. He has presents for you (fam., sing.} and for her, and
she has presents for him and for me. 2. They (masc.) can't9
live without us (/£/#.), and we can't16 live without them. 3. I
am content with you (fam., sing.} and with her, but I am not con-
108 SPANISH GRAMMAR
tent with him. 4. This house is very large, and many people live
in it. 5. This tree is very high, and there are many birds in it.
6 We (fern.} run and play a great deal, but what harm is there in it?
7. My father says n it is a pity that I don't study more. 8. He
says it is a pity that I didn't study more last year. 9. It is true
that I don't study much : I should study more. 10. We were very
sorry, ladies, that you did not permit Mr. Navarro to accompany you.
II. My mother wished to speak to the stranger, but my father did
not wish her to speak to him. 12. Did you (fam., pi.) believe
that Mr. Herrera would leave for 12 Madrid today? 13. Yes ; we be-
lieved that he would leave today, and he has already left. 14. She
asked me to pardon her, and I promised to pardon her. 15. There-
fore, I shall pardon her. 16. Wasn't it necessary to lie? No; it
wasn't necessary for you (fam., sing.} to lie. Never13 lie. 17. He
asked me to wait here until he returned, and I did wait until he
returned.14 18. He promised me that he would write the exercise for12
tomorrow even if he found it difficult. 19. And, although he found
it very difficult, he wrote it. 20. My father has forbidden my run-
ning and playing so-much.15 21. He had already forbidden my
smoking tobacco. 22. Your (fa?n., sing.) mother would prefer that
you return home at once. She wishes to see you. 23. John, I
bought this book that16 you (/am., sing.) might read it, and I wish
you to read it. 24. My mother said that she had bought the book
that I might read it, and she wished me to read it. 25. I shall pay
the bill whenever17 the tailor desires me to pay it. 26. He said
that he would pay the bill whenever the tailor desired him to pay it ;
but he hasn't paid it yet.
l Omit. 2 pret. of decir. « ' either.' * Imp. Ind. of ir. 6 Pret. of
ir (3d pers. sing.). 6 ' any.' 7 ' ever.' 8 leyese = le-iese (§ 216). 9 no
pueden. 10 no podemos. n dice. 12 para. 13 No ... nunca (placing the
verb between). *4 In this and similar sentences use the subjunctive only
when the time is indefinite and future with regard to the main verb. 36 tanto.
16 para que. 17 cuando. 18 ' had.'
LESSON XXII ICXJ
LESSON XXII
102 When a verb has two personal pronoun objects,
the indirect precedes the direct object.
me lo da, he gives it to me. os las da, he gives them to you.
te la da, he gives it to you. dAmelo, give it to me.
nos los da, he gives them to us. danoslos, give them to us.
a. If both pronoun objects are in the third person, se is used as
indirect object in the place of le or les. Thus, instead of either le lo da,
or les lo da, one says se lo da. This se is derived from an old dative
form of the personal pronoun of the third person,1 and is in no way
related to the reflexive pronoun se.
b. When the direct object is a pronoun of the first or the second per-
son, the indirect object is usually separated from the verb and assumes
the prepositional form after A, ' to.'
me presenta A ellos, he presents me to them,
te presenta a ml, he presents you to me.
nos presentan a usted, they present us to you.
presentame A 61, present me to him.
103. Each of the indirect object-pronouns le, les, and se
(= le or les) has several meanings : hence, to avoid ambiguity,
it is often necessary to use two pronouns to express the same
idea, — an indirect object-pronoun and the corresponding
prepositional form with a.
le da el libro A 61 (A ella, A usted), he gives the book to him (to her,
to you).
les da la casa A ellos (A ellas, A ustedes), he gives the house to them,
masc. (to them,/Jf/«. ; to you, plur.).
se lo da A 61 (A ella, A usted, A ellos, A ellas, A ustedes), he gives it to
him (to her, to you, to them, masc. ; to them, fern. ; to you, plur.}.
a. This double construction is also used with either direct or indirect
object-pronouns of the first, the second, or the third person, to add emphasis.
1 Written ge in old Spanish.
no
SPANISH GRAMMAR
The pronouns me, te, le> la, lo, nos, os, los, las, les, and se can not be made
emphatic by being stressed: 'give it to me,' with the stress on ' me,' can
not be translated by damelo, with the stress on me, but must be expressed
by damelo a mi, with the stress on mi.
te lo da d ti, he gives it to you.
danosla a nosotros, give it to us.
me quiere educar a mi tambi^n, he
wishes to educate me too.
The prepositional pronoun may precede the verb (except an imperative),
and it is then still more emphatic.
£ mi me lo da, he gives it to me.
This usage is often extended to nouns: d mi padre no le gusta, 'it
doesn't please my father.'
104. Subjunctive Imperfect : Tener, Haber, Ser, Estar.
Tener :
SINGULAR
1. tuviese
2. tuvieses
3. tuviese
1. tuviera
2. tuvieras
3. tuviera
Haber:
SINGULAR
1. hubiese
2. hubieses
3. hubiese
1. hubiera
2. hubieras
3. hubiera
First Form
Second Form
First Form
Second Form
PLURAL
1. tuvie"semos
2. tuvieseis
3. tuviesen
1. tuviSramos
2. tuvierais
3. tuvieran
PLURAL
1. hubiSsemos
2. hubieseis
3. hubiesen
1. hubie*ramos
2. hubierais
3. hubieran
LESSON XXII
IIT
Ser
SINGULAR
1. fuese
2. fueses
3. fuese
1. fuera
2. fueras
3. fuera
First Form
Second Form
Estar :
SINGULAR
1. estuviese
2. estuvieses
3. estuviese
1. estuviera
2. estuvieras
3. estuviera
First Form
Second Form
PLURAL
1. fu6semos
2. fueseis
3. fuesen
1. fue"ramos
2. fuerais
3. fueran
PLURAL
1. estuviSsemos
2. estuvieseis
3. estuviesen
1. estuviSramos
2. estuvierais
3. estuvieran
105. Subjunctive. Pluperfect Tense.
Hablar :
SINGULAR
First Form
1. hubiese hablado
2. hubieses hablado
3. hubiese hablado
Second Form
1. hubiera hablado
2. hubieras hablado
3. hubiera hablado
PLURAL
1. hubie"semos hablado
2. hubieseis hablado
3. hubiesen hablado
1. hubieramos hablado
2. hubierais hablado
3. hubieran hablado
a. Hubiese and hubiera, used impersonally, mean ' there might be,' etc.;
bibiese, or hubiera, habido, « there might have been.'
112 SPANISH GRAMMAR
106. A present condition " contrary to fact " may be
expressed in either one of the following ways :
si tuviese, or tuviera, dinero, lo compraria, > if I had money, I should
si tuviese, or tuviera, dinero, lo comprara, } buy it.
Note that the imperfect subjunctive in -ra may occur in the result
(apodosis) as well as in the condition (protasis), while the imperfect in
-se occurs only in the condition, ind the conditional indicative only in
the result.
a. The condition may, of course, either precede or follow the result :
si tuviese tiempo, irla, ' if I had time, I should go,' or irfa si tuviese
tiempo, ' I should go if I had time.'
b. The conjunction si is sometimes followed by a conditional indica-
tive, and si then means ' whether ' : no supe si vendrla, ' I did not know
whether he would come.'
107. Idiomatic Expressions.
I ojala que viva mil anos ! oh, that he may, or I hope he will, live a
thousand years !
I ojala que viviese, or viviera, mil anos ! oh, that he might, or I wish
he would, live a thousand years !
quisiera l estudiar el franc6s, I should like, or I should be glad, to study
French,
quisiera que tu estudiases, or estudiaras, el francos, I should like you
to, or I wish you would, study French.
\ quien escribiera ! oh, if I could only write !
Exercise XXII
A, i. £l nos arra a nosotros, y nosotros le amamos a e*l.
2. Lo (or le) matare", 6 me matara £1 a mi. 3. Me quieren
educar a mi tambie"n ; pero yo no quiero que me eduquen.
4. Ahora te toca a ti. — Si ; ahora me toca a mi. 5. Luego
os tocara a vosotros. — Si ; luego nos tocara a nosotros. 6. No
la entiendo a listed, senora. — Caballero, yo no le entiendo 4
1 Imperf. Subj. of quer«x.
LESSON XXII 113
listed tampoco. 7. Se lo he dicho l & £1 y no a ella. No he
querido decirselo a ella. 8. <iQuieres prestarme tu bicicleta?
— Si; te la quiero prestar con mucho gusto. 9. Mi padre
queria que yo se lo prometiese, y se lo prometi. 10. Ella
queria que yo le leyera la carta ; pero yo no queria leersela.
ii. <iPuedo pedirle a usted un favor? — j No, hombre, no!
Siempre me pide usted favores. 12. Tu no eres hijo de mi
hermano. Si lo fueras, no me insultarias como me has insul-
tado. 13. j Cuanto siento que no estuviera usted a mi lado !
14. Hijo mio2; yo quisiera que tu me acompanaras esta
noche. 15. Si lo hubiese hallado, te lo hubiera entregado.
16. Si usted la amara, no la trataria asi. 17. Si usted no
me quisiera3 a mi, no la querria yo a usted. 18. La gra-
matica seria buena, si no hubiese tantas faltas en ella. 19. Yo
se lo habria pedido a usted, si hubiera sabido que usted lo
tenia. 20. Vivo en Espafia desde hace diez afios, y no he
aprendido bien el espafiol. 21. Me sorprende que usted
viva en Espana desde hace diez anos, y no haya aprendido el
espanol. 22. El senor Pelayo dijo que le sorprendia que
yo viviera en Espana desde hacia diez anos, y no hubiese apren-
dido bien el espanol.
B. i. Will he give4 the book to you (fam., sing.'} ? Yes; he
will give it to me. 2. Will he give the house to us? No ; he will
not give it to us. 3. Will he give these chairs and tables to you
(fam.,pl.)l We believe that he will give them to us. 4. Will
he give his two black horses to you (fam., sing.)! Yes; he will
give them to me. 5. Did I present him to you (fam., sing.)!
Yes ; you (fam., sing.} presented him to me. 6. Did we present
you (fam., sing.) to her? Yes; you (fam., pi.) presented me to
her a short while ago. 7. If you (fam., sing.) are-willing to lend
me your umbrella, lend it to me. 8. If you are not willing to
lend it to me, do not lend it to me. 9. If you (form., sing.) are-
willing to lend us two chairs, lend them to us. 10. If you are not
willing to lend them to us, do not lend them to us. n. If I
114 SPANISH GRAMMAR
am-willing to present you (fam., sing.} to her, I shall present you
to her. 12. Do (fam., sing.) not present me to her, if you do
not wish to do so.5 13. I shall send him fifty pesetas, and I shall
send her one hundred pesetas. 14. Will you (form., sing.) not
send me also fifty pesetas? 15. Yes; I will send them to you
(form., sing.} if you promise me that you will not spend them the
first day. 16. I do not like6 this weather, but you (fam., sing.)
do like it. 17. We do not like this lamp, but you (fam., pi.)
do like it. 18. He doesn't like to live in Madrid, but she does.7
19. You (form., pi.) like to study Spanish, but they do not like
to.8 20. I love him, but I love her more. She loves me, but she
loves him more. 21. If I had the money, I should buy this dog;
but I haven't the money, and consequently I shan't buy it. 22. I
wish9 you (form., sing.) would lend me your bicycle. I shall be
glad to 10 lend it to you. 23. Will you (fam., pi.) not present us
to the French ladies? We should present you {fam., pi.) to them,
if you spoke French. 24. But you do not speak French, and they
do not speak English. 25. I should like to study Spanish and
French, and I should like you (form., pi.) to study these languages.
We should study them if we had the time.
1 Past Part, of decir. 2 ' my son.' 3 Querer d means 'to love,' ' to be
fond of.' 4 dard. 5 hacerlo. 6 Use gustar. 7 Say : ' but she does
like (it).' 8 Omit. 9 quisiera. 10 Say: ' I shall have much pleasure in'
(followed by the Infin.).
LESSON XXIII
108. Se and Si. — The reflexive pronouns se and si
are masculine or feminine, singular or plural. Se is
used as the direct or indirect object of a verb ; si as the
object of a preposition. Whenever the subject of a verb
is a noun or a pronoun of the third person, and is repre-
sented as acting, either directly or indirectly, on itself,
se is used as the object-pronoun and si as the preposi-
tional form.
LESSON XXIIl 115
61 se alaba, he praises himself. Onofre habla siempre de si, Ono-
usted se engana, you deceive fre is always talking about
yourself. himself.
Antonio se compr6 un sombrero, sirvase Vd. decirme, please tell
Anthony bought himself a hat. me.
a. Reflexive se, whether direct or indirect object, always precedes
another object-pronoun : se me figura, ' it seems to me.' (Here se is the
direct, me the indirect, object.)
109. In the first and second persons there is no especial form
of reflexive pronoun, but the object- pronouns may become
reflexive. Thus, the indicative present tense of enganarse, ' to
deceive one's self,' is
me engano, I deceive myself. nos enganamos, we deceive our-
te enganas, you deceive your- selves.
self. os enganais, you deceive your-
se engana, he (she) deceives him- selves. [selves.
self (herself). se enganan, they deceive them-
a. If English 'myself,' 'ourselves,' 'thyself,' etc., are emphatic, they
are to be expressed in Spanish by the reflexive pronoun in the preposi-
tional form, modified by mismo (-a, -os, -as).
me engano d mi mismo, I deceive myself.
listed se engana 4 si mismo, you deceive yourself.
Onofre habla siempre de si mismo, Onofre is always talking about himself.
In these expressions propio may replace mismo.
ella se ama a si propia, she loves herself.
b. Many verbs require the reflexive construction in Spanish, but not in
English.
acostarse, (to) go to bed (lit., 'to acordarse (de), (to) remember.
recline one's self). Olvidarse, (to) forget.
levantarse, (to) arise, or to get up alegrarse (de), (to) rejoice (at),
(lit., to raise one's self). or (to) be glad (of).
sentarse, (to) sit down, or to be atreverse (a), (to) dare.
seated (lit., ' to seat one's self '). reirse (de), (to) laugh (at), etc*
hacerse, or ponerse, (to) become. etc.
116 SPANISH GRAMMAR
c. Some intransitive verbs may be used as reflexives, with change of
meaning.
ir, (to) go. dormirse, (to) fall asleep.
irse, (to) go away. morir, (to) die.
dormir, (to) sleep. morirse, (to) be dying, etc.
d. The reflexive construction is often used in Spanish where the passive
voice is required in English.
se dice, it is said. aqui se habla espanol, Spanish is spoken here.
f. The direct reflexive substitute for the passive is usually to be avoided
if there is a personal subject. Thus, se admira el hombre means < the
man admires himself,' and not 'the man is admired'; but one can say, se
admira al hombre, 'the man is admired,' se la trata con distinci6n, 'she
is treated with distinction,' se te llama, ' some one is calling you,' etc.
If a masculine pronoun of the third person is used, it is in the dative.
se les admira, they are admired.
110. In the plural a reflexive verb may become reciprocal;
that is, several persons or things may be represented as acting
on one another. Usually no distinction of form is made in
Spanish between reflexive and reciprocal verbs ; thus, nosotros
nos enganamos may mean ' we deceive ourselves,' or ' we de-
ceive one another.' Often, however, the meaning determines
whether the verb is reflexive or reciprocal, as in la primera vez
que se vieron y se hablaron, ' the first time they saw each other
and spoke to each other.'
a. A reciprocal verb may be strengthened and made explicit by the use
of el uno al otro (la una d la otra, los unos d los otros, las unas d las
otras, or el uno a la otra, la una al otro, etc.).
OS enganais el uno al otro, you deceive each other.
se aman las unas d las otras, they love one another.
se burlan el uno del otro, they make fun of each other.
The article may be omitted, as in se aborrecen unos a otros, * they hate
one another.'
LESSON XXIII
117
111. The following facts should also be noted :
a. The ethical dative, or " dative of interest," is much commoner in
Spanish than in English.
me tomo la libertad, I take the liberty.
me lo temo, I fear so.
no te lo mates, do not kill him.
b. The forms la and las (cosa or a similar word being understood) may
be used with the force of an indefinite pronoun.
el me la habrd de pagar, he will pay me for it.
los pretendientes se las prometen siempre felices, suitors always promise
themselves happiness.
la gata cogi6 un rat6n y se
lo comi6, the cat caught a
mouse and ate it.
112. Hypothetical Subjunctive. (Also called Put. Subj.^
(i) Regular Verbs.
Hablar
PLURAL
SINGULAR
1. hablare
2. hablares
3. hablare
SINGULAR
1. temiere
2. temieres
3. temiere
SINGULAR
1. viviere
2. vivieres
3. viviere
Temer
Vivir
1. hablaremos
2. hablareis
3. hablaren
PLURAL
1. temiSremos
2. temiereis
3. temieren
PLURAL
1 . viviSremos
2. viviereis
3. vivieren
fa) Radical-changing Verbs.
THIRD CONJUGATION
Sentir
SINGULAR
1. sintiere
2. sintieres
3. sintiere
PLURAL
1. sintieremos
2. sintiereis
3. sintieren
n8
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Peak
SINGULAR
1. pidiere
2. pidieres
3. pidiere
SINGULAR
1. durmiere
2. durmieres
3. durmiere
Dormir
PLURAL
1. pidieremos
2. pidiereis
3. pidieren
PLURAL
1. durmiSremos
2. durmiereis
3. durmieren
a. The hypothetical subjunctive of the radical-changing e and 0 verbs
of the first and second conjugations is regular.
b. It should be noted here that the radical-changing e and 0 verbs of
the first and second conjugations are regular in all tenses except the
present indicative, present subjunctive, and imperative ; while those of the
third conjugation have irregular forms in all tenses except the imperfect,
future, and conditional indicative.
(3) Tener, Haber, Ser, Estar.
SINGULAR
1. tuviere
2. tuvieres
3. tuviere
SINGULAR
1. hubiere
2. hubieres
3. hubiere
SINGULAR
1. fuere
2. fueres
3. fuer«
Tener
Haber
Ser
PLURAL
1. tuvieremos
2. tuviereis
3. tuvieren
PLURAL
1. hubieremos
2. hubiereis
3. hubieren
PLURAL
1. fueremofi
2. fuereis
3. fueren
LESSON XXIII 119
Estar
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. estuviere i. estuvi6remos
2. estuvieres 2. estuviereis
3. estuviere 3. estuvieren
Note that the hypothetical subjunctive, like the imperfect subjunctive,
is built up on the preterite (3d person) stem.
113. Hypothetical Perfect Subjunctive.
Hablar
SINGULAR PLURAL
1. hubiere hablado i. hubie"remos hablado
2. hubieres hablado 2. hubiereis hablado
3. hubiere hablado 3. hubieren hablado
a. Hubiere is also used as an impersonal verb.
114. Use of the Hypothetical Subjunctive.
The hypothetical subjunctive always denotes a condition or
hypothesis. Like the present subjunctive, it denotes either
present or future time. In the spoken Spanish of today the
hypothetical subjunctive is rarely used except in proverbs,
legal expressions, etc. Its place is regularly taken by the
present subjunctive, or by the present indicative if used with
si/ if.'
si tal pensare (piensa), se en- mientras durare (dure) la vida,
gana, if he thinks so, he is trabajare", as long as life lasts, I
mistaken. shall work.
si lo hubiere (ha) dicho, ha men- cre"elo si quisieres (quieres), be-
tido, if he has said so, he has lieve it if you wish.
lied. es necesario aceptar lo que nos
si tuviere (tengo) dinero, lo com- dieren (den), it is necessary to
prar6, if I have money, I shall accept what they give us.
buy it.
120
SPANISH GRAMMAR
115. In Spanish the commoner forms of conditional sen-
tences are as follows :
1. gasto mucho si gano mucho, I
spend much if I earn much.
2. gastar6 mucho si gano (ga-
nare) mucho, I shall spend
much if I earn much.
3. gastaba mucho si ganaba
mucho, I spent much if I
earned much.
4. gast£ mucho si gan& mucho,
I spent much if I did earn
(earned) much.
5. gastaria mucho si ganase
mucho, I should spend much
if I earned much.
6. gastaria mucho si ganara
mucho, I should spend much
if I earned much.
7. gastara mucho si ganasc
mucho, I should spend
much if I earned much.
8. gastara mucho si gauara
mucho, I should spend
much if I earned much.
9. he gastado mucho si he ga-
nado mucho, I have spent
much if I have earned
much.
10. habia gastado mucho si habia
ganado mucho, I had spent
much if I had earned much-
116. When the verb of the conclusion (apodosis) is thrown
into the subjunctive, the present and future indicative become
the present subjunctive ; the imperfect, preterite, and con-
ditional indicative become the imperfect subjunctive ; and the
perfect and pluperfect indicative become the perfect and plu-
perfect subjunctive respectively. Thus (cf. parallel sentences
in preceding paragraph) :
1. teme que yo gaste mucho si
gano mucM, he fears that I
spend much if I earn much.
2. teme que yo gaste mucho si gano
(ganare) mucho, he fears that I
shall spend much if I earn much.
3. teme que yo gastara (gastase)
mucho si ganaba mucho, he
fears that I spent much if I
earned much.
1. teme que yo gastara (gastase)
mucho si gane mucho, he
fears that I spent much if I
did earn (earned) much.
5, 6, 7, 8. teme que yo gastara
(gastase) mucho si ganase
(ganara) mucho, he fears
that I should spend much if
I earned much.
LESSON XXIII 121
9. teme que yo haya gastado 10. teme que yo hubiera (hu-
mucho si he ganado mucho, biese) gastado mucho si
he tears that I have spent habia ganado mucho, he
much if I have earned fears that I had spent much
much. if I had earned much.
Note that the verb of the condition (protasis) is not attracted into the
Subjunctive in I, 2, 3, 4, 9, and 10.
Exercise XXIII
A. i. Cuando era nino me acostaba y me levantaba tem-
prano. 2. Ahora que soy hombre me acuesto y me levanto
tarde. 3. El hombre se acuesta ; la vaca se echa. 4. Aqui
se cambia dinero. 5. No se permite fumar aqui. 6. Una
casa se vende ; la otra se alquila. 7. Se habla mucho de la
guerra. 8. Se dice que ya han muerto l muchos soldados.
9. El se queja de ella, y ella se queja de el. 10. Parece que
se odian. n. El hombre que no se respeta a si mismo no
es digno de ser2 respetado por los otros. 12. Los ninos
pueden reirse y llorar casi al mismo tiempo. 13. El cama-
Ie6n se puede poner bianco, negro, 6 verde. 14. La ira
puede llamarse la peor de las pasiones. 15. Se sinti6 algo
cansado y se sent6 al pie de un arbol. 16. Las dos mujeres
se abrazaron y besaron ; pero todo el mundo sabe que no se
amaban. 17. El ano proximo pienso marcharme a Espana, y
es probable que me quede alia por algunos anos. 18. | C6mo
se parece la nina a la mujer ! 19. No son parientas ; pero
se parecen mucho una a otra. 20. Este hombre es muy
vanaglorioso : se alaba siempre a si, habla mucho de si y con-
sigo, y no piensa sino en3 si mismo. 21. Si me casase con
usted seria menester que usted me gustara, y la verdad es que
usted no me gusta. 22. <jSe ha marchado ya tu primo? —
Si, senor ; se hallaba sin ocupaci6n. 23. Nosotras nos bur-
lamos de ellos, y ellos se burlan de nosotras. 24. Se4 te
122 SPANISH GRAMMAR
llama, nifio : vete.5 — No me importa que me 11am en : no
quiero irme. 25. Callate, nifio, si no quieres que me enfade.
26. En caso que lo hallare (or halle6), se lo enviare" a usted
por correo. 27. Si e"l no estuviere (or esta6) en casa, se
lo entregar£ a su mujer. 28. Te acompanaremos si tu lo
deseares (or deseas6).
B. i. I feel7 sad; you {fam., sing.} feel sad; he feels sad; we
feel sad; you {fam., pi.) feel sad; they feel sad. 2. I wash my
hands8; you {fam., sing.} wash your hands; she washes her
hands; we wash our hands; you {fatn., pi.) wash your hands;
they wash their hands. 3. I speak about myself; you {fam.,
sing.) speak about yourself; you {form., sing.) speak about yourself;
we speak about ourselves; you {fam., pi.) speak about yourselves;
they speak about themselves. 4. It seems9 to me; it seems to
you {fam., sing.) ; it seems to him; it seems to us; it seems to
you {fam., pi.) ; it seems to them. 5. I go to bed10; you {fam.)
sing.) go to bed; she goes to bed; we go to bed; you {fam., pi.)
go to bed ; they go to bed. 6. I am glad n of it ; you {fam.,
sing.) are glad of it ; you {form., sing.) are glad of it ; we are glad
of it ; you {fam., pi.) are glad of it ; they are glad of it. 7. I am
going to sleep 12 ; you (fam., sing.) are going to sleep ; he is going
to sleep ; we are going to sleep ; you (fam., pi.) are going to sleep ;
they are going to sleep. 8. My name is 1S Mary ; your (fam., sing.)
name is John ; her name is Frances ; our names are Peter and Paul ;
your {fam., pi.} names are Sophia and Trinity; their names are
Henry and George. 9. I am frightened14; you {fam., sing.) are
frightened; you {form., sing.) are frightened; we are frightened;
you {fam., pi.) are frightened ; you (form., pi.) are frightened.
10. We {masc.) hate each other; you {fam., pi., fern.) hate each
other; they {masc. and fern.) hate each other. 11. We {fern.)
embrace and kiss each other; you {fam., pi., fern.) embrace and
kiss each other; you {form., pi., masc. and fern.) embrace and kiss
each other. 12. We (masc.) remember15 one another; you
{fam., pi., fern.) remember one another; they {masc. and fern.)
remember one another. 13. French and Spanish are spoken here,
but English is not spoken. 14. I go to bed at 9 P.M. and I arise
LESSON XXIV 123
at 6 A.M.16 15. Please17 (form., sing.} sit down if you feel tired.
1 6. The father and the son look like each other, but the son is the
handsomer. 17. The two children poured warm water into the
wash-basin, and washed their hands and faces with soap. 1 8. They
then dried their hands and faces18 with a towel, and combed and
brushed their hair.
1 Past Part, of morir. 2 ' being.' 8 ' of.' 4 ' one ' or ' some one.'
* Imperative, 2d pers. sing., of irse. 6 The more usual Subj. or Ind. form is
given in parenthesis. < Use sentirse. 8 Say : ' I wash me the hands.'
9 Useftgurarse. 1° Use acostarse. H Use alegrarse (df). 12 Use dormirse.
13 Use llamarse. 14 Use asustarse. 15 Use acordarse (de). 16 Usually
'A.M.' is expressed by de la manana, and ' P.M.' by de la tarde or de la noche.
I? sir-vase usted. 18 Say : ' dried themselves the hands and face and combed
themselves and brushed themselves the hair.'
LESSON XXIV
117. Possessive Adjectives.
SINGULAR
ist Pers. mfo (-a, -os, -as) or mi (mis), my.
2d Pers. tuyo (-a, -os, -as) or tu (tus), your, thy-
3^ Pers. suyo (-a, -os, -as) or su (sus), his, her, its, your.
PLURAL
1st Pers. nuestro (-a, -os, -as), our.
id Pers. vuestro (-a, -os, -as), your.
3^ Pers. suyo (-a, -os, -as) or su (sus), their, your.
a. Before nouns, the apocopated forms mi, tu, and su are used; and
after nouns the full forms, mio, tuyo, and suyo. Nuestro and vuestro
are used either before or after nouns.
b. Mio (mi) is the possessive corresponding to yo, tuyo (tu) corre-
sponds to tu, nuestro to nosotros (-as), vuestro to vosotros (-as), and
suyo (su) to 61, ella, ellos (-as), usted, and ustedes.
124 SPANISH GRAMMAR
118. Possessive adjectives regularly precede theif
noun, and agree in gender and number with the thing
possessed, not with the possessor.
nuestro caballo, our horse. nuestra casa, our house,
nuestros caballos, our horses. nuestras casas, our Mouses.
a. In certain indefinite expressions, and sometimes when emphatic,
the possessive follows its noun.
cierto amigo mio, a certain friend of mine,
algunos discipulos nuestros, some pupils of ours.
los vicios tuyos, your vices.
b. In direct address, mio is generally used with an unmodified noun in
the singular, and either mi or mio with a noun modified by an adjective.
amigo mio, my friend.
mi querido amigo, or querido amigo mio, my dear friend.
119. When the thing possessed forms part of the possessor,
and is the object of a verb, the possessive adjective is generally
replaced by an indirect object- pronoun and the definite article.
me corte" el dedo, I cut my finger. se quit6 el sombrero, he took
te salv6 la vida, he saved your life. off his hat.
The same usage obtains with nouns.
(le) salv6 la vida £ su amigo, he saved his friend's life.
(le) habian perdonado la vida a un hombre, they had pardoned
(spared) a man's life,
voy d romper(le) la cabeza a ese abogado, I am going to break that
lawyer's head.
a. When the possessor is the subject of the verb, and no ambiguity is
possible, the pronoun is omitted and the definite article alone is used
instead of a possessive adjective.
perdi el sombrero, I lost my hat.
la ni3a abri6 los ojos y Ievant6 la cabeza, the girl opened her eyes and
raised her head.
tengo los pies mojados y frios, my feet are wet and cold.
LESSON XXIV 125
120. Infinitive
(1) 'To' before an infinitive is either not expressed in
Spanish, or it is expressed by a or de.
quiero hablar con usted, I wish to speak with you.
espero llegar a tiempo, I hope to arrive on time.
aprende a escribir, he is learning to write.
estoy obligado a trabajar mucho, I am obliged to work a great deal.
tratarS de hacerlo, I shall try to do so.
tengo vergiienza de pedirlo, I am ashamed to ask it.
a. Most verbs (especially the " modal auxiliaries," deber, querer, etc.;
take no preposition before a following infinitive; a is required after a verb
of beginning, teaching, and learning, and after most verbs of motion,
before a following infinitive ; de is often used to connect a noun or adjec-
tive with a following infinitive, and is found occasionally between verbs
(tratar de ver, alegrarse de ir, etc.).
b. But 'to,' meaning 'in order to,' is para: como para vivir: no vivo
para comer, ' I eat to live : I do not live to eat.'
(2) After a preposition, the English present participle1 is to
be translated usually by the Spanish infinitive.
antes de comer, before eating.
parti6 sin decir adi6s, he left without saying good-bye.
estoy cansado de leer, I am tired of reading.
(3) Used as a noun, the infinitive usually takes the definite
article.
el comer es indispensable, (to) eat (or eating) is indispensable.
el saber es util, knowledge is useful.
121. Present Participle.1 — The present participle is
invariable ; that is, it may agree, without changing its
l No attempt is here made to distinguish between the present participle and
the gerund, either in English or in Spanish.
126 SPANISH GRAMMAR
form, with a masculine or feminine, a singular or plural,
noun.
hablando asi las ninas . . ., the girls speaking thus ....
gana el pan cosiendo y bordando, she earns her bread (by) sewing
and embroidering.
a. We have seen that hablo means ' I speak,' ' I do speak ' (emphatic),
or ' I am speaking ' ( progressive) ; hablaba means * I was speaking '
( progressive} or ' I used to speak '; hablare" means ' I shall speak ' or ' I
shall be speaking' (progressive}, etc. But progressive action may also be
expressed in Spanish by estar and the present participle : estoy hablando,
'I am speaking'; estaba hablando, ' I was speaking'; estare" hablando,
' I shall be speaking,' etc. The progressive form with estar, however, is
used less often, and is more emphatic, than the English progressive form
with 'be.' It is rarely used with the present participles of ser, estar, ir,
venir, and many other verbs. Instead of estar, the verbs ir, venir, andar,
are sometimes used to form a periphrastic progressive tense: va oscure-
ciendo, ' it is growing dark.'
122. Past Participle. — Past participles used as adjec-
tives are inflected like adjectives.
mi amada patria, my beloved country.
las cartas estan acabadas, the letters are finished.
When used to form the perfect tenses, past participles
are invariable.
mi madre ha venido, my mother has come.
las manzanas que he comprado son buenas, the apples that I have
bought are good.
a. The following otherwise regular verbs have irregular past parti?
ciples :
abrir, (to) open. abierto, opened,
cubrir, (to) cover. cubierto, covered.
escribir, (to) write. escrito, written.
imprimir, (to) print. impreso, printed.
LESSON XXIV 127
123. Idiomatic Expressions.
(1) d fe" mfa, upon my word.
d pesar nuestro, in spite of us (ourselves).
no es culpa mia, it is not my fault.
(2) al leer la carta, upon reading the letter.
al leer yo la carta, upon my reading the letter.
Exercise XXIV
A. Algunos historiadores ban creido hallar el origen de los
Indies americanos en aquellas diez tribus de Israel que fueron
conquistadas por un rey de Asiria, unos setecientos anos antes
de Cristo. Muchos de los vencidos fueron llevados en cautiverio
y, mezclandose con los conquistadores, perdieron su nacionali-
dad. Pero, segun dice1 Esdras, hubo algunos que formaron el
proyecto de abandonar la multitud de los Gentiles e" irse a un
lejano pais en donde los hombres nunca habian morado. Al-
gunos opinan que los desgraciados restos de estas tribus lleva-
ron 4 cabo su designio, pasando a la America, y que fueron los
progenitores de la raza india. La historia s61o dice que avan-
zaron hasta la Media, y fuera de esto no sabemos nada mas de
sus viajes, ni aparece prueba alguna de que se estableciesen
finalmente en la America, excepto una pequena semejanza
entre las costumbres y ceremonias religiosas de los Indios y los
antiguos Israelitas. Ambos tenian sus sacerdotes y profetas,
BUS fiestas, festines y sacrificios. Pero ni estos ni otros puntos
de semejanza que se alegan son bastantes para probar la teorr
B. i. Certain plans of yours are good, but our designs are bet-
ter. 2. In a letter which he has written, John says to me : " My
dear friend : I am proving a resemblance between the Indians and
the ten tribes of Israel." 3. They know that it is not your fault,
but they are tired of carrying out your theories. 4. Before leav-
ing the land of the Gentiles the tribes had lost their nationality.
5. To form a plan is easy; to carry it out is difficult. 6. John
lost his life in America. 7. The wind has carried off the man's
128 SPANISH GRAMMAR
hat. 8. When I had (preterite) opened my eyes, I spoke to the
Indians. 9. Raising his head, the boy who was weeping said2:
"I have cut my hand." 10. Our letter is3 written. We are
sending the letter and a present to our beloved sister. n. Some
friends of his have printed his book of poems. 12. We were
speaking to a certain pupil of yours. 13. Upon my word, it is
not our fault that the door is3 open. 14. We cannot4 live with-
out eating. 15. Writing is useful, and speaking is not always
indispensable. 16. In spite of ourselves we are obliged to work
a-great-deal. 17. Upon my saying good-by, the girls raised their
heads (sing.). 18. Our hands are cold and our feet are wet.
19. We know that the ten tribes of Israel were conquered by the
king of Assyria, and some believe that-they-can 4 (infin.') find the
origin of the Indian race in these conquered men. But the points
of resemblance that some historians allege are not sufficient to prove
our theory. History only says that the conquerors carried (pret.)
the tribes into captivity; and that later-on5 the remnants of the
ancient Israelites left the country of the Gentiles to 6 go to a distant
country. Apart from their religious customs and ceremonies, there
appears to be7 no proof that these unfortunate Israelites were8 the
progenitors of the American Indians. But Esdras has written a
history which says that the Israelites, advancing as far as Media and
carrying out a certain design of theirs, passed-over to a land where
the Gentiles were not dwelling. He knows nothing more of their
plans nor of their journeys. We think that they established (pret.)
themselves in America.
1 ' says.' 2 dijo. 8 estd. 4 Use poder. 6 lucgo. * para.
7 Omit. 8 fucsen.
LESSON XXV
124. Possessive Pronouns.
SINGULAR
ist Pers. el mlo (la mfa, los mlos, las mfas), mine.
2d Pers. el tuyo (la tuya, los tuyos, las tuyas), yours, thine.
3^ Pers. el suyo (la suya, los suyos, las suyas), his, hers, its, or yours
LESSON XXV 129
PLURAL
1st Pers. el nuestro (la nuestra, los nuestros, las nuestras), ours.
zd fers. el yuestro (la vuestra, los vuestros, las vuestras), yours-
$d Pers. el suyo (la suya, los suyos, las suyas), theirs or yours.
Note that the Spanish .possessive pronouns usually require the definite
article, while the English do not.
a. Possessive pronouns, like possessive adjectives, agree in gender and
number with the things possessed.
mi casa es mas grande que la tuya, pero prefiero la tuya a la mia,
my house is larger than yours, but I prefer yours to mine.
b. Los mios often means ' my people ' ; los tuycs, ' your people,' etc.
Lo mio means 'mine,' 'what is mine'; lo tuyo, 'yours,' 'what is
yours,' etc.
125. Suyo and su have several meanings ; hence, in order to
avoid ambiguity, it is often necessary to use de and the proper
personal pronoun instead of suyo and su.
(1) Instead of tengo su libro one would then say :
tengo el libro de 61, J have his book.1
tengo el libro de ella, I have her book.
tengo el libro de usted, I have_>w*r book.
tengo el libro de ellos, I have their (masc.} book.
tengo el libro de ellas, I have their (fern.) book.
tengo el libro de ustedes, I have your (plur.) book.
(2) And instead of tengo el suyo one would say :
tengo el de 61, I have his.
tengo el de ella, I have hers.
tengo el de usted, I have yours.
tengo el de ellos, I have theirs (masc.}.
tengo el de ellas, I have theirs (fern.).
tengo el de ustedes, I have yours (plur.).
* One may also say tengo su libro de el (ella, ellos, ellas, usted, ustedes}
130 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. The same construction is used with the possessive case of nouns,
tengo el libro de Miguel, I have Michael's book.
tengo el de Miguel, I have Michael's.
b. The definite article is usually omitted before a possessive pronoun
(or noun) in predicate.
esta pluma es mia, this pen is mine.
esa pluma es de usted, that pen is yours.
aquella pluma es de Miguel, that pen (over there) is Michael's.
But the article is used to make an emphatic distinction.
esta pluma es la mia (la de usted, la de Miguel), this pen (not the
other) is the one that belongs to me (to you, to Michael}.
126. Regular Verbs: First, Second, and Third Con-
jugations. Study §§ 207-212.
127. Orthographic Changes that occur in the inflection
of both regular and irregular verbs. Study §§ 213-219
and § 226.
Exercise XXV
A. i. Saque Vd. la pobre mosca del agua en que ha caido.
2. Averigiie" ayer la raz6n de la conducta de ella. 3. Tu
tio y el nuestro son amigos intimos del padre de ellos. 4. Co-
nozco a su primo de Vd. 5. Pague Vd. las cuentas que nos
trajeron 1 el sastre y la lavandera, y cojamos el tranvia para ir
al despacho. 6. Temamos al hombre que no ama a su
patria. 7. Esta casa es mia ; pague" seis mil duros por ella.
8. Tu tema, el de Carlos, y el mio no tienen las mismas faltas.
9. Creyendo falsas las noticias de la muerte de ella, mis sobrinas
no me dijeron2 nada del asunto. 10. Si yerro en lo que
digo,3 corrijan Vds. los pormenores de mirelacion. n. Dis-
tingamos lo bianco de lo negro. 12. Las aguas hirvientes
bulleron en torno del nadador, y pronto desapareci6. 13. No
arguyamos en favor de semejante sistema. 14. Rece Vd.
por el alma del difunto. 15. El capitan se retir6 porque
LESSON XXVI 131
muchos de los suyos habian caido, heridos por las balas de los
enemigos. 16. Continue Vd. su obra segun el plan original,
y no la varie en nada. 17. Este aceite huele mal. 18. No
delincamos, quebrando esta ley antigua. 19. Venzan los
soldados a los enemigos de la patria, y sus conciudadanos los
alabaran. 20. Lo mio no es lo tuyo.
B. i. My cousins thought that the news of his death was false.*
2. The tailor and the laundress brought their bills yesterday;5
let-us-pay them. 3. This letter is ours; that-one is John's.
4. (Let) the soldier conquer the enemy of his country. 5. Let-
us-ascertain now the reason of their behavior. 6. This theme
is mine ; let-us-correct the mistakes in it. 7. Your nieces and
his err in what they say.6 8. Let them not vary their work in
any-way ; Charles is contimrng his according-to our original plan.
9. Let them pray for the soul of the soldier who has fallen.
10. The captain praised his-men, because they had (imfier/.}
conquered the enemy. n. I distinguish what-is-mine from
what-is-yours. 12. I do not argue in favor of that system, be-
cause I do not know the details of it. 13. John has Peter's hat,
Peter has mine, and I have John's. 14. The soldiers burnished
the metal of their weapons. 15. With my story I drew7 (pret.}
Charles from his melancholy. 16. Let our fellow-citizens know *
us, and they will say9 that we love our country. 17. These
flowers are ours and not his ; they smell good.10
1 Pret. of traer. 2 ' told.' 3 ' I say." 4 Say: ' thought false the news
of his death.' 5 put the adverb immediately after the verb. 6 dicen,
7 Use sacar. 8 conozcan. 9 dirdn. 1° bien.
LESSON XXVI
128. Demonstrative Adjectives.
este (-a, -os, -as), this.
ese (-a, -os, -as), that.
aquel (aquella, -os, -as), that.
132 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. A demonstrative adjective regularly precedes its noun : esta mujef,
'this woman.'
129. Este denotes what is near the speaker ; ese, what is
near the uerson addressed ; and aquel, what is remote from
both. In reference to time, este denotes present time ; ese, a
near period ; and aquel, remote time.
esta pluma yic yo tengo, this pen aquella pluma que 61 tiene, that
which 1 have. pen which he has.
esa pluma que tu tienes, that pen esta semana, this week,
which you have. ese mes, that month.
aquel ano, that (remote) year.
130. Demonstrative Pronouns.
e"ste (-a, -os, -as), this (one). esto, this.
e"se (-a, -os, -as), that (one). eso, that.
aque"! (aque"lla, -os, -asyx that aquello, that,
(one).
The masculine and feminine forms take the accent; the
neuter (esto, eso, aquello) do not. The neuter pronouns do
not represent a noun, but a whole phrase, sentence, or idea
(compare with ello).
aquella casa es mds alta que e"sta, that house is taller than this one.
no me gustan estas manzanas ; prefiero aqu611as, I do not like these
apples ; I prefer those (over there).
e"sos son mios, those (near you) are mine,
^crees esto? do you believe this (which I have just told)?
no comprendo eso, I do not understand that (which you have just
told me),
aquello parece imposible, that (affair of which we are told) seems
impossible.
a. Este sometimes means «the latter,' and aquel* the former.'
b. The English pronoun 'that ' (not denoting a specific object) is esto,
when it denotes what has to do with the speaker: «Jcrees esto? 'do you
LESSON XXVI 133
believe that (which T have just told you) ? ' An unemphatic ' that ' is often
not to be expressed in Spanish: sera magnlfico, 'that will be fine.'
c. In correspondence, en (de, a) e"sta means 'in (from, to) the writer's
town,' and en (de, a) 6sa means ' in (from, to) the correspondent's town,'
ciudad, ' town,' or plaza,1 ' market,' being understood : sali ayer de esa y
llegu£ hoy a e"sta, ' I left your town yesterday, and arrived here to-day.
131. Before a relative clause, and before a phrase introduced
by de, the definite article is generally used instead of a demon-
strative or personal pronoun.2
el que desea mucho siempre es pobre, he who desires much, is always
poor,
esta muchacha es la que usted buscaba, this girl is the one (that)
you were looking for.
aquellos caballos son los que vimos ayer, those horses are the ones
(that) we saw yesterday.
lo que dice es verdad, what (or that which; he says, is true.
el de la barba, the one with the beard.
la pluma de acero y la de oro, the steel pen and the gold one (lit.,
' the pen of steel and that of gold ').
el perro de usted y el de su amigo, your dog and that of your friend
(your dog and your friend's).
lo de ayer, the affair of yesterday.
a. The demonstrative adjective aquel may replace the article. This
occurs often when the following relative is the object of a preposition.
aquella d quien he escrito la carta, the one to whom I have written the
letter.
aquel de la capa verde, that one with the green cloak,
aquello de ayer, that affair of yesterday.
1 In Mexico, plaza often means ' village,' or ' small town.'
2 When thus used, el is sometimes called a pronoun, but it seems best to
call it an adjective (the article) when it limits the application of an adjective, a
phrase, or a clause, used substantively : as in el bianco, ' the white one ' ; el de
la capa verde, ' the one with the green cloak ' , el que vino ayer, ' the one that
tame yesterday.' Note the same use of the adjective aquel, given below in <j.
134 SPANISH GRAMMAR
132. Radical-changing Verbs. — First Class. Study
§§ 221-228.
Exercise XXVI
A. i. <jNo entiende Vd. lo que prueba este argumento? —
Si, pero no lo creo bastante fuerte. 2. Hay dos manzanas
maduras en este plato : esta es la mia y aquella es la de Juan.
3. Este invierno nieva muchisimo y hiela muy a menudo.
4. Cuentenos Vd. lo que aconteci6 ayer tarde. 5. Al pre*
sente llueve en e"sta y a menudo truena ; espero que haga buen
tiempo en e"sa. 6. El bibliotecario desea que Vds. le devuel-
van el libro que les prest6 esta manana. 7. Los historia-
dores nos recuerdan los hechos de los que eran personajes
principales en el tiempo pasado. 8. Aunque el soldado se
defiende con atrevimiento heroico, no vencera al enemigo
poderoso que le acomete. 9. Despie"rtate, Enrique, ya son
las ocho. 10. Como me duelen la cabeza y las muelas, no
pienso salir hoy. n. <iQue piensan los Franceses y los
Rusos de la nueva coalici6n entre los Ingleses y los Alemanes?
12. Nuestra madre piensa siempre en nosotros cuando estamos
ausentes. 13. No es la vanidad lo que mueve a esta mujer,
sino su terquedad. 14. El duque de Jicara es aquel de quien
hablamos : desciende de un guerrero celebre de la Edad Media.
15. A causa de la fiebre amarilla el eje"rcito americano pierde
muchos hombres en Cuba. 16. Nuestras hermanas vier-
ten un raudal de lagrimas cuando piensan en su buena tia.
17. Esta criada y la de la nariz remangada no son bonitas, pero
son hacendosas. 18. El que no guarda las leyes humanas,
no obedece tampoco las leyes divinas, y pierde la estimaci6n de
sus compatriotas.
B. i. He has a toothache and is shedding a lot of tears.
2. We hope that our friends are thinking of us when we are absent
in the ] Philippines.2 3. They do not understand what-you-say 8 ;
tell them what happened today. 4. I awake always al six o'clock
LESSON XXVII 135
in 4 the morning. 5. What do you think of the coalition between
the French and the Russians? 6. This historian is one l of those
who recall to us the deeds of heroic personages of the Middle Ages.
7. This is the book that I lent to Charles ; the-one-that-you-have is
John's ; and that-one on the table is Mary's. 8. He who attacks
well defends himself well. 9. Vanity and obstinacy move that
woman (of-whom-you-speak), and the one with the snub nose also.
10. The Duke of Tetudn is-descended (pres. indie.*) from the warrior
of whom the historians have spoken so often. 11. Your maid is
the one of whom we were speaking. 12. The librarian does not
desire me to return5 the book today. 13. It is snowing or rain-
ing all-the-time 6 in this-town ; we hope that the weather is good in
yours. 14. We do not mean to go out when there-is-thunder.7
15. Prove your argument, and we shall believe it strong enough.
16. Those who do not obey the human laws, do not observe the
divine laws either, and they lose the respect of all their compatriots.
1 Omit. 2 Filipinas. 8 eso. 4 de. 6 Say : " that I return," using
pres. subj. 6 siempre. 7 Use tronar in the pres. indie.
LESSON XXVII
133. Relative Pronouns.
que, who, which, that. quien, who.
el cual and el que, who, which. cuanto, all that.
a. A relative pronoun agrees in gender and number with its antecedent,
b. A relative pronoun is sometimes omitted in English, but never in Span-
ish : ' the man I saw ' = ' the man that (whom) I saw,' el hombre que vi.
c. An English relative clause sometimes ends with a preposition; in
Spanish the preposition must precede the pronoun it governs : * the house
that we live in ' = ' the house in which we live,' la casa en que vivimos.
134. Que, 'who, which, that,' is invariable, and as subject
or object of a verb it may refer to persons or things ; it is the
most common of the Spanish relative pronouns.
136 SPANISH GRAMMAR
la muchacha que cose, the girl la facilidad con que escribe, the
that is sewing. ease with which he writes.
el indio ^ue l mataron, the Indian la viuda, que amaba tiernamente
whom thev killed. a su marido, le olvid6 en breve,
los libros que estan sobre la mesa, « the widow who dearly loved
the books that are on the table. her husband soon forgot him.'
a. After a preposition, que refers to things, and quien (quienes) to
persons.
la casa en que vivo, the house in el hombre d quien escribi, the
which I live. man to whom I wrote.
135. el cual (la cual, los cuales, las cuales, lo cual),
el que (la que, los que, las que, lo que), who, which.
The masculine and feminine forms refer to persons or things :
the neuter forms refer only to a whole phrase, sentence, or idea.
Instead of que, either el cual (la cual, etc.) or el que (la
que, etc.) is regularly used in cases of ambiguity, emphasis, or
the separation of antecedent and relative.
he escrito £ la hija del senor Martinez, la cual est£ enferma, ' I have
written to Mr. Martinez' daughter, who is ill.'
hal!6 en el bolsillo cincuenta pesos en moneda de oro y plata, los
cuales (los que) di d mi padre, I found in the purse fifty dollars in
gold and silver coin, which I gave to my father.
el profesor me escribe que te comportas bien, lo cual (lo que) me
agrada muchisimo, your master (teacher) writes me that you behave
well, which pleases me greatly.
a. Moreover, el cual or el que is generally used when the relative is
governed by por or sin,2 or by a preposition of two or more syllables. After
a compound preposition, el cual is preferable to el que.
las razones por las cuales (las que) se decidi6, the reasons on account
of which he decided.
1 Note the omission of a, although que refers to a specific person.
2 In referring to persons, quien may be used with por and $iu.
LESSON XXVII 137
la ciudad hacia la cual (la que) marchaba el eje*rcito, the city toward
which the army was marching.
el edificio en frente del cual me estaba esperando mi amigo, the building
in front of which my friend was awaiting me.
b. Lo cual or lo que is regularly used as the neuter relative ; que is
rarely neuter : le prest6 todos mis libros, lo cual (lo que) le di6 mucho
placer, ' I lent him all my books, which pleased him greatly.' For the
use of lo que, meaning ' that which, what,' see Demonstrative Pronouns,
§I3L
c. There is usually little choice between el cual and el que, except that
el cual is used the oftener in literary language.
REMARK. — It should be noted that el que has two meanings, 'who'
(as explained above) or 'he who' (as explained in § 131). In the first
case, the article modifies only the relative pronoun; in the second case it
modifies the entire relative clause.
136. Radical-changing Verbs. — Second and Third
Classes. Study §§ 229-234.
Exercise XXVII
A. i. Prefiero que muramos a que no sacudamos el yugo
del extranjero. 2. El hombre que no se arrepiente de sus
pecados no se convierte jamas en buen cristiano. 3. Son-
rie"ndose, el soldado, sin la ayuda del cual yo no hubiera esca-
pado del peligro, parti6 para la ciudad. 4. Yo no hubiera
creido que consintieran sus hermanas de Vd. en la proposici6n
de quedarse aqui, la cual les hizo1 sti tio. 5. En el presente
de indicative y de subjuntivo, asi como en el singular del
imperative, erguir pertenece a dos conjugaciones : podemos
decir yergo, yerga, yergue 6 irgo, irga, irgue. 6. Sentiria
muchisimo que Vd. no durmiese bien esta noche. 7. Yo no
concibo que Vd. pida tanto dinero por una cosa que no
cuesta mucho. 8. De esta fuente el agua sale hirviendo.
p. Tengo una pluma-tintero, sin la cual no podria apuntar las
138 SPANISH GRAMMAR
cosas que advierto. 10. Las hijas de mi tia con las cualea
hablabamos ayer no refieren chismes a sus vecinas. n. Los
mozos se despidieron de su madre y siguieron a su hermano
mayor a la guerra. 12. El muchacho a quien hemos dado
el premio no miente nunca. 13. Este es un refran espanol :
" Medio mundo se rie del otro medio, y yo solo me rio del
mundo entero." 14. El herido no gimi6, lo cual me sor-
prendi6. 15. Los rayos del sol hieren los cristales de la
ventana y aclaran el interior del aposento. 16. Los tertu-
lianos que estaban reunidos junto a la puerta dejaron entrar a
Maria, la hija mayor del conde, a la cual el duque conducia por
la mano. 1 7. Las naranjas de que hablabais no estan madu-
ras, lo que nos obliga a botarlas. 18. 6ste es el arbol debajo
del cual hemos hallado las monedas. 19. Aunqne se vista de
seda la mona, mona se queda. 20. Este muchacho rine
siempre con la hermana de su amiguito Carlos, la cual es una
nina discola. 21. Si consiguiese hallar un buen libro, lo
leeria hoy.
B. I . The duke does not conceive how 2 Mary should quarrel
(pres. sul>j.) with her brother. 2. The guests did not consent
to the proposition of remaining near the window. 3. If the count
succeeds in escaping from the peril, he will laugh at the whole world.
4. This is the tree near which the Christians were assembled.
5. The water is boiling and the sunbeam is striking it. 6. I do
not talk gossip and I smile at the sins of my brother, which sur-
prises my aun^s neighbors, who are always gossiping and lying.
7. Let us take leave of the wounded-man ; he slept well yesterday
and he is not moaning tonight. 8. The soldier repented and
became-converted into a 3 good Christian. 9. Yergue and irgue
belong to the imperative of erguir, which in the singular of the
subjunctive has irga and yerga. 10. Charles's elder sister, who
is under the tree, dresses well. n. Let us follow the soldier to
the city toward which the army is marching. 12. The man did
not consent to the proposition which the count made him ; he pre-
ferred to die. 13. Never lie, and always repent of your sins.
LESSON XXVIII 139
14. This is a Spanish proverb : " Although the monkey dressed in
silk, she remained a3 monkey." 15- The prize which we are
giving to the boy does not cost much. 16. We started for the
city, which obliged them to follow us. 17. The soldiers who
found the books gave them to the men to whom they belonged.
1 8. We threw away the oranges which were not ripe; the lads
regretted it, although it did not surprise them. 19. If I asked*
for (imperf. subj.} money, without which I should not be able to
start for the city, you would laugh. 20. This is the fountain under
which the boy found the book and the coins.
1 ' made.' 2 que. 8 Omit.
LESSON XXVIII
137. Quien (quienes), 'who,' in modern Spanish refers only
to persons or personified things.
(1) After a preposition,1 quien is used instead of que, in
referring to persons ; as in el amigo de quien hablamos ' the
friend of whom we are speaking.'
(2) When the subject or the direct object of a verb, quien
either introduces a clause which is not restrictive of the ante-
cedent, or it includes its antecedent.
vi a tu senor padre, quien me lo cont6 todo, I saw your father, who
told me all.
me lo cont6 todo tu senor padre, a quien vi poco ha, your father,
whom I saw a short while ago, told me all.
quien te adula te agravia, he who flatters you, insults you.
no tengo a quien dirigirme, I have not any one to whom to apply.
Cf. vf al hombre que te lo cont6 todo, ' I saw the man who ' (restric-
tive) Hold you all.'
1 After a compound preposition, el cual is preferable to quien.
140 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. Quien sometimes serves to indicate the number of its antecedent
or the fact that the antecedent is a person.
me tope" con el abuelo de estos ninos, quien los buscaba en todas partes,
I ran across the grandfather of these children, who was looking for
them everywhere.
ayer vi al dueno de la casa, quien esta en esta ciudad, yesterday I saw
the owner of the house, who is in this city.
b. Quien is equivalent to either one of the two el que's (see §§ 131
and 135).
quien (el que) calla otorga, he who is silent gives consent.
Hame" a un mozo, a quien (al que) entregue" la carta, I called a waiter,
to whom I gave the letter.
But in colloquial language, quien is rarely used as the subject or the direct
object of a verb, save in a few proverbial expressions ; in its stead el cual
or el que is used.
c. Correlative quien . . . quien means ' one . . . another ' : quien
lloraba, quien gemia, ' one was weeping, another was groaning,' or 'some
were weeping and some were groaning.'
138. Cuanto (-a, -os, -as), ' how much,' ' how many,' ' all
that,' is used as pronoun or adjective.
le ofrecf cuanto dinero tenia, ' I offered him all the money that I had.'
cuantos entraron en el buque, perecieron, all that entered the ship
perished.
139. Cuyo (-a, -os, -as), 'whose,' 'of whom,' 'of which/
is a relative possessive adjective. It agrees in gender and
number with the thing possessed, and it may refer to persons
or things.
la senora cuyas amigas han llegado, the lady whose friend? have
arrived.
an lugar de cuyo nombre no me acuerdo, a place the name of which
I do not remember.
LESSON XXVIII 141
140 The adverb donde, ' where,' is often used as equivalent
to a preposition plus a relative, and sometimes with the prepo-
sition expressed, as in la casa donde (en donde) vivo, ' the house
in which I live.'
141. Verbs with Inceptive Endings and -uir Verbs. —
Study §§ 220 and 235.
Exercise XXVIII
A. i. Agradezcamos a quien nos favorece. Siempre agra-
decemos a las personas de quienes hemos recibido favores.
2. Mariana visitar£ la casa donde naci6 el gran poeta. 3.^ No
quiere Vd. decirme el nombre del caballero cuya tarjeta de
visita la criada acaba de darle? — Si, la tarjeta lleva el nombre
del Senor Suarez, quien (or el que) escribi6 la mas interesante
novela del ano pasado. 4. Estoy pidiendo a mi librero una
novela mas corta que la suya y que no carezca de interns ; no
me importa que no instruya con tal que no me entristezca.
5. Sentiriamos muchisimo que Vd. atribuyera a este autor
defectos que no tiene. 6. No es cosa nueva calunmiar las
mejores acciones, atribuyendoles viciosas causas. 7. Los
ciudadanos pidieron que se disminuyesen las contribuciones y
que se distribuyesen mas uniformemente las cargas publicas.
8. A los tiranos no les gusta que nazcan hombres libres en
sus dominios. 9. Hay muchos proverbios espanoles como
e~stos : quien a los suyos se parece, honra merece ; nunca bien
sirve quien (or el que) con su dueno arguye ; muchas veces
quien huye del fuego da en las brasas. 10. No nos gusta
que el autor de este libro luzca tanto sus conocimientos lingiiis-
ticos. n. El discipulo merece un duro castigo, porque
su mala conducta influye en la de toda la clase. 12. Ano-
checer en un lugar significa llegar 6 estar en un lugar al empe-
zar la noche 6 antes de que anochezca completamente
142 SPANISH GRAMMAR
13. He hablado con el maestro de estos discipulos, quien
me ha dado cuantos informes deseo acerca de la conducta de
ellos. 14. Escribo al Senador Cisneros, a quien (or al que)
tengo que felicitar por su brillante discurso en pr6 de la re-
forma arancelaria. 15. <; Ha estado Vd. en la ciudad de
Waltham, donde se fabrican muy buenos relojes? — Si, como
aficionado a la relojeria, me interesa (todo) cuanto se relaciona
con esta arte. 16. En este mundo, quien l (or el que) juzga
por apariencias, hasta lo bianco le puede parecer negro.
B. i. I like that Spanish proverb: "To him who judges by
appearances even white may seem black." 2. We shall reach the
city of Waltham before night comes on. 3. The senator whom
I congratulated has just made '2 a speech : he asked that the taxes
be diminished. 4. Has the bookseller given you all the informa-
tion that you wish about the novel? 5. We do not like to have
authors displaying their faults in their books. 6. The teacher to
whom I spoke will punish the pupil for3 his bad behavior. 7. A
good man does not ascribe vicious causes to good deeds. 8. I do
not think4 that the conduct of the pupil deserves (pres. subj.} a
severe punishment. 9. Provided a man is born free, it does not
matter that he has faults. 10. There is a Spanish proverb : "Out
of the frying pan into the fire." n. (By) distributing the public
burdens, the senators will show that all relating to the needs of the
citizens interests them. 12. He who is6 fond of brilliant speeches
often judges by appearances. 13. With their teacher the pupils
have visited a house in which fine watches are made. 14. The
author whose book I have just received argues in favor of tariff
reform, but he does not influence the feelings of the citizens, be-
cause his book is wholly without interest. 15. He who argued
with his master never served him well. 16. I should be sorry
that you should argue with the poet in-order-to6 show off your
attainments. 17. Mr. Cisneros is the gentleman whom I thank-
for that favor. 18. Ask the bookseller for a book which shall
instruct (pres. subj.} us and shall not sadden us. 19. The maid
has given me the visiting card of Mr. Suarez ; he is the man
whom watch-making and all related to that art interests very much.
LESSON XXIX 143
20. I ascribe the behavior of the citizens to the taxes which the
tyrant will not diminish. 21. It is no new thing to calumniate
a man and to ascribe faults to him who hasn't any.7
1 ' if one." 2 Use hacer. 3 por. 4 Use creer. 6 estd. 6 para. 7 los.
LESSON XXIX
142. Interrogative Pronouns.
que", what. cual, which.
qui6n, who. cuanto (-a), how much.
The interrogatives take the accent in both direct and indirect
questions.
143. Que, ' what,' may be used as pronoun or adjective. As
a pronoun, it refers to things, and is neuter.
es eso? what is that?
iqu6 dijo? what did he say?
<jqu6 hora es? what time is it?
ique hombre es 6ste? what man is this?
pregunta qu6 pasajeros ban llegado, he asks what passengers have
arrived.
a. In exclamations, quo" is ' what (a) ' before an attributive, and ' how '
before a predicate adjective : j qu£ linda luna ! ' what a pretty moon ! '
jque" palido estds! 'how pale you are!' To add emphasis, tan, 'so,' or
mas, ' more,' may be placed before the attributive adjective, which then
follows its noun: jqu6 dia tan hermoso (mas hermoso) ! 'what a beau-
tiful day ! '
144. Qui&i (quienes), ' who,' is used only as a pronoun, and
refers only to persons. Interrogative ' whose ' is usually dc
quien.
144 SPANISH GRAMMAR
,fqui6n llama? who is knocking?
pregunta quie"nes eran las seSoras, he asks who the ladies were.
£de qui6n es aquella hermosa casa? whose is that beautiful house?
ide quiln es este caballo? whose horse is this? (lit., <of whom is
this horse ? ') .
145. Cual (cuales), ' which,' is chiefly used as a pronoun;
it may refer to persons or things.
I cual de las plumas quiere usted ? «: d cuales de mis amigos ha visto
which pen (lit., 'which of the usted hoy? which of my friends
pens1) do you wish? have you seen to-day?
a. Cual may be used adjectively, as in £ cual casa prefieres? < which
house do you prefer ?' but £cual de las casas prefieres? is the more
common construction.
b. When 'what' stands in the predicate, it is usually to be expressed by
cual: £cual es la fecha de la carta? 'what is the date of the letter?'
£cual es la ciudad capital de los Estados Unidos? 'what is the capital
city of the United States?' Qu6 is used if a definition is wanted: £qu6
es la filosofia griega? 'what is Greek philosophy?'
146. The interrogative possessive ciiyo, 'whose,' is little
used ; it refers only to persons, and is, as a rule, used only
in the predicate. Interrogative ' whose ' is generally de quien.
£Ciiya (better, de qui§n) es esta £cuyo (better, de quien) es aquel
casa? whose house is this? caballo? whose horse is that?
REMARK. — One does not say: £Ciiya casa habita usted? * whose
house do you occupy? 'but £cuya (de qui6n) es la casa que usted
habita?
147. Cuanto (-a) is ' how much ' ; cuantos (-as), ' how
many.' Cuanto (-a, -os, -as) may be used as adjective 01
pronoun.
icuantos hay? how many are there?
^cuanto dinero necesita usted? how much money do you need?
^cuantas vacas vendiste? how many cows did you sell?
LESSON XXIX 145
148. Irregular Verbs: IT, '(to) go,' and Venir, '(toj
come.' Study §§ 247 and 248.
a. ' Go and ' (followed by a verb) is ir a; ' come and ' is venir a.
Vaya usted a decirselo. go and tell him. venga a verlo, come and see it
149. Idiomatic Expressions.
va a Hover, it is going to rain. la nina iba creciendo, the little girl
vamos a ver, let us see. kept growing.
la noche va oscureciendo, the night iba montado en una mula, he was
keeps (is) growing darker. riding a mule.
la semana que viene, next week.
Exercise XXIX
A. i. <iQue* hora es? — Son las once y media. 2. iQue'
es la aritm£tica? — Es una de las ciencias exactas. 3. <iCual
es la mejor aritme'tica? — La del Sefior Cisneros. 4. <i Cuanto
dinero ha gastado Vd.1 esta manana? — Unos quince duros.
5. Si su primo de Vd. viniera a verme, iria con 61 a visitar al
senor catedratico en cuyas clases hemos estudiado. 6. <iDe
cual catedratico habla Vd.? — Del Senor Martinez, el que en-
sena las lenguas orientales en la Universidad Central. 7. La
noche iba oscureciendo como caminabamos montados en nues-
tras mulas, y nos parecia que iba. a Hover ; pero pronto el viento
se hizo 2 frio y los copos de nieve vinieron volando del cielo.
8. Venga lo que viniere, emprendere" esta tarea. 9. Ven-
dremos esta tarde ; aguardenos Vd. 10. iQue calle es esta?
— La calle de Alcala. n. ^Cual es el mejor modo de
dirigirme a la Puerta del Sol? — Soy extranjero; preguntelo
Vd. a ese guardia en la acera. 12. <iQuie"n es Vd.? — Soy
un turista norte-americano. 13. <[ Cuanto tiempo hace que
esta Vd. en la corte (Madrid)? — Llegue anteayer y quizas
me marche manana. 14. \ Qu6 visita mas corta ! — Pienso
volver aqui a mi regreso del Escorial y entonces ver^ lo que
146 SPANISH GRAMMAR
ahora no he visto. 15. Y <ique" le ha gustado mas £ Vd. de
lo que ha visto en Madrid? 16. Vamos a ver ; como artista,
me ha encantado el gran Museo del Prado, que en mi concepto
gana al Louvre, y como arque61ogo, la Armeria Real, cuya
colecci6n de armaduras es la mas completa que he visto,
17. Pues, venga Vd. a ver una corrida de toros ; es la diversi6n
mas esencialmente espanola, y habra una grande corrida la
semana que viene. 18. ^Quie^i es aquel hombre que va por
la calle montado en una mula? — Es un campesino. 19. j Que"
modo tan raro de pasearse ! — No es raro en Espana. 20. Sin
duda en su pais todo el mundo monta a caballo. Si Vd. fuera
al campo, veria mas mulas y asnos que caballos. 21. Ire"
a visitar algunas aldeas castellanas antes de partir de este pais.
22. <jCuya (De quie"n) es aquella casa en la esquina de esta
calle? 23. <{Cual casa? <:Quiere Vd. decir el gran palacio?
Pues, es el palacio del Duque de Villarica. 24. Venga con-
migo, iremos a llamar a la puerta, y nos dejaran entrar a ver las
hermosas pinturas de Goya que posee el duque. 25-1 Cuantas
obras maestras ha pintado ese gran pintor ! — Si, no se puede
decir cuantas. 26. Dondequiera que vaya Vd., vera las obras
de aquel insigne pintor, 6 de otros artistas mas antiguos, como
Velasquez, Murillo y Zurbaran.
B. i. Who teaches Oriental languages in the University ?
2. The professor in whose class your cousin studied ; come with me
and see him. 3. I shall go with you, if it is half-past eleven.
How many classes has the professor? 4. Ask your cousin this
evening ; I am not going to tell you how many. 5. Which tourist
arrived the-day-before-yesterday ? 6. What is a tourist? 7. The
night will soon be growing dark. 8. What a strange amusement!
Do you mean the bullfight ? We shall go and see it next week.
9. If you should go and visit a Spanish village, you would see peas-
ants going along the streets riding on mules. 10. In3 what way
do they go-about in your country? 11. They ride on horseback.
12. In Madrid everybody likes to go and visit the Museum of the
LESSON XXX 147
Prado and the Royal Armory. 13. Come what may come (i.e.
Happen what may), the strangers will take-their-way to the Puerta del
Sol. 14. To what street did you go this morning? 15. Let's
see; I went to the street on whose corner the Duke's palace is.4
16. To my mind, the Spaniards have great painters. On my return
from the country, I mean to visit the museums and see the paintings
of Velasquez and Murillo. What beautiful works those illustrious
artists have painted! 17. Yes ; wherever we may -go, we shall see
them. 1 8. Before going to the Prado, I shall come to the Puerta
del Sol. 19. What (Which) is the North American way of going-
about? We ride on horseback. We do not go riding on donkeys
and mules. 20. Who owns more paintings than the archaeologist
whose collection is in that house on the corner? 21. How long
have-you-been-visiting (pres. indie.} the capital? 22. It is not
going to rain ; the snow will come with the cold winds. 23. The
masterpieces in the Museum of the Prado surpass those of the Louvre.
24. Are you going to knock at the door? What a strange way of
entering a palace! 25. Perhaps we shall come tomorrow, if you
return 5 here. 26. One cannot say how-much money the strangers
are going to spend. 27. In Spain, everybody likes to see a bull-
fight. 28. What artists are older than Zurbaran? 29. What
exact sciences did you study in the classes of Mr. Cisneros?
30. How much armor is there in the Royal Armory? 31. Soon
the flakes of snow will come flying down from the sky. 32. If you
went (imperf. subj.} to the Escurial, its collections of beautiful
paintings would delight you.
1 Abbreviation of listed : cf. $ 90. 2 Pret. Indie, of hacer. 8 £>et
* Say : ' is the palace of the Duke.' 5 Radical-changing verb, ist class : vuelve.
LESSON XXX
150, Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
Alguien, 'some one,' 'somebody,' 'any one,' 'anybody,1
algo, ' something,' ' anything/ are pronouns and invariable,
Alguien refers only to persons; algo is neuter.
[48 SPANISH GRAMMAR
alguien toca a la puerta, some one is knocking at the door,
i hallaste algo? did you find something (anything)?
a. ' Not — any one,' ' not — anybody,' is no — nadie ; ' not — any-
thing ' is no — nada. See "Negation," § 165. Alguien and algo are
never combined with negatives.
151. Alguno (-a, -os, -as), ' some,' 'any,' 'a few,' is used as
adjective or pronoun.
algiin l dia, some day.
algunos de los amigos de usted, some of your friends.
tiene algunos libros muy raros, he has a few very rare books.
at « Not — any ' is usually no — ninguno or no — alguno (after noun).
b. In partitive expressions, unemphatic 'some' and 'any,' used as
adjectives, are generally not to be expressed in Spanish.
tengo pan, pero no tengo mante- quiero comprar manzanas y na«
quilla, I have some bread, but ranjas, I wish to buy some ap-
I haven't any butter. pies and oranges.
In answer to a question, 'some* or 'any' is then expressed by a personal
pronoun object, or the noun is repeated.
£no tiene Vd. peras? haven't you any pears? hoy no las tengo, I haven't
any to-day.
£ tiene Vd. vino? have you any wine? no tengo vino (or vino no tengo),
I haven't any.
ihay uvas? are there any grapes? si, las hay, yes, there are some,
ihay pan? is there any bread? no lo hay (or no hay pan), there isn't
any.
152. Unos (-as) means ' some ' :
tengo unos quinientos pesos, I have some five hundred dollars.
Unos sometimes seems to mean little more than ' a pair of.'
el elefante tiene unas orejas enormes, the elephant has * a pail of
enormous ears.
1 See " Apocopation of Adjectives," § 66.
LESSON XXX 149
153. Nadie, 'no one,' 'nobody/ 'not any one/ 'not anybody/
nada, 'nothing/ 'not anything/ are pronouns and invariable.
Nadie refers only to persons ; nada is neuter. See " Negation,"
§ 165.
nadie ha venido hoy, no one has come to-day
nada veo, I do not see anything.
154. Ninguno (-a, -os, -as), ' none/ ' no/ ' not any/ is used
as adjective or pronoun.
ninguna casa, no (not any) house,
ninguno de los ninos, none of the children.
a. English ' no,' « not any/ is often expressed by no, ' not/ before the
verb.
no tengo tiempo, I have no (not any) time.
no tiene enemigos, he has no (not any) enemies.
155. Mucho (-a), ' much,' muchos (-as), ' many/ is used as
adjective or pronoun.
mucho tiempo, much (a great deal of) time.
muchos anos, many years.
muchos han partido, many have left.
a. • Very much ' is muchisimo (rather than muy mucho).
156. Poco (-a), ' little ' (meaning ' a small quantity '), pocos
(-as), ' few/ is used as adjective or pronoun.
tengo poco dinero, I have little money,
pocos han venido, few have come.
a. Un poco de is ' a little ' : tengo un poco de vino, « I have a little
wine ' ; of. tengo poco vino y mucha leche, ' I have a little (i.e. only
& little) wine and much milk.'
157. Todo (-a, -os, -as), 'all, 'every/ is used as adjective 01
pronoun.
150 SPANISH GRAMMAR
todo aquel dia, all that day. todos los hombres, all the men.1
toda mujer, every woman. todas las noches, every night.
todo el mundo, everybody. todos lo dicen, all say so.
a. 'All,' meaning « the whole,' is todo (-a, -os, -as) el (la, los, las) : toda
la semana, ' all week.'
b. The neuter pronoun todo means ' all,' ' everything ' : todo es vanidad
en este mundo, ' all is vanity in this world.'
158. Mismo (-a, -os, -as), 'same,' 'very,7 'self,' 'himself
(' herself,' etc.), is used as an adjective.
el mismo dia, the same day.
el exceso mismo de mi felicidad me matara, the very excess of my
happiness will kill me.
61 mismo me lo dijo, he told me so himself.
creo que es usted la misma virtud, I believe that you are virtue itself.
Tn the sense of ' self,' it often follows the noun or pronoun.
a. El mismo (la misma, los mismos, las mismas, lo mismo), 'the
same,' is used as pronoun.
159. Ambos (-as), los dos (las dos), 'both (of),' are used as
adjectives or pronouns.
tengo las dos (ambas) manos heladas, both of my hands are frozen,
nos ama a los dos, he loves us both.
160. Cada, 'each,' is used as adjective, and cada uno (-a) 01
cada cual, ' each (one),' as pronoun (cada is invariable).
cada vez, each time.
di un peso a cada uno (cada cual), I gave each one a dollai.
161. Otro (-a, -os, -as), ' other,' ' another,' is used as adjective
or pronoun ; it does not admit the indefinite article.
1 Todos los hombrea is ' all men ' (generally speaking) if the noun denotes
all of its kind.
LESSON XXX 151
el otro dia, the other day. otra semana, another week,
quiero otro caballo, I wish an- no tengo otros, I have no others
other horse. (I haven't any others).
Note the position of otro in otros muchos, ' many others,' otros tres,
'three others,' etc.
162. Uno (-a) y otro (-a), 'both' (in the sense of 'each'), uno
(-a) li otro (-a), ' either (one),' ni uno (-a) ni otro (-a), ' neither
(one)/ 'not either (one),' el uno — el otro (la una — la otra),
' each other,' los unos — los otros (las unas — las otras), ' one
another,' are used as adjectives or pronouns.
personas de uno y otro sexo, persons of both sexes.
aceptare" uno u otro, I will accept either (one).
no quiero ni uno ni otro, I wish neither (one), or I do not wish
either (one).
se burlan el uno del otro, they make sport of each other.
163. Tal (tales), ' such,' ' such a,' is used as adjective or pro-
noun ; it is never followed by the indefinite article.
tales hombres, such men. tal muchacho, such a boy.
a. Un tal is ' one,' « a certain '; el tal is ' the said ' : me lo cont6 un tal
Manzanares, * one (a certain) Manzanares told me '; el tal G6mez era un
plcaro, ' the said Gomez was a rascal.'
164. Cosa, ' thing,' is used in the formation of many com-
pound indefinite pronouns, which occur frequently in colloquial
language.
alguna cosa, something, anything.
ninguna cosa or cosa alguna, nothing, not anything.
la misma cosa, the same thing.
otra cosa, something else, anything else.
tal cosa, such a thing, etc.1
1 Also in interrogative que cosa, ' what thinj.*
152 SPANISH GRAMMAR
165. Negation. — The pronouns nadie, 'no one,' iiada,
'nothing,' ninguno, ' none,' and the adverbs ni — ni, ' neither — -
nor,' nunca and jamas, 'never/1 and tampoco, 'not either,'
require the verb to be made negative when they follow the
verb. They are negative in themselves if they precede the
verb or if no verb is expressed.2
no temo nada or nada temo, I su hijo no es, ni serA nunca nadie,
fear nothing (I do not fear her son is not nor ever will be
anything). anything.
no tengo ni pluma ni papel or ni no quiero aquel caballo tampoco
pluma ni papel tengo, I have or tampoco quiero aquel ca-
neither pen nor paper (I ballo, I do not wish that horse
haven't either pen or paper). either.
no le vi nunca or nunca le vi, I i Quien viene? — Nadie. Who is
never saw him. coming? — No one.
nadie se acordaba de 61, ni 61 se £Qu6 dice Vd.? — Nada. What
acordaba de nadie, no one are you saying? — Nothing.
remembered him, nor did he
remember any one.
a. As a rule, negative pronouns and adverbs are used instead of positive
ones if the sentence is in any way negative, or expects a negative answer,
or if the pronoun or adverb follows a comparative.
es inutil decir nada, it is useless to say anything.
sin olvidarte nunca, without ever forgetting you.
I hay nada mds sublime ? is there anything more sublime ?
el viejo parece mds feliz que nunca, the old man seems happier than
ever.
b. In a negative sentence, alguno may be used instead of ninguno, in
which case alguno follows its noun : no tiene enemigo alguno, ' he has
no enemy.'
1 ' Never* is commonly expressed by nunca. Jama's after a positive verb is
positive : <? ha visitado Vd. jama's a Mejico ? ' have you ever visited Mexico ?'
2 In colloquial language, the negative (except no) usually follows the verb,
t.g. no tengo nada is more common than nada tengo, ' I have nothing,' or ' J
haven't anything.'
LESSON XXX 153
166. Irregular Verbs.
Querer, « (to) wish; and poder, < (to) be able (can) '
Study §§ 242 and 243.
167. Idiomatic Expressions.
el nino puede caerse, the child 61 puede mas que yo, he is strongei
may fall. than I.
no puedo mas, I can't do any more, <J quiere usted venir conmigo ? will
I am played out. you come with me ?
no pndo menos de sonreirse, he la quiere mucho, he is very fond
couldn't help smiling. of her.
puede que, it is possible that. <» que quiere decir esto ? what does
this mean ?
Exercise XXX
A. i. Alguien tiene que responder del resultado. 2. Al-
gun dia nos veremos frente a frente y podremos ver quie"n de
los dos puede mas. 3. <J Tiene Vd. cambio por un peso? —
jiCuanto necesita Vd. pagar? — Una peseta (veinte centavos).
— Aqui tiene Vd. — Muchas gracias. 4. Nadie sabe lo que ha
de suceder maiiana. 5. Ninguno de los cuatro ninos sabe leer
6 escribir. 6. Mas vale poco que nada. 7. 6l y yo iba-
mos en el mismo tren. 8. Este retrato es el mismo Antonio.
9. Ambos contendientes perecieron. Cada uno pele6 con valor ;
otro caballero quiso intervenir y sali6 herido. 10. Pasemos
a otra cosa. n. Nadie dudaba del e"xito. 12. <iPodria
Vd. facilitarme su diccionario? — Si, pero quisiera que Vd. se
sirviera devolve"rmelo cuanto antes. 13. La maestra quisiera
a cada nina, si estudiase sus lecciones. 14. <J Quiere Vd.
darme un poco de pan y queso? 15. Todos los caminos
llevan a Roma. 16. Hay muchisimos alfileres en esta caja,
pero no los puedo hallar nunca. 17. Ellos mismos no quisie-
ron venir, porque yo no pude convidarlos. Tal cosa jamas se ha
154 SPANISH GRAMMAR
visto. 1 8. Estaba en la sala un tal Herreros. 19. No ea
oro todo lo que reluce. 20. Sobre todo, £1 no quiso hablar
con nadie. 21. No podemos mas : estamos mas fatigados que
nunca. 22. A nadie quiere recibir el hombre nialo : ni sus
amigos, ni sus parientes pueden entrar a verle. 23. ,: Hay nada
mas interesante que el Don Quijote de Cervantes? 24. No
podemos menos de quejarnos cuando consideramos nuestra
condici6n desgraciada. 25. Juan ao sabe lo que quiere
decir esto ; ni su hermano tampoco. 26. £ Quien le ha dicho
a Vd. que no queremosa nuestros padres? — Nadie. 27. No
tenemos duda alguna acerca del £xito de la empresa. 28. Sin
duda alguna no pudieramos derrotar al enemigo, si no tuvie"se-
mos un fuerte eje"rcito. 29. Es posible que haya algo en la
cesta, pero no podemos hallar nada. 30. Alguien llama a la
puerta: sin duda algunos de nuestros amigos quieren entrar.
31. Si quieres ser bien servido, sirvete a ti mismo. 32. Yo
podria hacer ese favor, pero no quisiera molestar a mi amigo.
33. Puede que llueva manana. 34. Ahorraremos nuestro
dinero por lo que pudiere tronar. 35- £ Quie"n habla? — Nadie.
B. I.I can see each (every) gentleman in the room ; John can-
not see each (every) one of them. 2. Who doubts the result?
Nobody ; we can all answer for the outcome. 3. We need twenty
cents. That1 is little. Yes; but a little is better than nothing.
4. Can there be anything more wretched than the condition of the
said Herreros? 5. We are played out: do you know what that
means ? 6. One or another of the armies will be able to rout the
enemy. Of this I have no doubt whatever. 7. Some of our enter-
prises could not have any success. 8. We do not wish to com-
plain because we have no gold ; and everybody knows that all is
not gold that glistens. 9. It is possible that you may be well
served if you serve yourself. 10. I should not like to do a favor
for Antonio, nor for John, either. 1 1 . This gentleman could fight
well, if he had another opponent. 12. Never have I been able to
find any pins in your box. 13. Both wished to go with us in the
same train ; but we could invite neither. 14. We should like you
LESSON XXXI 155
to-be-kind-enough to pass to something else. 15. The men could
not help saying that they had no cheese and that they desired but
little bread. 16. Is anybody knocking at the door? Yes ; some
of our friends wish to come in and see us, but we shall be unable to
receive them. 17. It is possible that nobody may-wish (pres.
subj.} to do us that favor. 18. Each of the roads leads to Rome.
19. The said Herreros says that he has seen a certain Sanchez and
another man with him. 20. Could you oblige me with twenty
pesetas? — Many thanks. I shall pay you as soon as possible.
21. I should not like to see my enemy face to face; one or other
of us might perish. 22. Save your money against contingencies.2
23. Both of the contestants fight valorously. Which of the two is
the stronger? 24. I cannot say what will happen tomorrow if
you do not study your lessons. 25. They wished to return us our
box, but they could not find it. 26. We might enter into the
room if we wished to speak with somebody. 27. The enemies
were fighting; our friends sought3 to interfere, and came-out (of it)
with-a-wound.4
1 eso. % Cf. A 34 . 3 Use querer. 4 heridos : cf. A 9.
LESSON XXXI
168. Cardinal Numerals.
cero, o. nueve, g.
uno (-a),1 i. diez, 10.
dos, 2. once, 11.
tres, 3. doce, 12.
cuatro, 4. trece, 13.
cinco, 5. catorce, 14.
seis, 6. quince, 15.
siete, 7. diez y seis,2 16.
ocho, 8. diez y siete, 17.
1 See I 66.
* These numbers are also written in one word, as, diecise'is, veintiuno
treiiitaiuno, etc.
I56
SPANISH GRAMMAR
ciento,1 100,
ciento y uno, 101.
ciento y diez, 1 10.
doscientos (-as), 200.
trescientos (-as), 300.
cuatrocientos (-as), 400,
quinientos (-as), 500.
seiscientos (-as), 600.
setecientos (-as\a 700.
ochocientos (-as), 800.
novecientos (-as),2 900.
mil, 1,000.
mil y ciento, 1,100.
mil y doscientos (-as), 1,200.
dos mil, 2,000.
cien1mil, 100,000.
doscientos (-as) mil, 200,000.
un mill6n, 1,000,000.
dos millones, 2,000,000.
#. The cardinals are invariable, except uno (-a), -cientos (-as) in
the combinations from doscientos (-as) to novecientos (-as) inclusive,
and quinientos (-as): doscientos hombres, 'two hundred men'; dos-
cientas mujeres, 'two hundred women'; doscientas mil personas, 'two
hundred thousand persons.'
b. In compound numerals, uno drops the final vowel before a mascu-
line noun: treinta y un soldados, 'thirty-one soldiers'; but cincuenta
y una casas, ' fifty-one houses.'
c. Mill6n takes un, but ciento and mil do not: cien estudiantes,
'one hundred students'; mil pesos, 'one thousand dollars'; un mill6n
de pesetas, ' one million pesetas.'
But ciento un, doscientos un, etc., may occur before mil : ciento un
.nil trescientos veinte y cinco, 101,325.
d. The conjunction y is often used to connect the last, of a series of nu-
merals with the foregoing numeral : mil doscientos ochenta y cinco, 1 285.
diez y ocho,
1 8.
diez y nueve,
19.
veinte,
20.
veinte y uno,
21.
veinte y dos,
22.
veinte y tres,
23-
veinte y cuatro,
24.
veinte y cinco,
25-
veinte y seis,
26.
veinte y siete,
27.
veinte y ocho,
28.
veinte y nueve,
29.
treinta,
30.
treinta y uno,
31.
cuarenta,
40.
cincuenta,
5°-
sesenta,
60.
setenta,
70.
ochenta,
80.
noventa,
90.
l See § 69.
* In colloquial language one sometimes hears sietecientos and nuevecientoa
LESSON XXXI
157
e. Counting by hundreds is not carried above nine hundred in Spanish;
beginning with ten hundred mil is used : mil ochocientos noventa y
tres, 1893.
/ As substantives, ciento or centenar, mil or millar, are used; but
only ciento and millar are regularly used to express rate : centenares de
caballos, 'hundreds of horses '; dos pesetas el ciento, 'two pesetas per
hundred'; miles de aves, 'thousands of birds'; a peso el millar, 'at
one dollar per thousand.' l
169. Ordinal Numerals.
primero, -a (primo, -a), ist.
segundo, -a, 2d.
tercero, -a (tercio, -a), 3d.
cuarto, -a, 4th.
quinto, -a, 5th.
sexto, -a or sesto, -a, 6th.
sSptimo, -a or se"timo, -a, ;th.
octavo, -a, 8th.
noveno, -a (nono, -a), 9th.
dScimo, -a, loth,
undecimo, -a, nth.
duodecimo, -a, 1 2th.
dScimo tercio, -a,2 i3th.
dScimo cuarto, -a, i4th.
de'cimo quinto, -a, i5th.
dScimo sexto, -a, i6th.
dScimo sSptimo, -a, lyth.
de'cimo octavo, -a, i8th.
dScimo nono, -a, I9th.
vigSsimo, -a, 2oth.
vigSsimo primo, -a, 2ist.
vige"simo segundo, -a, 22d.
vigSsimo tercio, -a, 23d.
1 In mercantile language uno is usually omitted, as here, before the name ol
the coin.
2 These are also written decimotercio, decimocuarto, etc.
3 The use of the ordinals in Spanish is daily becoming less. It is hardly an
exaggeration to say that only trained persons know them from ' twentieth ' on.
trigSsimo, -a,
cuadrage"simo, -a,
quincuag§simo, -a,
sexag£simo, -a,
septuagSsimo, -a,
octoge"simo, -a,
nonage"simo, -a,
centSsimo, -a,
centSsimo primo, -a,
centSsimo und6cimo, -a,
ducente"simo, -a,
trecent6simo, -a,
cuadragentesimo, -a,
quingentesimo, -a,
sescent6simo, -a,
septeng6simo, -a,
octogent^simo, -a,
nonagentSsimo, -a,
millsimo, -a,
dosmilSsimo, -a,
diezmil6simo, -a,
millonlsimo, -a,
3oth.
40th.
5oth.
6oth.
70th.
Both.
9oth.
looth.
lOISt.
nith.
2OOth.
300th.
4Ooth.
5ooth.
6ooth,
yooth.
Sooth.
900th.
i,oooth.
2,oooth.
io,oooth.
i,ooo,oooth.8
I $8 SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. The shorter forms, primo, tercio, and nono are used in compound
ordinal numerals. Sexto and sSptimo are usually pronounced and often
written sesto and setimo. For the apocopation of primero and tercero
see § 66.
b. The ordinals agree in gender and number with the noun they
modify. A single ordinal may precede or follow its noun; a compound
ordinal regularly follows: el primer dia, «the first day'; el siflo dScimo
sexto (or el siglo diez y seis), « the sixteenth century.'
c. After primero, the cardinals are generally used in Spanish instead
of the ordinals, to specify the number of a volume, book, chapter, lesson,
century, etc. : el tomo veinte, ' the twentieth volume ' (or ' volume
twenty ') ; el siglo diez y nueve, ' the nineteenth century.'
d. The ordinals are used up to dScimo (or unde'cimo) to indicate the
order of succession of sovereigns; but from that number on the cardinals
are regularly used : Carlos quinto, ' Charles the Fifth ' ; x Leon trece,
'Leo XIII.'
e. In dates, the cardinals are used instead of the ordinals, with the ex-
ception of primero : el primero (el dos, el tres, etc.) de junio, ' the first
(the second, the third, etc.) of June.'
170. Fractional Numerals.
un medio, \. un unde'cimo, onzavo, or once-avo, TV
un tercio, £. un dozavo or doce-avo, TV
dos tercios, \ . un trezavo or trece-avo, ^.
un cuarto, £. un catorzavo or catorce-avo, fa.
tres cuartos, f . un quinzavo or quince-avo, yV
un quinto, $. un diez y seisavo (seis-avo), •£$.
un sexto, $. un diez y sietavo (siete-avo), •&.
un se"ptimo, |. un veintavo or veinte-avo, fa
uii octavo, £. un treintavo, -fa.
un noveno, $. un centSsimo or centavo, ^.
un decimo, ^. un mil^simo, To^'g*
un millon^simo, 1000000-
a. Fractional numerals may also be expressed by the ordinals with
parte, especially when a partitive expression follows or is understood:
la tercera parte de ellos, ' one-third of them.'
1 Note the omission of the article in Spanish. See § 56 (2).
LESSON XXXI 159
b. 'Half ('a half,' 'one-half,' 'half a '), as a substantive, is expressed
by la mitad; as an adjective, by medio (-a). In calculations, medio ^-a)
is used.
la mitad de mis bienes, ' one half of my goods.'
medio dia, ' half a day.'
una hora y media, ' an hour and a half.'
171. Collective Numerals.
un par, a pair. una veintena, twenty, a score.
una decena, ten. una sesentena, sixty.
una docena, a dozen. una centena or un centenar, one hundred.
una quincena, fifteen. un millar, one thousand.
a. The ending -ena may make the numeral indefinite : eg. una veintena,
some twenty, about twenty.
172. Multiplicative Numerals.
simple, single. septuple, septuple.
doble or duplicado, double.1 6ctuplo, octuple.
triple or triplicado, treble. decuple, decuple.
cuadruplo or cuadruplicado, quadruple.1 ce"ntuplo or centuplicado,
quintuple or quintuplicado, quintuple. centuple.
B^xtuplo, sextuple.
173. Numeral Phrases.
una vez, once. diez veces, ten times.
dos veces, twice. cien veces, a hundred times.
tres veces, three times (thrice). mil veces, a thousand times.
174. Irregular Verbs.
Hacer, ' (to) make,1 ' (to) do,' and decir, « (to) say,' < (to) tell.1
Study §§ 246 and 257.
1 Doble, triple, etc., may also be translated 'two-fold,1 'three-fold,' etc
There are also the forms diiplice and triplice, and cuadruple, quintuple, etc.
I6O SPANISH GRAMMAR
175. Idiomatic Expressions.
hagame usted el favor de cerrar hace de portero, he is acting as
la puerta, please shut the door. porter.
el huracan hizo temblar la casa, hace frio (calor), it is cold (warm).
the hurricane made the house hace un mes (dos meses), a month
tremble. (two months) ago.
hizo (mand6) hacer un traje, he hago construir una casa, I am
had a suit of clothes made. having a house built.
haz entrar al hombre, have the se hizo amar por todo el mundo,
man come in. he made himself loved by every-
no hagas caso de eso, never mind body.
that. se hace el tonto, he plays the
har6 por verle manana, I shall try fool.
to see him tomorrow. se dice que, dicen que, it is said
£ te hace falta dinero ? do you that, people say that.
need money ?
Exercise XXXI
A. i. Digame Vd. ^Cuantas son las partes del mundo?
2. Haga el favor de decirme su gracia (nombre). 3. Quisiera
que el me dijera cuales son sus verdaderos prop6sitos.
4. Digale que venga acd inmediatamente. 5. iQue" hace
Vd. alii ? — Estoy haciendole un cofre a Don Julian. 6. Hacia
tanto frio que se he!6 el agua en nuestro cuarto. 7. Dicen
que volvera pronto. 8. Se hace el tonto por conveniencia.
9. La torre Eiffel tiene trescientos metros de altura. <jSabe
Vd. que" anchura tiene? 10. Col6n descubri6 la America el
doce de Octubre de mil cuatrocientos noventa y dos. 1 1. Este
ano es el mil novecientos y cuatro. Por lo tanto, hace cuatro-
cientos y doce anos de dicho acontecimiento y de dicha fecha.
12. El peso tiene cien centavos, 6 diez reales de plata, 6 cinco
pesetas. 13. ^Cuantos anos tiene Vd. ? — Veinte afios.
14. Hagannos Vds. el favor de repasar dos veces la Iecci6n de
los numeros cardinales y ordinales desde uno hasta sesenta
y cuatro. 15. Un quebrado consta de dos guarismos; ei
LESSON XXXI l6l
numerador, qne es un numero cardinal, y el denominador, que
puede ser un numero ordinal. 16. El rio tiene una anehura
de quinientos pies, y tiene cien millas de largo. 1 7. Voy i.
hacerme hacer un traje. 18. Un medio mas dos quintos son
nueve decimos. 19. El nino tiene tres manzanas y media.
20. El criado estuvo aqui hace una hora y media. 21. Ha-
game Vd. el favor de decide que haga entrar al hombre.
22. No importa que digamos tres quinzavos (quince avos) 6 un
quinto. 23. Algunas veces nos hacia falta dinero. 24. La
sala tiene cincuenta y cinco pies de largo (longitud) y treinta y
seis de ancho (anehura). 25. A Pio Nono sigui6 Le6n Trece.
26. <?Que" hora es? — Son las diez y media. A la una
vendre" aqui. 27. El hijo mayor de Felipe Primero era como
emperador Carlos Quinto de Alemania y como rey Carlos
Primero de Espana.
B. I.I should like you to tell (imp erf. subj.} me whether1 you
need (any) money. 2. Julian told us three months ago that he
was having a house built. 3. Never mind what2 he says: we
shall try to see her tomorrow, if it is not too 3 cold. 4. We shall
make ourselves beloved by everybody. 5. What4 is the date? —
It is the fourth of October, nineteen hundred and three. 6. How
old is your father? He is fifty-two years old. 7. There are two
figures in a Spanish fraction : three-sevenths has a numerator, which
is a cardinal, and a denominator, which is an ordinal. Sometimes
the denominator is a cardinal with -avo. 8. Two-thirds and (plus)
one-sixth are five-sixths. 9. Alphonsus the Thirteenth is the
Spanish king. 10. That servant was acting as porter three months
ago. ii. The river is five hundred miles long and six hundred
feet wide. 12. It was so warm that we did not go in. 13. I
should not like him to play (imperf. sub].} the fool. 14. What
time was it? — It was half-past eight. 15. Please give me three
and (a) half apples. 16. He did us the favor of telling us his
name. 17. They would like us to tell them how many the parts of
the world are. 18. The servant is packing your four trunks
1 62 SPANISH GRAMMAR
19. The numerator of that fraction is the numeral seventeen
20. It is so cold here, that we shall go into5 your room; [it] is not
freezing there.
l si. z lo que. 3 demasiado. 4 &Cudl? 5 Use entrar en.
LESSON XXXII
176. Adverbs.
aqui, aca, here. alH, alia, there (distant from
ahi, there (near the person ad- both the speaker and the per-
dressed). son addressed).
estoy muy bien aqui, I am very comfortable here.
a dos pasos de aca, two paces (steps) from here,
alia iremos todos, we shall all go there.
a. With verbs of motion, ' here ' is usually ac£, and ' there ' is allA ;
but aqui and alii are used to denote a definite, specific place : yen acdj
'come here'; ven aqui, 'come right here.'
b. ' Here in ' is aqui en, and ' there in ' is ahi en or alia en : alia en
Puerto Rico, ' over there in Porto Rico.'
c. English expletive ' there ' is not to be expressed in Spanish : hay,
' there is,' ' there are ' ; han salido de este pueblo mas de veinte familias,
'there have left this town more than twenty families.'
177. Mucho, ' much,' ' a great deal ' ; muy, ' very.1
trabaja mucho, he works a great deal,
estoy muy cansado, I am very tired.
Before past participles, ' much,' ' very much,' is muy.
es muy estimado, he is much esteemed.
te estoy muy agradecido, I am very much obliged to you.
But with the past participle of a perfect tense, ' much ' is mucho :
ha escrito mucho, 'he has written much (a great deal).'
a. * Very,' when standing alone, is mucho : <? es interesante el libro ?
'is the book interesting ? ' si, mucho, ' yes, very.'
LESSON XXXII 163
178. Ya, ' already,' ' now ' ; with a negative, ' no longer,' ' no
more.'
ya es tarde, it is already late. ya no fuma, he doesn't smoke
ya acabe", I have already fin- any longer (any more).
ished. ya no tengo dinero, I have no
ya entiendo, I understand more money (I haven't any
now. more money).
179. -mente. — In English many adverbs of manner are
formed by adding the termination -ly to adjectives, as 'quickly*
(from ' quick '), ' correctly ' (from ' correct '), etc. In Spanish
many adverbs are similarly formed by adding -mente to the
feminine singular of descriptive adjectives, as severamente (from
severe), * severely,' facilmente (from facil), ' easily,' etc.
a. When several adverbs in -mente modify the same word, -mente is
omitted from all but the last : habla docta, concisa y elegantemente, ' he
speaks learnedly, concisely, and elegantly.'
180. The Prepositions Por and Para. — ' For ' is expressed
by por or para. If ' for ' means ' for the sake of,' 'on account
of,' or * in exchange for,' it is expressed by por ; if it denotes
purpose or destination, it is expressed by para.
daria la vida por 61, I would give my life for him.
los sacrificios que hizo por ella, the sacrifices that he made for her.
peleaba por la vida, he was fighting for his life.
le castigue" por haberme dicho una mentira, I punished him for hav-
ing told me a lie.
he pagado diez pesos por el perro, I have paid ten dollars for the dog.
este libro es para ti, this book is for you.
parto para Madrid, I am leaving for Madrid.
a. Por also means * through,' ' by,' 1 ' per?
1 ' By ' is usually de, after passive verbs and participles that express feeling
or emotion : es amado de todos, ' he is beloved by all.'
1 64 SPANISH GRAMMAR
por temor, through fear.
entr6 por la ventana, he entered through the window.
este drbol ha sido plantado por mi abuelo, this tree was planted by mjF
grandfather.
me cogi6 por la mano, he caught me by the hand.
diez por ciento, ten per cent.
mil pesos por ano, a thousand dollars per year (a year).
b. Before an infinitive, ' to,' meaning ' for the sake of,' ' in exchange
for,' is por, and meaning ' in order to ' is para.
pugnando por entrar, fighting to enter.
lo hizo para enganarme, he did it to deceive me.
c. Note also the following ways of expressing ' for ' in Spanish:
estuve allf un ano, I was there for a year.
hace un ano que estoy aqui, I have been here/0r a year.
voy £ Madrid por un ano, I am going to Madrid for a year,
tengo que escribir un ejercicio en castellano para manana, I must write
a Spanish exercise for to-morrow.
181. In English nouns are often used adjectively, as in 'a
wheel chair/ 'a saw-mill,' etc. A noun used adjectively in
English is usually expressed in Spanish by a noun preceded
by de or para.
una estatua de marmol, a marble statue.
una vela de cera, a wax candle.
una maquina de coser, a sewing-machine.
un vaso para vino, a wineglass.
una cuchara para sopa, a soup spoon.
182. With verbs meaning to take (from), to ask (of), etc.,
'of or ' from ' is expressed in Spanish by a.
el capitan ouit6 al soldado el punal, the captain took the dagger from
the soldier.
hemos pedido un favor a tu senor padre, we asked a favor of your
father.
t& quie"n compraste el caballo? of whom did you buy the horse?
LESSON XXXII 165
a. A personal pronoun object is put in the dative case (indirect object).
me ban robado mucho dinero, they have stolen a great deal of money
from me.
86 10 quite", I took it away from him.
183. A preposition is usually retained before a substantive
clause in Spanish, but omitted in English.
estoy convencido de mi error, I am convinced of my error.
estoy convencido de que no dijo la verdad, I am convinced that he
did not tell the truth.
me alegro de eso, I am glad of that.
me alegro de que no pueda venir, I am glad that he cannot come.
no me acuerdo de su nombre, I do not remember his name.
me acuerdo de que se llama Pedro, I remember that he is called Peter,
estoy seguro del hecho, I am certain of the fact,
estoy seguro de que no dara nada, I am certain that he will give nothing,
184. Idiomatic Expressions :
ir escalera arriba (abajo), (to) go rio abajo, down-stream,
upstairs (downstairs). dias antes, days before.
tierra adentro, inland. meses despu6s, months afterward.
mar afuera, seaward.
dice que si (que no), he says so (not).
creo que si (que no), I believe so (not).
espero que si (que no), I hope so (not).
me parece que si (que no), it seems to me so (it doesn't seem to me so)
ACaba de partir, he has just left.
acababa de partir, he had just left.
no volver6 d mentir, I shall not lie again.
poco falt6 para que se cayese (cay era), he almost felL
hoy mismo, this very day.
s.yer mismo, even yesterday.
por la tarde, in the evening.
manana por la manana, tomorrow morning.
166 SPANISH GRAMMAR
£vive usted por aqui? do you live about here?
voy por pan, I am going after bread.
he enviado por el medico, I have sent for the physician.
te pagar6 para el 5 de mayo, 1 shall pay you (by) the 5th of May
Iey6 la carta para si, he read the letter to himself.
este nino es pequeno para su edad, this child is small for his age.
no sirve para nada, it is good for nothing.
estudia para me'dico, he is studying to be a physician.
estoy para partir, I am about to leave.
estoy por partir, I am inclined to leave,
185. Irregular Verbs.
Dar, (to) give. (Mr, (to) hear.
Saber, (to) know. Ver, (to) see.
Study §§ 241, 245, 254, and 258.
186. Saber. ' (To) know/ meaning ' (to) have knowledge of,1
• (to) be aware of,' is saber (saber does not take a personal
object) ; meaning ' (to) be acquainted with,' it is conocer.
£ sabes que es verdad ? do you ,; conoces a aquel joven ? do you
know that it is true? know that young man?
a. Saber also means ' (to) know how,'1 ' (to) learn ' (in the sense of
' (to) get knowledge of); saber a means « (to) taste of,' ' (to) savor of.'
no sabe nadar, he doesn't know how to swim.
supe que no pudis^e venir, I learned that you couldn't come.
sabe a pescado, it tastes of fish.
b. Can, meaning 'know how/ is saber: 'can he read and write?-
£sabe leer y escribir?
1 'To know how* is saber como, when the main and the dependent verbs
have different subjects, as in no se como viven, ' I do not know how they live.'
And also when the dependent clause is an indirect question, as in no se como
puedo hacerlo, ' I do not know how I can do it.'
LESSON XXXII 167
187. Idiomatic Expressions :
flar voces, (to) call out, (to) shout, no sabe nada, he doesn't know
dar los buenos dlas, (to) wish good anything.
day. [marry him. hacer saber, (to) make known.
ella le di6 el si, she agreed to no s6 que contestar, I do not
dar d saber (d conocer), (to) make know what to answer, [clare !
known. joye! joiga! listen! hear! I de-
iya diste de comer d los caba- oigo subir : a alguno, I hear some
llos? have you already fed the one coming up.
horses? oy6 gemir a los pobres cautivos,
dar un paseo, (to) take a walk. she heard the poor captives
di6 en el bianco, he hit the mark. groan.
la ventana da a la calle, the win- me oi llamar por alguno, I heard
dow faces the street. some one call me; I heard
me doy por vencido, I give it up. myself called by name.
luego daran las doce, it will soon vi caer * a mis companeros, I saw
strike twelve. my companions fall.
me di6 la fiebre amarilla, I caught no tengo nada que ver con eso, I
the yellow fever. haven't anything to do with that.
Exercise XXXII
A. i. Venga Vd. aca y si£ntese aqui, y digame lo que estaba
haciendo alii. 2. Vaya Vd. otra vez para alia, y ens^neme lo
que estaba arreglando. 3. ± D6nde esta mi diccionario? —
Por ahi anda, pero no s£ donde esta. 4. Lo siento mucho ;
estoy muy aburrido de su abandono. 5. Ya Ileg6 su amigo,
y esta muy impaciente por verle a Vd. ; viene elegantemente
vestido. 6. Mariana parto para Sevilla por tener que asistir
a las fiestas reales. 7. Emple6 su capital en un negocio al
ocho por ciento. 8. " Las enfermedades entran por toneladas
y salen por onzas." 9. " Come para vivir, pero no vivas para
comer." 10. Un puente de acero, una sortija de diamantes,
una silla de montar, una prensa de imprimir, — <icual vale mas?
n. Dame un lapiz : quiero escribir una carta en castellano y
otra en ingle's. 12. <jSabe Vd. que su amigo va a dar una
1 Note that a dependent infinitive immediately follows oir or ver.
1 68 SPANISH GRAMMAR
recepci6n? 13. Hagame Vd. el favor de darme un poco de
agua templada con aziicar. 14. No le he visto a Vd. hace un
afio; asi es que a primera vista no le conoci. 15. Dar de
comer al hambriento es obra de misericordia. 16. La ventana
de mi cuarto da al mar : asi es que hace alii siempre fresco.
17. (J Que" hora es? — Acaban de dar las tres en el reloj de la
catedral. 18, Suba Vd. a mi cuarto y bajeme mis gemelos de
6pera, que se los quiero dar a este sefior. 19. Si le escribe Vd.
a su familia, sirvase darle mis recuerdos. 20. Un amigo intimo
me dice : "^que" quieres? " Una persona que no conozco bien
me dice : "<;que" quiere Vd.?" En la fonda el mozo me dice :
"^que" quiere el senor?"
21 MADRID, el 10 de Eneio de 1905.
Muy Senor mio : l
Tengo el gusto de acusar a Vd. el recibo de su apreciable carta
fechada el 2 del corriente, y en contestaci6n le aviso que no es
posible aceptar la proposici6n que Vd. me hace. 22. Sirvase
Vd. dispensarme el que no haya contestado a vuelta de correo.
Tengo el honor de susciibirme de Vd. S. S. Q. B. S. M.2
23. Querido Jacinto :
Acabo de recibir tu carta del 25 del ppdo,3 en la cual me
pides te envie cincuenta pesos ($50) por carta certificada 6 por
giro postal. 24. Siento decirte que nopuedo adelantarte niun
centavo antes del 2 del proximo mes. Entretanto24ten cuidado
con no gastar mas de lo necesario. ™ r
lu aimo* papa.
25. Sr. Dn. Jose" Morales.
Muy Senor mio y amigo :
Por la ultima de Vd. del n del corriente he sabido la des-
gracia que acaban Vds. de pasar perdiendo su querido padre
26. Acompano a Vds. en su sentimiento y les brindo mi per-
sona para en lo que5 les pueda ser 6 til.
Quedo de Vd. afmo.
LESSON XXXII 169
B. I. He made many sacrifices for his friend, and I believe that
he would give his life for him if it were necessary. 2. He said that
he paid five hundred dollars for the horse ; but he lied, and I shall
punish him for having told me a lie. 3. The letter is for you, and
the package is for your brother. 4. Tomorrow I leave for the City
of Mexico. I have been here for six months, and I am going to
Mexico for a year. 5. Are you very tired ? — Yes, very; I am
going into6 the country to rest for a month. 6. I have already
taken ten lessons in Spanish, but I have no more money, and I shall
take no more lessons. 7. Go and get7 a wineglass, and give me
a glass of wine. 8. A soup spoon is larger than a teaspoon, and a
table knife is larger than a penknife. 9. He asked several favors
of me, but I could not, or rather 25 would not, grant them.8 10. The
thief stole ten dollars from a rich man, and gave them to a poor man
who needed them more. Will he be punished for that ? n. I
have bought a new bicycle for you, John. I bought it of Mr.
Navarro. 12. He bought a typewriter of Miss Montoya for his
daughter, who will now learn to write on it. 13. I cannot remem-
ber your name, but I remember that I saw you and talked with you
for an hour last summer. 14. Did the porter go up to my room
and bring down my trunk ? — He says so, but I don't believe it.
15. He almost died, but a skilful physician saved his life. 16. I
have just seen him, and I do not wish to see him again.9 17. Come
here, child, and sit down at my side. Do you feel tired after running
and playing so much ? 18. The boy is very large for his age, and
he has already decided to study to be a lawyer.10 19. First he
read it to himself, and then he read it aloud. 20. When I was
ill, I sent for Dr. Menendez y Garcia, but he was good for nothing
and did not cure me. 21. I know him well, and I know that he
tells the truth. 22. I saw him go into the house, and I saw him
come out ; but he did not speak to me.
23. Dear Sir:
I have just11 received your letter dated the 7th inst., in which
/oil are kind enough 12 to acknowledge the receipt of the draft
for14 three hundred and twenty-four dollars in13 American gold
24. I am very sincerely yours.15
SPANISH GRAMMAR
25. Dear Friend :
Your very kind 16 letter of the 3d inst. came 17 to hand 18 the 5th
and I now have the pleasure of answering 19 it.
It remains for me 20 to thank you 21 for your many acts of kind-
ness 22 toward me and my son.
26. With affectionate regards I am very truly yours.23
1 Dear Sir. 2 $. s. Q. B. S. M. = segura servidor que besa sus manos.
8 proximo pasado. 4 afectisimo. 5 para en lo que is better than para lo en
que, ' for that in which,' ' for anything in which." 6 ,/. i buscar. 8 Say :
'grant him them.' 9 \Jsevolver. lo Say: 'for (a) lawyer.' n Use
acabar de. 12 se sirve. 13 Omit. 1* de. 15 Se reitera de Vd. con la
mds distinguida consideracion su afmo S. S. Q. B. S. M. 16 appreciable or
atenta. ljr fue. 18 d mis manos. 19 corresponder. 20 restame.
21 darle miles de gracias. 22 ' many acts of kindness,' bondades. 28 ' very
truly yours,' de Vd. S. S. Q. B. S. M. 24 < meanwhile.' 25 mds bien.
LESSON XXXIII
Conjunctions.
188. y, e (before initial i or hi), ' and.'
padre y madre, father and mother, padre 6 hijo, father and son.
a. y is used before y and the diphthong (h)ie.
tu y yo, you and I. corta y Mere, it cuts and wounds,
189. 6, li (before initial o or ho), ' or/
cinco 6 seis, five or six. siete u ocho, seven or eight.
a. li may also be used between two vowels, the first of which is o, as in
leyendo U escribiendo, ' reading or writing,' but 6 is the more usual here.
190. pero, mas, sino (after a negative statement which is
offset by a positive statement), 'but.' 1
somos los servidores del rey, pero no sus esclavos, we are the king's
servants, but not his slaves.
!o dice, mas no lo creo, he says so, but I do not believe it.
no voy d Paris sino a Madrid, I am not going to Paris, but to Madrid
1 Colloquially, pero is used much oftener than mas.
LESSON XXXIII 171
a. * But,' as adverb or preposition, is often expressed by no ... sin<\
and ' no ... but ' by no ... mas que.
no nos visita sino raramente, he visits us but rarely.
no tengo mds amigo que tu, I have no friend but you.
191. cuando (interrogatively, cuando1), 'when.'
se lo dire" cuando venga, I shall tell him when he comes.
<; cuando lo hard usted? when will you do it ?
a. Que is used instead of cuando to introduce a clause that limits the
meaning of an adverb or adverb-phrase of time.
en el momento que venga, se lo un dia que estuve en Barcelona,
dare", the moment (that) he one day when I was in Barce-
comes I shall give it to him. lona.
192. donde (interrogatively, d6nde), ' where,' is often made
more specific by prefixing a, en, or de.
£& d6nde va usted? where are you going?
la casa (en) donde vive, the house in which he lives.
£de d6nde viene? where does he come from?
porque, 'because,' porque*, 'why'1 (also written por que).
no lo hice porque no queria hacerlo, I did not do it because I did not
want to do it.
^porque" no vino usted ayor? why did you not come yesterday?
193. Agreement of Subject and Verb. — A verb agrees with
its subject in number and person.
yo soy, I am ; tu eres, you are, etc.
(i) Two or more singular subjects take a verb in the plural : 61 y ella
son, 'he and she are.'
1 Strictly speaking, the interrogative^ cuelndo, d6nde,and porque are adverbs
rather than conjunctions.
1/2 SPANISH GRAMMAR
(2) When subjects are of different persons, the verb is in the first
person plural if any of the subjects is of the first person ; and it is in the
second person if the subjects are of the second and third persons.
tu y yo somos, you and I are.
el y yo somos, he and I are.
tu y 61 sois,, you and he are.
194. Word Order.
(1) In an affirmative sentence, the subject may precede
or it may follow the verb.
el hombre est£ enfermo, the man is ill.
ya Ileg6 mi amigo, my friend has already arrived.
(2) In an interrogative sentence, the subject regularly fol-
lows the verb.
i lo compr6 Juan ? did John buy it ?
195. When the subject follows the verb :
(1) A noun object usually precedes a noun subject.
£ compr6 la casa tu seSor padre ? did your father buy the house ?
But if the object is the longer, it follows.
<; compr6 tu padre todas estas casas ? did your father buy all these
houses ?
(2) A predicate adjective usually precedes a noun subject.
£ es interesante el libro ? is the book interesting ?
(3) A pronoun subject immediately follows the verb and
precedes a noun object or a predicate adjective.
no quiero yo el caballo, I do not want the horse.
,; estd usted enfermo ? are you ill ?
(4) The parts of a perfect tense are not separable.
^hacomprado Vd. (nothaVd. c.) la casa? have you bought the house ?
196. If an adverb does not come first in the sentence, it
usually follows the verb immediately.
LESSON XXXIII 1/3
manana hablaremos el gobernador y yo, tomorrow the governor
and I shall have a talk.
aqul se habla ingle's, English is spoken here,
dice siempre la verdad, he always tells the truth.
contest6 muy tranquilamente el joven, the young man answered
quite calmly.
197. Irregular Verbs.
andar, (to) go. salir, (to) go out.
caber, (to) be contained in. caer, (to) fall.
poner, (to) put. traer, (to) bring.
asir, (to) grasp. -ducir, (to) lead,
valer, (to) be worth.
Study §§ 240, 244, 249, 250, 251, 252, 253, 255, and
256; and review Ser, Haber, Estar, and Tener, §§ 236,
237, 238, and 239.
198. Andar, ' (to) go,' ' (to) walk ' : < (to) go ' in a definite
direction, or to a definite place, is ir.
el reloj no anda, the watch doesn't go.
voy a la ciudad, I am going to town.
199. Idiomatic Expressions.
se cay6, he fell down.
lo deje" caer, I dropped it.
la levita te cae (sienta) bien, the coat fits you well.
este color cae bien con este otro, this color matches well with this other.
ya caigo en eso, now I understand that.
se pone palida, she is growing pale.
el cafe" se pondri frio, the coffee will get cold.
£has puesto la mesa? have you set the table?
el sol se pone, the sun is setting.
esta gallina no pone hmvos, this hen doesn't lay eggs.
la niSa se puso a llorar, the little girl began to cry.
174 SPANISH GRAMMAR
4quie"n sali6? who won?
salir a luz, (to) be published.
icuanto vale? how much is it worth?
no vale cada, it's good for nothing.
no vale la pena, it isn't worth while.
mis vale tarde que nunca, it is better late than never.
tiene raz6n, he is right.
no tiene raz6n, he is wrong.
tengo ganas de visitar a Cuba, I am anxious to visit Cuba.
i tenga usted cuidado ! look out ! take care !
no tenga usted cuidado, don't worry.
no tiene remedio, there's no help for it.
no tiene nada de particular, there's nothing strange about it,
tenga usted la bondad (de), please.
tengo que hacerlo, I have to do it.
tengo escrita la carta, I have the letter already written.
no lo hay, there isn't any.
hay que tener cuidado, one must take care.
<j.que he de hacer? what am I to do?
ha de ser muy pobre, he must be very poor.
soy de Madrid, I am a native of Madrid.
esta finca es del Senor G., this plantation belongs to Mr. G.
es de notar, it should be noted.
estar en (or de) pie, (to) stand,
estarse parado, (to) stand still.
ir d pie, (to) go afoot, (to) walk,
ir a caballo, (to) ride horseback.
ir en coche, (to) drive (in a carriage).
huele a tabaco, it smells of tobacco,
sabe a ajo, it tastes of garlic,
de dfa, by day. de noche, by night.
Exercise XXXIII
A. i . <J Cua*ndo dijo el senor me"dico que visitaria al enfermo ?
— Cuando sus clientes le den una hora de libertad. 2. En
las horas que lo Irate", lo conoci a fondo. 3. <: D6nde encon-
LESSON XXXIII 175
Irarfas mas chistes y mas filosofia que en el Quijote ? 4. El
pais de donde vengo esta favorecido por un clima ideal.
5. Era un joven fino e" inteligente, aunque sus deberes y sus
gustos eran completamente opuestos. 6. Las mejores califi-
caciones de un estudiante son " sobresaliente " u " 6ptimo."
7. No es Vd. a quien he llamado, sino a su sefior padre.
8. No nos saluda sino de cuando en cuando. 9. Sera su
companera mas no su esclava. 10. Deseo mucho verla, pero
me es imposible. n. No serviras a nadie mas que a tu Dios y
Sefior. 12. ^Porque" no me avis6 Vd. con anticipaci6n? —
Porque no quise molestar su ocupada atenci6n. 13. El tomd
el mando de las tropas, y di6 las 6rdenes necesarias. 14. Tu,
61, y yo somos de la misma edad, pero yo soy mas alto que
vosotros. 15. No puedo negar que ella y yo nos amamos.
1 6. Venci6 Napole6n, pero perdi6 sus famosos Guardias
Nobles. 17. <iHa terminado su carrera el hijo de Vd, ? —
Todavia no. — ^Estudia ingeniatura 6 medicina? — Estudia
para medico. 18. <; Es favorable a nuestra causa la decisidn
del Juzgado? — Si ; es favorable. 19. Caballero, no deseo
yo la amistad de Vd. Su comportamiento es inexplicable.
20. De ese asunto para Vd. tan importante, pronto sabremos
los detalles. 21. Vivfa en la margen este 15 del rio ; al otro
lado vivia mi primo Antonio. 22. Vistea lafrancesa ;camina
a la americana ; y vive a la inglesa.17 23. j A cdmo se vende
la tela china? — Barata, caballero, peso al metro (a la vara).
24. i Cuanto gana Vd. alii ? — Quinientos pesos al ano poco
mas 6 menos. 25. Esta sopa sabe a cebolla1*5 y limdn. El
panuelo de Vd. huele a tabaco. 26. A la vista de su hogar
cay6 de rodillas y or6 en silencio.
B. i. He says that he is not going to Seville, but to Malaga;
but I do not believe it. 2. We have no friend but John, and he
visits us but rarely. 3. One day when I was in Paris I went to
the house in which he lives, but he was not at home. 4. It will
not be long before he returns, and I shall tell him what you say
176 SPANISH GRAMMAR
when he comes. 5. You and I live happily,1 but you and John do
not agree. 6. Did your brother buy the horse? 2 — No ; my father
bought it; but he bought it for my brother. 7. Is your brother ill?
— No; he is in better health than he was last year. 8. Shall you
walk3 or ride?4 — ! prefer to ride, but my sister prefers to drive.6
9. I shall leave this city6 the last of March or the first of April,17
if the weather permits.7 10. After being in Buenos Ayres a few
months, I spoke Spanish well ; or, at least, I thought 8 that I did.9
II. He smells of garlic and tobacco, and I do not like to sit by10
his side. 1 2. Please change for 6 me n this ten-dollar bill.17 — I can
give you two five-dollar bills for it. 13. He speaks Spanish al-
most every day with a Spanish friend, and in this way he is learning
to speak Spanish well. 14. I went to a neighbor's to borrow a book
which I wished to read. 15. The neighbor was not at home, and
his wife said that she didn't know when he would return. 16. She
said that as soon as he returned, she would send the book to me.
17. Poor Peter! He was blind with anger17 and trembling with
cold,17 and he couldn't say a word. 18. In autumn the sun sets
earlier each day. 19. When they gave him the news, he became 12
very sad and began 12 to weep. 20. Go to Mr. Garcia's and 18
learn 14 the news of the day. 21. The Indian served me as guide 17
in these forests. 22. His son works as tailor 17 in Valles' work-
shop. 23. Your handkerchief smells of oranges. Have you any
in your pocket? 24. We should work by day and sleep by night,
but I usually work by night and sleep by day.
1 Say: 'happy.' 2 Place the subject after the object. 8 Say: 'go afoot.'
4 Say : ' go on horseback.' 5 Say : ' go in (a) carriage.' 6 Omit. 7 Say :
' permits it.' 8 Use creer. 9 Say : ' I spoke it well.' lf) a. n Dative.
12 Use ponerse. 13 a. 1* informarse de. 15 ' east.' 16 ' onion.'
1" See § 206.
LESSON XXXIV
200. Qualifying Suffixes. — The Spanish diminutive and
augmentative suffixes consist of endings all of which may be
attached to nouns, while most diminutives may be attached to
LESSON XXXIV 177
adjectives and adverbs. They occur commonly in colloquial
language, but rarely in elevated diction. The foreigner should
use them with the utmost caution. It is generally safe to use
-ito, but one not to the manner born would best avoid the other
suffixes until he has become familiar with their use.
a. The qualifying suffixes are attached to the stem of a word after it
has dropped a final unstressed vowel or, often, an unstressed diphthong.
pdjaro, pajarillo. amigo, amiguito. rosario, rosarito.
201. Diminutives. — There are three forms of most diminu-
tive suffixes, as follows : (i) -ito, -illo, -uelo, etc. ; (2) -cito, -cillo,
-zuelo, etc. ; and (3) -ecito, -ecillo, -ezuelo, etc.
a. The third form (-ecito,1 -ecillo, -ezuelo, etc.) is used :
(1) With monosyllables.
flor, flower, florecita, little flower. pez, fish, pececito, little fish.
rey, king. reyezuelo, little king.
(2) With words of more than one syllable, ending in -e.
viaje, journey. viajecito, little trip.
madre, mother. madrecita, dear little mother.
(3) With words ending in -a or -o, that have the radical
diphthong -ie or -ue.2
viento, wind. vientecito, slight breeze.
piedra, stone. piedrecita, little stone.
pueblo, village. pueblecillo, little village.
(4) With some words ending in unstressed -ia, -io, -ua, -uo.
bestia, beast. bestiecita, little beast.
genio, genius. geniecillo, little genius.
lengua, tongue. lengtiecita, little tongue.
arduo, arduous. arduecito, rather arduous.
1 Pie makes piececrto, piececillo, etc.
2 In old Spanish the radical diphthongs ie and ue usually reverted to e and o
when a qualifying suffix was added : as in puerta, ' door,' portezuela, ' carriaga
door'; but in modern Spanish the diphthongs are usually retained: nieto,
nietecillo ; hue vo, hue vecillo : etc.
1/8 SPANISH GRAMMAR
b. The second form (-cito, -cillo, -zuelo, etc.) is used with
words of more than one syllable, ending in -n or -r, especially if
they have the stress on the final syllable.
Iadr6n, thief. ladroncillo, petty thief.
joven, young man. jovencito, youth,
autor, author. autorcillo, young author.
But, arbol, tree. arbolito, little tree.
c. The first form (-ito, -illo, -uelo, etc.) is used in all other
cases.
hermano, brother. hermanito, little brother.
polio, fowl. polluelo, chick.
d. There are some exceptions to the above rules ; such as
mano, hand. manecita (or manita), little hand.
abuelo, grandfather. abuelito, dear little grandfather.
agrio, sour. agrillo, rather sour.
jardin, garden. jardinito (or jardincito), little garden.
senora, lady. senorita, young lady.
202. The meaning of the various diminutive suffixes is as
follows :
a. -ito (-a), -cito (-a), -ecito (-a), express smallness of size,
quality, or degree, together with fondness, admiration, and
respect. They may usually be translated ' little,' ' dear little,' etc.
pobre hijita mfa, my poor dear child. madrecita, dear little mother,
gatito, kitten. un poquito, a very little,
toditos los dias, almost every day. cerquita, quite near.
una ni5a grandecita, a rather large girl.
b. -illo (-a), -cillo (-a), -ecillo (-a), express smallness of size,
quality, or degree, with indifference, or with depreciation, ridi-
cule, or pity.
ladroncillo, little thief. pobre viejecillo, poor old man.
sonrisilla, faint smile. pobrecillo, poor little fellow.
LESSON XXXIV 179
c. -uelo (-a), -zuelo (-a), -ezuelo (-a), express smallness,
together with ridicule, disdain, or mockery.
plazuela, little square. sus ojuelos, his little eyes.
d. -ico (-a), -cico (-a), -ecico (-a),1 have the force of -ito, ex-
cept that they are generally used somewhat humorously or
sarcastically.
un perrico, a pretty little dog.
e. -ete (-a), -cete (-a), are used in a diminutive and often
depreciative sense.
un pobrete, a poor fellow. un caballerete, a ' dandy.'
f. -ejo (-a) usually denotes contempt.
librejo, worthless book, caminejo, wretched road, amarillejo, yellowish.
g. The dialectal forms -in (-ina) and -ino (-a) are sometimes
used in Castilian to express smallness.
nino chiquitfn, wee little child. cebollino, young onion.
203. Augmentative Suffixes. — a. -6n (-ona) denotes large
size, with or without grotesqueness. Feminine nouns usually
become masculine upon assuming this ending, unless sex is
indicated.
hombr6n, big man. sil!6n, easy chair. barb6n, thick beard.
picar6n, great rogue. cuchar6n, ladle.
b. -azo (-a) has a meaning similar to that of -6n, but it is
used less often.
bocaza, big mouth. mujeraza, large, coarse woman,
c. -ote (-a) is augmentative or depreciative.
palabrota, harsh word. ricote, rich and pretentious.
1 In some parts of the Spanish-speaking world, e.g. Cuba, -ico replaces -itc
after a stem ending in -t : as platico for platito, gatico for gatito, etc.
ISO SPANISH GRAMMAR
d. -acho (-a), -ucho (-a), and -ajo (-a) express disdain and
contempt.
vinacho, poor wine. casucha, hut. trapajo, dirty rag.
204. Combinations of diminutive and augmentative endings
occur.
chico,1 chiquito, chiquitin, wee little child.
hombre, hombr6n, hombronazo, big, awkward man.
picaro, picar6n, picaroncillo, small man who is a great rogue,
picaro, picarillo, picaril!6n, large man who is a little rogue.
205. The endings -azo and -ada are often used to denote a
blow, thrust, discharge, etc. These endings are neither diminu-
tive nor augmentative, but denote the result of an action.
bastonazo, blow with a walking-stick. fusilazo, rifle-shot,
punalada, stab with a dagger.
206. Idiomatic Expressions.2
a principles de mayo, the first of May.
a mediados de junio, the middle of June.
a fines (ultimos) de Julio, the last of July.
1&. c6mo estamos hoy? what day of the month is this?
i los pocos anos de estar en Madrid, after being in Madrid a few years.
al otro lado, on the other side. a lo menos, at least.
a la francesa, after the fashion of the French.
poco a poco, little by little. uno £ uno, one by one,
i&. cuanto se vende? what is it worth ?
a peso la vara, el metro, a dollar a yard, a metre.
quinientos pesos al ano, five hundred dollars a year.
caer de rodillas, (to) fall on one's knees.
trabajar de sastre, (to) work as tailor.
servir de guia, (to) serve as guide.
1 Note chico, cbiquito, chiquitito (chiquitico).
2 Most of these illustrate the use of prepositions.
LESSON XXXIV l8l
ClegO de c61era, blind with anger.
temblar de frio, (to) tremble with cold.
estoy mejor (peor) de salud, I am in better (worse) health.
hu6rfano de madre (padre), orphan on the mother's (father's) side
camino de Cadiz, by way of Cadiz.
un billete de a diez pesos, a ten-dollar bill (bank note).
de esta manera, de este modo, in this way.
desde luego, at once.
pobre de mi, poor me.
la buena de la Justina, good Justine.
estar en casa, (to) be at home, ir i casa, (to) go homa.
esta en casa del Senor Montejo, he is at Mr. Montejo's.
va £ casa de un vecino, he is going to a neighbor's.
viene de casa de mi tio, he comes from my uncle's.
Exercise XXXIV
A. i. S61o un pillete hubiera cometido tal maldad. 2. El
hombrecillo se acerc6 a mi y me present6 a su hijita. 3. Al salir
le dijo al portero : " Ahorita estate" de vuelta." 4. Ese hom-
br6n es un montanes : esa mujeraza es su hermana. 5. Las
dos grandecitas son sus nietas ; las pequenitas son sus sobrini-
tas. 6. El politiquejo se enoj6, y volvie"ndose le ech6 dos
6 tres palabrotas. 7. El reyezuelo os6 desafiar al empera-
dor. 8. El soldadote sali6 de la casa, y ciego de c61era
se dirigi6 hacia la plazuela. 9. <i Esta Vd. mejor de salud ?
— Si; un tantico. 10. El jovencito que le presents" a Vd.
anoche es hue>fano de padre y madre. Trabaja de ingeniero
?n el Ferrocarril del Norte. Dicen que tiene un talentazo
descomunal. n. La ensalada esta cargadita de mostaza
como a Vd. le gusta. 12. Cdmbieme este doble hidalgo
por dos billetes de a diez pesos, 6 cuatro de a cinco. De
esta manera podre" pagar mis deudas. 13. "j Pobre de mi ! "
exclam6 el abogadillo, " no fiie" mas que un descuidillo."
1 82 SPANISH GRAMMAR
14. " Caballerito, una limosnita, un centavito, 6 cualquiera
cosita que quieraVd. darme," exclam6el mendigo. 15. Poco
a poco, caballero. S£ defender a mis amigos ausentes cuando
se les insulta sin que puedan defenderse. 16. Uno a uno
6 dos a dos marchare"is por el puente, pero por ningun con-
cepto en pelot6n. 17. £ Acaba de llegar Vd. de casa de mi
padre? — No; vengo de casa de su hermano. 18. A mi
me gusta andar aprisa. Este tren anda con una velocidad de
cuarenta ki!6metros por hora; pero en Alemania hay trenes
que andan ciento cincuenta y ami doscientos ki!6metros por
hora. 19. P6ngase Vd. este sombrero a vet que" tal le esta,
y si le gusta, saiga con el y traigameio cuando encuentre el
suyo. 20. Su amigo habra tenido que ir a declarar ante
el juez : e"ste esta en el Palacio de Justicia y es un anciano
muy venerable. 21. El emperador Guillermo se cay6 del
caballo y se Iastim6 una pierna. 22. Estuve de pie (parado)
toda la funci6n, y estoy muy cansado. 23. En esa caja no
caben mas de trescientos volumenes : la caja es demasiado
pequena. 24. Senora, ,ic6mo esta su hijito? — Muy bien,
gracias; y <;c6mo esta la hijita de Vd. ? 25. A las ninas
grandecitas no les gusta jugar con las chiquillas. 26. El
pobrecito esta enfermo. El medico desea que tome el sol
toditos los dias.
B. i. My little son1 has two kittens that he loves dearly.
2. My dear little mother,1 may I go to Henry's to play with him?
3. Little Anna1 has a little sister1 that is only two months old.
4. The little thief1 is a great rogue.2 5. I shall return home in a
moment : if I can find the book that I am looking for. 6. He has
a large mouth2 and a thick beard,2 and he says many harsh words.2
7. I was talking with a dear friend l of mine when the little man '
came out of his house and approached us. 8. The sun sets at
five and rises at seven o'clock today. 9. He turned pale and
dropped the purse that he had in his hand. 10. This coat fits
you better than that one, but I do not like either one. 1 1 . My
LESSON XXXIV 183
watch doesn't go. — Mine goes, but it is slow. 12. Cecilia, set
the table. It is dinner time,6 and I am very hungry. 13. Is the
coffee ready? — It is ready, and it will get cold if you do not drink
it soon. 14. The color of the hat does not match that of your
coat. If I were you, I should not buy that hat. 15. He is usu-
ally wrong, but he always believes that 3 he 3 is 4 right. 16. I must
work today, or they will discharge me. — There is nothing strange
about that. 17. It should be noted that he is a native of Spain,
and he speaks Spanish very well. He is a Castilian. 18. When
will your work be published? — Next year. — It is better late than
never. 19. When his son died, we gave him the fatal news little
by little. 20. Do you wish to go afoot? — No; I prefer to go
on horseback, but the ladies need to go in a carriage. 21. Please
tell me what day of the month this is. — It is the fourth of July.
22. He always goes out with his mother or his sister. He loves
his mother and his sister tenderly. 23. He speaks Spanish and
English well, but he does not write these languages correctly.
24. Where are you coming from, and where are you going to?
25. Is your brother's bride pretty? — Yes ; very.
1 Use diminutive. 2 Use augmentative. * Omit. * Use infinitive.
6 hora de comer.
THE VERB
207. Like its prototype, the Latin verb, the Spanish
verb shows changes of mood, tense, and person, by the
addition to a verb stem of certain inflexional endings :
habl-ar, to speak. habl-o, I speak,
habl-aba. I used to speak, or habl-6, I spoke.
I was speaking. habl-ando, speaking.
It resembles the English verb in forming compound
tenses by adding to an auxiliary verb the past participle,
or the present participle, of a principal verb ; e.g.
he hablado, I have spoken ; estoy hablando, I am speaking.
208. For the sake of convenience we may consider the
Spanish verb under five different headings : (i) the regular
verb, (2) the verb with inceptive endings, (3) the radical-
changing verb, (4) the -uir (-iiir) verb, (5) the irregular verb.
209. There are six principal parts, a knowledge of which
will aid in the formation of the other parts of many verbs :
these are the present infinitive, the past participle, the present
participle (or gerund), the first person singular of the present
indicative, the first person singular of the preterite indicative,
and the third person singular of the preterite indicative.
(i) The present infinitive is the basis of the future and the con-
ditional of the indicative of all verbs. For the future, there are added
to the infinitive of the verb in question the forms, or the ending (as
in the case of the second plural), of the present indicative of the
verb haber, * to have.' The initial h of the forms of haber disappears
ID the composition. For the conditional, there are added to the
184
THE VERB 185
infinitive of the verb in question the endings of the imperfect indica-
tive of haber. Irregular verbs may show a certain alteration of the
infinitive basis.
(2) The past participle enters into the composition of all perfect
tenses.
(3) The present participle, or gerund, enters into the composi-
tion of the periphrastic progressive tenses.
(4) The first person singular present indicative has, in regular
verbs, the same stem as the rest of the verb, except the future and
the conditional of the indicative. In irregular, inceptive, and -uir
(but not in radical-changing) verbs, it often furnishes the stem for
the whole present subjunctive.
(5) The first person singular preterite indicative has the same
stem as all the rest of that tense in regular, inceptive, -uir, and irregu-
lar verbs ; and as the second singular and the first and second plural
of this same tense in radical-changing verbs. Its stem is also the
same as that of the subjunctive imperfect tenses and the hypotheti-
cal (or future) subjunctive of all but radical-changing verbs.
(6) The third person singular preterite indicative has, in radical-
changing verbs, the same stem as the third plural of that tense, and
as the subjunctive imperfect tenses and the hypothetical subjunctive.
(Apart from regular verbs, the above rules are not complete guides,
and practice must be relied on.)
210. The Regular Verb. — It is the custom to speak of three
regular conjugations in Spanish, classified, according to their
endings, as the -ar, or first ; the -er, or second ; and the -ir,
or third conjugation. In actual practice, however, we find that
there are but two entire conjugations, for in all but four forms
(the present infinitive, the first and second persons plural of the
present indicative, and the second person plural of the impera-
tive) the -ir or third conjugation has the same endings as the -er,
or second. In the four exceptional forms, the third conjugation
has the distinctive vowel i (-ir, -imos, -is, -id), whereas the second
has e (-er, -emos, -e*is, -ed). The following are the paradigms:
286
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Present
habl ar, to speak.
II
INFINITIVE MOOD
Present
tern er, to fear.
PARTICIPLES
INDICATIVE MOOD
in
Present
viv ir, to live,
Present
(GERUND)
habl ando, speaking.
Present
(GERUND)
tern iendo, fearing.
Present
(GERUND)
viv iendo, living
Past
habl ado, spoken.
Past
tern ido, feared.
Past
viv ido, lived.
Present
Present
Present
/ speak, do speak, am
speaking, etc.
I fear, do fear, am
fearing, etc.
/ live, do live, am
living, etc.
hablo
tern o
viv o
habl as
tern es
viv es
habl a
tem e
viv e
habl amos
tem emos
viv imos
habl ais
tem 6is
viv is
habl an
tem en
viv en
Imperfect
Imperfect
Imperfect
/ spoke, was speaking,
used to speak, etc.
I feared, was fearingt
used to fear, etc.
/ lived, was living
used to live, etc.
habl aba
tem ia
viv ia
habl abas
tem las
viv ias
habl aba
tem ia
viv ia
habl abamos
tem {amos
viv iamos
habl abais
tem iais
viv {ais
habl aban
tem ian
viv ian
THE VERB
I87
Preterite
Preterite
Preterite
I spoke, etc.
7 feared, etc.
/ lived, etc.
liable"
habl astc
habI6
temi
tern iste
tern i6
viv i
viv iste
viv i6
habl amos
habl asteis
habl aron
tern imos
tern isteis
tern ieron
viv imos
viv isteis
viv ieron
Future
Future
Future
/ shall speak, etc.
/ shall fear ; etc.
/ shall live, etc.
hablar 6
hablar ds
hablar d
temer e"
temer ds
temer d
vivir &
vivir ds
vivir d
hablar emos
hablar e*is
hablar dn
temer emos
temer 6is
temer dn
vivir emos
vivir 6is
vivir dn
Conditional
Conditional
Conditional
f should speak, etc.
I should fear, etc.
/ should live, etc
hablar la
hablar las
hablar ia
temer ia
temer ias
temer ia
vivir ia
vivir ias
vivir ia
hablar iamos
hablar iais
hablar ian
temer iamos
temer iais
temer ian
vivir iamos
vivir iais
vivir ian
speak, etc.
*d Si?, habl a
2d PI. habl ad
IMPERATIVE MOOD
fear, etc.
tern e
tern ed
live, etc.
viv e
vivid
188
SPANISH GRAMMAR
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
Present
Present
Present
< That I may) speak,
( That I may) /far,
( That I may) live^
(let me) speak, etc.
(let me) fear, etc.
(let me) live, etc.
hable
tern a
viv a
habl es
tern as
viv as
hable
tern a
viv a
habl emos
tern amos
viv amos
habl 6is
tern ais
viv ais
habl en
tem an
viv an
Imperfect
Imperfect
Imperfect
FIRST FORM
FIRST FORM
FIRST FORM
(-86 IMPERFECT)
(-se IMPERFECT)
(-se IMPERFECT)
(That or if I might}
(That or if I might)
(That or if I might]
speak, etc.
fear, etc.
live, etc.
habl ase
tem iese
viv iese
habl ases
tem ieses
viv ieses
habl ase
tem iese
viv iese
habl asemos
tem iSsemos
viv i6semos
habl aseis
tem ieseis
viv ieseis
habl asen
tem iesen
viv iesen
Imperfect
Imperfect
Imperfect
SECOND FORM
SECOND FORM
SECOND FORM
(-ra IMPERFECT)
(-ra IMPEKFECT)
(-ra IMPERFECT)
I should spfak, (that or if
1 should fear, (that or if
/ should live, (that oi
I might) speak, etc.
1 might) fear, etc.
if 1 might) live, etc.
habl ara
tem iera
viv iera
habl aras
tem ieras
viv ieras
habl ara
tem iera
viv iera
habl aramos
tem ie'ramos
viv ie'ramos
habl arais
tem ierais
viv ierais
habl aran
tem ieran
viv ieran
THE VERB l8g
Hypothetical Hypothetical Hypothetical
(OR FUTURE) (OR FUTURE) (OR FUTURE)
/ (may or shall } speak, etc. I (may or shall ) fear, etc. I (may or shall} live, etc,
habl are tern iere viv iere
habl ares tern ieres viv ieres
habl are tern iere viv iere
habl aremos tern ie"remos viv ie*remos
habl areis tern iereis viv iereis
habl aren tem ieren viv ieren
211. Compound Perfect Tenses. — The compound tenses
of all verbs, regular or not, are formed by adding their
past participle (invariable) to a part of the auxiliary
haber, 'to have' (see § 237) ;_e.g.
INFINITIVE PARTICIPLE
Present Perfect Present Perfect (Perfect Gerund;
to have spoken having spoken
haber hablado habiendo hablado
INDICATIVE
Present Perfect Preterite Perfect (Past Anterior]
/ have spoken, etc. / had spoken, etc.
he hablado hube hablado
has hablado etc.
etc.
Pluperfect Future Perfect
/ had spoken, etc. / shall have spoken, etc.
habia hablado habr^ hablado
etc. etc.
Conditional Perfect
I should have spoken, etc.
habria hablado
etc.
190 SPANISH GRAMMAR
SUBJUNCTIVE
Present Perfect Pluperfect
SECOND FORM (,-ra PLUPERFECT)
( That I may] have spoken, etc* I should have spoken, etc.
haya hablado hubiera hablado
etc. etc.
Pluperfect Hypothetical (or Future) Perfect
FIRST FORM (-se PLUPERFECT)
j That I might) have spoken, etc. I (may or shall) have spoken, etc.
hubiese hablado hubiere hablado
etc. etc.
212. Periphrastic Progressive Tenses. — These are
formed by adding the present participle to a part of
the auxiliary estar, 'to be' (or ir, 'to go/ venir, 'to
come/ etc.); e.g.
estoy (voy, etc.} hablando, I am speaking, etc.
See § 121, a.
213. Orthographic Variations. — It is an inviolable rule
of Spanish conjugation that the consonantal sound occurring at
the end of the infinitive stem (i.e. immediately before the end-
ings -ar, -er, -ir) shall be preserved throughout the verb. When,
therefore, there is a change of the vowel beginning the flectional
ending, the written character denoting the consonantal sound
at the end of the infinitive stem may have to be changed, for
the original character may not denote the original sound before
the new vowel ; thus it is obvious that a first conjugation verb
in -car cannot continue to have c before the preterite ending,
first person singular in -6 ; the original k sound of the infinitive
stem can now be indicated only by qu before the -e.
Many of the changes here indicated for regular verbs occur
also in the case of irregular verbs.
THE VERB IQI
214. The asual variations in spelling are the following :
(1) Verbs in -c-ar change c to qu before flectional e. The
change can occur only in the present subjunctive and in the first
person singular of the preterite indicative.
Sacar, to take out
Pret. \st Sing* saqud
Pres. Subj. saque saques saque saquemos saque'is saquen
(2) Verbs in -g-ar insert u between the g and flectional e. The
cases of change are the same as for -car verbs.
Pagar, to pay
Pret. 1st Sing, pague* Pres. Subj. pague, etc.
(The u has no pronounceable value : it is a mere sign that the g is " hard "
before the following e.)
(3) Verbs in -gu-ar write a diaeresis over the u before flectional e.
This is necessary in order to indicate that the u, which has a pro-
nounceable value before the infinitive ending -ar, continues to have
one before the -e. Without the diaeresis u is silent in the combina-
tion gue.
Apaciguar, to pacify
Pret. 1st Sing, apacigue* Pres. Subj. apacigue, etc.
(4) Verbs in -z-ar change z to c before flectional e. The cases,
concerned are the same as in the three preceding classes, but the
variation in spelling is a purely conventional one (due to the fact
that modern Spanish does not write z before e or i), and no possible
change of sound is involved.
Rezar, to pray
Pret. ist Sing, rece Pres. Subj. rece, etc.
215. The preceding cases concern only verbs of the first
conjugation. In the ensuing ones we deal with second and
third conjugation verbs.
IQ2 SPANISH GRAMMAR
(i) Verbs in -c-er or -c-ir preceded by a consonant change c to 2
before flectional o or a. The cases concerned here and in the three
following classes are the first person singular of the present indica-
tive and all of the present subjunctive.
Veneer, to conquer
Pres. Subj. venza venzas venza venzamos venzdis venzan
Esparcir, to scatter
Pres. Indie., 1st Sing, esparzo Pres. Subj. esparza, etc.
a. For verbs in -cer and -cir preceded by a vowel, see the Inceptive
Conjugation, § 220.
(2) Verbs in -g-er or -g-ir, whether regular verbs or not, change
g to j before flectional o or a.
Coger, to gather, take, etc.
Pres. Indie., isf Sing, cojo Pres. Subj. coja, etc.
Corregir, to correct
Pres. Indie., 1st Sing, corrijo
Pres. Subj. corrija, etc. (A radical-changing verb.)
(3) Verbs-in -qu-ir change qu to c before flectional o or a.
Delinquir, to be delinquent
Pres. Indie., 1st Sing, delinco Pres. Subj. delinca, etc.
(4) Verbs in -gu-ir omit the u before flectional o or a. The u is
a mere sign of " hard " g in the infinitive, and is not needed before a
following o or a.
Distinguir, to distinguish
Pres. Indie., ist Sing, distingo Pres. Subj. distinga, etc.
216. In the second and third conjugations the diphthongs
-ie- and -16 occur in certain endings (present participle, third
person singular, and third person plural of the preterite indica-
tive, and throughout the two imperfects and the hypothetical of
THE VERB 193
the subjunctive). If the verb stem end in a vowel (e.g. le-er,
'to read '), the i of these diphthongal endings must be changed
to y, for it is a general rule (and therefore applicable to all
verbs, whether regular or not) that unaccented i cannot stand
between two vowels.
Le-er, to read
Pres, Part. le-yendo (for le-iendo)
Pret. Indie., *$d Sing. Ie-y6 (for Ie-i6)
^d PI. le-yeron (for le-ieron)
Imperf. Subj.^ 1st Form le-yese, etc. {for le-iese, etc.)
2.d Form le-yera, etc. {for le-iera, etc.)
Hypothetical le-yere, etc. {for le-ie.e, etc.)
This change is particularly common in -uir verbs (huir, < to flee,'
huyendo, etc.)«
217. If the verb stem end in 11 or n, the i of the diphthongal
endings -ie- and -16 disappears. This is true of all verbs, regular
or not. Certain irregular verbs (especially decir, ' to say,' traer,
1 to bring,' and -ducir derivatives) likewise lose the i of their -ie-
e ridings after the j of their preterite stem.
Bullir, to boil
Pres. Part. bull-endo (instead of bull-iendo}
Pret, Indie., ^d Sing, bull-d (instead of bull-id)
$d PI. bull-eron (instead of bull-ieron)
Impf. Subj.) ist Form bull-ese, etc.
2.d Form bull-era, etc.
Hyp. Subj. bull-ere, etc,
Planir, to lament
plan-endo plafi-6 plaS-eron
plafi-ese, etc. plan-era, etc. plan-ere, etc.
Traer, to bring
Pret. Indie. , 3^ /*/., traj -eron
Subj. traj-ese, etc. traj-era, etc, traj-ere, etc.
194
SPANISH GRAMMAR
218. In the three persons singular and in the third plural of
the present tenses (indicative, subjunctive, and imperative),
certain -iar and -uar verbs take an accent on the i or the u.
Variar, to vary
Pres. Indie. vano varias varfa (variamos) (variais) varian
Pres. Subj. varfe varies van'e (variemos) (varieis) varien
Imper. Sing* varia
Acentuar, to accentuate, to accent
Pres. Indie. acentuo acentuas acentua acentuan
Pres. Subj. acentue acentues acentue acentuen
Sing, acentua
219. Not all the -iar and -uar verbs take this accent ; cf.
principiar, * to begin ' ; principio, ' I begin ' ; presenciar, * to
witness ' ; presencio, ' I witness ' ; diferenciar, * to differentiate ' ;
diferencian, ' they differentiate.' By practice only can it be
determined whether the accent should fall on the i and the u or
not. The verbs in the following lists are among the commonest
taking the accent.
(i) -iar:
acuantiar calo friar cuantiar enfriar
cariar desafiar enviar
ciar descarriar espiar
confiar desconfiar estriar
contrariar descriar expiar
aliar
ampliar
arriar
ataviar
averiar
aviar
correntiar desvariar fiar
criar desviar gloriar
(2) -uar:
acentuar continuar extenuar
actuar desvirtuar fluctuar
arruar efectuar ganzuar
atenuar evaluar graduar
conceptuar exceptuar
guiar
hastiar
telegrafiar
triar
liar
vaciar
piar
porfiar
resfriar
vanagloriar
variar
vigiar
rociar
zurriar
habituar perpetuar situar
individuar puntuar tumultuar
infatuar redituar usufructual
insinuar ruar valuar
THE VERB 195
220. Verbs with Inceptive Endings. — There are certain
verbs of the second and third conjugations whose infinitives end
in -cer or -cir preceded by a vowel and the great majority of
which are derived from Latin inceptive (-seen) verbs. In the
present stem (indicative and subjunctive; these insert a z
before the c, wherever the verb ending begins with o or a.
Only seven forms undergo this change ; namely, the first person
singular present indicative, and the six forms of the present
subjunctive. All other forms of these verbs are regular.1
Conocer, to know, conociendo, conocido
Pres. Indie.
conozc-o conoc-es conoc-e conoc-emos conoc-ds, conoc-en
Pres. Subj.
conozc-a conozc-as conozc-a conozc-amos conozc-ais conozc-an
Pres. Imperat. conoce, conoc-ed
Indie. Imperf. conocia, etc. Pret. conocf, etc.
Fut. conocere', etc. Cond. conoceria, etc.
Subj. Imperfs. conociese, etc. conociera, etc.
Hyp. conociere, etc.
Lucir, to shine, luciendo, lucido
Pres. Indie, luzc-o luc-es luc-e luc-imos luc-is luc-en
Pres. Subj. luzc-a luzc-as luzc-a luzc-amos luzc-ais luzc-an
All other forms regular as in the third conjugation.
Exceptions : — a. mecer, 'to rock' (and its derivative remecer), sim-
ply changes c to z before o or a (mezo, meza, etc.) ; it is a regular verb
of the second conjugation. Cocer, 'to boil,' recocer, 'to boil again,' and
CSCOCer, 'to smart,' likewise change c to z; they are radical-changing
verbs of the first class, e.g. cuezo, cueza, etc. ; cf. § 223 (4) ; but cocer
is little used in forms taking z. Hacer, «to do,' 'to make,' decir, 'to say,'
and their derivatives, are irregular verbs and not of the inceptive class.
* The inceptive or "beginning" sense is not necessarily present in these
Verbs. It was already gone to a large degree in Latin.
196 SPANISH GRAMMAR
Irregular, too, are yacer, 'to lie,' and placer, 'to please.' Pacer, 'to
graze,' and balbucir, ' to stammer,' are hardly used in the forms that
would have an inserted Z.
b. Certain irregular verbs conjugate their present tenses after the fashion
of the inceptive verb. Thus the -ducir derivatives (conducir, inducir,
etc.) have in the pres. indie, -duzco, and in the pres. subj. -duzca, -duzcas,
-duzca, -duzcamos, -duzcdis, -duzcan. The rest of their present forms are
also like those of lucir; that is, are those of regular verbs of the third con-
jugation. Their preterite tenses are irregular. See § 256.
221 . Radical-changing Verbs. — Quite a number of verbs are
regular as to their flectional endings, but under certain conditions
modify the vocalic nature of their radical or root syllable. In
these verbs the infinitive shows the unmodified root vowel, which
must be either e or o. As a result of accentual influences or of
apparent umlaut {e.g. the influence of the i of one of the diph-
thongs ie, io, in the following syllable) the e may become ie or
even i and the o may become ue or even u.
222. There are three main classes of these radical-changing
verbs. Their variations may be represented by this scheme :
I. Root vowel e becomes ie ) , .
\ under the accent.
Root vowel o becomes ue >
II. Root vowel e becomes ie )
\ under the accent.
Root vowel o becomes ue )
Root vowel e becomes i ) ... . f ..
r when not accented, if the following
Root vowel o becomes u i
syllable have a or one of the diphthongs ie, io.
III. Root vowel e becomes i, both (i) under the accent and (2)
when not accented, if followed by a syllable with a or
one of the diphthongs ie, io.
NOTE. — It is well for students to be on their guard against all verbs
showing e or 0 in what seems to be the root vowel of the infinitive. A
verb list should be consulted for the purpose of ascertaining whether they
are radical-changing or not.
THE VERB
197
223. This first class of radical-changing verbs embraces
only -ar and -er verbs. In these, e becomes ie and o becomes
ue when the root syllable has the accent. It can have the
accent only in the three persons singular and the third person
plural of the present indicative an I present subjunctive, and
in the second person singular of the imperative. These forms
alone, then, show any change : all the other forms are per-
fectly regular. The variations may be illustrated by the verbs
pensar, to think. contar, to count, to tell.
perder, to lose, y' mover, to move.
(i) Pensar, pensando, pensado
{piens-o
piens-as
piens-a
r piens-e
Pres. Subj. J piens-es
(^ piens-e
Imperat. piens-a
pens-amos
pens-ais
piens-an
pens-emos
pens-eis
piens-en
pens-ad
Imperf. Indie, pens-aba, pens-abas, etc.
Pret. Indie, pens-e", pens-aste, etc.
Flit. Indie, pensar-d, pensar-ds, etc.
Cond. Indie, pensar-ia, pensar-ias, etc.
fmperf. Subj.) 1st Form pens-ase, pens-ases, etc.
fmperf. Subj ., 2.d Form pens-ara, pens-aras, etc.
Hyp. Subj. pens-are, pens-ares, etc.
(2) Perder, perdiendo, perdido
rpierd-o perd-emos
Pres. Indie. J pierd-es perd-dis
l^pierd-e pierd-en
rpierd-a perd-amos
Pres. Subj. J pierd-as perd-dis
l^pierd-a pierd-an
Imperat. pierd-e perd-ed
All other forms
are regular.
All other forms
are regular.
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Jmperf. Indie, perd-ia, perd-ias, etc.
Pret. Indie, perd-i, perd-iste, etc.
Fut. Indie, perder-e, perder-as, etc.
Cond. Indie, perder-ia, perder-ias, etc.
f. Subj., ist Form perd-iese, perd-ieses, etc.
Imperf. Sufi/., id Form perd-iera, perd-ieras, etc.
Hyp. Subj. perd-iere, perd-ieres, etc*
(3) Contar, contando, contado
( cuent-o cont-amos
Pres. Indie. J cuent-as cont-ais
i^cuent-a cuent-an
rcuent-e cont-emos
Pres. Subj. J cuent-es cont-dis
(^cuent-e cuent-en
Imperat. cuent-a cont-ad J
Cont-aba, etc. ; cont-d, etc. ; contar-^, etc. ; contar-ia, etc. ; cont-ase,
etc. ; cont-ara, etc. ; cont-are, etc*
(4) Mover, moviendo, movido
r muev-o mov-emos
Pres. Indie. J muev-es mov-^is
(^ muev-e muev-en
{muev-a mov-amos
muev-as mov-dis
muev-a muev-an
muev-e mov-ed
All other forms
are regular.
Mov-ia, etc. ; mov-i, etc. ; mover-d, etc. ; mover-ia, etc. ; mov-iese,
etc. ; mov-iera, etc. ; mov-iere, etc.
NOTE. — The change of the root vowels e and 0 to ie and ue under
the accent started with verbs having as their root vowels in Latin e or at
(vulgar Latin open <?) and o. In the development cf Latin into Spanish
these vowels could not remain under the accent (as the long vowels clid)(
but when stressed they broke into the corresponding diphthongs ie, ue
THE VERB 199
When not under the accent, they ordinarily preserved their integrity in
Spanish: cf. Latin petra, Spanish piedra, 'stone'; Latin terra, Spanish
tierra, 'earth'; Latin certus, Spanish cierto, 'certain'; Latin caecus,
Spanish ciego, 'blind'; Latin fortis, Spanish fuerte, 'strong'; but with
unaccented and therefore retained root vowel, Latin * petrdrius, Spanish
pedrero, 'stone-cutter '; Latin tirrenus, Spanish terreno, 'land,' etc., etc.
224. Certain verbs in -olver are of this first radical-changing
class, but have only an irregular past participle in -uelto.
These are chiefly
volver, to return, to come back ;
Pres. Indie, vuelvo, vuelves, etc. ; Past Part, vuelto ;
and its derivatives, devolver, <to give back'; envolver, 'to wrap
up ' ; revolver, * to stir,' etc., and solver, < to loosen,' and its deriv-
atives, absolver, < to absolve ' ; disolver, < to dissolve ' ; resolver, ( to
resolve,' etc.
225. Orthographic changes already indicated for regular
verbs are to be observed also in radical- changing verbs; cf.
§§ 213-217, e.g.:
r Pret., ist Sing, me revolque'
c to qu, revolcarse, ' to wallow': •< Pres. Sbj., ist Sing, me re-
L vuelque, etc.
( Pret. ist Sine", cegue*
gtogu, cegar, 'to blind': < _, c,. *1 ?
\ Pres. Sbj. ist Sg. ciegue, <?/<:.
f Pret. ist Sing, tropece
ztoc, tropezar, 'to stumble': \ _ w. .7..
i. Pres. Sbj. ist Sing, tropiece
{Pres. Ind. tuerzo, but
tuerces, tuerce, etc.
r> oz- *
Pres. Sbj. tuerza, tuerzas,
etc.
{Pres. Ind. degiiello, de-
giiellas, etc.
Pres. Sbj. degiielle, etc.
200
SPANISH GRAMMAR
226. The verbs errar, ' to err,' and oler, ' to have an odor,' « to
smell/ are of this first radical-changing class, but wherever they
stress their root syllables, the resulting ie of errar is changed to
ye, and the resulting ue of oler to hue, because of the rule that
no word should begin with the diphthongs ie or ue.
(i) Errar, errando, errado
Pres. fnd. yerr-o yerr-as yerr-a err-amos err-ais yerr-an
Pres. Subj. yerr-e yerr-es yerr-e err-emos err-e'is yerr-en
Imperat. yerr-a err-ad •
etc. etc.
(2) Oler, oliendo, olido
Pres. fnd. huel-o huel-es huel-e ol-emos ol-dis
Pres. Subj. huel-a huel-as huel-a ol-amos ol-ais
Imperat. huel-e ol-ed
etc. etc.
huel-en
huel-an
a. An h is also inserted before the ue of the stressed root syllables of
desosar, 'to bone,' 'to unbone,' and desovar, 'to spawn.' Here the h is
due to the analogy of the related nouns hueso. ' bone,' and huevo, ' egg.'
Desosar, desosando, desosado
Pres. Indie.
deshueso deshuesas deshuesa desosamos desosais deshuesan
Pres. Sitbj.
deshuese deshueses deshuese desosemos desosdis deshuesen
Imperat.
deshuesa
etc.
desosad
etc.
In similar fashion desovar has
deshuevo deshuevas deshueva desovamos etc.
THE VERB 201
227. Instead of o in the unaccented syllables, to correspond
to ue of the accented syllables, jugar, ' to play,' now shows u.
But the u has simply taken the place of older o. The ue
remains wherever originally developed. Before flectional e of
the ending, u is inserted after the g.
Jugar, jugando, jugado
Pres. fnd. j«ego juegas juega jugamos jugais juegan
Pres. Subj. juegue juegues juegue juguemos jugueis jueguen
fmperat. juega jugad
Pret. fnd, jugue', etc.
All other forms have u.
228. Three verbs in -ir seem to belong to this class, which
regularly comprises only -ar and -er verbs. These are discernir,
'to discern,' concernir, ' to concern' (cf. § 264), adquirir, 'to
acquire,' and inquirir, ' to inquire.' But they are derivatives
and are related to simple verbs in -er, viz. cerner and querer.1
Adquirir and inquirir show the further peculiarity of an i in the
unstressed root forms, to correspond to the ie of the stressed
root syllables ; but it is to be observed that querer shows the
original e.
(i) Discernir, discerniendo, discernido
Pres. Indie.
disderno disciernes discierne discernimos discernfs disciernen
Pres. Subj.
discierna disciernas discierna discernamos discernais disciernau
Imperat.
— discierne discernid —
All other lorms are regular as of the -ir conjugation.
1 Querer is irregular, adquirir and inquirir are regular, in the preterite and
allied forms.
202 SPANISH GRAMMAR
(2) Adquirir, adquiriendo, adquirido
Pres. Indie.
adquiero adquieres adquiere adquirimos adquiris adquieren
Pres. Subj.
adquiera adquieras adquiera adquiramos adquirdis adquieran
Imperat*
adquiere adquirid
All other forms are regular as of the -ir conjugation.
229. The second radical-changing class embraces only verbs
of the third conjugation with the root vowel e or 0.
As in the first class, e becomes ie and 0 becomes ue under
the accent. When not accented the e is changed to i and the
0 to U, if the strong vowel a or one of the diphthongs ie, 16
occur in the next syllable. In all other cases the original e
and 0 remain. This class may be illustrated by the conjuga-
tion of the verbs sentir, ' to feel,' and dormir, ' to sleep.'
(i) Sentir, sintiendo, sentido
Pres. Indie.
sient-o sient-es sient-e sent-imos sent-is sient-en
Pres. Subj.
sient-a sient-as sient-a sint-amos sint-a"is sient-an
Imperat.
sient-e sent-id
Fut. Indie. sentir-d, etc. (Regular)
Cond. Indie. sentir-ia, etc. (Regular)
Imp erf. Indie, sent-ia, etc. (Regular}
Pret. Indie.
sent-i sent-iste sint-io sent-imos sent-isteis sint-ieron
Imp erf . Subj., \st Form
sint-iese sint-ieses sint-iese sint-ie'semos sint-ieseis sint-iesen
THE VERB
203
Imperf. Subj.y 2.d Form
sint-iera sint-ieras sint-iera sint-ie'ramos sint-ierais sini-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
sint-iere sint-ieres sint-iere sint-ie'remos sint-iereis sint-ieren
(2) Dormir, durmiendo, dormido
Pres. Indie.
f duerm-o duerm-es
1 dorm-imos dorm-is
duerm-e
duerm-en
Pres. Subj.
f duerm-a duerm-as
\ durm-amos durm-dis
duerm-a
duerm-an
Imperat.
f duerm-e
\ dorm-id
__^^
Fut. Indie.
Cond. Indie.
Imperf. Indie.
dormir-e', etc. (Regular)
dormir-ia, etc. (Regular)
dorm-la, etc. (Regular)
Pret. Indie.
f dorm-f dorm-iste
\ dorm-imos dorm-isteis
durm-i6
durm-ieron
Imperf. Subj.,
f durm-iese durm-ieses
1st Form \ . .. , . .
[ dunn-idsemos durm-ieseis
durm-iese
durm-iesen
Imperf. Subj.,
f durm-iera durm-ieras
•2d Form \ . .. , . .
L durm-ieramos durm-ierais
durm-iera
durm-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
[ durm-iere durm-ieres
1 durm-ie'remos durm-iereis
durm-iere
durm-ieren
It is a useful fact to remember that in this class the subjunctive imper-
fects and hypothetical always show the same stem as the preterite, third
person singular.
a. The number of 0 verbs in this second radical-changing class is
small : dormir, ' to sleep,' and morir, 'to die,' are the only simple verbs in
it. Morir is conjugated exactly like dormir except in its past participle,
which has only the irregular form muerto. The past participle muerto
is not only intransitive, meaning ' died,' ' dead ' (el hombre ha muerto,
'the man has died,' 'the man is dead '); but with a personal object it may
be transitive, meaning ' killed ' (hemos muerto al soldado, ' we have killed
the soldier').
2O4 SPANISH GRAMMAR
230. The third radical-changing class consists only of third'
conjugation verbs with the root vowel e. A change occurs
only in the same cases as in Class II, viz. under the accent,
and where the root syllable is not accented if it be followed by
a or one of the diphthongs ie, 16. In both these cases the e
becomes i (so that there is no diphthong in the root syllable of
these verbs). In all other forms the e remains and those forms
are regular as of the third conjugation. The class may be
illustrated by the conjugation of vestir, ' to clothe/
Vestir, vistiendo, vestido
Pres. Indie.
vlst-o vist-es vist-e vest-imos vest-Is vist-en
Pres. Subj.
vist-a vist-as vist-a vist-amos vist-ais vist-an
Imperat.
— vist-e - - vest-id — —
Fut. Indie. vestir-d, etc.
Cond. Indie. vestir-ia, etc. {Regular}
Imperf. Indie, vest-ia, etc. {Regular}
Pret. Indie.
vest-1 vest-iste vist-id vest-imos vest-isteis vist-ieron
Imperf. Subj.) \st Form
vist-iese vist-ieses vist-iese vist-idsemos vist-ieseis vist-iesen
Imperf. Subj., 7.d Form
vist-iera vist-ieras vist-iera vist-ie'ramos vist-ierais vist-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
vist-iere vist-ieres vist-iere vist-idremos vist-iereis vist-ieren
As in the second class, it is to be noted that the stem of the
preterite, third person singular, prevails throughout the sub-
junctive imperfects and hypothetical.
THE VERB
20C
231. The orthographical changes stated for regulai verbs
are to be observed here: cf. §§ 213-217.
gu to g, seguir, ' to follow
g to j, elegir, * to elect ' :
Pres. Indie., \st Sing, sigo
Pres. Subj. siga, sigas, etc.
{Pres. Indie., \st Sing, elijo
Pres. Subj. elija, elijas, etc.
{Pres. Part, cinendo {for ciniendo)
Pret. -$d Sing. cifi6, ^d PL cineron
Imperf. Subj., \st Form, cinese, etc.
Imperf. Subj., 2.d Form, cinera, etc.
Hyp. Subj. cinere, etc.
232. The verb erguir, 'to erect,' may in the stressed root
syllables of its present tenses have either the diphthong ie
(written ye because it is at the beginning of the word) or the
vowel i. It may be conjugated throughout as of either the
second or the third radical-changing class. Of course its u
disappears before o or a.
Erguir, irguiendo, erguido
Pres. Ind.
I irg-o
irgu-es
yerg-as
irg-as
irgu-e
jyergu-en
ergui-mos ergu-isjirgu_en
' I irg-a
1=
Fut. Ind. erguir-e', etc.
Cond. Indie, erguir-fa, etc.
Imp. Ind. ergu-ia, etc.
'irg-amos
irg-*isjrg~ai
1 irg-an
ergu-idj__
{Regular}
{Regular}
{Regular}
Pret. Ind. ergu-i ergu-iste irgu-i6 ergu-imos ergu-isteis irgu4eron
Imp. Subj.
\st Form,
Imp. Subj.
id Form, irgu-iera, ,*.
Hyp. Subj. irgu-iere, etc.
2O6 SPANISH GRAMMAR
233. There are certain verbs in -eir that belong to this
class. They change their e to i in the same cases as vestir,
but whenever that i comes into conjunction with i of a follow-
ing diphthong ie or 16, one of the two i's disappears, as in reir,
' to laugh.'
Reir, riendo (for ri-iendo), re-ido
Pres. Indie, rf-o ri-es ri-e re-imos re-is rl-en
Pres. Subj. rf-a ri-as rl-a ri-amos ri-ais ri-an
Imperat. ri-e re-Id •
Fut. Indie. reir-d, etc. {Regular)
Cond. Indie, reir-ia, etc. (Regular)
Imperf. Ind. re-la, etc. (Regular)
Pret.lndic. r,l re-.stej ri^{ «,!»,» re-.steUJ™'^
Imperf. Subj-> \st Form riese (for ri-iese) rieses, etc.
Imperf. Subj., ?.d Form riera (for ri-iera) rieras, etc.
Hyp. Subj. riere (for ri-iere) rieres, etc.
a. This is now the customary conjugation of reir and other -eir verbs
of this class. Formerly — at least in the case of reir itself — the i was
not lost necessarily, and there resulted such forms as riyendo (unaccented
i changed to y between vowels), riy6, riyeron, riyese, etc., riyera, etc.,
riyere, etc. Note the many forms of reir requiring a written accent.
234. The verb podrir, ' to putrefy/ was once included in this
class as an example of a change of o to u in conjugation. But
in practice it has become a regular verb of the third conjuga-
tion, with u everywhere in the root syllable. The o is retained
only in by-forms of the infinitive and past participle, podrir
and podrido. Pudrir is preferred to podrir, but as the passive
participle podrido seems to be still the commoner form.
235. -Uir Verbs. — These include only verbs with a pro-
nounced u (written with a diaeresis when g precedes, as in
arguir, ' to argue ')
THE VERB
207
Their peculiarity consists in adding y to their stem vowel u,
except where the flectional ending begins with i (whether
stressed i or i of the diphthongs ie, io). Of course, the future
and conditional indicative do not take the y, being based on
the infinitive. Besides this y added to the stem, the conjuga-
tion of these verbs shows a y (in the present participle, the
preterite, third singular, and third plural, and the subjunctive
imperfects and hypothetical) which is not an addition, but
merely represents the unaccented i of the diphthongal ending,
which has chanced to come between vowels : cf. § 216.
The class may be illustrated by the conjugation of huir, 'to
flee.'
Huir, huyendo (for hu-iendo), huido
Pres. Indie.
hu-imos hu-is
Pres. Subj.
huy-amos
Imperat.
huy-o
huy-a
huy-e
huy-a
huy-es
huy-as
— huy-e
huir-e*, etc. (Regular)
huir-ia, etc. (Regular}
hu-Ia hu-ias
huy-ais
hu-id
buy-en
huy-an
Put. Indie.
Cond. Indie.
Imperf. Indie.
hu-ia hu-iamos
Pret. Indie.
hu-i hu-iste hu-y6 hu-imos
Imperf. Subj., \st Form
hu-yese hu-yeses hu-yese hu-ydsemos
Imperf. Sub]., id Form
hu-yera hu-yeras hu-yera hu-ydramos
Hyp. Subj.
hu-yere hu-yeres hu-yere hu-yeVemos
hu-iais hu-ian
hu-isteis
hu-yeseis
hu-yerais
hu-yereis
hu-yeron
hu-yesen
hu-yeran
hu-yeren
208
SPANISH GRAMMAR
a. Verbs in -giiir require their diaeresis only before a written i : it dis
appears before y : eg.
argiiir, ' to argue,' but arguyendo, arguyo, arguye, arguyen., arguya, etc,
argiiia, argiii, but arguy6, arguyese, etc.
The Irregular Verb
236. Ser, to be
Ser, siendo, sido
Pres. Indie.
Pres. Subj.
Imperat.
Fut. Indie.
Cond. Indie.
Imp erf. hi die. era
Pret. Indie. fu-i
Imperf. Subj., \ fu_(
1st Form )
Imperf. Subj.,\,_^ fu_ems fu_era
id Form )
Hyp. Subj. fu-ere fu-eres fu-ere
soy
se-a
es
se-a
eres
se-as
sd
ser-d ser-ds ser-d
ser-ia ser-ias ser-ia
eras era
fu-iste fu-d
fu-eses fu-ese
somos
se-amos
son
se-an
ser-emos
ser-an
sois
se-dis
sed
ser-dis
ser-iamos ser-iais ser-ian
e'ramos erais eran
fu-imos fu-isteis fu-eron
fu-eseis fu-esen
fu-dramos fu-erais fu-eran
fu-dremos fu-ereis fu-eren
he
has
hay-a
habr-d
habr-ia
hay-as
(hd)
habr-ds
habr-ias
237. Haber, to have
Haber, habiendo, habido
Pres. Indie.
ha hemos
Pres. Subj.
hay-a hay-amos
Imperat.
hab-dis han
hay-dis
hab-ed
hay-an
Fut. Indie.
habr-d habr-emos
Cond. Indie.
habr-ia habr-iamos
habr-dis habr-dn
habr-iais habr-lan
THE VERB
209
Imperf. Indie.
hab-ia hab-ias hab-ia hab-i'amos hab-ials hab-ian
Pret. Indie.
hub-e hub-iste hub-o hub-imos hub-isteis hub-ieron
Imperf. Sub]'., 1st Form.
hub-iese hub-ieses hub-iese hub-idsemos hub-ieseis hub-iesen
Imperf. Subj., 2d Form.
hub-iera hub-ieras hub-iera hub-ieramos hub-ierais hub-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
hub-iere hub-ieres hub-iere hub-ieremos hub-iereis hub-ieren
a. Note that the future and the conditional of the indicative are based
on a contract form of the infinitive. The form h6 is, in accordance with
the example set by the Spanish Academy, usually classed as imperative
singular of haber; it may, however, represent a peculiar phonetic devel-
opment of the imperative singular of the verb ver, ' to see,' as the gramma-
rian Cuervo suggests. It is most common in combination with the adverb
aqui, 'here,' he" aqui, 'behold.' As the impersonal verb 'to be,' haber
takes the suffix y (an old adverb meaning ' there ') in the present indica-
tive, whence hay, 'there is' or 'there are.' For the other moods and
tenses it simply has the third person singular forms without the appended
y: habia, 'there was (were),' habrd, 'there will be,' etc.
It is characteristic of many irregular verbs that in the first and
third singular of the preterite indicative they stress the stem vowel
and not the ending : compare hube, hubo with temf, temi6.
238. Estar, to be
Estar, estando, estado
Pres. Indie.
est-amos
est-oy est-a"s
est-e* est-e's
• est-d
est-d
est-d
Pres. Subj.
est-emos
Imperat.
est-dis
est-dis
est-ad
est-dn
est-e*n
210
SPANISH GRAMMAR
estar-e*
estar-ia
est-aba
estar-as
estar-ias
est-abas
estuv-e estuv-iste
Fuf. Indie.
estar-a estar-emos
Cond. Indie.
estar-ia estar-iamos
Imp erf. Indie.
est-aba est-dbamos
Pret. Indie.
estuv-o estuv-imos
estar-dis
estar-iais
est-abais
estar-an
estar-lan
est-aban
estuv-isteis estuv-ieron
Imp erf. Subj., ist Form
estuv-iese estuv-ieses estuv-iese estuv-idsemos estuv-ieseis estuv-iesen
Imp erf. Subj., 2.d Form
estuv-iera estuv-ieras estuv-iera estuv-ie'ramos estuv-ierais estuv-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
estuv-iere estuv-ieres estuv-iere estuv-ieVemos estuv-iereis estuv-ieren
a. The present tenses of estar are perfectly regular as of the first con-
jugation, except for the y appended to the first person singular, present
indicative form (cf. the y of soy, * I am,' from ser ; of doy, ' I give,' from
dar; and of voy, 'I go,' from ir). Estar is the Latin verb stare, 'to
stand,' which has had its sense weakened to ' to be,' and has received an
initial (prosthetic) e, because in Spanish no word properly begins with
S plus a consonant. All Latin words beginning with such a combination
and surviving in Spanish take this e prefix (cf. also French etat from Latin
statum, etc.).
239. Tener, to have
Tener, teniendo, tenido
Pres. Indie.
teng-o tien-es tien-e ten-emos ten-e'is tien-en
Pres. Subj.
teng-a teng-as teng-a teng-amos teng-ais teng-an
Imperat.
ten — — ten-ed — —
THE VERB
211
Fut. Indie.
tendr-e" tendr-ds tendr-d tendr-emos tendr-dis tendr-dn
Cond. Indie.
tendr-ia tendr-Ias tendr-ia tendr-iamos tendr-Iais tendr-ian
Imperf. Indie.
ten-fa ten-ias ten-ia ten-iamos ten-fais ten-ian
Fret. Indie.
tuv-e tuv-iste tuv-o tuv-imos tuv-isteis tuv-ieron
Imperf. Subj., ist Form
tuv-iese tuv-ieses tuv-iese tuv-idsemos tuv-ieseis tuv-iesen
Imperf. Subj., id Form
tuv-iera tuv-ieras tuv-iera tuv-ieramos tuv-ierais tuv-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
tuv-iere tuv-ieres tuv-iere tuv-ieremos tuv-iereis tuv-ieren
a. The infinitive basis of the future and the conditional of the indica-
tive is contract, but with inserted d. The second and third person singu-
lar and the third person plural, present indicative, have the peculiarity
of a radical-changing verb. The imperative singular has no inflectional
ending.
240. Andar, to go, walk
Andar, andando. andado
Pres. Indie.
( and-o
( and-amos
Pres. Subj.
J and-e
( and-emos
Imperat.
{=
Fut. Indie.
j andar-£
( andar-emos
Cond. Indie.
( andar-ia
( imdar-iamos
Imperf. Indie.
J and-aba
( and-dbamos
and-as
and-dis
and-es
and-eis
and-a
and-ad
andar-ds
andar-dis
andar-fas
andar-iais
and-abas
and-abais
and-a
and-an
and-e
and-en
andar-d
andar-dn
andar-ia
andar-ian
and-aba
and-aban
212
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Pret. Indie.
Imp erf. Subj.^
ist Form
Imp erf. Sub}.,
2,d Form
Hyp. Subj.
j anduv-e
< anduv-imos
< anduv-iese
I anduv-iesemos
j anduv-iera
( anduv-idramos
( anduv-iere
( anduv-ieremos
anduv-iste
anduv-o
anduv-isteis
anduv-ieron
anduv-ieses
anduv-iese
anduv-ieseis
anduv-iesen
anduv-ieras
anduv-iera
anduv-ierais
anduv-ieran
anduv-ieres
anduv-iere
anduv-iereis
anduv-ieren
a. This verb is perfectly regular as of the first conjugation in all its
forms except the preterite indicative and the three subjunctive tenses
based on it. Note the resemblance of the preterite stems of estar, tener,
and andar, i.e. estuv-,tuv-, and anduv-,to that of haber, i.e. hub- (spelled
with v instead of b in earlier Spanish).
241. Dar, to gfve
Dar. dando, dado
Pres. Indie.
Pres. Subj.
Imperat.
Put. Indie.
Cond. Indie
Imp. Indie.
Pret. Indie.
Imp. Sub/.. ) .
* zr r d-i
I st Form >
Imp. Subj., ) d_.
2d Form )
Hyp. Subj. d-iere
d-oy d-as d-a
d-d d-es d-d
dar-e* dar-ds dar-a
dar-ia dar-ias dar-ia
d-aba d-abas d-aba
d-1 d-iste d-i6
d-amos d-ais d-an
d-emos d-eis d-en
d-ad
dar-emos dar-dis dar-dn
dar-iamos dar-iais dar-ian
d-abamos d-abais d-aban
d-imos d-isteis d-ieron
iese d-ieses d-iese d-ie'semos d-ieseis d-iesen
-lera
d-i eras d-i era
d-ieres d-iere
d-ieYamos d-ierais d-ieran
d-idremos d-iereis d-ieren
a. The stem of this verb is d-. Thereon are based the present tenses
and the imperfect indicative with the regular endings of the first conjuga-
tion. The first person singular, present indicative, has also a y suffix (cf.
ser, estar, and ir with soy, estoy, and voy). The preterite and the sub-
junctive imperfect and hypothetical tenses simply add to d- the regular
endings of the second and third conjugation.
THE VERB 213
242. Querer, to wish, want
Querer, queriendo, querido
Pres. Indie.
quier-o quier-es quier-e quer-emos quer-dis quier-en
Pres. Subj.
quier-a quier-as quier-a quer-amos quer-dis quier-an
Imperat.
— — quier-e quer-ed
Fut. Indie.
querr-d querr-as querr-i querr-emos querr-dis querr-an
Cond. Indie.
querr-la querr-ias querr-ia querr-iamos querr-iais querr-ian
Imperf. Indie.
quer-ia quer-ias quer-ia quer-iamos quer-iais quer-ian
Pret. Indie.
quis-e quis-iste quis-o quis-imos quis-isteis quis-ieron
Imperf. Subj., 1st Form
quis-iese quis-ieses quis-iese quis-idsemos quis-ieseis quis-iesen
Imperf. Subj., 2.d Form
quis-iera quis-ieras quis-iera quis-idramos quis-ierais quis-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
quis-iere quis-ieres quis-iere quis-ieremos quis-iereis quis-ieren
a. In the present tenses the verb is conjugated exactly like a radical-
changing verb of the first class. The future and conditional indicative are
based on a contract infinitive querr-, whose rr must be carefully pronounced,
especially to distinguish the conditional from the imperfect indicative.
243. Poder, to be able
Poder, pudiendo, podido
Pres. Indie.
pued-o pued-es pued-e pod-emos pod-dis pued-en
Pres. Subj.
pued-a pued-as pued-a poa-amos pod-ais pued-ao
214 SPANISH GRAMMAR
Imperat.
Fut. Indie.
podr-^ podr-as podr-a podr-emos podr-e'is podr-an
Cond. Indie.
podr-la podr-ias podr-la podr-iamos podr-iais podr-lan
Imperf. Indie.
pod-ia pod-ias pod-ia pod-iamos pod-fais pod-ian
Pret. Indie.
pud-e pud-iste pud-o pud-imos pud-isteis pud-ieron
Imperf. Subj., 1st Form
pud-iese pud-ieses pud-iese pud-idsemos pud-ieseis pud-iesen
Imperf. Sub/., id Form
pud-iera pud-icras pud-iera pud-i^ramos pud-ierais pud-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
pud-iere pud-ieres pud-iere pud-ieremos pud-iereis pud-ieren
a. The present indicative and subjunctive follow the model of a radical-
changing verb of the first class, but the present participle has the same stem
as the preterite. The future and conditional indicatives are based on a
contract infinitive. The verb has no imperative.
244. Caber, to be contained, find room
Caber, cabiendo, cabido
Pres. Indie.
quep-o cab-es cab-e cab-emos cab-dis cab-en
Pres. Subj.
quep-a quep-as quep-a quep-amos quep-ais quep-an
Imperat.
cab-e cab-ed
Fut. Indie.
cabr-d cabr-as cabr-a cabr-emos cabr-e'is cabr-dn
THE VERB
215
Cond. Indie.
cabr-fa cabr-ias cabr-fa cabr-iamos cabr-fais cabr-fa a
Imperf. fndic.
cab-ia cab-ias cab-ia cab-iamos cab-iais cab-ian
Pret. Indie.
cup-e cup-iste cup-o cup-imos cup-isteis cup-ieron
Imperf. Subj., \st Form
cup-iese cup-ieses cup-iese cup-iesemos cup-ieseis cup-iesen
Imperf. Subj., 7.d Form
cup-iera cup-ieras cup-iera cup-ieramos cup-ierais cup-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
cup-iere cup-ieres cup-iere cup-ieremos cup-iereis cup-ieren
a. Note the two stems, one regular and the other irregular, in the
present tenses. As is frequently the case, the present subjunctive uses
throughout the irregular stem as found in the first person singular, present
indicative. The future and conditional are based on a contract infinitive.
The preterite cupe represents the Latin capui become cope and then cupe.
245. Saber, to know, be aware
Saber, sabiendo, sabido
Pres. Indie.
s6 sab-es sab-e sab-emos sab-dis sab-en
Pres. Subj.
sep-a sep-as sep-a sep-amos sep-dis sep-an
sab-e sab-ed
Put. Indie.
sabr-e' sabr-ds sabr-a" sabr-emos sabr-dis sabr-dn
Cond. Indie.
sabr-ia sabr-fas sabr-fa sabr-iamos sabr-iais sabr-ian
Imperf. Indie.
sab-ia sab-fas sab-ia sab-iamos sab-iais sab-fan
2l6
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Pret. Indie.
Bup-e sup-iste sup-o sup-imos sup-isteis sup-ieron
Imp erf. Subj., ist Form
Bup-iese sup-ieses sup-iese sup-idsemos sup-ieseis sup-iesen
Imperf. Subj., id Form
sup-iera sup-ieras sup-iera sup-ieramos sup-ierais sup-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
sup-iere sup-ieres sup-iere sup-ieremos sup-iereis sup-ieren
a. The conjugation of saber is quite like that of caber. In the first
person singular, present indicative, however, saber has a contract form s&
instead of a form sepo, which might have been expected : but the irregular
stem sep- has remained in the present subjunctive.
246. Hacer, to do, make
Hacer, haciendo, hecho
Pres. Indie.
hag-o hac-es hac-e hac-emos hac-dis hac-en
Pres. Subj.
hag-a hag-as hag-a hag-amos hag-ais hag-an
Imperat.
haz hac-ed
Fut. Indie.
har-£ har-ds har-a har-emos har-dis har-^n
Cond. Indie.
har-ia har-Ias har-ia har-Iamos har-iais bar-fan
Imperf. Indie.
hac-Ia hac-ias hac-ia hac-i'amos hac-iais hac-lan
Pret. Indie.
hic-c hic-iste hiz-o hic-imos hic-isteis hic-ieron
THE VERB
Imperf. Subj., ist Form
hic-iese hic-ieses hic-iese hic-ie'semos hic-ieseis hic-iesen
Imperf. Subj., ^d Form
hic-iera hic-ieras hic-iera hic-ie'ramos hic-ierais hicieran
Hyp. Subj.
hic-iere hic-ieres hic-iere
hic-idremos hic-iereis hic-ieren
a. The past participle is irregular (from Latin factuni). The impera-
tive singular has no flectional ending, but consists only of the regular pres-
ent stem as found in hac-es, etc., with, of course, z, and not C, in the final
position. The future and conditional are based on a contract infinitive
har. The preterite hice represents the Latin fed. Like hacer are conju-
gated its derivatives. Some of these, like satisfacer, 'to satisfy,' have
instead of h the original Latin /of facere. Besides an imperative singular
satisf az there is found also a regular form satisface.
247. Ir, to go
Ir, yendo, ido
Pres. Indie.
voy
vas
va
vamos
vais
van
Pres. Subj.
vaya
vayas
vaya
vaya mo s
vayais
vayan
Imperat.
-^~
ve
vamos
id
Fut. Indie.
lr-^
ir-as
ir-a
ir-emos
ir-£is
ir-an
Cond. Indie.
ir-ia
ir-fes
ir-ia
ir-iamos
ir-fais
ir-fan
Imperf. Indie.
Iba
ibas
iba
fbamos
ibais
iban
Pret. Indie.
fti-i
fu-iste
fo-d
fu-imos
fu-isteis
fu-eron
218 SPANISH GRAMMAR
Imp erf. Subj., \st Form
fu-ese fu-eses fii-ese fu-esemos fu-eseis fu-esen
Imp erf. Subj.t 2d Form
fa-era fu-eras fu-era fa-eramos fu-erais fu-eran
Hyp. Subj.
fii-ere fu-eres fu-ere fu-e'remos fu-ereis fa-eren
a. There are three different Latin verbs discernible in the make-up of
this verb. The infinitive, present participle, past participle, imperative plu-
ral, future and conditional indicative, and imperfect indicative are asso-
ciated with ire, 'to go.' The present indicative and subjunctive and the
imperative singular forms come from vadere, 'to go.' The preterite and the
subjunctive imperfects and hypothetical represent the Latin fui, fuissetn,
etc. ; that is, they are simply borrowed from the corresponding tenses
of the Spanish ser, ' to be.' Cf. in colloquial English ' I was to Boston
yesterday' = ' I went (and returned).'
b. Ir is apparently the only Spanish verb having an imperative first
plural form, viz. vamos. But authorities regard this as another form of
the first plural, present subjunctive (i.e. while vayamos may represent a
Latin vadeamus> vamos may represent a Latin vadatmis which passed
through the stage vaamos). In Cervantes and other classic writers there is
found also a second form of the second plural, present subjunctive, viz. vais
(i.e. while Latin vadeatis gave vayais, vadatis gave vais through vaais).
In optative constructions vamos, Met us go,' etc., alone can be used:
vayamos is restricted in use to subordinate clauses. Vamos and vaya
are frequently used as interjections (cf. French allons), meaning 'come
now I ' etc.
248. Venir, to come
Venir, viniendo, venido
Pres. fndic.
veng-o vien-es vien-e ven-imos ven-fe vien-en
Pres. Subj.
reng-a veng-as veng-a veng-amos veng-ais veng-an
THE VERB
219
Imperat.
ven ven-id
Fut. Indie.
vendr-d vendr-ds vendr-a vendr-emos vendr-^is vendr-an
Cond. Indie.
vendr-ia vendr-fas vendr-ia vendr-iamos vendr-lais vendr-ian
Imperf. Indie.
ven-ia ven-ias venia ven-iamos ven-iais ven-ian
Pret. Indie.
vin-e vin-iste vin-o vin-imos vin-isteis vin-ieron
Imperf. Subj., ist Form
vin-iese vin-ieses vin-iese vin-idsemos vin-ieseis vin-iesen
Imperf. Subj., 2d Form
vin-iera vin-ieras vin-iera vin-i^ramos vin-ierais vin-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
vin-iere vin-ieres vin-iere vin-i^remos vin-iereis vin-ieren
a. Certain forms have characteristics of a radical-changing verb (cf.
present participle, second and third singular and third plural of present
indicative, etc.). The imperative singular is without a flectional ending.
The future and conditional of the indicative are based on a contract infini-
tive with inserted d. The preterite vine represents Latin vent.
249. Poner, to put
Poner, poniendo, puesto
Pres. Indie.
pong-o pon-es pon-e pon-emos pon-^is pon-en
Pres. Subj.
pong-a pong-as pong-a pong-amos pong-ais pong-an
Imperat.
»— pon pon-ed
220
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Fut. Indie.
pondr-d pondr-ds pondr-d pondr-emos pondr-ds pondr-dn
Cond. Indie.
pondr-la pondr-ias pondr-la pondr-iamos pondr-iais pondr-ian
Imperf. Indie.
pon-ia pon-ias pon-ia pon-iamos pon-iais pon-ian
Pret. Indie.
pus-e pus-iste pus-o pus-imos pus-isteis pus-ieron
Imperf Subj. , I st Form
pus-iese pus-ieses pus-iese pus-ie'semos pus-ieseis pus-iesen
Imperf. Subj., 2,d Form
pus-iera pus-ieras pus-iera pus-ie'ramos pus-ierais pus-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
pus-iere pus-ieres pus-iere pus-ie'remos pus-iereis pus-ieren
a. The present stem shows both a regular and an irregular (pong-)
form. The imperative singular is without flectional ending. The future
and conditional indicative are based on a contract infinitive with inserted
d. The preterite puse came through an intervening pose from Latin
posui. The past participle puesto is irregular; cf. Latin positum.
250. Asir, to grasp
Asir, asiendo, asido
Pres. Indie.
asg-o as-es as-e as-imos as-is as-en
Pres. Subj.
asg-a asg-as asg-a asg-amos asg-dis asg-an
Imperat.
as-e as-id
Fut. Indie.
asir-^ asir-ds asir-d asir-emos asir-dis asir-dn
Cond. Indie.
asir-ia asir-ias asir-ia asir-iamos asir-lais asir-ian
THE VERB 221
Imperf. Indie
as-ia as-ias as-ia as-iamos as-iais as-ian
Pret. Indie.
as-I as-iste as-i6 as-imos as-isteis as-ieron
Imperf. Sub/., \st Form
as-iese as-ieses as-iese as-iesemos as-ieseis as-iesen
Imperf. Subj., ^d Form
as-iera as-ieras as-iera as-ieramos as-ierais as-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
as-iere as-ieres as-iere as-ieremos as-iereis as-ieren
a. This verb is irregular in only seven forms, viz. the first singular,
present indicative, and all the present subjunctive, which show a stem asg-.
All other forms are as of the third regular conjugation.
251. Valer, to be worth
Valer, valiendo, valido
Pres. Indie.
valg-o val-es val-e val-emos val-dis val-en
Pres. Subj.
valg-a valg-as valg-a valg-amos valg-dis valg-an
Imperat.
val^rvale val-ed
Fut. Indie.
valdr-£ valdr-as valdr-d valdr-emos valdr-dis valdr-an
Cond. Indie.
valdr-ia valdr-ias valdr-ia valdr-iamos valdr-iais valdr-ian
Imperf. Indie.
val~ia val-ias val-ia val-iamos val-iais val-ian
Pret. Indie.
faJ-i val-iste val-i6 val-imos val-isteis val-ieron
222
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Imp erf. Subj., ist Form
val-iese val-ieses val-iese val-iesemos val-ieseis val-iesen
Imp erf. Subj., 2.d Form
val-iera val-ieras val-iera val-ieramos val-ierais val-ieran
Hyp. Subj.
val-iere val-ieres val-iere val-ieremos val-iereis val-ieren
a. The present tenses have both a regular and an irregular (valg-)
stem. The imperative singular may have a flectional vowel or not; it
usually does nowadays. The future and conditional indicative are based
on a contract stem with inserted d. All other forms are perfectly regular.
252. Salir, to go out, come out
Salir, saliendo, salido
Pres. Indie, salg-o sal-es sal-e sal-imos sal-is sal-en
Pres. Subj. salg-a salg-as salg-a salg-amos salg-ais salg-an
Imperat. sal sal-id
a. All other forms follow the model of valer, from which, moreover,
salir differs only in the four flectional forms characteristic of the third
conjugation and in having only the imperative singular without a flec-
tional vowel.
253. Caer, to fall
Caer, cayendo, caido
Pres. Indie.
( caig-o
( ca-e m os
ca-es
ca-dis
ca-e
ca-en
Pres. Subj.
( caig-a
( caig-amos
caig-as
caig-ais
caig-a
caig-an
Imperat.
{~
ca-e
ca-ed
_
Fut. Indie
J caer-e'
( caer-emos
caer-as
caer-dis
caer-a
caer-da
Cond. Indie.
( caer-fa
( caer-iamos
caer-fas
caer-iais
caer-ia
caer-ian
THE VERB
223
Imperf. Indie. \
Pret. Indie.
ca-ia
ca-iamos
ca-i
ca-imos
Imperf. Subj., < ca-yese
1st Form \ ca-ye'semos
Imperf. Subj., < ca-yera
2d Form \ ca-ye'ramos
ca-yere
ca-ydremos
Hyp. Subj.
ca-fas
ca-iais
ca-iste
ca-isteis
ca-yeses
ca-yeseis
ca-yeras
ca-yerais
ca-yeres
ca-yereis
ca-ia
ca-ian
ca-yo
ca-yeron
ca-yese
ca-yesen
ca-yera
ca-yeran
ca-yere
ca-yeren
a. The present tenses have a regular and an irregular (caig-) stem.
The rest of the verb is perfectly regular. Note, however, that a written
accent is required on the i of the past participle and of the second singular
and the first and second plural of the preterite, and that unaccented i
between vowels has been changed to y in the preterite third singular and
third plural, in the subjunctive imperfects and hypothetical, and in the
present participle.
254. Oir, to hear
Oir, oyendo, oido
Pres. Indie.
oig-o
oy-es
oy-e
o-imos
o-is
oy-en
Pres. Subj.
oig-a
oig-as
oig-a
oig-amos
oig-ais
oig-an
fmperat.
oy-e
o-id
Fut. Indie.
oir-e
oir-as
oir-a
oir-emos
oir-dis
oir-an
Cond. Indie.
oir-ia
oir-ias
oir-ia
oir-iamos
oir-iais
oir-ian
Imperf. Indie.
o-ia
o-ias
o-ia
o-iamos
o-iais
o-ian
Pret. Indie.
o-i
o-iste
o-yd
o-i'mos
o-isteis
o-yeron
Imperf. Subj., ]
1st Form j
• o-yese
i
o-yeses
o-yese
o-yesemos
o-yeseis
o-yesen
Imperf. Subj., \
2.d Form j
- o-yera
1
o-yeras
o-yera
o-yeramos
o-yerais
o-yeran
Hyp. Subj.
o-yere
o-yeres
o-yere
o-yeremos
o-yereis
o-yeren
a, Three stems are visible in the present, viz. oig- (first singular, present
indicative, and all of present subjunctive), oy- (second and third singular
and third plural of present indicative and imperative singular), and the
224
SPANISH GRAMMAR
regular stem 0- (first and second plural, present indicative, and imperative
plural). The rest of the verb is regular, but unaccented i between vowels
is changed to y (third singular and plural of preterite, and all of sub-
junctive imperfects and hypothetical, as well as present participle). Not*
that stressed i after 0 requires a written accent.
255. Traer, to bring
Traer, trayendo
, traido
Pres. Indie.
( traig-o
( tra-emos
tra-es
tra-^is
Pres. Subj.
J traig-a
( traig-amos
traig-as
traig-dis
Imperat.
1 =
tra-e
tra-ed
Fut. Indie.
< traer-d
( traer-emos
traer-as
traer-^is
Cond. Indie*
j traer-fa
( traer-iamos
traer-fas
traer-iais
Imp erf. Indie.
( tra-la
[ tra-famos
tra-Ias
tra-iais
Pret. Indie.
( traj-e
1 traj-imos
traj-iste
traj-isteis
Imp erf. Subj.,
1st Form
( traj-ese
( traj-esemos
traj-eses
traj-eseis
Imp erf. Sub].,
2d Form
( traj-era
1 traj -frames
traj-eras
traj-erais
Hyp. Subj.
| traj-ere
( traj-dremos
traj-eres
traj-ereis
tra-e
tra-en
traig-a
traig-an
traer-d
traer-an
traer-ia
traer-ian
tra-ia
tra-ian
traj-o
traj-eron
traj-ese
traj-esen
traj-era
traj-eran
traj-ere
traj-eren
a. The present tenses show a regular and an irregular (traig-) stem;
the present participle exhibits the change of unaccented i between vowels
to y (tra-iendo — tra-yendo). Note the written accent of the past par-
THE VERB
225
ticiple. The preterite traje represents the Latin traxi (a Latin x between
vowels has usually become j in Spanish). The i of the diphthong ie has
disappeared after the j; cf. § 217.
256. -ducir, to lead
This verb (from Latin ducere] is found in modern Spanish
only in certain derivatives (conducir, deducir, inducir, reducir,
etc.). Its conjugation may be illustrated by one of these.
Conducir, to conduct
conduc-es conduc-e
conduc-is conduc-en
conduzc-as conduzc-a
conduzc-ais conduzc-an
conduc-e
conduc-id
conducir-as
conducir-e*is
conducir-ias
conducir-iais
f conduc-ia conduc-fas
conduc-iais
conduj-iste
conduj-isteis
conduj-eses
conduj-eseis
Prts. Indie.
< conduzc-o
( conduc-imos
Pres. Subj.
( conduzc-a
( conduzc-amos
[mperat.
\-
Put. Indie.
( conducir-e*
( conducir-emos
Cond. Indie.
( conducir-ia
( conducir-iamos
Imperf. Indie.
Pret. Indie.
\ conduc-iamos
( conduj-e
( conduj-imos
Imperf. Subj., ( conduj-ese
ist Form 1 conduj-^semos
Imperf. Subj.> ( conduj-era
2.d Form \ conduj-dramos
( conduj-ere
( conduj-dremos
Hyp. Subj.
conduj-eras
conduj-erais
conduj-eres
conduj-ereis
conducir-d
conducir-dn
conducir-ia
conducir-ian
conduc-ia
conduc-fan
conduj-o
conduj-eron
conduj-ese
conduj-esen
conduj-era.
conduj-eran
conduj-ere
conduj-eren
a. The present tenses show the peculiarities of the inceptive verbs,
to which, because there is a vowel before the -cir, this verb has been
attracted. The preterite -duje represents the Latin duxi, and as usual the
j absorbs the i of a following diphthong -ie-.
226
SPANISH GRAMMAR
257. Decir, to say
Decir, diciendo, dicho
Pres. Indie.
Pres. Subj.
Imperat.
Fut. Indie.
Cond. Indie.
Imp. Indie.
Pret. Indie.
Imp. Subj., )
ist Form )
Imp. Subj., )
•zd Form )
Hyp. Subj.
dig-o dic-es dic-e
dig-a dig-as dig-a
dj
dir-d dir-as dir-a
dir-i'a dir-ias dir-ia
dec-ia dec-ias dec-ia
dij-e dij--iste dij-o
dij-ese dij-eses dij-ese
dij-era dij-eras dij-era
dij-ere dij-eres dij-ere
dec-imos dec-fs die-en
dig-amos dig-ais dig-an
decid
dir-emos dir-^is dir-an
dir-iamos dir-iais dir-ian
dec-iamos dec-iais dec-far,
dij-imos dij-isteis dij-eroo
dij-esemos dij-eseis dij-esen
dij-eramos dij-erais dij-erap
dij-eremos dij-ereis dij-eren
a. The present tenses and the present participle show vocalic condi-
tions like those of the third class of radical-changing verbs. The past
participle is irregular (from Latin dictum) ; the imperative singular lacks
a flectional ending (cf. Latin die). The future and conditional indicative
are based on a contract infinitive, dir. Dije represents the Latin dlxi, and
after the j the i of the diphthong ie has disappeared (in preterite third
plural and subjunctive imperfects and hypothetical). There is an indefinite
form diz, 'it is said,' 'people say,' etc., which may represent a contraction
of dice + se.
b. Derivatives of decir are bendecir, 'to bless,' and maldecir, 'to
curse.' These imitate decir in their conjugation, except that they base
their future and conditional indicative upon the uncontracted infinitive
decir, whence the forms bendecire", etc., maldecire", etc., and have a flec-
tional vowel in their imperative singular, bendice and maldice. Further-
more, they have regular past participles, bendecido and maldecido. The
participles bendicho and maldicho are now antiquated, and the forms
bendito and maldito occur only as adjectives. The derivatives contrade-
cir, 'to contradict,' desdecir, 'to gainsay,' and predecir, 'to predict,' differ
from decir only in having the full form of the imperative singular, contra-
€ice, desdice, predice.
THE VERB
227
258. Ver, to see
Ver, viendo, visto
Pres. Indie.
ve-o
v-es
v-e
v-emos
v-eis
v-en
Pres. Subj.
Imperat.
Fut. Indie,
ve-a
ver-e*
ve-as
v-e
ver-as
ve-a
ver-a"
ve-amos
ver-emos
ve-ais
v-ed
ver-eis
ve-an
ver-an
Cond. Indie.
ver-ia
ver-ias
ver-ia
ver-iamos
ver-iais
ver-ian
Imperf. Indie
Pret. Indie.
ve-ia
v-i
ve-ias
v-iste
ve-la
v-i6
ve-iamos
v-imos
ve-iais
v-isteis
ve-ian
v-ieron
Imperf. Sitbj.,
ist Form
\
v-iese
v-ieses
v-iese
v-iesemos
v-ieseis
v-ieseu
Imperf. Subj., )4^
2.d Form )
Hyp. Subj. v-iere
v-ieras v-iera
v-ieres v-iere
v-ie'ramos v-ierais v-ieran
v-ieremos v-iereis v-ieren
a. The true present stem of this verb is ve-, which is seen in the first
singular, present indicative (ve-0), and throughout in the present sub-
junctive (ve-a, etc.) and the imperfect indicative (ve-ia, etc.). Before a
flectional e the stem loses its e, as in the remaining forms of the present
indicative, the infinitive, and the imperative. It also loses the e in the
present participle. The past participle is irregular. The preterite vf
represents the Latin vldil In poetry an imperfect indicative via, vias
(with reduced stem V-) is sometimes found even now.
b. Compounds of ver which show the reduced present stem (v-), such
as antever, *to foresee,' prever, 'to foresee,' rever, 'to see again,' <tc
review,' are conjugated exactly like it. On the other hand, the derivative
proveer, 'to provide,' which shows the full present stem (ve-), is conju-
gated throughout as a perfectly regular verb. It has, however, both a
regular past participle, proveido, and an irregular one, provisto ; and in
the present participle, the preterite, third singular and third plural, and the
subjunctive imperfect and hypothetical, it changes the i of the diphthongs
•ie-, -16, to y.
1 Vide, for vi, still survives in some dialects, for instance, in New Mexico.
228
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Proveer, proveyendo, proveido or provisto
Pres. Indie.
Pres. Subj.
Imperat.
Put. Indie.
Cond. Indie.
prove-o
prove-a
proveer-d, etc.
proveer-fa, etc.
Imperf. Indie, prove-ia, etc.
Pret. Indie. 5 Prove-i
( prove-imos
prove-es, etc.
prove-as, etc.
prove-e, etc.
prove-iste
prove-fsteis
prove-yd
prove-yeron
1st Form > *
^
prove-yere, etc.
2d Form
Hyp. Subj.
Note the accent required in the regular past participle and the second
singular, and the first and second plural of the preterite.
Anomalous Past Participles
259. Four regular verbs of the third conjugation have only
irregular past participles.
imprimir 5 to Print \ , imprcso
( to impress )
abrir, to open, abierto.
cubrir, to cover, cubierto.
cscribir, to write, escrito.
This peculiarity is shared by their compounds.
a. The participle escribido is found in what is perhaps punning use in
such an expression as un hombre (bien) leldo y escribido, * a man who
can read and write ' (cf. the influence of the participle leido ; its attrac-
tive force may explain escribido).
260. Two regular verbs of the second conjugation have both
a regular and an irregular past participle.
prender, to catch, prendido and preso.
romper, to break, rompido and roto.
THE VERB
229
Preso and roto are preferred for the compound tenses ; rompido,
however, is far more common than roto in the intransitive use.
261. Two regular verbs of the third conjugation have both a
regular and an irregular past participle.
oprimir, to oppress, oprimido and opreso.
suprimir, to suppress, suprimido and supreso.
The regular participle alone seems now to be used in the com-
pound tenses ; the other forms are practically adjectives.
Defective Verbs
262. Placer, ' to please.' Used now chiefly as an impersonal
verb, i.e. only in the third person singular forms of its tenses.
Traces of other forms are occasionally found in the present
tenses ; e.g. placen. Its impersonal conjugation is this :
Pres. Ind. place Pres. Subj. plega, plegue or plazca
, ( placia Impf. Sub/.. ) . . .
Impf. Ind. 4* , , / zr * r pluguiese or placiese
( (rare) \st Form > c
, ( plugo or Impf. Subf.. ) . . .
Pret. Ind. \ p * .. ^ zr f pluguiera or placiera
< placi6 ?.d Form } r
Put. Ind. placerd Hyp. Subj. pluguiere or placiere
Cond. Ind. placen'a Pres. Part. placiendo
a. The commonest form is pluguiera, which is used in optative ex-
pressions : j pluguiera d Dios ! ' would to God ! '
b. The derivative complacer is of the class of verbs with inceptive
endings; another derivative, aplacer, is found in the third person singular
and plural forms, such as aplace, aplacen, aplacia, and aplacian.
263. Yacer, 'to lie.' This verb has many peculiarities of
the inceptive class. It is nearly obsolete, and is chiefly used
in the third person forms.
23O SPANISH GRAMMAR
Yacer, yaciendo, yacido
r yazco >|
Pres. Indie. <j yazgo I yaces yace yacemos yac&s yaceq
lyago J
r yazca yazcas, <?/<:.
Pres. Subj. J yazga yazgas, etc.
I yaga yagas, *fc.
Imperat. yace 0r yaz
The other forms are regular.
yaci, *fc. ; yaciese, <?/£. ; yaciera, etc. ; yaciere, etc. ; yacer£, etc. \
yacerfa, etc.
264. Concernir, ' to concern,' occurs only in the third person
singular and plural forms.
Pres. Indie. concierne conciernen
Pres. Subj. concierna conciernan
Fut. Indie. concernira concernirdn
Cond. Indie. concerniria concernirian
Imp erf. Indie. concernia concernian
Pret. Indie. concernid concernieron
hnperf. Subj., \st Form concerniese concerniesen
Imperf. Subj. , 2d Form concerniera concernieran
Hyp. Subj. concerniere concernieren
265. Soler, ' to be accustomed,' is used now in hardly any
forms except those of the present and imperfect indicative.
Pres. Indie. suelo sueles suele solemos soldis suelen
Imperf. Indie, solia solias solla soliamos soliais solian
The present participle soliendo, the past participle solido, and
the preterite soli, etc., are exceedingly rare. All other forms
do not occur.
266. Ataner, ' to appertain,' is only found in the third person
forms, especially of the present indicative.
atane atanen
THE VERB
231
267. Raer, 'to erase/ is but little used. Its conjugation
is like that of caer, with the additional forms raya, rayas, etc.,
in the present subjunctive.
268. Roer, ' to gnaw.' This may have any one of three
present stems before its endings -o and -a ; otherwise it is a
regular verb of the second conjugation.
f ro-o "i
Pres. Indie. \ roig-o ^ roes roe roemos roeis roen
(_ roy-o J
T ro-a ro-as, etc.
Pres. Subj. -\ roig-a roig-as, etc.
I roy-a roy-as, etc.
But the first person singular, present indicative, and all the
present subjunctive are rather shunned in actual use.
a. The derivative corroer, ' to corrode,' avoids the stems ending in -ig
and -y.
269. It is generally stated that the preterite forms repuse, ' I
replied,' repusiste, 'thou didst reply,' etc., are from the verb
reponer, which does not in its other tenses and forms connect
itself with the sense of " reply." But repuse, etc., may rather
connect themselves with the Vulgar Latin irregular preterite of
respondere, viz. * resposi, etc.
270. Some ten verbs of the third regular conjugation occur
only in the forms whose flectional ending begins with i.
These are
abolir, to abolish. despavorir, to become frightened,
aguerrir, to make warlike. embair, to impose upon,
arrecirse, to become numb. empedernir, to harden.
aterirse, to become numb. garantir, to guarantee.
desmarrirse, to become sad. manir, to become tender.
232
SPANISH GRAMMAR
For these there can occur in the present indicative and
imperative only the forms in -imos, -is, and -id (e.g. abolimos,
abolis, abolid). They have no subjunctive present forms,
They may have all the rest of the conjugation, since the
endings begin with i.
271. List of Verbs.
The following list embraces radical-changing, -uir, irregular, and
anomalous verbs. The verbs with inceptive endings (-cer or -cir preceded
by a vowel) are not included: they simply follow the models given in
§ 220. In the case of derivatives reference is made to the conjugation
of the simple verbs, which they follow. The numbers refer to paragraphs.
abnegar, renounce: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
abolir, abolish : 270.
abrir, open : p. p. irr., 259.
absolver, absolve : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (4) ;
p.p. irr., 224.
abstenerse, abstain : irr., 239.
abstraer, abstract: irr., 255.
abunolar, make fritter-shnped: Rads
ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. abunuelar, reg.
acertar, hit the mark: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
aclocarse, stretch out, brood : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (3) ; cf. 225.
acordar, resolve, remind, tune; — se,
to remember: Rad.-ch. I., 223 (3).
acostar, lay down : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
acrecentar, increase: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
adestrar, guide: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ;
also adiestrar, reg.
adherir, adhere: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
adormir, make drowsy: Rad.-ch. II,
229 (2).
adquirir, acquire : Rad.-ch. 1, 228.
aducir, adduce: irr., 256.
advertir, observe, advise . Rad.-ch. II,
299(1).
afollar, blow with bellows : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
aforar, give a charter: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3). Aforar, gauge, reg.
agorar, divine, prognosticate: Rads
ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 225.
aguerrir, inure to warfare: 270.
alebrarse, squat, cower: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
alentar, breathe, encourage : Rad.-<-.h.
I, 223 (i).
aliquebrar, break the wings: Rad.*
ch. 1,223 (i).
almorzar, breakfast: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(3) ; cf. 214 (4) and 225.
alongar, lengthen : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (3) ;
cf. 214 (2) and 225.
amoblar, furnish : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
Also amueblar, reg.
amolar, whet: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
amover, remove, dismiss: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (4).
andar, go, walk : irr., 240.
antedecir, foretell: jrr., 257.
anteponer, put before, prefer : irr.t 249,
antever, foresee : irr., 258.
apacentar, graze : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i),
apercollar, collar, snatch : Rad.-ch. \
223(3)- «
THE VERB
233
apernar, seize by the legs : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
aplacer, please : irr., 262.
apostar, bet, post : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ;
post iroops, reg.
apretar, squeeze, press: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
aprobar, approve : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (3).
argtiir, argue : 235.
arrecirse, become benumbed: 270.
arrendar, rent, hire: Rad.-ch.l, 223(1}.
arrepentirse, repent: Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
ascender, ascend : Rad.-ch. 1,223 (2)-
asentar, seat, set down: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
asentir, assent, acquiesce : Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
aserrar, saw: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
asir, seize, grasp : irr., 250.
asolar, level to ground, raze : Rad.-ch.
1,223(3).
asoldar, hire: Rad.-ch. J, 223 (3).
asonar, assonate, be in assonance:
Rad.-ch. 1,223 (3).
asosegar, v. sosegar.
ataner, belong, appertain : 266.
atender, attend, mind: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (2).
atenerse, abide, hold : irr., 239.
atentar, try: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
Atentar, to attempt a crime, reg.
aterirse, become rigid with cold:
270.
aterrar, fell : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; ter-
rify, reg.
atestar, cram, stuff: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(i). Atestar, attest, reg.
atraer, attract : irr., 255.
atravesar, cross: Rad.-ch. 1,223 (i).
atribuir, attribute : 235.
atronar, make a thundering din, stun :
Rad.-ch. 1,223 (3).
avenir, reconcile : irr., 248.
aventar, fan, winnow: Rad.-ch. I,
223 Ci).
avergonzar, shame: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(3) ; cf. 214 (4) and 225.
azolar, shape with the adze : Rad.-ch
1,223(3).
balbucir, stammer : 220 a.
bendecir, bless: irr., 257.
bienquerer, esteem , wish well : irr., 242,
brunir, burnish : 217.
bullir, boil : 217.
caber, be contained, find room : irr*
244.
caer, fall: irr., 253.
calentar, warm: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
cegar, blind: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (ij ; cf.
214 (2) and 225.
cenir, gird: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230; cf. 217
and 231.
cerner, sift: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2).
cerrar, close: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
cimentar, found, establish: Rad.-ch.
1,223(1).
circuir, encircle : 235.
clocar, cluck: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf.
214 (i) and 225.
cocer, boil, bake: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) ;
cf. 220, Exceptions (a}.
coextenderse, be coextensive: Rad.-.
ch. I, 223 (2).
colar, strain, filter : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
colegir, collect: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230; cf.
215 (2) and 231.
colgar, hang up: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ;
cf. 214 (2) and 225.
comedirse, behave: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
comenzar, commence: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i); cf. 214 (4).
coxnpetir, compete: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230,
complacer, please, content: irr., 262.
componer, compose: irr., 249.
comprobar, verify, confirm : Rad.-ch.
1,223 (3).
concebir, conceive: Rad.-ch. 111,2301
concernir, concern: Rad.-ch. I, 233;
but cf. 264.
234
SPANISH GRAMMAR
COncertar, concert, regulate : Rad.-ch.
1,223 (i).
concluir, conclude : 235.
concordar, accord, agree : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
condescender, condescend : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (2).
condolerse, condole: Rad.-ch. I,
2*3 (4)-
conducir, conduct: irr.t cf. 256 and
220 b.
conferir, confer: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
confesar, confess : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (i) .
confluir, join : 235.
conmover, move, affect: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (4).
conseguir, obtain, attain : Rad.-ch. Ill,
230; cf. 215 (4) and 231.
consentir, consent: Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
consolar, console ; Rad.-ch. 1,223 (3).
consonar, be in consonance, rhyme :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
constituir, constitute : 235.
constrenir, compel, constrain : Rad.-ch.
Ill, 230; cf. 231.
construir, construct : 235.
contar, count, tell : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) .
contender, contend: Rad.-ch. 1,223 (2)«
contener, contain : irr., 239.
contorcerse, be distorted, writhe:
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) ; cf. 215 (i).
contradecir, contradict : irr., 257.
contraer, contract : irr., 255.
contrahacer, counterfeit : irr., 246.
contraponer, oppose, compare: irr.,
249.
contravenir, contravene : irr., 248.
contribuir, contribute : 235.
controvertir, controvert : Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
convenir, agree, fit: irr., 248.
convertir, convert : Rad.-ch. 11,229(1).
corregir, correct: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230;
cf. 215 (2) and 231.
COiroer, corrode: irr., 268.
costar, cost: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
creer, believe : cf. 216.
cubrir, cover : p.p. irr., 259.
dar, give: irr., 241.
decaer, decay: irr., 253.
decentar, begin to use: Rad.-ch. I
223 (i).
decir, say: irr., 257.
deducir, deduce: irr.t cf. 256 and
220 (b) .
defender, defend : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2).
deferir, defer: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
degollar, behead, cut the throat •
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 225.
demoler, demolish : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (4).
demostrar, demonstrate: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3)-
denegar, deny: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ;
cf. 214 (2) and 225.
denostar, insult: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
dentar, tooth, indent; teeth: Rad.-ch.
1,223(1).
deponer, depose, depone : irr., 249.
derrengar, sprain the hip, cripple:
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and
225.
derretir, melt: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
derrocar, pull down, demolish : Rad.«
ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (i) and 225.
derruir, cast down, destroy: 235.
desacertar, blunder, err : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
desacordar, make discordant; — se,
forget: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
desaferrar, loosen, unfurl : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
desalentar, put out of breath, discour-
age: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
desamoblar, unfurnish, remove furni-
ture: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). Also
desamueblar, reg .
desandar, retrace steps, undo: irr.,
240.
desapretar, slacken, loosen : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (i).
THE VERB
235
desaprobar, disapprove: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
desarrendarse, shake off the bridle :
Rad.-ch. 1,223 (i).
desasentar, disagree, displease ; — se,
get up: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
desasir, let go, release hold : irr., 250.
desasosegar, disturb, disquiet : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
desatender, disregard, neglect : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (2).
desatentar, perturb, perplex : Rad.-ch.
1,223 (i).
lesavenir, discompose, disconcert :
irr., 248.
descender, descend : Rad.-ch . 1 , 223 ( 2) .
descenir, ungird: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230;
cf. 217 and 231.
descolgar, unhang, take down : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
descollar, stand forth, excel : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (3).
descomedirse, be disrespectful, be-
have ill: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
descomponer, disconcert, decompose :
irr., 249.
desconcertar, disconcert, confound:
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
desconsentir, dissent: Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
desconsolar, make disconsolate : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (3).
descontar, discount: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(3)-
desconvenir, disagree, be unlike : irr.,
248.
descordar, remove cords: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
descornar, remove horns: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
descubrir, uncover, discover ; p.p. irr.,
259-
desdar, untwist: irr. 241.
desdecir, gainsay : irr., 257.
lesdentar. remove teeth: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
desempedrar, unpave: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
desencerrar, release from confine-
ment: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
desencordar, remove strings, loosen :
Rad.-ch. 1,223 (3)-
desengrosar, make lean; Rad.-ch. I
223 (3).
desentenderse, disregard, feign not to
notice: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
desenterrar, disinter: Rad.-ch. \
223 (i).
desenvolver, unfold, unravel: Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (4) ; p.p. irr., cf. 224.
deservir, neglect duty, do a disser-
vice: Rad.-ch. 111,230.
desfiocar, remove flocks (of wool) :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 225.
desgobernar, derange the government,
misgovern: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
deshacer, undo, destroy: irr., 246.
deshelar, thaw: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
desherbar, pluck out herbs : Rad.-ch*
1,223 (i).
desherrar, uniron, remove horse-
shoes: 223 (i).
desleir, dilute: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230 anu
233-
deslendrar, remove nits (from hair) :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
desmajolar, uproot vines: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
desmarrirse, become sad : 270.
desmedirse, go beyond bounds, be
unreasonable : Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
desmembrar, dismember : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
desmentir, belie: Rad.-ch. II, 229
(i).
desnegar, retract denial: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2, and 225.
desnevar, melt away (of snow) : Rod.*
ch. I, 223 (i).
desobstruir, remove obstruction : 235,
desoir, not to heed, feign, not to hear:
irr., 254.
23$
SPANISH GRAMMAR
desolar, make desolate: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
desoldar, unsolder: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(3).
desollar, flay: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
desosar, remove bones: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3) '» cf. 226 a.
desovar, spawn: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ;
cf. 226 a.
despavorir, be terrified, stand aghast :
270.
despedir, dismiss; — se, take leave:
Rad.-ch. 111,230.
despernar, remove legs, cripple: Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i).
despertar, awaken : Rad.-ch. 1,223(1).
despezar, arrange (stones) at inter-
vals, taper at the end: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i) ; cf. 225.
desplacer, displease : 262.
desplegar, unfold, unfurl : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
despoblar, depopulate: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
desproveer, leave unprovided, deprive
oi supplies: 216; cf. 258 b.
destenir, discolor, fade: Rad.-ch. Ill,
230; cf. 217 and 231.
desterrar, exile: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
destituir, deprive, remove from office :
235-
destorcer, untwist : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (4) ;
cf. 215 (i) and 225.
destrocar, return a bartered object:
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (i) and
225.
destruir, destroy: 235.
desventar, vent, let out air : Rad.-ch.
1,223 (i).
desvergonzarse, be shameless or im-
pudent: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3); cf.
214 (4) and 225.
detener, detain : irr.t 239.
detraer, detract : irr., 255.
devolver, give back: Rad.-ch. I, 323
(4) ; p.p. irr.t 224.
diferir, defer, delay, differ: Rad.-ck
II, 229 (i).
digerir, digest: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
diluir, dilute : 235.
discernir, discern: Rad.-ch. 1,223 (2)
and 228 (i).
disconvenir, v. desconvenir.
discordar, disagree, be discordant;
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
disentir, dissent: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i),
disminuir, diminish, 235.
disolver, dissolve : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) :
/./. irr., 224.
disonar.be in dissonance: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
dispertar, v. despertar.
displacer, displease : irr., 262.
disponer, dispose: irr., 249.
distender, distend : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (2).
distraer, distract: irr., 255.
distribuir, distribute : 235.
divertir, divert: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
dolar, plane, sm< 'Oth (wood, etc.) :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
doler, pain, grieve: Rad.-ch. 1,223 (4)-
dormir, sleep: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (2).
educir, educe, bring out : irr., 256 ; cf,
220 b.
elegir, elect: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230; c£
215 (2) and 231.
embair, impose, deceive : 270.
embestir, invest, attack: Rad.-ch. Ill,
230.
emparentar, be related by marriage :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
empedernir, harden, make inveterate :
270.
empedrar, pave : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
empeller, urge, push : 217.
empezar, begin: Rad.-ch. 1,223 (i):
cf. 214 (4) and 225,
emporcar, sully, befoul : Rad.-ch. I
223 (3) ; cf. 214 fi) and 225.
encender, light, kindle: Rad.-ch. I
223 (2).
THE VERB
23;
aucentar, begin to use for first time:
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
ancerrar, shut up, confine : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
enclocar, cluck: Kad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ;
cf. 225.
encomendar, commend: Kad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
encontrar, meet, find: Kad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
encorar, cover with leather, renew the
skin: Kad.-ch. 1,223 (3).
encordar, string (musical instru-
ments), lash: Rad-ch. I, 223
(3).
encovar, put into a cave or cellar, lock
up: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
encubertar, cover over: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
endentar, mortise in: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
engorar, lay addled eggs : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3) ; cf. 225.
engreir, elate, puff up: Rad.-ch. Ill,
233-
engrosar, fatten, strengthen : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (3).
enhestar, erect, set upright: Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (i).
enmelar, honey, sweeten: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
enmendar, amend, correct: Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (i).
enrodar, break on the wheel : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (3).
ensangrentar, cover with blood:
Rad.-ch. 1,223 (J)-
entender, hear, understand: Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (2).
enterrar, inter: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
entorCar, make crooked; deprive of
one eye: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
entredecir, interdict : irr., 257.
entremorir, pine away: Rad-ch. II,
229 (2) ; p.p. irr., 229 a.
entreoir, hear indistinctly : irr., 254.
entrepernar, put the legs in between
(something else) : had.-ch. \.
223(1).
entreponer. interpose : irr., 249.
entretenf.-r, delay, entertain : irr.,
239-
entrever, see imperfectly, catch a
glimpse of: irr., 258.
envolver, involve, wrap up, compli-
cate: Kad.-ch. I, 223 (4) ; p.p. irr.,
224.
equivaler, equal, be equivalent: irr.,
251-
erguir, erect : Rad.-ch. II or III, 232,
229, and 230; cf. 215 (4) and 226.
errar, err, wander: Kad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ;
cf. 226.
escarmentar, give warning example,
learn by experience: Kad.-ch. 1,
223 (i).
escocer, smart: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4);
cf. 220 (a) and 225.
escribir, write : p. p. irr., 259.
esforzar, strengthen- — se, attempt:
Kad.-ch. I, 223 (3) , cf. 214 (4) and
225.
estar, be : irr., 238.
estatuir, establish, 235.
estregar, rub, scour, grind: Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
estrenir, bind, restrain: Kad.-ch. Ill,
230 ; cf. 217.
excluir, exclude : 235.
expedir, expedite, despatch : Rad.-ch,
111,230.
exponer, expose : *>r., 249.
extender, extend : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2).
extraer, extract : irr., 255.
ferrar, put on iron points, etc. : Rad.>
ch. I, 223 (i).
fluir, flow : 235.
foliar, blow with bellows Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
forzar, force: Kad.-ch. I, 223 (3);
cf. 214 (4) and 225.
238
SPANISH GRAMMAR
fregar, rub, cleanse: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
freir, fry: Rad.-ch. Ill, 233.
garantir, guarantee : 270.
gemir, groan, moan : Kad.-ch. Ill, 230.
gobernar, govern : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
gruir, cry like cranes : 235.
grunir, grunt : 217.
haber, have : irr., 237.
hacendar, transfer property : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (i).
hacer, do, make : irr., 246.
heeler, have a stench, stink : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (2).
helar, freeze: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
hencbir, stuff, cram : Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
bender, cleave, split : Rad.-ch, 1, 223(2).
berbar, dressskms : Rad.-ch. 1,223(1).
herir, wound: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
hervir, boil, bubble: Rad.-ch. II, 229
(i).
herrar, shoe (horses), brand (cattle):
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
holgar, rest, cease working: Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
hollar, trample on, tread on : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (3).
huir, flee : 235.
imbuir, imbue : 235.
impedir, impede : Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
imponer, impose : irr., 249.
impr.im.ir, print: p.p. irr., 259.
improbar, disapprove, censure : Rad.-
ch. 1,223 (3).
incensar, perfume, incense; Rad.-ch.
I, 223(0.
incluir, include : 235.
indisponer, indispose, disincline : irr.t
249.
inducir, induce : irr., 256 ; cf. 220 b.
tnferir, infer: Rad.-ch., 11,229 (i).
infernar, damn, vex: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
influir, influence : 235.
ingerir, graft, insert: Rad.-ch. \\
229 (i).
inquirir, inquire : Rad.-ch. I, 228 (2).
instituir, institute : 235.
instruir, instruct : 235.
interdecir, indict : irr., 257.
interponer, interpose : irr., 249.
intervenir, intervene: irr., 248.
introducir, introduce: irr., 256; cf.
220 b.
invernar, winter: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
invertir, invert, spend, invest: Rad.-
ch. II, 229 (i).
investir, invest, gird: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
ir, go : irr., 247.
jugar, play : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf.
227.
leer, read : 216.
Hover, rain: Rad.-ch. I, impcrs., 223
(4).
maldecir, curse: irr., 257.
malherir, wound seriously: Rad.-ch.
11,229(1).
malquerer, dislike, abhor : irr., 242.
malsonar, make cacophony : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (3).
maltraer, maltreat: irr., 255.
manifestar, manifest: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
manir, mellow, mature meat : 270.
mantener, maintain : 239.
mecer, rock, lull, mix: 220 a.
medir, measure: Rad. ch. Ill, 230.
melar, boil to honey, deposit honey
(of bees) : Rad.-ch. I., 223 (i).
mentar, mention : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i),
mentir, lie: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
merendar, lunch: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
moblar, furnish: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3)
Also mueblar, reg.
moler, grind: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4).
morder, bite : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4).
THE VERB
239
Oiorir, die: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (2) ; p.p.
irr., 229 a.
mostrar, show: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
mover, move: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4).
negar, deny: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf.
214 (2) and 225.
nevar, snow: Rad.-ch. I, impers.,
223 (i).
Obstruir, obstruct : 235.
obtener, obtain : irr., 239.
oir, hear: irr., 254.
Oler, smell, have an odor: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (4) ; cf. 226 (2) .
opoiier, oppose: irr., 249.
oprimir, oppress : 261.
pedir, ask: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
pensar, think, mean, believe: Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i).
perder, to lose, spoil, destroy: Rad.-
ch. 1,223 (2).
jjterniquebrar, break the legs : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i).
perseguir, pursue, persecute : Rad.-
ch. Ill, 230; cf. 231.
pervertir, pervert: Rad.-ch. II, 229.
placer, please: irr., 2.6-2.
planir, lament, bewail : 217.
plegar, fold: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf.
214 (2) and 225.
poblar, found, people, fill : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
poder, be able, can : irr., 243.
podrir, rot: 234.
poner, put : irr., 249.
poseer, possess : 216.
posponer, place after, postpone : irr.,
249.
predecir, predict : irr., 257.
predisponer, predispose: irr., 249.
preferir, prefer: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
premorir, die first or prematurely:
Rad.-ch. II, 229 (2) and a.
p render, arrest, catch : 260.
preponer, put before, prefer : irr., 249.
presentir, forebode, foresee : Rad.-ch.
II, 229 (i).
presuponer, presuppose: irr., 249
prevalerse, prevail : irr., 251.
prevenir, forestall, prevent : irr., 248.
prever, foresee: irr., 258.
probar, prove, try, taste: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
producir, produce : irr., 256 ; cf. 220 b.
proferir, utter, pronounce: Rad.-ch.
11,229(1).
promover, promote: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(4).
proponer, propose: irr., 249.
proseguir, pursue, prosecute: Rad.-
ch. Ill, 230; cf. 215 (4) and 231.
prostituir, prostitute : 235.
proveer, provide : 216 ; cf. 258 b.
provenir, proceed : irr., 248.
pudrir, rot : 234.
quebrar, break: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
querer, wish, like : irr., 242.
raer, scrape, grate, erase: irr., 267.
rarefacer, rarify: irr., 246.
reapretar, squeeze again : Rad.-th. I,
223 (i).
rebendecir, bless again: irr., 257.
recaer, fall back, relapse: irr., 253.
recalentar, treat again: Rad.-ch. I,
223(1).
recentar, leaven: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
recluir, shut up, seclude : 235.
reoocer, boil again: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(4) ; cf. 220 a, 215 (i), and 225.
recolar, strain again: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(3)-
recomendar, recommend : Rad.-ch.
1,223(1).
recomponer, recompose, mend : irr.,
249.
reconducir, renew lease or contract:
irr , 256 ; cf. 220 b.
recoDstruir, reconstruct: 235.
240
SPANISH GRAMMAR
recontar, recount : Rad.-ch. 1,223(3).
reconvenir, accuse, rebuke : irr., 248.
recordar, remind : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
recostar, lean against, recline : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (3).
redarguir, reargue : 235.
reducir, reduce: irr., 256; cf. 220 b.
reelegir, reelect: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230;
cf. 215 (2) and 231.
ref erir, relate, refer : Rad.-ch. 1 1 ,229 (i) .
refluir, flow back: 235.
reforzar, strengthen, fortify : Rad.-ch.
1,223 (3); cf. 214 (4).
refregar, rub over again: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
refreir, fry again : 233.
regar, water: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf.
214 (2) and 225.
regimentar, raise a regiment: Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i).
regir. rule, direct: Rad.-ch. 111,230;
215 (2) and 231.
regoldar, belch, eruct: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3) ; cf 225.
rehacer, make again, mend : irr., 246.
rehencbir, fill again, restuff: Rad.-ch.
111,230.
reherir, wound again: Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
reherrar, shoe (horses) again : Rad.-
ch. 1,223 (i).
rehervir, reboil: Rad.-ch. 11,229 C1)-
rehollar, trample under foot: Rad.-
ch. 1,223 (3).
rehuir, withdraw, deny : 235.
reir, laugh, 233.
remendar, repair, patch: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
rementir, lie again: Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
remoler, grind again: Rad.-ch. I,
223(4).
remorder, bite repeatedly, cause re-
morse: Rad.-ch. 1,223 (4).
remover, remove, alter: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (4).
rendir, subdue, render ; — se, surrerv
der: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
renegar, deny, disown : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
renovar, renovate, renew: Rad.-ch. \t
223 (3).
renir, quarrel, scold: Rad.-ch. Ill,
230; cf. 217 and 231.
repensar, think over again : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (i).
repetir, repeat, recite: Rad.-ch. HI,
230.
replegar, refold, double again: Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
repoblar, repopulate: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
repodrir, decay, rot inwardly : 234.
reponer, put back, replace: irr., 249.
reprobar, reject, condemn : Rad.-ch.
I, 223 (3).
reproducir, reproduce: irr., 256; cf.
220 b.
repudrir, decay, rot inwardly: cf. 234.
requebrar, court, make love: Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i).
requerer, wish much, like well : irr.,
242.
requerir, investigate, require, request:
Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
resaber, know well : irr., 245.
resalir, project, be prominent: irr. ,252.
resegar, reap again: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
resembrar, sow again: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
resentirse, begin to give way, resent:
Rad.-ch. 11,229 (i).
resolver, resolve : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (4) ;
p.p. irr., 224.
resollar, respire: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
resonar, resound : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) .
resquebrar, crack, split, burst : Rad.<
^.1,223 (I).
restituir, restore, reestablish: 235.
restregar, scrub : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (i) ;
cf. 214 (2) and 225.
THE VERB
24I
retemblar, shake, tremble much,
brandish: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
retener, retain: irr., 239.
retentar, threaten with a relapse :
Rad.-ch. 1,223 (i).
retenir, dye over again: Rad.-ch. Ill,
230; cf. 217 and 231.
retorcer, twist, contort: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (4) ; cf. 215 (i) and 225.
retostar, toast again, scorch well:
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
retraer, retract : irr., 255.
retribuir, make retribution, recom-
pense: 235.
retronar, thunder again: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
retrotraer, make retroactive, retroact :
irr., 255.
revenirse, be consumed gradually,
sour, ferment : irr., 248.
reventar, burst : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
rever, see again, review, revise : irr.,
258.
reverter, revert : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) .
revestir, put on vestments : Rad.-ch.
111,230.
revolar, fly again : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
revolcarse, wallow: Rad.-ch. I, 223
(3) ; cf. 214 (i) and 225.
revolver, stir, revolve: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (4); p.p. irr., 224.
rodar, roll: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
roer, gnaw : irr., 268.
rogar, entreat, ask : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (3) ;
cf. 214 (2) and 225; derivatives
reg.
saber, know : irr., 245.
salir, go out, come out : irr., 252.
salpimentar, season with pepper and
salt: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
sarmentar, gather prunings of vine :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
satis facer, satisfy : irr., 246.
segar, reap : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf.
214 (2) and 225.
seguir, follow: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230; c£
215 (4) and 231.
sembrar, sow: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
sementar, sow: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
sentar, seat, set, suit: Rad.-ch. 1,223
(i).
sentir, feel, regret : Rad.-ch. II, 229 (j) .
ser, to be : irr., 236.
serrar, saw: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
servir, serve : Rad.-ch. Ill, 230.
sobre(e)ntender, be understood:
Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (2).
sobreponer, put above, add : irr., 249.
sobresalir, rise above, surpass: irr.t
252.
sobresembrar, sow over again : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (i).
sobresolar, pave again, put on new
sole: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
sobrevenir, happen, supervene: irr.>
248.
sobreventar, get the weather gauge.
Rad.-ch. 1,223 (i).
sobreverterse, overflow: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (2).
sobr eve stir, put on an outer coat:
Rad.-ch. 111,230.
sofreir, fry slightly : Rad.-ch. Ill, 233.
solar, floor, pave, sole: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
soldar, solder, mend: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3) .
soler, be wont or accustomed: Rad.-
ch. I and defective ; cf. 265 .
soltar, untie, loosen: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
solver, loosen: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4);
p.p. irr., 224.
sonar, sound: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
sonreir, smile : Rad.-ch. Ill, 230 and
233-
sonrodarse, stick in the mud: Rads
ch. 1,223 (3).
sonar, dream : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
sorregar, change channels : Rad.-ch*
I, 223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
242
SPANISH GRAMMAR
sosegar, appease, rest: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
sostener, sustain : irr., 239.
soterrar, put underground, bury :
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
subarrendar, take a sublease, sub-
rent: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
subentender, subintend: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (2).
subseguir, be next in sequence : Rad.-
ch. Ill, 230; cf. 215 (4) and 231.
substituir, v. sustituir.
substraer, v. sustraer.
subtender, subtend: Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (-2).
subvenir, aid, give a subvention : irr.,
248.
subvertir, subvert: Rad.-ch. II, 229(1).
BUgerir, suggest: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i).
superponer, superimpose: irr., 249.
supervenir, supervene : irr., 248.
suponer, suppose : irr., 249.
suprimir, suppress : 261.
sustituir, substitute : 235.
sustraer, subtract : irr., 255.
taner, ring, peal, touch : 217.
temblar, tremble: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
tender, stretch: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2).
tener, have, hold : irr., 239.
teiitar, feel, try: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
tenir, tinge, dye, stain: Rad.-ch. Ill,
230; cf. 217 and 231.
torcer, twist, bend : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) ;
cf. 215 (i) and 225.
tostar, toast: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3).
traducir, translate : irr., 256 ; cf. 220 b.
traer, bring: irr., 255.
transcender, •;-. trascender.
transferir, transfer: Rad.-ch. II,
229 (i).
transfregar, v. trasfregar.
transponer, v. trasponer.
trascender, transcend: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (2).
trascolar, filter through : Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3).
trascordarse, forget: Rad.-ch. 1,
223 (3).
trasegar, upset, decant: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225.
trasfregar, rub: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) •
cf. 214 (2) and 225.
trasoir, misunderstand, hear imper-
fectly: irr., 254.
trasonar, dream: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3),
trasponer, transpose; — se, set (of
sun) : irr., 249.
trastrocar, change about, invert or-
der : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (i)
and 225.
trasverter, overflow: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (i).
trasvolar, fly across or beyond : Rad.-
ch. I, 223 (3).
travesar, cross: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
trocar, exchange, barter: Rad.-ch. \,
223 (3) I cf- 2I4 (J) and 225.
tronar, thunder: Rad.-ch. 1,223 (3)-
tropezar, stumble : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (3) •
cf. 214 (4) and 225.
valer, be worth : irr., 251.
venir, come : irr., 248.
ventar, blow: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i).
ver, see : irr., 258.
verter, pour, shed : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (2).
vestir, dress, clothe: Rad.-ch. Ill,
230.
volar, fly, rise, blow up: Rad.-ch. I,
223 (3)-
volcar, overturn : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ;
cf. 214 (i) and 225.
volver, return, come back: Rad.-ch,
I, 223 (2) ; p.p. irr., 224.
yacer, lie: irr., 263.
yuxtaponer, put in juxtaposition : irr.
249.
za(m)bullirse, dive: 217.
zaherir, reproach, censure: Rad.-cfy
II, 229 (I).
VOCABULARY
VOCABULARY
SPANISH-ENGLISH
6, to, at, on, from, sign of the personal acometer, to attack.
accusative.
abandonar, to abandon, leave.
abandono, #*., neglect, slovenliness.
abierto, pp. of abrir.
abogadillo (fr. abogado), m., little
lawyer.
aborrecer, to abhor.
abrazar, to embrace.
abrigo, m., shelter, wrap, overcoat.
abril, m., April.
abrir, to open.
abuelo, -a, m. and f., grandfather,
grandmother ; m. pi., grandpar-
ents.
aburrir, to weary, bore; refl., to be
bored.
aca, hither, here.
acabar, to end, finish; — de, to have
just.
acci6n,yC, deed, action,
aceite, m., oil.
aceptar, to accept.
acera,/, sidewalk.
acerca de, about.
acercarse d, to approach, go near.
ace"0, m., steel.
aclarar, to light up, brighten.
acompanar, to accompany, go
sympathize with.
aconsejar, to advise.
acontecer, to happen,
acontecimiento, m., happening.
event, occurrence.
acostar, to lay down, put to bed;
refl.t to lie down, go to bed.
active, -a, active.
acusar, to accuse, acknowledge.
adelantar, to advance, go forward,
be fast (as a watch}.
advertir, to observe, warn,
aficionado, -a (a), fond (of),
af mo = af ectisimo, most affectionate,
agosto, m.y August.
agradar, to please.
agradecer, to thank, be grateful for,
agua, /, water.
aguardar, to wait for, await.
aguardiente, m., distilled liquot
(such as brandy, whiskey, rum").
ahl, there.
ahora, now.
ahorita (Jr. ahora} , very soon, in f
minute.
ahorrar, to spare, save.
245
246
SPANISH GRAMMAR
al, to the.
alabar, to praise.
aldea,/, village.
alegar, to allege.
alegre, happy, joyous, merry.
Alejandro, /«., Alexander.
Ale man, -ana, m. and /., German.
aleman, -ana, German.
Alemania,/, Germany.
alfiler, m., pin.
Alfredo, /#., Alfred.
algo, something, anything; some-
what.
alguien, some one, somebody.
algiin; cf.alguno.
alguno, -a, some, any; //., some,
certain, a few; no ... — , not . . .
any, no ... whatsoever; ni . . . — ,
nor . . . any ; sin . . . — , without
any . . . whatsoever.
alma,/, soul.
almorzar, to breakfast.
alquilar, to rent, hire.
alto, -a, high, tall, loud.
altura,/, height.
alia, there, thither.
alii, there.
amable, kind, lovable.
amar, to love, like.
amarillo, -a, yellow.
ambos, -as, both.
America,/., America.
Americano, -a, m. and f., American.
americano, -a, American.
amigO, -a, m. and/., friend.
amiguito, -a, m. and f., little friend.
amistad,/, friendship.
anciano, -a, aged.
ancho, -a, broad, wide ; noun
breadth, width.
anchura,/, breadth, width.
andar, to go, walk, run (as a watch},
animal, »/., animal ; brute, fool.
anoche, last night.
anochecer, to become night; arrive
(at) or be (in) at night; anochece,
night is coming on.
anteayer, the day before yesterday,
two days ago.
antes, before, beforehand; — de, be-
fore; — (de) que, before; cuanto
— , as soon as possible; — de ayer,
the day before yesterday.
anticipaci6n, /, anticipation; con
— , in advance.
antiguo, -a, old, early, ancient.
Antonio, m.t Anthony.
ano, m., year; — bisiesto, leap year;
tener . . . anos, to be ... years old.
apagar, to put out (afire or light}.
aparecer, to appear.
apariencia,/, appearance.
aposento, m., room, apartment.
apreciable, estimable, kind.
apreciar, to appreciate, esteem.
aprender (a), to learn to.
aprisa, fast, quickly.
apuntar, to note down.
aquel, -ell a, adj., that, the former.
aquel, aquella, aquello, that one;
that, the one, the former.
aqui, here.
arancelario, -a, relating to the tariff.
arbol, ;;/., tree.
arguir, to argue; arguyamos, pres.
subj., ist pi.
VOCABULARY
247
argumento, m., argument.
aritmStica, /, arithmetic.
armaduras,///., armor.
armeria,/, armory.
arque61ogO, m.t archaeologist.
arquitecto, m., architect.
arte,/ (andm.}, art.
artista, /«., artist.
arreglar, to arrange, regulate, see to.
arrepentirse, to repent.
asesinar, to assassinate.
asi, as, so, thus; — como, as well as.
Asiria,/, Assyria.
asistir, to be present.
asno, -a, m. and f., ass, donkey.
asunto, m.y matter, affair, business.
atenci6n,/i, attention. \watck).
atrasar, to retard, be slow (as a
atrevimiento, m., daring.
atribuir, to attribute, ascribe.
aunque, although, even if.
ausente, absent.
autor, -ora, m. and/., author.
avanzar, to advance.
avariento, -a, m. and/., miser.
averiguar, to ascertain; averiguS,
pret. indie., ist. sing,
avisar, to inform, advise, give notice.
ayer, yesterday; antes de — , day
before yesterday.
ayuda,/, aid.
azucar, m., sugar,
azul, blue.
bajar, to go down, take down,
bajo, -a, low.
bala,/, ball, bullet.
barato, -a, cheap.
bastante, enough, sufficient; sum*
ciently, quite, rather.
bautismo, m., baptism.
beber, to drink.
bello, -a, beautiful.
besar, to kiss.
biblioteca, /, library.
bibliotecario, m., librarian,
bicicleta,/, bicycle.
bien, well, comfortable.
billete, m., bill, bank-note, ticket,
bianco, -a, white; lo — , white,
bobo, -a, m. and f., fool,
bola,/, marble.
bolita,/. (Jr. bola}, marble,
bondad,/, goodness, kindness.
bonito, -a, pretty.
botar, to throw away,
brasas,/. //., glowing coals; quien
huye del fuego, da en las — , out
of the frying-pan into the fire,
brazo, m., arm.
brillante, brilliant.
brindar, to drink a toast to, offer.
Bruto, ;«., Brutus,
buen, cf. bueno.
bueno, -a, good, well,
bullir, to boil, seethe,
burlarse (de), to make fun, make
sport (of).
buscar, to seek, look for.
buz6n, m., letter-box.
caballerito (fr. caballero), m., young
gentleman.
caballero, m., gentleman, sir.
caballo, m.t horse.
caber, to be contained.
248
SPANISH GRAMMAR
cabeza,/, head.
cabo, m., end ; llevar a — , to carry
out.
cada, adj., each, every ; — uno
(-a), prn.t each, each one.
caer, to fall ; reft., to fall down.
caf6, m., coffee.
caja,/, box.
caliente, hot, warm.
calificaci6n, /, qualification, grade.
calor, m., heat, warmth; tener — ,
to be warm (as a person) ; hacer
• — , to be warm (as the weather}.
calumniar, to calumniate.
callarse. to hush, be silent.
calle,/, street.
cama,/, bed.
camale6n, m., chameleon.
cambiar, to change, exchange.
cambio, m., change.
caminar, take one's way, journey
along, walk.
camino, m., road, way.
campesino, -a, m. and f., peasant.
campo, /»., field, country ; casa de
— , country house.
cansado, -a, tired, (with ser) tire-
some.
cansar, to tire, fatigue.
cantar, to sing.
capital, m., capital; f., capital (city).
capitan, m., captain.
carb6n, m., coal.
cardinal, cardinal.
carecer de, to be without, lack.
carga,/, burden.
cargadito, -a (Jr. cargado), slightly
seasoned.
cargar, to load, charge, season.
Carlos, /»., Charles.
carta,/, letter.
cartero, m., postman, letter-carrier.
carrera, /, course of (professional)
study.
carro, m., wagon, car.
casa, /, house ; en — , at home ;
d — , home.
casar, to marry ; casarse con, to
marry, be married to.
casi, almost.
caso, m., case ; en — que, in casa
castellano, -a, Castilian ; el — t
Spanish.
castigO, m., punishment,
catedral,/, cathedral,
catedratico, m., university professor,
catorce, fourteen,
causa, f., cause, lawsuit; a — de, on
account of.
cautiverio, m., captivity,
cegar, to blind.
cSlebre, celebrated.
cenar, to have supper, sup.
centavito (fr. centavo), m., only a
cent, mite.
centavo, -a, hundredth.
centavo, m., centavo, cent.
centSsimo, -a, hundredth,
centime, m., centime,
central, central,
ceremonia, f., ceremony,
certificar, to certify, register.
Cervantes, Cervantes,
cerveza,/., beer,
cerrar, to shut, close.
Cesar, m.> Caesar.
VOCABULARY
249
testa, /, basket.
ciego, -a, blind.
cielo, m., heaven, sky.
ciencia,/, science.
ciento, cien, one hundred.
cinco, five.
cincuenta, fifty.
ciudad,/, city.
ciudadano, m., citizen.
clase,/, class, kind, sort.
cliente, m. and f., patient.
clima, m., climate.
C0alici6n,yi, coalition.
cobarde, m. and f., coward.
cocina,/, kitchen, cooking.
cofre, m., box, trunk; hacer un —
&., to pack a trunk for.
coger, to catch ; cojamos, pres. sufy'.,
jstpl
colecci6n,/, collection.
c61era,/, anger.
coltnado, -a, filled (to overflowing).
Col6n, m., Columbus.
color, m., color.
comedor, ;»., dining-room.
comer, to eat, dine.
cometer, to commit.
como, as, like; while.
c6mo, how.
c6modo, -a, comfortable.
companero, -a, m. and f.t com-
panion.
compania, f., company.
compatriota, m. and f., compatriot.
completamente, completely, entirely,
wholly.
completo, -a, complete.
t6mplice, m. andf., accomplice.
comportamiento, m., deportment,
conduct.
comprar, to buy.
COmun, common; por lo — , com
monly.
con, with, toward; para — , toward;
— tal que, provided that,
concebir, to conceive,
concepto, m., conception, sense; en
mi — , to my mind,
conciudadano, -a, m. and f., fellow-
citizen.
conde, m., count.
condici6n, /, condition,
conducir, to conduct, lead, guide,
conducta,/], behavior, conduct.
C0njugaci6n, /, conjugation.
conmigo, with me.
COnocer, to know, be acquainted with.
conocimientos, m. pi., attainments.
COnozco, pres. indie., ist sing, of
conocer.
conquistador, m., conqueror.
conquistar, to conquer.
COnseguir, to obtain, succeed in.
consentir (en), to consent (to),
conservar, to preserve, keep,
considerar, to consider.
consigo, with himself, herself, etc.
consiguiente, m., consequence; poi
— , consequently.
constante, constant.
constar (de), to consist (of),
constituir, to constitute.
contar, to count, tell, relate,
contendiente, m., contestant, oppo
nent.
contener, to contain.
250
SPANISH GRAMMAR
contestaci6n, f., answer.
contestar, to answer.
COntigO, with you, with thee.
continuar, to continue.
contrario, -a, contrary.
contribuci6n, f., tax.
conveniencia,/, convenience.
r-onvertir, to convert.
convidar, to invite.
copiar, to copy.
copo, m., flake.
cortar, to cut.
corte,/, court, capital, Madrid.
COrtSs, polite, courteous.
corto, -a, short.
corregir, to correct; corrijan, pres.
subj., 3d pi.
correo, /«., mail, post-office.
correr, to run.
corrida, /, coursing match; — de
toros, bull-fight.
COrriente, present (month), current.
Wsa,/!, thing, affair; matter.
cosita (/r. cosa), /., little thing,
trifle.
costar, to cost.
COstoso, -a, costly, expensive,
costumbre, /., custom, manner.
creer, believe, think; creyendo,
pres. p.
criada,/, servant, maid.
criado, m., servant.
cristal, m., pane,
cristiano, -a, m. and '/., Christian.
Cristo, m., Christ.
Crist6bal, m., Christopher,
cuadra, /, city block.
cuadro, m., picture.
cual, which; el (la) cual, whos which,
whom.
cudl, interrog. adj. and pron,, which,
what.
cuando, when; cuando, when, in-
terrog.; de — en — , from time
to time.
cuanto, -a, how much, as much, all
the, all that; todo — , all that; —
antes, as soon as possible; — ...
tanto, the ... the; -os, -as, //,
how many, as many, all the.
cuanto, -a, interrog. and ex clam. ^
how much; pi., how many; —
tiempo, how long; £ — s anos
tienes ? how old are you?
cuarenta, forty.
cuarto, m.y room.
cuarto, -a, fourth.
cuatro, four.
cuatrocientos, -as, four hundred.
Cuba,/, Cuba.
Cubano, -a, m. and f., Cuban.
cubano, -a, Cuban.
cuenta,/, account, bill.
cuidado, m., care; ten — , look out !
no tengas — , don't worry.
cumpleanos, m., anniversary of birth-
day.
cumplir, to fulfil, complete.
cunado, -a, m. andf., brother-in-law,
sister-in-law.
cuyo, -a, whose, of which.
Ciiyo, -a, interrog., whose.
chino, -a, Chinese. [tot.
chiquillo, -a (fr. chico), little fellow,
chismes, m. //., tittle-tattle, gossip.
VOCABULARY
251
chiste, m., witty saying, jest.
chocolate, m., chocolate.
D. (=don), Mr.
dar, to give, face, hit, strike (of a
clock} ; — en, to strike against, fall
upon.
de, of, from, since, with, in.
debajo de, under, beneath.
deber, to be (morally) obliged to,
ought, owe.
deber, m., duty.
decidido, -a, decided, resolved,
determined.
de"cimo, -a, tenth.
decir, to say, tell.
decisi6n,/, decision.
declarar, to make a declaration, de-
pose upon oath.
defecto, »/., fault.
defender, to defend.
dejar, to leave ; — de, to cease to ;
no — de, not to fail to, not to
omit.
del, of the, from the; — cual, of
whom.
deleitar, to delight.
delincamos, pres. sbj. ist pL of de-
linquir.
delinquir, to be delinquent, to trans-
gress.
demas, other, rest.
demasiado, -a, adj., too much
(many) ; adv., too, too much.
denominador, m., denominator.
dentro de, inside of, within.
derecho, -a, right, straight.
derrotar, to rout.
desafiar, to challenge.
desagradable, disagreeable.
desaparecer, to disappear.
descansar, to rest.
descanso, m., rest.
descender, to descend, to be de-
scended.
descomunal, extraordinary, unusual.
descubrir, to discover.
descuidillo (fr. descuido}, m., slight
neglect.
desde, from, since ; — ... hasta,
from ... to ; — que, since.
desear, to desire, wish.
desgracia,/, misfortune.
desgraciado, -a, unfortunate,
wretched.
designio, m., design, purpose.
despacho, m., office; — de billetes,
ticket office.
despedirse, reft., to take leave.
despertar, to awake, m., wake up ;
reft., to awake.
despuSs, afterward ; — de, after ;
— que, after.
detalle, m., detail.
deuda,/, debt.
devolver, to return, give back.
dia, m., day ; de — , by day ; ocho
dias, a week; quince dias, a fort-
night; dias, saint's day.
diamante, m., diamond.
dibujo, m., drawing.
diccionario, m., dictionary.
dice, pres. indie, jd sing, of decir, to
say.
diciembre, m., December.
dicho, -a, said, the said.
252
SPANISH GRAMMAR
diente, m., tooth.
diez, ten.
diferir, to defer, differ.
dificil, difficult.
difunto, -a, deceased.
digno, -a, worth, worthy.
digO, pres. indie, ist. sing, of decir.
dijeron, pret. indie, jd pi. of decir.
dinero, #/., money.
Dios, m., God.
directo, -a, direct, through.
dirigir, to direct ; reft., to make one's
way, address, turn, direct one's self.
discipulo, -a, m. and /., pupil,
scholar.
discolo, -a, peevish,
discurso, /«., discourse, speech,
disminuir, to diminish,
dispensar, to excuse.
disputar, to dispute.
distancia, /, distance,
distingamos, pres. sbj. ist pi. of dis-
tinguir.
distinguir, to distinguish.
distribuir, to distribute.
diversi6n, /., diversion, amusement,
sport.
divino, -a, divine,
doble, double.
doce, twelve.
docena,/, dozen.
doler, to ache,
dolor, m., pain, ache, grief; — de
cabeza, headache.
domesticar, to tame,
flomingo, m., Sunday.
dominio, m., dominion, domain,
power.
don, dona, m. and f., Mr., Mrs. and
Miss ; — Quijote, Don Quixote.
donde, where, in which ; en — k
where, in which.
d6nde, interrog., where.
dondequiera, wherever.
Dn = don.
Dna = dona.
dormir, to sleep ; reft., to fall asleep.
dos, two ; los (las) — , both.
doscientos, -as, two hundred.
duda,/, doubt.
dudar, to doubt.
dueno, m., master.
duque, m., duke.
durar, to endure, last.
duro, m , dollar.
duro, -a, hard, severe.
6, and.
echar, to throw, cast, pour (eu
water) ; re/I., to throw one's self
down, lie down.
Edad, /, Age; — Media, Middle
Ages.
edificio, m., building.
educaci6n,/, education.
educar, to educate.
Eiffel, Eiffel; la torre — , the Eiffel
tower.
ejercicio, m., exercise.
ejSrcito, m., army.
el (la, lo, los, las), the, that, the
one, those ; — que, who,
he who, etc.
61, he, him, it.
elSctrico, -a, electric.
elefante, -a, m. and f., elephant.
VOCABULARY
253
elegantemente, elegantly.
ella, she, her, it.
ello, it.
ellos, ellas, they, them.
emperador, w., emperor.
empezar, to begin.
emplear, to employ, use.
emprender, to undertake.
empresa,_/I, enterprise, undertaking.
en, in, into, on.
enamorado, -a, in love.
encantar, to delight.
encarnado,-a, flesh-colored, (bright)
red.
encender, to light, kindle.
encontrar, to meet, find.
enemigo, -a, m. and /., enemy;
adj., hostile.
enero, m., January.
enfadar, to vex, anger; refl., to be-
come angry.
enfermedad,/, illness, sickness.
enfermo, -a, ill, sick.
enojarse, to become (get) angry.
Enrique, m., Henry.
ensalada,/, salad.
ensenar, to teach, show.
entender, to understand; — de, to
understand, be skilled in.
entero, -a, entire, whole, firm.
entonces, then, at that time.
entrada,/, entrance.
entrar, to enter, go into; hacer — ,
to show in, admit.
entre, between, among.
entregar, to deliver, hand over.
entristecer, to sadden.
Caviar, to send.
eran, v. ser.
errar, to err.
error, m., error, mistake.
es, pres. ind. jd sing, of ser.
escapar, to escape.
esclavo, -a, m. and f., slave.
Escorial, nt.t Escurial (town and
palace).
escribir, to write,
escrito, /. /. of escribir.
escuchar, to listen,
escuela,/, school.
escultor, sculptor.
Esdras, Esdras.
ese (esa, eso, esos, esas), that
(those) ; 6se, etc., that one, etc'.;
eso, that which you say.
esencialmente, essentially.
Espana,/, Spain.
Espanol, -Ola, m. and f.t Spaniard,
Spanish woman.
espanol, -ola, Spanish.
esperar, to hope, wait for, expect.
esple"ndido, -a, splendid, fine.
esposo, -a, m. and f., husband
wife.
esquina, /, corner,
establecerse, refl., to establish one's
self, settle.
estaci6n, /, station, season,
estado, »/., state.
Estados Unidos, m. pl.t United
States.
estar, to be.
estatua,/, statue.
e"ste (6sta, e*stos, 6stas), this, this
one (these), the latter; 6sta, /,
this place (city, town").
254
SPANISH GRAMMAR
este (esta, esto, estos, estas), adj.,
this (these), the latter.
estimaci6n,/, esteem,
esto, this (that I say).
ftstrecho, -a, narrow.
estudiar, to study.
evitar, to avoid,
exacto, -a, exact.
excepto, except.
exclamar, to exclaim.
Sxito, m., outcome, result, issue,
success.
extranjero, -a, foreign.
extranjero, -a, m. and f., stranger,
foreigner.
fabricar, to make, manufacture.
facil, easy.
facilidad,/, ease, facility.
facilitar, to oblige with.
falso, -a, false.
falta, /, fault, mistake; defect,
want, lack; hacer — , to he
needed; nos hacla — , we needed.
familia,/, family.
famoso, -a, famous.
iatigado, -a, fatigued, tired.
lavor, m., favor; hacer el — , to do
the favor.
favorable, favorable.
favorecer, to favor.
febrero, m., February.
fecha,/, date.
fechar, to date.
felicidad,/, happiness.
felicitar, congratulate.
Felipe, ;;/., Philip.
feliz, happy.
feo, -a, ugly, homely.
ferrocarril, m., railway.
festin, m., banquet, feast.
fiebre,/, fever.
fiel, faithful.
fiesta,/, feast, festival, festivity.
figurar, to figure; reft., to fancy
imagine.
filosofia,/", philosophy.
finalmente, finally.
fino, -a, courteous, refined,
flor,/, flower.
fonda, /, inn, restaurant,
fondo, m., bottom, depth; d — »
thoroughly, perfectly.
formar, to form,
fortuna,/, fortune.
Frances, -esa, m. and f.9 French.
man, Frenchwoman,
trance's, -esa, French,
franco, -a, frank.
franqueza,/, frankness,
f rente, /, front, forehead; — a — ,
face to face.
fresco, -a, fresh, cool.
frio, M., cold; tengo — , I am cold;
hace — , it is cold.
frio, -a, adj., cold.
fuego, m., fire; quien huye del — ,
da en las brasas, out of the
frying-pan into the fire.
fuente,/, fountain, spring.
f uera, impf. subj.^d sing, of ir, to go.
fuera de, apart from, outside of.
fuerte, strong, mighty, powerful;
— resfriado, bad cold.
fumar, to smoke (as tobacco}.
funci6n,/, performance.
VOCABULARY
255
gana, /., inclination, desire; tener
ganas de, to have a desire to.
ganado, m., live stock.
ganar, to earn, make (jnoney}, gain,
win; — a, to surpass.
gastar, to spend, waste.
gatito, -a, m. and f., kitten.
gato, -a, m. and f., cat.
gemelos, m. //., (opera or field)
glasses.
gemir, to groan, moan.
general, »/., general.
generalmente, generally.
Gentil, m., Gentile.
geografia,/., geography.
giro, »/., turn, revolution; draft,
order.
Godo, -a, m. and f., Goth.
Goya, ;;/., Goya (modern Spanish
painter).
gracia,yC, name, grace; //., thanks,
I thank you.
gramatica, /, grammar.
gran, cf. grande.
grande, great, big, large, grand.
grandecito, -a (fr. grande}, rather
large, biggish.
grave, important, serious.
guante, ;//., glove.
guardar, to keep, protect; — cama,
to stay in bed.
guardia, f., guard; m., guardsman,
guard, policeman.
guarismo, m.t numeral, cipher, fig-
ure.
guerra,/, war.
guerrero, m.t warrior.
Guillermo, m., William.
gustar, to taste, please; me gusta,
I like.
gusto, /»., taste, pleasure.
ha, pres. indie. $d sing, of haber.
haber, to have, be; hay, there is
(are) ; — de, to have to ; ha de
suceder, is to happen.
hablador, -ora, talkative.
hablar, to speak, talk.
hacendoso, -a, active, industrious.
hacer, to make, do ; — un cofre d,
to pack a trunk for ; — falta, to
be needed ; — hacer, to have
made ; hace frio, it is cold ; hace
una hora y media, an hour and
a half ago; hace cuatrocientos
doceanos, it is 41 2 years; <;cuanto
tiempo hace ? how long is it ?
reft.,to become; hacerse el tonto,
to play the fool.
hacia, toward (s).
hallar, to find.
hambre,/!, hunger; tener — , to be
hungry.
hambriento, -a, hungry.
haragan, -ana, lazy.
hasta, to, up to, until, as far as,
even.
hay, cf. haber.
hecho, w., deed.
helar (also refl.~}, to freeze.
hembra,/, female.
herido, m., wounded man.
herido, -a, wounded, with a wound.
herir, to strike, wound.
hermano, -a, m. and f., brother
sister.
256
SPANISH GRAMMAR
hermoso, -a, beautiful, handsome,
fine.
heroico, -a, heroic.
hervir, to boil, bubble.
hidalgo, m., Mexican coin = 10 dol-
lars ; doble hidalgo = 20 dollars.
hierro, m., iron,
hija,/, daughter.
hijito, -a, m. andf. (fr. hijo), little
son, daughter.
hijo, -a, m. and f., son, daughter;
m. //., sons, children.
hirviente, boiling, bubbling.
historia,/, history,
historiador, m., historian.
hogar, m., hearth, home,
hola, hello.
hombre, /»., man.
hombrecillo (fr. hombre), nt., little
man.
hombr6n (fr. hombre}, m., large
(big) man.
honra, /, honor.
hora, /, hour ; £ qu6 — es ? what
time is it ?
hoy, today.
hubo, there was, there were; cf.haber.
huele, pres. indie. 3 d sing, ofoler.
huelga,/, strike (of workmen),
huerfano, -a, m. and f, orphan.
huevo, m., egg.
huir, to flee.
humano, -a, human.
ideal, ideal.
idioma, m., language,
imaginar, to imagine ; reft., to ima-
gine.
impaciente, impatient.
impedir, to prevent, impede.
imperativo, m., imperative.
importante, important.
importar, to be of importance, con
ctrn ; j no importa ! no matter!
imposible, impossible.
imprimir, to print, impress.
indicative, m.t indicative.
indio, -a, Indian.
industrioso, -a, industrious.
inexplicable, inexplicable.
influir (en), to influence.
informes, m. //., information.
ingematura,/, engineering.
ingeniero, m., engineer.
Inglaterra,/, England.
ingle's, -esa, English.
Ingle's, -esa, m. and /, English-
man, Englishwoman.
inmediatamente, immediately.
inmortal, immortal.
insigne, illustrious.
instante, m., instant; al — , instantly.
instruir, to instruct.
insultar, to insult.
inteligente, intelligent.
intenci6n,/, intention.
interns, m.t interest.
interesante, interesting.
interesar, to interest.
interior, m., interior.
intervenir, to interfere.
intimo, -a, intimate.
invdlido, -a, incapacitated, crip-
pled.
invencible, invincible.
invierno, m., winter.
VOCABULARY
257
fr, to go, go on, continue ; reft., to
go off, go away.
ira,/, anger.
irritar, to provoke, anger.
Israel, Israel.
Israelita, m. and f., Israelite.
Italiano, -a, m. and/., Italian,
italiano, -a, Italian.
izquierdo, -a, left.
jamds, ever, never; no ... jamds,
never.
Jicara, Jicara; as a common noun,
coffee cup.
Jorge, »*., George.
Jos6, m., Joseph.
joven, m. arid /., (young) man,
woman, youth.
joven, young.
jovencito, -a, (fr. joven}, m. and
/, young fellow, youth, young
girl.
Juan, m., John.
Juana,/, Jane,
jueves, m., Thursday,
juez, m., judge.
jugar, to play.
Julian, m., Julian.
Julio, m., Julius,
junio, m., June,
junto, -a, united, joined together;
— £, near,
justicia, /, justice.
juzgado, m., tribunal, court of jus-
tice,
juzgar, to judge.
ki!6metro, m., kilometre.
la, f., the, that, the one, she, her,
it; //., the, those, they.
la, pers. prn., her, it; //., them,
lado, m., side.
Iadr6n, -ona, m. and/., thief,
lagrima,/, tear.
Idmpara,/, lamp,
lapiz, m., pencil.
largo, -a, long; largo, n., length,
lastima, /, pity.
lastimar, to hurt, injure.
lavandera, /, laundress.
lavar, to wash.
le, him, it, you; to him, her, it, you.
Iecci6n, /, lesson,
leche,/, milk.
leer, to read.
lejano, -a, distant,
lejos, far.
lengua,/, tongue, language,
lena, /, wood.
Le6n, »/., Leo.
les, to them, to you.
levantar, to raise; reft., to rise,
get up.
ley,/, law.
libertad,/, liberty,
libra,/, pound.
libre, free.
librero, m., bookseller,
libro, m., book.
Iim6n, m., lemon,
limosna, /., alms.
limosnita (fr. limosna), /., little
alms, trifle for charity's sake,
lindo, -a, pretty,
linea,/, line,
lingiifstico, -a, linguistic.
258
SPANISH GRAMMAR
lirio, m., lily.
lo, the, it, him, you, so; lo que,
that, which, what ; lo CUal, which.
lodo, tn., mud.
longitud, /., length,
los, the, them, you; — que, those
who (whom) ; — suyos, his own.
Louvre, tn., Louvre (palace and
museum at Paris).
lucir, show off, display.
lucha,/, struggle.
luego, directly, soon; — que, as
soon as.
lugar, m., place.
Luis, ;/z., Lewis, Louis,
luna,/, moon.
lunes, m., Monday.
luz, /, light.
llamar, to call, knock, ring; refl., to
be named.
llegar, to arrive.
llevar, to bear, carry, take, lead;
— a cabo, to carry out.
llorar, to weep, cry.
Hover, to rain.
macho, m., male.
madre,/, mother.
maduro, -a, ripe.
maestro, -a, m. and /., (school)
master, mistress, teacher.
magnifico, -a, magnificent, splen-
did.
mal, badly, poorly; noun, evil,
harm ; adj., cf. malo.
maldad, /., misdeed, wicked act.
mallsimo, -a (Jr. malo} , very bad.
malo, -a, bad, ill, sick,
mama,/, mamma, mother,
mandar, to command, order, send,
mando, m., command,
manera,/, manner, way.
mano, /, hand,
mantequilla, /, butter,
manzana, /, apple, city block.
manana, f., morning, tomorrow;
— por la — , tomorrow morning;
pasado — , day after tomorrow.
mar, m. or f., sea.
marchar, to march, go; re/I., to go
away.
margen,/, margin, bank.
Maria,/, Mary.
martes, »*., Tuesday.
marzo, m., March.
mas, but.
mas, more, most, plus; no — que,
only.
matar, to kill.
mayo, m., May.
mayor, greater, greatest; elder,
older, oldest.
me, me, to me.
Media,/, Media.
mediados, m.pl. /a — de, about the
middle of.
medicamento, tn., medicine,
medicina,/, medicine,
me'dico, m., physician, doctor (of
medicine).
medio, -a, half, a half, middle;
Edad Media, Middle Ages.
Mejicano, -a, m. and f., Mexican,
mejicano, -a, Mexican.
Mexico, tn., Mexico.
VOCABULARY
259
mejor, better, best.
mendigo, -a, m. and f., beggar.
menester, ///., necessity, need; ser
— , to be necessary,
menor, smaller, smallest; younger,
youngest.
menos, less, least; a — que, unless,
mentir, to lie.
mentira,/, lie, lying.
menudo: d — , often.
merecer, to merit, deserve,
mes, m., month.
metro, m., metre.
mezclar, to mix; mezclarse con, to
mingle with.
mi, my.
ml, me.
miedo, m., fear; tener — de, to be
afraid of.
miercoles, m., Wednesday.
Miguel, m.t Michael.
mil, (one) thousand; noun m.,
thousand.
militar, m., soldier, officer.
milla,yi, mile.
mil!6n, »«., million.
minuto, »/., minute.
mio, -a, my, mine; el (la, los, las,
lo) mio (-a, -os, -as, -o),mine.
misericordia, /, mercy.
mismo, -a, self, himself, etc.;
same, very ; — que, same as.
modo, m., way, mode, manner.
molestar, to annoy, trouble, dis-
turb.
molestia,/, trouble.
momento, m., moment.
moneda, /, coin.
mono, -a, m. and /., monkey.
montanes, -esa m. and f., moun-
taineer.
montar, to mount, ride; — a ca-
ballo, to ride on horseback; mon-
tado en, riding on.
morar, to dwell, live.
morir, to die; refl., to die, be dying.
mosca, /., fly.
mostaza, f., mustard.
mover, to move, actuate.
mozo, -a, youth, lad, lass; waiter,
waitress.
muchacho, -a, m. and f., boy, girl.
muchisimo, -a (/r. wuc/io), very
much.
muchisimos, -as, very many.
mucho, -a, much, a great deal ; //.,
many; adv., much, a great deal,
very. [niture; pi., furniture.x
mueble, m., article (piece) of fur-
muela, /., (molar) tooth.
muerte,/, death.
mujer,/, woman, wife.
mujeraza, /., large, coarse woman.
mula,/, mule.
multitud,/, multitude.
mundo, ;//., world; todo el — ,
everybody.
Murillo, m., Murillo (Spanish
painter).
muro, m.t wall.
museo, m., museum.
musica,/!, music.
muy, very.
nacer, to be born.
nacionalidad, /, nationality.
260
SPANISH GRAMMAR
nada, nothing, anything, any respect ;
no ... nada, nothing.
Dadad-or, m., swimmer.
nadie, no one, nobody, any one, any-
body; no ... — , nobody, not any-
body.
naranja,/, orange.
nariz,/, nose.
neblina,/, fog, mist.
necesario, -a, necessary.
necesitar, to need, want.
negar, to deny.
negocio, #/., business, affair.
negro, -a, black.
nevar, to snow.
ni, nor, or ; ni . . . ni, neither . . .
nor ; ni . . . tampoco, not . . .
either, nor . . . either.
nieto, -a, tn. and f.t grandson,
granddaughter.
nieve,/, snow.
ninguno, -a, no, none ; no ... nin-
guno, -a, not any.
nino, -a, m. and f., child, (small)
boy, girl.
no, not, no; no poder menos de,
not to be able to help.
noble, noble.
noche,/, night ; esta — , tonight.
nombre, m., name.
nono, -a, ninth.
norte, m.t north.
Norte-Americano, -a, m. and /,
North American.
norte-americano, -a, North Ameri-
can.
nos, us, ourselves, each other, one
another ; to us, to ourselves.
nosotros, -as, we, us.
noticias, /.//., news.
novecientos, -as, nine hundred,
novela,/, novel,
noveuo, -a, ninth.
noventa, ninety.
noviembre, ;//., November,
nuestro, -a, our, ours ; el (la, lo£
los, las) nuestro (-a, -o, -os,
-as), ours.
nueve, nine,
nuevo, -a, new.
numerador, m., numerator,
niimero, m., number; gran — , a
large number,
nunca, never, ever ; no . . . nunca,
never, not ever.
6, or.
obedecer, to obey.
objeto, m., object.
obligar, to oblige, compel.
obra, /, work ; — maestra, master-
piece.
octavo, -a, eighth.
octubre, »/., October.
ocupaci6n,/i, occupation.
ocupado, -a, busy, occupied.
ochenta, eighty.
ocho, eight ; las — , eight o'clock,
ochocientos, -as, eight hundred.
Odiar, to hate.
oido, m., hearing, (inner) ear.
olr, to hear.
OJO, m., eye.
Oler, to smell ; — a", to smell of.
once, eleven ; las — y media, half-
past eleven o'clock.
VOCABULARY
261
onza,/, ounce.
opera,/, opera.
opinar, to upine, be of the opinion.
opini6n,/, opinion.
6ptimo, -a, best, excellent.
opuesto, -a, opposite, opposed.
orador, m., orator.
orar, to pray.
orden,/, order.
ordinal, ordinal.
oriental, oriental.
origen, m., origin.
original, original.
oro, m., gold.
OS, you.
osar, to dare.
oscurecer, to grow dark.
otro, -a, other, another.
Pablo, /»., Paul.
padre, m.t father, priest; //., fathers,
parents.
pagar, to pay.
pagina,/, page.
pague", pret. indie, ist sing, of
pagar.
pague, pres. subj. $d sing, of pagar.
pals, m., country, region, land.
palabra,/, word.
palabrota (fr. palabra), /., coarse
expression, harsh word.
palacio, m.t palace.
pan, m., bread.
panuelo, m., handkerchief.
papa, m., papa, father.
papel, m., paper; — secante, blot-
ting paper.
paquete, m., package.
para, for, to, in order to; — que, in
order that, that.
parado, -a, stopped, erect, standing.
parecer, seem, appear ; parecerse a,
to be like to, resemble.
pariente, -a, m. and f., relative, re-
lation.
parte, /, part; por todas partes,
everywhere; la mayor — , nnst.
partir, to depart, leave; to split,
crack ; — de, to leave.
pasado, -a, past last; lo — , the
past; — manana, day after to-
morrow.
pasar, to pass, pass through, pass
over, spend (time).
pasearse, to take a walk or a ride,
go about.
paseo, m., public promenade.
pasi6n, /, passion.
patria,/, (native) country.
paz, /, peace ; paces, / //., peace.
pecado, m., sin.
pedir, to ask for; — a, to ask of.
pelear, to fight.
peligro, m., peril, danger.
pelota,/, ball.
pelot6n, m., platoon.
pensar, to think, intend, mean
(folloived directly by an infini-
tive}; — en, to think of, recall;
— de, to think of, form an opinion
of.
peor, worse, worst.
pequenito, -a (fr. pequeno), very
small, wee, little, tiny.
pequeno, -a, little, small, slight.
perder, to lose ; — a, to ruin.
262
SPANISH GRAMMAR
perd6n, m., pardon.
perdonar, to pardon.
perecer, to perish.
perezoso, -a, lazy, idle.
peri6dico, m.y newspaper, periodi-
cal.
permitir, to permit.
pero, but.
persona,/, person.
personaje, m., personage.
pertenecer, to belong.
perro, m.t dog.
pesar, to weigh.
peseta, /, peseta, franc (nearly
twenty cents).
peso, m., weight, dollar.
piano, m., piano.
pie, m., foot.
piedad,/, pity, piety.
pierna, /, leg.
pill etc (fr. pillo}, m., low rascal,
base rogue.
pintar, to paint.
pintor, ///., painter.
pintura,/, painting.
Pio, Pius.
piso, m., story, floor.
pizarra,/, slate.
plan, m., plan.
planchar, to iron.
plata,/, silver.
platO, m ., plate.
plazuela (fr. plaza}, /., little square.
pluma, /, pen, feather; — tintero,
fountain pen.
pobre, poor.
pobrecito, -a (fr.fobri), poor little
(fellow).
pOCO, -a, little; un poco, a little-,
pocos, -as, few; — ha, a short
while ago.
poder, to be able, can, may; —
mas, to have the more power., be
the stronger; no — mas, to be
played out, be able to do no more;
no — menos de, not to be able to
help; puede que, it is possible
that.
poder, w., power.
poderoso, -a, powerful.
poeta, /«., poet.
politico, -a, political; noun m^
politician.
politiquejo (fr. politico}, m., low
politician.
poner, to put, place, set (a table),
lay (eggs) ; re/I., to put on (cloth-
ing), become, begin.
por, for, through, by, along, on ac-
count of, per; — alii, over there;
— la manana, in the morning.
pormenor, m., detail.
porque, because; por qu6, why
porque", why.
portero, m., porter.
poseer, to possess, own.
posible, possible.
postal, postal.
ppdo. = pr6ximo pasado.
Prado, m., meadow; name of 4
promenade and park at Madrid.
preferir, to prefer.
preguntar (a), to ask (of).
pregunt6n, -ona, inquisitive.
premie, m., prize.
VOCABULARY
263
prensa,/, press.
presentar, to present.
presente, present; lo — , the present
(time} ; al — , at present.
presente, m., present.
prestar, to lend.
primer (o), -a, first.
primo, -a, m. andf., cousin.
principal, principal, leading, of
importance.
principio, m., beginning; a prin-
cipios de, near the beginning of.
prisa, /, hurry; tener — , to be in
a hurry; de — , quickly, fast.
pr6, m., advantage; en — de, in
favor of.
probable, probable.
probablemente, probably.
probar, to prove, test.
profesor, m., professor.
profeta, m., prophet.
progenitor, m., progenitor.
prohibir, to forbid, prohibit.
prometer, to promise.
pronto, soon, quickly.
proposici6n, /., proposition, pro-
posal.
prop6sitO, m., purpose, plan, propo-
sition.
prosperidad, /., prosperity.
protege r, to protect.
proverbio, m., proverb.
pr6ximo, -a, next; — pasado, last
month, ultimo.
proyecto, m., plan.
pmeba, /, proof.
publico, -a, public.
pueblo, m., people, town.
puente, m., bridge.
puerta, /, door, gate; Puerta del
Sol,/, Gate of the Sun (name of
the chief square in Madrid}.
pues, well, why.
puesto, /;/., situation, position.
punto, m., point, element; d — de,
on the puint of.
puro, -a, pure.
que, el (la, las, los, las) — , who,
which, that; lo — , that which,
what.
qu6, interrog. and ex dam., what,
que, conj., that, for, than, as; tener
— , to have to, must ; de — , of
the fact that.
qu6, ex clam., what a!
quebrado, m., fraction.
quebrar, to break.
quedar, to remain ; refl., to remain,
stay.
quejarse (de), to complain (of).
querer, to wish, want, like, try ; —
d, to love, like; — decir, to mean,
signify.
querido, -a, dear.
queso, m., cheese.
quien, who, whom, he who, him who;
quien . . . quien, some . . . some.
(the) one . . . (the) other.
qui£n, interrog., who, whom.
Quijote, Quixote,
quince, fifteen.
quince-avo, fifteenth,
quinientos, -as, five hundred,
quinto, -a, fifth.
quinzavo, fifteenth
264
SPANISH GRAMMAR
quitar (a), to take (from or off of ).
quizds, perhaps.
raro, -a, strange, odd, queer.
raudal, w., stream, torrent, lot.
rayo, w., ray, beam.
raza,yC, race.
raz6n, /I, reason, right ; tener — ,
to be right.
real, royal, real.
real, ;«., silver coin worth about five
cents.
rece, pres. sbj. $d sing, of rezar.
recepci6n,/, reception.
recibir, to receive.
recibo, /«., receipt.
recomendar, to recommend.
recordar, to recall, remind.
recuerdo, #*., recollection ; //., com-
pliments, regards.
redondo, -a, round.
referir, to relate, utter.
reforma,/, reform.
refran, #*., refrain, proverb.
regalar, to give, present.
regalo, *»., present, gift.
regreso, #2., return.
reina,/, queen.
reir, to laugh ; reirse (de), to laugh
(at).
relaci6n,/, account.
relacionarse (con), to be related (to).
religiose, -a, religious.
reloj, »/., watch, clock.
relojeria, f.t watch-making.
relucir, to shine, glisten, gleam.
remangado, -a, turned up, snub.
remendar, to mend, repair.
renir, to quarrel.
repasar, to recite, repeat
resfriado, /«., cold.
resistir, to resist.
respetar, to respect.
responder, to respond, answer ; — d$
to answer for, be responsible for.
resto, m., remnant.
resultado, w., result, outcome.
resultar, to result.
retirarse, to retire, retreat.
retrato, /«., portrait, picture.
reunido, -a, united, gathered, as-
sembled.
rey, /#., king.
reyezuelo (fr. rey), w., petty king.
rezar, to pray.
rico, -a, rich.
rlo, m.t river.
rodilla,/, knee.
rogar, to ask, entreat.
rojo, -a, red.
Roma,/, Rome.
Romano, -a, »*. and/., Roman.
romano, -a, Roman, Romanic, Ro-
mance.
ropa,/, clothing, clothes.
roto, -a, broken.
ruido, *rc., noise.
Ruso, -a, #z. and/., Russian.
S. S. Q. B. S. M. (P.) = seguro (-a)
servidor (-ora) que besa sus
manos (pies).
sabado, #*., Saturday.
saber, to know, know how» learn,
be able: — a, to taste of.
saqar, to take out.
VOCABULARY
sacerdote, m., priest.
sacrificio, /«., sacrifice.
sacudir, to shake off.
sala,/., room.
salida, /, going out, departure ;
— del sol, sunrise.
salir, come out, go out, issue, leave.
salud, /, health; Men de — , in
good health,
saludar, to salute.
sanar, to cure, heal,
santo, -a, holy, saint.
saque, pres. sbj.gdsing. of sacar.
sastre, /»., tailor.
S6, himself, herself, itself, one's self,
yourself, themselves, yourselves ;
(=le, les), to him, to her, to it,
to them, to you.
secante, drying, blotting,
sed,/, thirst ; tener — , to be thirsty.
seda,/, silk.
seguir, to follow, succeed.
segiin, prep., according to; conj.,
according as, as.
segundo, »/., second.
seguridad, _/!, security, safety.
seguro, -a, secure, sure, firm,
seis, six.
seiscientos, -as, six hundred,
semana, f., week ; la — que viene,
next week.
semejante, such a.
semejanza, /, resemblance.
senador, m., senator.
sencillo, -a, simple, unmixed, un-
qualified.
sentar, to set, seat; to fit, suit; reft.,
to sit down, be seated.
sentimiento, m., feeling, grief, sor-
row.
sentir, to feel, regret ; reft., be sorry,
feel.
Senor, m., Lord.
senor, m., sir, gentleman, Mr.
senora,/, madam, lady, wife, Mrs.
senorita,yC, young lady, miss.
se(p)tiembre, ;»., September.
se"(p)timo, -a, seventh.
ser, to be.
servidor, -ora, m. andf, servant.
servir, to serve; servirse de, to
make use of ; sirvase Vd., please,
be kind enough.
sesenta, sixty.
setecientos, -as, seven hundred.
setenta, seventy.
severe, -a, strict, severe.
Sevilla,/, Seville.
sexto, -a, sixth.
si, if; whether (in indirect ques-
tion)', indeed (in exclamations).
si, yes.
si, himself, herself, itself, yourself,
one's self, themselves, yourselves*
siempre, always, ever, still.
siete, seven.
siglo, m., century.
significar, to signify, mean.
siguiente, following.
silencio, m., silence.
Silvestre, m., Silvester.
silla,yi, chair, saddle.
sin, without.
singular, m., singular.
sino, but ; no ... — , only.
sistema, m., system.
266
SPANISH GRAMMAR
sobre, above; — todo, above all,
especially.
sobre, m., envelope.
sobresaliente, excellent, surpassing.
sobrinito, -a (fr. sobrino}, m. and
/., little nephew, niece.
sobrino, -a, m. and/., nephew, niece.
sol, m., sun.
soldado, ///., soldier.
soldadote (fr. soldado}, m., big,
rough soldier.
solo, -a, alone, solitary.
s61o, adv., only, merely,
sombrero, m.t hat.
son, see ser.
sonreirse, to smile.
sopa,/, soup.
sordo, -a, deaf.
sorprender, to surprise,
sortija,/, ring.
Sr., Sor.= senor.
Sra., Sora. = senora.
Srta. = senorita.
SU, his, her, its, their, your, one's ;
— . . . de Vd., your.
suavidad, /, suavity, gentleness;
//. , soft words or acts.
subir, to go up, take up.
su(b)scribir, to subscribe ; reft., to
sign one's self.
subjuntivo, m.t subjunctive.
subrayar, to underscore, underline.
suceder, to happen, follow (in order).
sueno, m., sleep, tener — , to be
sleepy.
sufrir, to suffer.
suplicar, to beg, entreat.
Buponer, to suppose.
suyo, -a, your, yours ; el (la, lo, loa,
las) suyo (-a, -o, -os, -as), yours-,
los suyos, his men.
tabaco, m., tobacco.
tal, such, such a ; un — , a certain ;
con — que, provided that ; —
vez, perhaps ; qu6 — , how.
talentazo, m. (fr. talento), great
talent.
talento, »/., talent,
tambie'n, also, too.
tampoco, as little, neither, nor . . .
either ; ni . . . — , not . . . either,
nor . . . either.
tan, so, as; idiomatic in exclamations.
tantico, -a (fr. tanto}; un — , a
little bit, somewhat.
tanto, -a, as much, so much; tantos,
-as, as many, so many ; — ...
COmo, as (so) much ... as ; por
lo — , therefore.
tanto, adv., so much, so.
tardar, to delay; no tardara en
venir, it will not be long before
he comes.
tarde,/, evening, afternoon,
tarde, late,
tarea, /, task.
tarjeta, /, card; — de visita,
visiting card.
te, /«., tea.
te, you, thee.
teatro, m., theatre.
tejado, »/., roof,
tela,/, cloth, fabric.
tema, »/., theme, exercise,
temer, to fear.
VOCABULARY
267
templar, to temper, soften.
temprano, early.
tener, to have, hold; — que, to
have to.
teoria, /-, theory.
tercer(oj, -a, third.
tercio, -a, third.
terminal1, to finish, end.
terquedad, /, stubbornness, obsti-
nacy
tertuliano, -a, m. and/., guest, per-
son present at a party.
ti» you, thee.
tfa,/, aunt.
tiempo, m., time, weather ; <: cuanto
— hace ? how long is it ?
tienda,yC, shop, store.
tienen, pres. indie, jd pi. of tener.
tierra, /., earth, land.
tinta, /, ink.
tio, -a, m. and f., uncle, aunt.
tirano, m., tyrant.
tocar, to touch, play (a musical
instrument) ; knock (on a door} ;
be one's turn.
todavia, still, yet.
todito, -a (fr. todo} ; toditos los
dias, almost every day.
todo, -a, all, every ; n., all, every-
thing ; — el dia, all day ; todas
las noches, every night.
tomar, to take.
tonelada,/, ton.
tonto, -a, m. and /., fool ; hacerse
el — , to play the fool.
torno, m., turn ; en — de, around.
toro, m., bull; corrida de toros,
bull-fight.
tortuoso, -a, crooked.
torre, /., tower.
trabajar, to work.
trabajo, m., work.
traer, to bring.
traidor, -ora, m. and f., traitor;
adj., treacherous.
traje, m.t suit, costume.
trajeron, pret. indie, jd pi. of
traer.
tranvia, m., tramway, street car.
tratar, to treat, have dealings (with),
trece, thirteen.
treinta, thirty.
tren, m.t train,
tres, three.
trescientos, -as, three hundred,
tribu,/, tribe,
triste, sad, gloomy, dismal.
tronar, to thunder; por lo que
pudiere tronar, for a rainy day,
against contingencies.
tropa, /, troop,
tu, thou, you.
tu, thy, your,
turista, m. and /., tourist,
tuyo, -a, thine, yours ; el tuyo, etc,
thine, yours.
u, or.
ultimo, -a, last,
uniforme, m., uniform.
uniformemente, uniformly,
universidad, /, university,
uno, -a, one ; unos, -as, some, any,
about ; a la una at one o'clock,
usted (//. ustedes), you.
util, useful.
268
SPANISH GRAMMAR
V. (= Hated), you; VV., pi. ( =
ustedes), you.
vaca,/, cow. [better.
valer, to be worth; mas vale, it is
valor, m , valor, courage ; con — ,
courageously. [ceited.
vanaglorioso, -a, boastful, con-
vanidad, /, vanity,
rara,/, yard.
variar, to vary, change. [several,
vario, -a, various, different ; //.,
var6n, m., male.
Vd. (= listed), you; Vds. ( =
ustedes), you.
vecino, -a, m and f., neighbor,
veinte, twenty.
vela,/, candle. [painter).
Velazquez, Velazquez (Spanish
velocidad,/, speed,
veneer, to conquer, win.
vencido, -a, conquered.
vender, to sell.
veneno, m., poison, venom,
venerable, venerable,
venir, to come, happen,
ventana,/, window,
venzan, pres. sbj. 3d pi. of veneer.
ver, to see. [it so?
verdad, /, truth ; i no es — ? isn't
verdadero, -a, true, real.
verde, green.
verter, to pour forth, shed,
vestido, m., garment, clothes, suit.
vestir, to dress, clothe; re/I., to
dress (one's self).
Vez, /, time ; otra — , again ; una
— , once ; dos veces, twice ; en
— de, instead of.
viajar, to travel.
viaje, m., journey, travel.
vicioso, -a, vicious.
vida,/, life, living.
viejo, -a, old.
viento, m., wind.
viernes, m., Friday.
vino, ni., wine.
visita,/, visit.
visitar, to visit.
vista,/, sight, view.
visto, -a,/./, of ver, to see.
viudo, -a, m. and f., widower , widow.
vivir, to live.
volar, to fly.
volumen, m., volume.
voluntad,/, will.
VOlver, to turn, return, come back ;
— £, again ; re/I., to turn around.
VOS, you.
vosotros, -as, you, ye.
VOy, ist pers. sing. pres. indie, of ir,
to go.
vuelta, /, turn, return; d — de
correo, hy return mail ; estar de
— , to be back, have returned.
vuestro, -a, your, yours.
y, and.
ya, already, now ; — no, no longer,
no more.
yerro, pres. indie, ist sing, of errar.
yo, I.
yugo, m., yoke.
zapato, m., shoe.
Zurbaran, Zurbaran (Spanish
painter].
VOCABULARY
ENGLISH-SPANISH
NOTE. — Not all the words used in the Exercises will be found in the English-
Spanish part of the General Vocabulary. If an English-Spanish exercise involves
the use of Spanish words already employed in the preceding Spanish-English
exercise of the same lesson, as occurs especially in the second half of the
Grammar, those words are often not included in the English-Spanish part of
the Vocabulary. In such cases the student needs no help, provided he trans-
late properly the Spanish-English sentences of the particular lesson.
a, an, un, una.
about, ( = approximately} cerca de,
aproximadamente, (=of) de, ( =
with regard to) respecto de.
absent, ausente.
accompany, acompanar.
according to, segtin.
acknowledge, reconocer ; — the re-
ceipt (of), acusar recibo (de).
act, hecho, m.
admire, admirar.
advise, aconsejar (a).
affectionate, carifioso, -a; very
(most) — , afecti'simo, -a, afmo, -a.
afoot, a pie.
afraid: be — (of),tener miedo (de).
after, prep.y despues de; conj,, des-
pues que.
again, otra vez, de nuevo, volver a.
age, edad, /./ Middle — s, Edad
Media.
ago: a long time — , hace mucho
tiempo, mucho tiempo ha.
agreeable, agradable.
agree (to), convenir (en), ( = gel
along together} entenderse.
Alfred, Alfredo, m.
all, todo, -a; — day, todo el di'a.
almost, casi.
aloud, alto, en voz alta.
Alphonsus, Alfonso, m.
already, ya.
also, tambien.
although, aunque.
always, siempre.
a. m., de la manana.
America, America,/.; North ,
America del Norte.
American, Americano, -a, m. and f.
American, adj., americano, -a. norte-
americano, -a.
and, y, e (bef. i- or hi-}.
angry, enojado, -a, irritado, -a, en-
fadado, -a; be — , enojarse, irri-
tarse, enfadarse.
animal, animal, m.
269
2/0
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Anna, Ana,/.
another, otro, -a; one — , los unos
(a) los otros.
answer, responder, (to a letter} con-
testar.
Anthony, Antonio, m.
any (one), alguno, -a; not any
(one), no ... ninguno, -a, no
. . . alguno, -a (aft. noun} ;
not ... in any way, no . . .
en nada.
anything, algo, alguna cosa; not — ,
no . . . nada.
appear, aparecer, ( = seem} parecer.
apple, manzana, f.; — tree, man-
zano, m.; — orchard, manza-
nar, m.
approach, acercarse a.
April, abril, m.
argue, argiiir.
arise, levantarse.
arithmetic, aritmetica, /
arm, brazo, m.
army, ejercito, m.
arrive (at, in), llegar (a).
as, como ; as ... as, tan . . .
como; — soon — , luego que, tan
pronto como.
ascertain, averiguar.
Asia, Asia,/
ask, ( = question} preguntar; (= beg,
request} pedir, rogar; — of,
pedir a; — for, pedir.
at, a, (= in} en.
attack, acometer.
August, agosto, m.
aunt, tia,/
Australia, Australia, /
autumn, otono, m.
avoid, evitar.
awake, despertarse, (lit. ' to aroust
one's self}.
back, (of person} espalda, f. ; (of
animal) lomo, m.; (of chair)
respaldo, m.
bad, malo, -a; — cold, fuerte res-
friado; it's too — ! es lastima !
badly, mal.
ball, pelota, // play — , jugar a la
pelota.
barber, barbero, m.
bark, ladrar.
be, (permanently or inherently) ser;
(temporarily ; position} estar ;
— cold, tener frio (r/ a person or
animal); estar frio (of an inani-
mate object}', hacer frio (of the
weather}.
beard, barba,/
beautiful, bello, -a, (= handsome)
hermoso, -a.
because, porque.
bed, cama,// go to — , acostarse.
beer, cerveza,/
before, (position} ante, delantede;
(time} antes de; (= formerly,
beforehand} antes; con/, antes
que.
beg, mendigar; (= request} pedir,
rogar.
behavior, conducta,/
believe, creer.
beloved, amado, -a; querido, -a.
best, mejor.
better, mejor.
VOCABULARY
271
between, entre.
bible, biblia,/
bicycle, bicicleta,/
bill, (= account} cuenta, f.; { —
poster} cartel, m. ; ( = bird's — )
pico, m.; { — bank-note) billete,
tn.
bird, pajaro, m.; ave,/I
birthday, dia de cumpleanos, cum-
pleafios, m.
black, negro, -a.
blind, ciego, -a.
blotting-paper, papel secante, m.
blow, soplar; the wind — s, hace
(hay) viento.
blue, azul.
book, libro, m.
borrow, pedir (tomar) prestado, -a.
boy, muchacho, m. ; ( = young boy}
nino, m.
brandy, aguardiente, m. ; cofiac, m.
bread, pan, m.
bride, novia,/
bring, traer; — down, bajar.
broken, roto, -a.
brother, hermano, m.; — in-law,
cufiado, m.
brush, cepillo, m.; vb.y acepillar.
build, construir.
building, edificio, m.
burn, quemar ; intr., arder; — up
{or down}) quemarse.
burnish, brunir.
busy, ocupado, -a.
but, pero, mas, sino (aft. nega-
tive}.
butter, mantequilla, f.
buy, comprar.
by, (with passive verbs} por, de;
(= near} junto a, cerca de, al la-
do de; — day, de dia; — my
watch, en mi reloj.
call, llamar.
can, poder ; ( = know how} saber
candle, vela.,yi
cap, gorra, f.
captain, capitan, m.
care, cuidado, m.
carriage, coche, m. ; carruage, m.
carry Off, llevar, llevarse.
case, caso, m. ; in — , en caso que.
Catalan, Catalan, -ana, m. and f.
Catalonia, Cataluna,/
catch, coger; { — take} tomar, ( = tie,
fasten} amarrar ; — cold, coger
un resfriado (resfrio), tomar ca-
tarro, resfriarse.
cause, causa, f. ; motive, m.
cent, centavo, m.
centime, centime, m.
certain, a certain, cierto, -a.
chair, silla, f.
change, cambiar.
Charles, Carlos, m.
child, nino, -a, m. and f. ; children,
nifios, m. pi. ; ( = sons and daugh-
ters} hijos, m, pi.
chin, barba,/
city, ciudad,/
clean, limpiar.
Clock, reloj {de pared, de mesa} ; at
six o'clock, a las seis ; what
O'clock is it ? iqu*. hora es?
clothes, ropa, f.
Co. {company}, Cva.
272
SPANISH GRAMMAR
coalition, coalicion,/
coat, levita, // {—boy's — ) cha-
queta, / / ( = " sack " — ) " saco,"
m. ; ( = evening or " dress " — )
irac, m. ; (of uniform} casaca,/
coffee, cafe, m.
COld, noun, fn'o, m. ; {—illness}
resfriado, ;«., resfrio, ;#., catarro,
m. ; catch — , coger un resfriado
(resfrio), resfriarse.
COld, adj., frio, -a ; be — , see be.
collar, cuello, m.
collection, coleccion,/.
color, color, m.
comb, peine, ;//. ; vb.t peinar.
come, venir ; — out, salir.
comfortable, comodo, -a.
command, mandar.
company, compania,// Co., Cia.
conquer, veneer.
consequently, por consiguiente.
content, contented, contento, -a,
satisfecho, -a.
contentedly, tranquilamente, con-
tentamente.
continent, continente, m.
continue, continuar.
copy, copiaj f. ; (of a work} ejem-
plar, ;//.
cordially, cordialmente.
correct, corregir.
correctly, correctamente.
costly, costoso, -a.
country, pai's, m. ; ( = native land}
patria, f. ; (as 'distinguished from
the city} campo, m. ; — house,
casa de campo.
lousin, primo, -a, m. and f.
COW, vaca, /
crack, parti r.
cravat, corbata,/
cry, gritar, dar voces; (=weep\
llorar.
Cuba, Cuba,/
Cuban, Cubano, -a, m. and f.
Cuban, adj., cubano, -a.
cuff, puno, m.
cup, taza,// ( = wine cup} copa,/
cure, sanar.
cut, cortar.
daily, diariamente, todos los dias,
cada dia.
danger, peligro, m.
date, fecha,/ / vb.% fechar.
daughter, hija,/
day, dia, m. ; good — , buenos
dias.
deal ; a great — of, mucho, -a.
dear, ( — beloved'} querido, -a, caro,
-a ; ( — expensive} caro, -a, cos-
toso, -a ; — Sir, muy Sefior mio ;
— Madam, muy Senora mia.
dearly, ( = expensively} caramente,
costosamente ; ( = affectionately}
tiernamente, carinosamente.
death, muerte,/
December, diciembre, m.
decide, resolver (a.)
deed, hecho, m.
defend, defender.
desire, desear.
destroy, destruir.
die, morir.
difficult, dificil.
discharge, despedk.
VOCABULARY
273
distinguish, distinguir.
do, hacer.
dog, perro, m.
dollar, (in Spain) duro, m. ; (in
America] peso, m.
door, puerta,/
doubt, duda,// vb., dudar.
dozen, docena,yC
draft, giro, m.
draw, sacar.
drawing, dibujo. m.
dress, vestir ; intr., vestirse.
drink, beber.
drop, (-let go of) soltar, (= let fall}
dejar caer.
dry, secar, ( = wipe} enjugar.
each, cada; — other, el uno (al)
otro.
ear, oreja, f.;(— inner ear, or hear-
ing) oido, m.
early, temprano.
earn, ganar.
easy, facil.
eat, comer.
egg, huevo, m.
eight, ocho.
eighteen, diez y ocho.
eighth, octavo, -a.
eighty, ochenta.
elevated, elevado, -a.
else, something — , otra cosa.
embrace, abrazar.
employ, emplear.
employee, empleado, -a, m. and f.
end, extremidad, f. ; extreme, m
enemy, enemigo, -a, m. and f.
England, Inglaterra, /
English, Ingles, -esa, m. and /;
adj., ingles, -esa.
enough, bastante, suficiente.
enter, entrar (en).
envelope, sobre, m.
err, errar.
Europe, Europa, /
even, adv., aun ; — if, aunque.
evening, tarde,/; good — , buenas
noches.
ever, ( = always} siempre ; (in a
question") jamas, alguna vez ; not
— , no . . . nunca,no . . . jamas.
every (one), todo, -a; cada
(uno, -a); — body, todos (//.),
todo el mundo, m. ; — night,
todas las noches ; — time, cada
vez.
exercise, ejercicio, m.
expensive, costoso, -a, caro, -a.
eye, ojo, m.
face, cara, /
faithful, fiel.
fall, caer ; — down, caerse.
false, falso, -a.
family, familia, /
far, lejos ; as — as, hasta.
fast, ( =firm} firme, seguro, -a ;
( = swiff} veloz, ligero, -a ; be —
(as a watch}, adelantar, estar
adelantado.
fast, adv., (= firmly} fuertemente.
firmemente ; (= rapidly} aprisii,
de prisa.
fatal, fatal.
father, padre, m., papa, m.
fault, culpa,/
2/4
SPANISH GRAMMAR
favor, favor, m.
fear, temer.
February, febrero, m.
feel, sentir ; intr., sentirse.
feeling, sentimiento, m.
few, a few, pocos, -as ; unos (-as)
cuantos (-as).
fifteen, quince.
fifth, quinto, -a.
fifty, cincuenta.
find, hallar, (= meet) encontrar.
fine, bueno, -a.
finger, dedo, m. ; — nail, una (de
dedo),/
fire, (in the abstract} fuego, m.;
( = burning wood or coal}
lumbre, f., candela (e.g. in
Cuba},/.; ( = conflagration*} in-
cendio, m.
firm, casa,yC, (=firm name} firma,/!
first, primer (o) -a ; (in compound
ordinals} primo, -a.
fist, puno, m.
fit, sentar, caer, estar.
five, cinco ; — hundred, quinientos,
-as.
floor, suelo, m., ( = story} piso, ;;/.
flower, flor, f.
fog, neblina, / / niebla, /
foggy; it is — , hay neblina.
food, alimento, m.
foolish, bobo, -a.
foot, pie, m.
for, ( = for the sake of, in ex-
change for} por; (= destination)
para.
forbid, prohibir.
forehead, frente,/
forest, monte, m. ; bosque, m.
fork, tenedor, m.
forty, cuarenta.
four, cuatro.
fourteen, catorce.
fourth, cuarto, -a.
fragrant, oloroso, -a, fragante.
Frances, Francisca,/
French, frances, -esa.
Frenchman, Frances, m. ; French-
woman, Francesa,/
Friday, viernes, m.
friend, amigo, -a, m. and f.
frighten, espantar, asustar ; be
frightened, asustarse.
from, de, desde ; — ... to, de . . .
a, desde . . . hasta.
furniture, muebles, m. pi.
garlic, ajo, m.
gentleman, senor, m.; caballero, tn.
geography, geograffa,/
George, Jorge, m.
German, Aleman, -ana, m. and f.,'
adj., aleman, -ana.
get, (= obtain} conseguir, obtener;
( = go after} ir a buscar; go and
— , ir a buscar; ( = become}
ponerse.
gift, regalo, m.
girl, muchacha, yl / nina,^
give, dar.
glad, alegre, contento, -a; I am —
(to), me alegro de, me da gusto
(placer) de, tengo mucho gustq
(placer) en.
glass, vaso, m.
glove, guante, m.
VOCABULARY
275
go, ir; — out, salir; — up, subir;
— into, entrar (en) ; {of a watch}
andar.
god, dios, m.
gold, oro, m.
good, bueno, -a; be — for nothing,
no valer nada, no servir para nada
good-bye, adios; — for a while,
hasta luego ; — until we see each
other again, hasta la vista.
goodness, bonclad, yC / (lo) bueno, n.
grammar, gramatica,/
granddaughter, nieta,/
grandfather, abuelo, m.
grandparents, abuelos, m., pi.
grandson, nieto, m.
grant, otorgar, conceder.
great, gran(de) ; a — deal, mucho,
-a.
Greek, griego, -a.
guide, guia; vb., guiar.
hair, cabello, m., pelo, m. ; — of the
head, cabellos, m. pi.
half, mitad, f.; adj., medio, -a;
a — , or — a, medio, -a.
hand, mano, f. ; come to — , venir
a (mis) manos.
handkerchief, panuelo, m.
handsome, hermoso, -a.
happen, acontecer, suceder.
happily, felizmente.
happy, feliz.
hard, duro, -a ; ( = difficult) dificil ;
adv., diligentemente, mucho.
harm, mal, m.; (= damage} daiio,
m.
hat, sombrero, m.
hate, odiar, ahorrecer.
have, aux. vb., haber; (= possess,
hold} tener ; — to, tener que,
haber de.
he, el ; — who, el que, quien.
head, cabeza, f.
health, salud, / ; be in good (bet-
ter)— , estar hien (mejor) de salud.
healthful, saludable.
healthy, sano, -a.
heaven, cielo, m.
help, ayudar.
Henry, Enrique, m.
here, aqui, aca.
heroic, heroico, -a.
high, alto, -a, elevado, -a.
him, el, le, lo.
himself, se.
his, su, sus ; el (la, lo, los, las)
suyo (-a, -o, -os, -as) ; el (la, lo,
los, las) . . . de el.
historian, historiador, m.
holy, santo, -a.
home, ( — to one's — ) a casa ; at — ,
en casa.
hope, esperar.
horse, caballo, m.
horseback; on — , a caballo.
hot, caliente.
hour, hora, /.
house, casa, /
how, como; interrog., como; —
much (many), cuanto, -a (-os,
-as).
hundred, one — , cien(to).
hunger, hambre, /
hungry, hambriento, -a; be — ,
tener hambre.
276
SPANISH GRAMMAR
hurry, prisa, /. / be in a — , tener
prisa.
if, si.
ill, enfermo, -a, malo, -a.
illness, enfermedad,yi
in, en; (= within) dentro de ;
(after a comparative) de.
independent, independiente.
Indian, indio, -a.
indispensable, indispensable.
influence, influencia, /
ink, tinta,/
instant, instante, m.; ( = present
month} del corriente, del presente.
instead of, en lugar (vez) de.
intend, pensar, tener la intencion de.
interesting, interesante.
?ron, hierro, m.
is, see ser, to be, or estar, to be.
Island, isla,/!
it, el, ella, ello, lo.
.Italian, italiano, -a.
[anuary, enero, m.
fohn, Juan, m.
udge, juez, m.
fuly, julio, m.
fune, junio, m.
just, adv., justamente, exactamente;
to have — , acabar de.
keep, guardar.
kind, clase,/., especie,/! : ad'., bon-
dadoso, -a ; apreciable or atenta
• (carta) ; be — enough, tener la
bondad (de), servirse.
kindness, bondad, /
kiss, besar.
kitchen, cocina,/
knife, cuchillo, m.; (= daspkmfe),
navaja,// ( = penknife) cortaplu-
mas, m.; table — , cuchara de mesa,
know, ( = be acquainted with) cono-
cer, ( = be aware of, know how, be
able} saber ; I — , conozco or se ;
let them — , conozcan or sepan.
lady, sefiora, f.
lamp, lampara,^
language, lengua, f., idioma, m. ;
(= style of language) lenguaje, m.
large, gran(de).
last, durar.
last, dltimo, -a, postrer(o), -a; —
week, la semana pasada.
late, tarde.
Latin, latin, m. (the language}; latino,
-a, adj.
laugh, reir; — at, reirse de.
laundress, lavandera, f.
lawyer, abogado, m.
lazy, perezoso, -a, haragan, -ana.
leap year, ano bisiesto, m.
learn, aprender (a).
least, menos ; at — , a (por) lo menos,
leave, dejar, abandonar; (= depart)
partir, ( = go out) salir.
leg, pierna,/
lend, prestar.
less, menos.
lesson, leccion,yC
let, (= leave} dejar; ( = permifl
permitir; (= rent} alquilar, arren-
dar; (sometimes que with the pres
subj. of the main verb}.
VOCABULARY
277
letter, carta, f.
library, biblioteca,/
lie, mentir.
lie (down), acostarse.
life, vida,/
light, 'alumbrar, iluminar; (= kin-
dle} encender.
lighten, relampaguear.
like, querer (a), gustar (de) ; I — ,
me gusta (//'/., if pleases me).
lily, lirio, m.
line, h'nea, f.
listen, escuchar.
little, poco, -a; (= small) pequeno,
-a, chico, -a.
live, vivir.
living, vida,/
London, Londres, m.
long, largo, -a; a — time, mucho
tiempo; (see tardar}\ as — as,
mientras, mientras que.
look (at), mirar; — for, buscar;
(= appear) parecer; — like,
parecerse a.
lose, perder.
lot, porcion,// a — of, mucho, -a,
gran numero; a — of tears, un
raudal de lagrimas.
Louise, Luisa,/.
love, amar, querer (a).
low, bajo, -a.
madam, senora,/
make, hacer; (= earn) ganar.
man, hombre, m, ; his men, los suyos.
many, muchos, -as.
marble, marmol, m. ; (in game of}
bola,/./ bolita,/
March, marzo, m.
march, marchar.
Mary, Maria,/
match, fosforo, m.; vb.y caer Men
con.
mathematics, matematicas,///.
matter, vb., importar.
may, poder, tener permiso (de).
May, mayo, m.
me, to — , me.
mean, (= to intend'} pensar; (= to
signify} significar or querer decir.
meat, came,/
medicine, ( = science of} medicina,
f. ; (= drug) medicamento, m.
meet, encontrar.
melancholy, melancoh'a,/
mend, remendar, componer, reparar.
merchant, comerciante, m.
metal, metal, m.
Mexican, Mejicano, -a, m. and f. ;
adj., mejicano, -a.
Mexico, Mejico, m.
middle, medio, -a.
milk, leche,/
million, millon, m.
mine, mio, -a, -os, -as; el (la, lo,
los, las), mio (-a, -o, -os, -as).
minute, minuto, m.
miser, avariento, -a, m. and f.
Miss, (la) senorita; (bef. given
names'}, dona.
mistake, error, m., falta,/
moment, momento, m.
Monday, lunes, m.
money, dinero, m.
month, mes, m.
more, mas.
278
SPANISH GRAMMAR
moreover, ademas.
morning, manana, // tomorrow
— , mafiana por la manana.
most, mas; (= very) muy.
mother, madre,/.
mouth, boca,/
Mr., (el) senor, m.; (bef. given
names} don.
Mrs., (la) senora; (bef. given names}
dona.
much, mucho, -a; very — , muchf-
simo -a; SO (as) — as, tanto, -a,
como.
mud, lodo, m.; (= mire, slime}
fango, m.
mule, mulo, -a, m. and f. (the fern.
form is generally used}*
music, musica,/.
must, tener que, haber de; ( = moral
obligation} deber.
mustache(s), bigotes, m. pi.
my, mi, mis ; mio (-a, -os, -as).
nail, clavo, m. ; finger — , una (de
dedo),/
name, nombre, m.; (= surname}
apellido, m. ; my — is, me llamo.
napkin, servilleta,/
native, natural, m. and f.
near, cerca de, junto a.
nearly, casi.
necessary, necesario, -a; be — , ser
necesario, precise, menester.
neck, cuello, m., pescuezo, m.
necktie, corbata,/
need, necesidad,yC
need, necesitar.
negro, negro, -a, m. and f.
neighbor, vecino, -a, m. andf.
never, nunca, jamas.
new, nuevo, -a
news, noticia,/, noticias, f. pi.
next, proximo, -a, siguiente; —
month, el proximo mes, el mea
que viene (entra); the — page,
la pagina siguiente.
niece, sobrina,yi
night, noche,// last — , anoche.
nine, nueve.
nineteen, diez y nueve.
ninety, noventa.
ninth, noveno, -a; (in compound
ordinals} nono, -a.
no, no.
no, no one, none, ningun(o), -a.
nobody, nadie.
nor, ni.
north, norte, m. ; adj., norte.
North-American, Norte-Americano,
-a, m. and f.; ad/., norte-ameri-
cano, -a.
nose, nariz,/
not, no; — ... either, ni . . . tam-
poco.
note, notar; be noted, notarse.
nothing, nada.
November, noviembre, m.
now, ahora.
nut, nuez,yC
oblige, obligar.
observe, ( = to keep} guardar.
O'clock; at six — , a las seis.
October, octubre, m.
of, de; (with pensar} en;
verb of separation} a.
VOCABULARY
2/9
Offer, ofrecer.
often, muchas veces, a menudo.
old, viejo, -a, anciano, -a; (— an-
cient) antiguo, -a; older {of per-
sons}, mayor: be ten years — ,
tener diez afios.
<jn, en; (= on top of} sobre, encima
de; — time, a tiempo.
once, una vez; at — , en seguida.
one, un(o), -a; — or another, uno
(-a) d otro (-a), alguno (-a) que
otro (-a) ; that One, aquel, etc.
only, solo, solamente, no ... mas
que, no ... sino.
Open, abrir.
or, 6, u (bef. o- or ho-} ; not ... — ,
no ... ni.
orange, naranja,/
Order, (= command} orden, f.;
(— orderliness} orden, m. ; in —
to, para; in — that, para que.
original, original.
Other, another, otro, -a; (= the
rest) demas.
Ought, deber.
Our, nuestro, -a.
ours, nuestro (-a, -os, -as) ; el (la,
los, las, lo) nuestro (-a, -os, -as,
-o).
Out, fuera; (= outside} afuera; go
— , salir.
Outdoors, afuera.
Over, (= upon) sobre; (= above},
encima de; (= to the other side
of} al otro lado de; — there, por
allf.
Overcoat, sobretodo, /«., abrigo, m, ;
(= cloak} capote, m.
own, propio, -a, mismo, -a.
owner, duefio, -a, m. and f.
package, paquete, m.
page, pagina,/.
pale, palido, -a.
paper, papel, m.; (= newspaper}
periodico, m.
pardon, perdon, m. ; vb., perdonar.
parents, padres, m. pi.
Paris, Pan's,
parrot, loro, m., cotorra {species of
small —),/.
part, parte, /
pass, pasar.
past (lo) pasado, ».
past, adj., pasado, -a; at half —
one o'clock, a la una y media,
pastry, pasteles, m. pi.
Paul, Pablo, m.
pay, pagar.
peace, paz,/
peach, melocoton, m., durazno, m.
(= a common -variety of small
peach}.
pen, pluma,yC
pencil, lapiz, m.
penknife, cortaplumas, m.
people, pueblo, m. ,- (= persons}
gente, /.
pepper, pimienta}j/C
perhaps, tal vez, quizas.
permit, permitir.
person, persona,/
personage, personaje, nt.
Peter, Pedro, m.
Philippines, Filipinas, / pi.; in
the — , en Filipinas.
280
SPANISH GRAMMAR
philosophy, filosoffa,yC
physician, medico, m.
piano, piano, m.
picture, cuadro, tn.f ( = portrait)
retrato, m. ; ( = engraving) gra-
bado, rn.j lamina, f.
piece, pedazo, m. ; (of music, etc?)
pieza, /. / ( — of furniture) mue-
ble, m.
pity, piedad, /., misericordia, f.,
lastima, // it is a — , es las-
tima.
plan, plan, m.
plate, plato, m.
play, jugar, (on a musical instru-
ment) tocar.
please, gustar, agradar; (= be
kind enough), jhagame Vd. el
favor (de), tenga Vd. la bondad
(de)I
pleasure, gusto, m., placer, m.
p. m., (till dark) de la tarde; (aft.
dark) de la noche.
pocket, bolsillo, m.y faltriquera, f.
poem, poesfa,/
porter, portero, m.
possess, poseer.
possible, posible.
post-office, correo, m., cas&. (admi-
nistracion) de correos,/
potato, patata, f., (in most parts of
Spanish America) papa,yC
pour, echar.
praise, alabar.
pray, rezar.
prefer, preferir.
present, regalo, m., presente, m.;
v6.9 presentar.
prettily, lindamente, bonitamente.
pretty, bonito, -a, lindo, -a.
print, imprimir.
probably, probablemente.
promise, prometer.
prove, probar.
publish, publicar; be published,
publicarse, salir a luz.
punish, castigar.
pupil, discipulo, -a., m. andf.
pure, puro, -a.
purse, bolsa, /, bolsillo, m.
put, poner; — out (a Jire or light)%
apagar.
quarter, cuarto, m.y at a — past
one o'clock, a la una y cuarto.
rain, Hover.
raise, levantar.
rare, raro, -a.
rarely, raramente.
reach, alcanzar ; (= touch) tocar;
(= extend) tender, extender; ( =
arrive at) llegar a,
read, leer.
ready, listo, -a.
reason, razon,/
recall, recordar.
receipt, recibo, m.
receive, recibir.
red, rojo, -a ; (= bright red) encar«
nado, -a; (= dark red, " brick-
color ") Colorado, -a.
regards, recuerdos, m.pL
regret, sentir.
regular, regular ; he is a — fool, es
un bobo.
VOCABULARY
281
relate, relacionarse con ; all relating
to, cuanto se relaciona con.
remain, quedar, quedarse, restar.
remember, acordarse (de),recordar.
respect, estimacion,/
rest, descansar.
return, volver, regresar.
rich, rico, -a.
rifle, rifle, m. ; fusil, m.
right, justo, -a; (as compared to left)
derecho, -a ; be — , tener razon.
ring, sortija,/! ; anillo, m.
rise, levantarse ; (of sun, moon, etc.}
salir.
rogue, pi'caro, -a, m. and f. ; pillo,
-a, m. and f.
roof, tejado, m.
room, cuarto, m. ; bed — , alcoba,
f. ; bath — , cuarto de bano, m. ;
class — , aula, /, sala de clase,
/ / dining — , comedor, m. ;
state — , camarote, m.; ( = space}
lugar, »/., espacio, m.
run, correr.
Russian, Ruso, -a, m andf.
sacrifice, sacrificio, m.
sad, triste.
saint, san(to), -a, m. and f.; — 's
day, dia del santo, m.; dias, m.
pi.
sale, venta ; for — , de venta.
salt, sal,/
Saturday, sabado, m.
save, salvar.
say, deck ; they will say, diran.
scholar, (=/#/*/) discfpulo, -a, m.
andf.
school, escuela, /
second, segundo, -a.
second, segundo, m.
see, ver.
seek, buscar.
seem, parecer, figurarse.
self, mismo, -a.
sell, vender.
send, enviar, mandar ; — for, man«
dar a buscar.
September, se(p)tiembre, m.
serious, serio, -a ; ( = dangerous)
grave, peligroso, -a.
servant, criado, -a, m. and f.
serve (as), servir (de).
set, sentar; (of the sun, moon, etc?)
ponerse; ( — the table, etc.} poner.
seven, siete.
seventeen, diez y siete.
seventh, se(p)timo, -a.
seventy, setenta.
several, varios, -as.
severe, severe, -a.
Seville, Sevilla,/
shave, afeitar, rasurar; intr., afei-
tarse, rasurarse.
shed, verier,
shine, lucir, brillar; the sun — s,
hace (hay) sol.
shirt, camisa,/
shoe, zapato, m.
short, corto, -a; a — while (time)
ago, poco tiempo ha.
should, ( = ought to} deber.
show, ensenar, mostrar.
shut, cerrar.
side, lado, m.
silver, plata,/
282
SPANISH GRAMMAR
since, desde ; conj.y desde que.
sincere, sincere, -a.
sincerely, sinceramente.
sir, senor, m. ; caballero, m.
sister, hermana,/
sit (down), sentarse.
six, seis.
sixteen, diez y seis.
sixth, sexto, -a.
sixty, sesenta.
skilful, experto, -a, habil.
slate. pizarra,/
sleep, suefio, m. ; vb., dormir ; go
to — , fall a — , dormirse.
sleepy : be — , tener suefio.
slow, lento, -a, detenido, -a, atra-
sado, -a ; be — (as a watch, train,
etc.}, atrasar, estar atrasado, -a.
slowly, despacio.
small, pequefto, -a, chico, -a.
smell, oler ; — of, oler a ; it smells,
etc., huele, etc.
smoke, humear, echar humo ; — to-
bacco, fumar tabaco.
snow, nieve,yiy verb, nevar.
so, tan ; — much (many), tanto, -a,
tantos, -as; — ... as, tan . . .
como ; he said — , lo dijo.
soap, jabon, m.
soiled, sucio, -a.
soldier, soldado, m.
some, alguno, -a ; //., algunos, -as,
unos, -as, unos (-as) cuantos (-as).
somebody, some one, alguien, al-
guno, -a.
something, algo, alguna cosa ; —
else, otra cosa.
son, hijo, m.
soon, pronto, presto, temprano ; as
— as, luego que, tan pronto como.
Sophia, Sofia,/
sorry, afligido, -a, triste ; be — , sen^
tir(lo).
soul, alma,/
soup, sopa,/
Spain, Espana,/
Spaniard, Espanol, -ola, m. and f.
Spanish, espafiol, -ola ; ( .= the
Spanish language) el castellano,
el espanol, m.
speak, hablar.
spend, gastar.
splendid, magnifico, -a, esplendido,
-a.
split, partir.
spoon, cuchara, / / tea — , cucha-
rita,/
spring, (= season} primavera,/
squirrel, ardilla, /
station (of railway), estacion, /,
paradero, m.
statue, estatua, /
stay, quedar, quedarse ; — in bed,
guardar cama.
steal, robar.
still, todavia, aun (or adn).
story, cuento, m., relacion,/
stove, (= cooking — ) fogon, m.;
( — heating — ) estufa, /
strange, extrano, -a, particular,
stranger, extranjero, -a, m. and f. ;
( — unknown) desconocido, -a,
m. and f.
street, calle,/
strong, fuerte.
study, estudio, m. ; vb., estudiar.
VOCABULARY
283
such, such a, tal.
suffer, sufrir.
summer, verano, m.
sun, sol, m.
Sunday, domingo, m.
supper, cena, / ; have — , cenar.
support, mantener.
sweet, dulce ; sweets, dulces,
tn. pi.
system, sistema, m.
table, mesa, /
tablecloth, mantel, m.
tailor, sastre, ;//.
take, tomar, ( = carry) llevar.
talk, hablar.
tall, alto, -a.
taste, gusto, m. ; vb., gustar ; intr.,
saber a.
tea, te, m. ; — spoon, cucharita, /
teach, ensefiar.
teacher, maestro, -a, m. and f.
tear, lagrima, /
tell, decir, contar.
ten, diez.
tenderly, tiernamente.
tenth, decimo, -a.
Tetuan, Tetuan.
than, que, de (bef. numerals), del
que, de la que, etc. (bef. dependent
clauses] .
thank, dar (las) gracias (a), agra-
decer ; I — you ! ; gracias !
that (ret), que.
that (dem.*), ese, -a, -o ; aquel,
aquella, aquello.
that (con/.'), que; (= in order
that) para que.
that one, aquel, aquella.
the, el, la, los, las, lo.
their, su, sus ; el (la, los, las) . . .
de ellos (ellas).
them, los, les, las ; ellos, ellas.
theme, tema, m.
then, entonces.
there, alii, alia ; (near person ad-
dressed) ahi ; over — , por alii ;
— is (are), hay.
therefore, por consiguiente, por
esto (eso).
they, ellos, ellas.
thief, ladron, -ona, m. and f.
thing, cosa, /.
think, pensar ; — of, pensar en ;
— about, pensar de ; (= believe'),
creer, opinar.
third, tercer(o), -a ; (in compound
ordinals) tercio, -a.
thirst, sed, /
thirsty : be — , tener sed.
thirteen, trece.
thirtyj treinta.
this, (dem^) este, -a, -os, -as, -o ;
— One, (prn.) este, esta, etc.
those who, los que, etc.
thousand, one — , mil.
three, tres.
throat, garganta, /
through, por; — ticket, billete
(boleto) directo, m.
throw, echar, arrojar ; ( — a ball,
stone, etc.) tirar ; — away, botar,
arrojar.
Thursday, jueves, m.
ticket, billete, m. ; boleto, m.
(American).
284
SPANISH GRAMMAR
time, tiempo, m., hora, / / what
— is it ? <? que hora es ? the
first — , la primera vez ; on — , a
tiempo.
tired, cansado, -a.
to, a, hasta ; (= in order to) para,
tobacco, tabaco, m.
today, hoy.
tomorrow, manana ; day after — ,
pasado mafiana ; — morning,
manana por la manana.
too, tambien ; — much, demasiado,
-a ; it's — bad ! ; es lastima !
toothache : he has a — , le duelen
las muelas (lit. ' the teeth ache
to him ').
toward (s), hacia.
towel, toalla,/
town, pueblo, m. ; ciudad, f.
train, tren, ;«.
traitor, traidor, -ora, m. and f.
travel, viajar.
travelling-bag, maleta, f.
tree, arbol, m.
tremble (with), temblar (de).
Trinity, Trinidad,/
trousers, pantalones, m. pi.
true, verdadero, -a; ( = faithful}
fiel ; it is true, es verdad (cierto).
trunk, ball, nt.
truth, verdad, /
try, ( = test) probar ; ( = tempt)
tentar; ( = endeavor} tratar (de),
procurar, esforzarse (a).
Tuesday, martes, m.
turn, (= — around} volverse ;
(= become) ponerse, hacerse.
twelve, doce.
twenty, veinte.
twice, dos veces.
two, dos; — hundred, doscientos, -as,
typewriter, maquina de escribir,/
ugly, feo, -a.
umbrella, paraguas, m.
uncle, tfo, m.; uncle(s) and
aunt(s), tios, m. pL
underscore, subrayar.
understand, entender.
unfortunate, desdichado, -a, des-
graciado, -a.
unhappy, infeliz.
United States, Estados Unidos, m.pl.
unless, a menos que.
until, hasta; conj., hasta que.
us, nos, nosotros, -as, to — , nos.
use, usar, emplear, servirse de; he
used to do so, solia hacerlo, lo
hacia.
useful, titil.
usually, por lo comdn, por lo gen-
eral, comdnmente.
various, vario, -a.
vary, variar.
very, muy, mucho.
vest, waistcoat, chaleco, m.
village, aldea,/, pueblecito, m.
visit, visitar; noun, visita, f.
volume, tomo, m., volumen, m.
waistcoat, chaleco, m.
wait (for), esperar, aguardar.
wall, muro, m.; ( = inner — of
house} pared,// (of fortification}
muralla,/
VOCABULARY
285
want, (= lack} carecer de ; ( =
wish) querer, desear.
war, gucrra,/.
warm, caluroso, -a, calido, -a; lam
— , tengo calor; it is — , hace
calor; — water, agua caliente.
wash, lavar.
wash-basin, jofaina,/, palangana,/
watch, reloj. m.
water, agua, /
way, camino, m., direccion, f.;
(zz manner} manera, f., modo,
m. ; not ... in any — , no ... en
nada.
we, nosotros, -as.
wealthy, rico, -a, opulento, -a.
weapon, arma,yC
weather, tiempo, m. ; be good — ,
hacer buen tiempo.
Wednesday, miercoles, m.
week, semana,// in a — , en ocho
dias; in two — s, en quince di'as.
weep, llorar.
well, bueno, -a, bien de salud; adv.,
bien.
wet, mojado, -a.
what, pm. ret., lo que; — is mine,
lo mi'o : interrog., que, ( = which)
cual.
when, cuando; interrog., cuando.
whenever, cuando, cuandoquiera
que, siempre que.
where, donde; interrog., donde;
(= whither) a donde; ( =
wherein) en donde.
whether, si; (aft. dudar, etc.) que.
Which, que, el (la) cual, el (la)
que; interrog., cual.
while, (= time) tiempo; conj.,
mientras, mientras que.
white, bianco, -a.
who, que, el (la) cual, el (la) que,
quien; interrog., quien.
whom, ret., que, quien, el que, etc.,
el cual, etc.
whom, interrog., quien.
whose, cuyo, -a; interrog., de quien,
ctiyo, -a.
wicked, malo, -a.
wickedness, iniquidad, f., (lo)
malo, n.
wide, ancho, -a.
wife, mujer,/, senora,^, esposa, f.
wild, silvestre.
will, (= be willing) querer:
otherwise '«#//' denotes future
time. [be — , querer.
willing, dispuesto, -a, inclinado, -a;
win, ganar.
wind, viento, m.
window, ventana,yC
windy: it is — , hace (hay)
viento.
wine, vino, m.
winter, invierno, m.
wish, querer, desear.
with, con.
without, sin.
woman, mujer, // young — , jo-
ven,yC
wood, lefia, f.
word, palabra,/
work, trabajo, m. ; {—literary of
artistic production) obra,yi/ z/£.,
trabajar.
workshop, taller, m.
286
SPANISH GRAMMAR
world, mundo, m.
worry, molestar; (= be worried}
tener cuidado, atormentarse.
worth : be — , valer.
write, escribir.
wrong : be — , no tener razon.
year, afio, m. ; leap — , aflo bisiesto.
yellow, amarillo, -a.
yes, si.
yesterday, ayer.
yet, todavia, aun (or atin).
young, joven.
your, tu, vuestro, -a, su, el (la, lo%
las) . . . de Vd.
yours, tuyo, -a, vuestro, -a, suyo, -a,
el (la, los, las) de Vd., el tuyo, etc.,
el vuestro, etc., el suyo, etc.
INDEX
£: bcf. direct obj., 50; with names of coun-
tries, 55 (5); al (d la, etc.)=Eng. 'a,'
57, c; bef. infins.,i2o; with verbs meaning
' take from,' etc., 49, a, 182; idioms, 123,
206.
Abstract Nouns: used with def. art., 55
(i>; plur. of, 81 (3).
acabar (de), 184.
accentuation, 15; oi* diphthongs and triph-
thongs, 16; of monosyllables, 17; of
compound words, 18; of -iar and -uar
verbs, 218-219
Accusative Case: see Direct Object and
Personal d.
acordarse, 109, b.
acostar*e, 109, b.
Adjectives: fern., 33; neuter gender, 54;
plur., 34; use of plur., 81; position, 60,
61; position of pred. adj., 195 (2); of su-
perlative, 74, £•; agreement, 62; compari-
son, 74, 75; than, 78; repetition, 61, d',
62, d; used substantively, 80; of nation-
ality, 33, <*, 55 (4); adj. for adv., 62, e; dif-
ferent meaning with ser and estar, 46, c.
Adverbs: position, 196; comparison, 76,
77; lo used, 54, a, 76, a\ aqui, acd, ahi,
alii, alia. 176; mucho, 177; comparison
otmuc ho, -]•]•, muy,i-/j; ya,ijS; -mente,
179; tan, 79, 143, a', idioms, 184.
Agreement: of subj. and verb, 193; of
adj , 62.
ahi, all i, alia: see Adverbs.
al = d el, 30, a.
alegrarne, 109, b.
alguien, algo, alguno: see Indefinite Ad-
jective Pronouns.
alguno: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
'all,' 157, a.
' almost, ' poco faltd para que, 184.
Alphabetical List of Verbs, 271.
ambus : see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
andar: inflection, 240; meaning, 198; in
periphrastic progressive tenses, 121, a,
Anomalous Past Participles, 259-261.
'any,' 151.
Apocopation of Adjectives, 66-69.
Apposition: noun in, 55(2), £; art. omit-
ted, 56 ( i», 57, a; art. aft. noun, 74, £-.
aquel: see Demonstratives.
aqui, aca: see Adverbs.
Articles: see Indefinite Article and Defi-
nite Article.
' ask of ': verbs denoting, 49, <z, 182.
atreverse, 109. b.
Augment at ives: see Qualifying Suffixes.
-azo, -acho, -ajo, -ada: see Qualifying
Suffixes.
' be ' = ser or estar, 46.
bien : comparison, 77; mas bien, 77, a.
bonito: position, 61, a.
bueno: apocopation, 66; position, 61, a\
comparison, 75 (i); buenos dias, etc., 59.
' but,' 190.
cada: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
caer: inflection, 253; idioms, 199.
' can ' : see poder and saber.
Capitalization, 23.
-car verbs: orthographic variations of, 214,
214 'i).
Cardinals: see Numerals.
caro: position and meaning, 61, c.
casa : idioms, 48, a, 206.
Oases: see Possessive Case, Indirect Ob-
ject, and Personal a,
castellano, 55 14^, and footnote.
-cer and -cir verbs: orthographic variations
of, 215, 220.
ciento: see Numerals.
cierto: indef. art. omitted, 57, b', position
and meaning, 61, c.
287
288
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Collectives : see Numerals.
color: adj. of, 54.
como: tan ... conto, 79; used with saber,
186, footnote.
Comparison: see Adjectives and Adverbs,
and ' Than.'
Compound words: accent of, 18.
con: connngo, etc., 98, a, and footnote.
Conditional Sentences: see Sentences.
Conjunctions, 1 88 192 ;y,e, 188; d, u,iBg;
pero, maSfSino, 190; cuando, 191; donde,
192; porque, 192. See also que,co»w, etc.
eonocer .' inflection, 220; meaning, 54, a,
footnote, 1 86.
Consonants, 5 ; labials and labio-dentals, 6 ;
dentals or lingua-dentals, 7; gutturals and
palatals, 8; sibilants, 9; aspirates, 10;
tongue-trilled, n; spirant^, 12; double,
14.
COsa: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
countries, cities, etc.: names of, 55 (51.
cual, el cual, cual: see Relatives and In-
terrogatives.
cuando: see Conjunctions.
cuanto: as relative, 138; cuanto . . . tanto
= ' the . . . the,' 74, d.
d: lost in imperatives, 86, a.
dar: inflection, 241; idioms, 187.
Dative Case: see Indirect Object; ethical
dative, in.
de: denotes possession, 48, 125; with names
of countries, 55 (5); aft. superlatives =
'in,' 74, e\ = ' than,' 78, a, c; bef. infins.,
120; = 'by,' 1 80, at footnote; denotes
material, etc., 181; idioms, 206.
deber =' should,' 71, b\ with dependent
infin., 120, a.
Defective Verbs, 262-270.
Definite Article: forms, 30, 54; el for la,
30, b\ use, 54, 55; used in place of pos-
sessive, 119; with superlatives, it,,b,f,g;
with poss. pron., 124; with rel. pron., 135,
137, b; with prepositional phrases and
relative clauses, 125, 131; with infin.,
12° <3)» 55 (?) I omission, 56, omitted bef.
poss. pron., 125, b\ lo, 54; lo, with super-
lative adv., 76, a; = Eng. ' a,' ' an,' 57, c.
del = de el, 30, a.
Demonstratives:
Adjectives, 128; meaning, 44, 129: posi-
tion, 128, a; repetition, 44, a.
Pronouns, 130; 'the former,' 'the latter,*
130, a; 'that,' 130, b\ aquel bef phrase
and clause, 131, a; en \det d) esta {e"sa\
130, c.
dia, 24 (2), a.
diferente: position and meaning, 61, c.
Diminutives: see Qualifying Suffixes.
Diphthongs: kinds of, 4; accentuation
of, 16.
Direct Object (of verbs): with d, 50; posi-
tion of, 195.
' do ' : aux. ' do ' not translated into Spanish,
32.
don, dona: use, 55 (2), footnote; art. not
used, 55 (2\ a.
donde: see Conjunctions; = relative, 140.
dormirse, 109, c.
dos: los dos, 159.
e: see Conjunctions.
el, ella, ello, etc.: see Personal Pro-
nouns.
el: see Definite Article.
Elision of Vowels, 3.
en: with adjectives of nationality, 55 (4);
with names of countries, 55 (5); idioms,
206.
estar: inflection, 238; meaning, 46; to
express position, 46, a; in periphrastic
progressive tenses, 121, a; estar para
(por}t 184; idioms, 199.
este, ese: see Demonstratives.
-ete, -ejo: see Qualifying Suffixes.
'for,' 1 80.
'former' ('the former,' 'the latter'),
130, a,
Fractionals: see Ordinals,
Future Indicative: see Tenses.
Future Subjunctive: see Hypothetical Sub-
junctive.
-gar verbs: orthographic variations of,
214 (2).
Gender: of nouns, 24, 25; of adj., 33; of
adj. modifying several nouns, 62; neuter
gender of adj., 54; of def. art., 54; of poss.
pron., 124, b\ of demon, pron., 130; of
relatives, 135, c.
Genitive Case: see Possessive Case.
-ger and -gir verbs : orthographic variations
of, 215.
INDEX
289
grander apocopation, 67; position and
meaning, 61, c, 67, b; comparison, 75 (2).
-guar verbs: orthographic variations of, 214.
-guir verbs, orthographic variations of, 215.
haber: inflection, 237; meaning and use,
38; hay, 38, a, 65 121; ha in temporal
clauses, 38, a, 73, a; he, 92, footnote,
237, a; idioms, 38, a, 40, 65, 199.
hacer: inflection, 246; to express state of
weather, 65; time, 72, 73, a\ idioms, 175;
hacerse, 109, b.
' have ' = tener or haber, 38.
hay: see haber.
hermoso, 61, a,
Hypothetical Subjunctives: see Tenses.
i changed to y in verbs, 216; omitted, 217.
-iar verbs: accentuation of, 218-219.
Imperative Mood: see Moods.
Imperfect Tenses: see Tenses.
Inceptive Verbs, 220.
Indefinite Adjective Pronouns: alguien,
algo, 150; alguno, 151; apocopation of,
66; unas, 152; nadie, nada, 153; nin-
funo, 154; apocopation of, 66; mucho,
155; comparison of, 75 (3); muchtsimo,
155, a; poco, 156; comparison of, 75 (3) ;
todo, 157; mismo, 158; in refl. construc-
tions, 109, a\ ambos, 159; cada, 160:
otro, 161 ; uno y otro, etc., 162 ; el uno, el
otro in reciprocal constructions, no; tal,
163; cosa, 164; la, las, in, b.
Indefinite Article: forms, 26; repetition,
26, a; un for una, 26, b; omitted, 57;
in expressions of measure, 57, c.
Indicative Mood: see Moods.
Indirect Object, 49; with verbs meaning to
' take from,' ' ask of,' etc., 49, a, 182 ; ethi-
cal dative, in.
Infinitive Mood: see Moods.
Interrogative Sentences, 51.
Interrogatives, 142 147; que, 143; quien,
144; quien in optative expressions, 107;
cu&l, 145; cuyo, 146; cuanto, 147; que
cosa, 164, footnote.
ir: inflection, 247; meaning, 198; in periphras-
tic progress, tenses, 121, a; irse, 109, c\
* go and ' = ir A, 148, a ; idioms, 149, 206.
Irregular Verbs, 236-258.
-isimo, 74, h.
•ito, -illo, -ico, -in, -ino: see Qualifying
Suffixes.
jamas, 165.
' know ' = conocer or saber, 54, a, footnote,
186.
la, las: with force of indef. pron., in, b.
' last ' = ultimo, postrero, or pasado, 66,
footnote.
' latter * (' the former,' ' the latter'), 130, a.
' let ' and inf. = Span, subj., 87.
levantarse, 109, b.
lindo, 61, a.
lo ^neuter art ), 54; with superlative adv.,
76, a; idioms, 54, a.
nial : comparison, 77.
malo: apocopation, 66; position, 61, a\
comparison, 75 (i).
mano, 24 12), a.
in a pa, 24 (2), a.
mas: see Conjunctions.
mas: comparative of poco, 73 (3), 77; used
to form comparatives, 74-77: mas bien,
77, a', no mas . , . gue, 78, b, 190, a', in
exclamations, 143, a ; idioms, 167.
mayor, 75 (2) ; la mayor parte de = * most/
170, a.
medio and mitad, 170, b.
mejor, 75 (i), 77.
menor, 75 (2).
menos, 75, (3^ 77; idioms, 167.
-men te : see Adverbs.
mientras . . . = ' the . . . the,' 74, d.
mil: see Numerals.
mismo: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns;
idioms, 184.
Moods:
Infin.: 'to,' bef. infin., 120; with def.
art., 120 (3*; aft. prepositions. 120 (2V,
after expressions of ' willing,' ' fearing,'
etc., 96, footnotes; after oir and ver, 187,
footnote; idioms, 123 (2).
Participles: use of pres. part., 121; of
past part., 122.
Imperative, 86, 87, a.
Subjunctive: difference between ind.
and subjunc. moods, 94; subjunc. to ex-
press command, 87 ; in dependent clauses,
94, 95, 96, 100 ; pres. subjunc. to denote fut
2QO
SPANISH GRAMMAR
time, 96, a ', imp. subjunc. in -ya = pret. or
piuperf. ind., 99, footnote; choice betw
Morirse, 109, c.
'most,' 74, h\ 75 (3)1 «.
niucho: pron., see Indicative Adjective
Pronouns; adv., 177; comparison, 75
(31. 77'' =' very,' 177, a.
Multiplicative^: see Numerals.
muy: see Adverbs; = ' most,' 74, h.
nadie, nada, ninguno: see Indefinite
Adjective Pronouns.
Negation: neg. sentence, 31; neg. prons.
and advs., 165.
Neuter Gender: see lot 54.
' never,' 165, footnote.
ni . . . ni, 165.
ninguno: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
no: see Negation; no tnds ... gue, 78, b\
gue no, 184.
nosotros, nos: see Personal Pronouns.
Nouns: gender, 24, 25; plur, 29; use of
plur., 81 ; plur. of abstract nouns. 81 (3) ;
sing, noun to denote something that be-
longs to every member of group, 81 (2) ;
poss. case, 48, 125, a; dative case, 49,
182; accusative case, 50; position of subj.
and obj. noun, 194, 195: in predicate,
46, b\ in apposition, 55 (2). 6', requiring
def. art., 55 (i); used as adj., 61, e, 181.
nntro: 61, c.
Number: of noun, 29; of adj., 34; of adj.
modifying several nouns, 62.
Numerals:
Cardinals, 168; apocopation of uno,
66; of cienfa, 69; used instead of ordinals,
169, c, d, e.
Ordinals, 169; apocopation of primero
and tercero, 66.
Fractionals, 170.
Collectives, 171.
Multiplicatives, 172.
Phrases, 173.
Def. art. omitted, 56 (2); denoting
hours, 72; denoting days, 72, 169, e\ after
comparatives, 78, a.
••nra, 165.
6: see Conjunctions.
oir: inflection, 254; followed by dependent
infin., 187, footnote; idioms, 187.
ojali, 107.
olvidarse, 109, b.
-on, -ote: see Qualifying Suffixes.
'only': 78, b.
Ordinals : see Numerals.
Orthographic Variations, 213-219.
Orthography: non-phonetic, 13.
Otro : see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
para, 180, 181; = ' to,' 120, b, 180, b; with
names of countries, 55 (5); idioms, 184.
parte: in fractional expressions, 170, a.
Participles, 39, 121, 122; anomalous past
participles, 259-261.
pasado, 66, footnote.
peor, 75 (x),77.
pequefto: position, 61, a\ comparison,
75 (2).
Perfect Tenses: see Tenses.
Periphrastic Progressive Tenses: see
Tenses.
pero: see Conjunctions.
Personal a, 50; omitted, 50, a, b; to dis-
tinguish object from subject, 50, c.
Personal Pronouns: as subj. and obj. of
verb, 89; tu and usted, 90; ello and lo,
91 ; se and si, 108, 109 ; subj. pron. omitted,
89, a; position of obj. pron., 89, b, c,d,e;
of two obj. prons., 102, 103; of refl. se,
108, a; se for le, les, 102, a; la, las for
le, les, fern., 89, h; le and lo as masc.
obj. pron., 89, i\ refl. prons. of ist and
2d pers., 109; prepositional forms, 98;
poss. case, 125; explicit obj. of verb, 103;
conmigo, etc., 98, a, and footnote.
Pluperfect Tense: see Tenses.
Plural: of nouns, 29; of adjs., 34; use
of, 81.
pobre, 61, c.
poco: pron., see Indefinite Adjective Pro-
nouns; adv., comparison, 75 (3), 77.
poder: inflection, 243; idioms, 167.
poner: inflection, 249; ponerse, 109, b;
idioms, 199.
por, 180; = Eng. ' a ' or 'per,' 57, c; bef.
el cual (gue}, 135 (2) ; idioms, 97, 184.
porque: see Conjunctions.
Position: of nouns, 194, 195; of adjs., 60,
61; of advs., 196.
INDEX
291
Possesslves:
Adjectives, 117; position, 118; def. art.
forposs ,119; repetition, 44, a; idioms, 123.
Pronouns, 124, 125; explicit forms, 125.
Possessive Case, 48, 125, a; elliptical for
' at (to, from) the house, etc., of,' 48, a,
postrero, 66.
Prefixes in Syllabification, 21.
Prepositions: see d, de, en, para, for,
etc. ; preposition re:ained bef. substantive
clause, 183; idioms, 184.
Present Tense: see Tenses.
Preterite Perfect: see Tenses.
Preterite Tense: see Tenses.
primero: see Numerals.
Pronouns : see Personal Pronouns, Posses-
sives, etc.
Pronunciation, i; table of English equiv-
alents for vowel and consonant sounds, 2.
Punctuation, 22.
Qualifying suffixes, 200-205; diminutives,
201; their meaning, 202; augmentatives,
203; combinations of diminutive and aug-
mentative endings, 204; -azo and -ada to
denote result of action) 205.
Quantity of vowels, 3.
que and que: see Relatives and Interroga-
tives.
que (conj.) : rarely omitted, 96, b; = ' than,'
78; que for cuando, 191, a; idioms, 97.
qaerer: inflection, 242; ='will,' 71, a;
with dependent infin., 120, a; idioms, 107,
167.
quien and quien : see Relatives and Inter-
rogatives.
-quir verbs: orthographic variations of, 215.
Radical-changing Verbs, 221-234.
Reciprocal Construction, no.
Reflexive Construction, 108 in.
Regular Verbs, 210-219.
reir: inflection, 233; reirse, 109, b.
Relatives, 133-140; que, 134; el cual, el
que,-i^\ quien, 137; cuanto,i$>; cuyo,
139; donde, 140; relative not omitted,
133, b; del que, etc., after comparatives,
78, c; followed by subjunc. mood, 96 (6) ;
cada cual, 160.
8: lost in imperatives, 87, b.
saber: inflection, 245; meaning, 54, a, foot*
note, 186; idioms, 187.
salir: inflection, 252; idioms, 199.
santo, 68.
se and si : see Personal Pronouns.
' self,' 158; in refl. constructions, 109, a.
sentarse, 109, b.
Sentences: negative, 31; interrogative, 51;
conditions "contrary to fact," 106; com-
mon forms, 115; when the verb of the
apodosis is subjunc., 116.
senor, setiora, and seilorita, prefixed to
title, 55 v 2).
Sequence of Tenses: see Tenses.
ser: inflection, 236; meaning, 46; with
predicate nouns, 46, b; periphrastic pro-
gressive tenses, 121, a\ idioms, 47, 199.
' should ' = cond. ind. or deber, 71, b.
si : followed by cond. ind., = ' whether,1
106, b.
si i/yes'), que si, 184.
sin : followed by el cual (que), 135 (a).
sino: see Conjunctions.
' some,' 151, 152.
Subject (of verb): position, 51, 194.
Subjunctive mood: see Moods.
Syllabification, 19-21.
' take from,' verbs of, 49, <z, 182.
tal: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
tampoco, 165.
tan: tan . . . como, 79; in exclamations,
143, a.
tan to: tanto . . . como, 79; cuanto . . .
tanto = * the . . . the,' 74, d.
tener: inflection, 239; meaning and use,
38; d omitted after it, 50, a; with nouns
denoting bodily characteristics, 55 (6);
idioms, 40, 199.
Tenses:
Imperf. and pret. ind., use of, 53; perf.
ind. for pret., 53, b.
Fut. and cond. ind., formation of, 71,
footnote; use of, 71; fut. and cond. of
probability, 84; cond. ind. with si, 106, b;
Span, pres., imp. and fut. ind.= Eng. perf.,
pluperf., and fut. perf., 73.
Pluperf. and pret. perf., 64.
Pres. subj. to express fut. time, 96, a.
Imperf. and hyp. subj., on pret., sd
pers., stem, 99, a, 112 (3) ; choice bet.
forms in -se and -ra, 99; imp. in -ra —
pluperf. or pret. ind., 99, footnote.
Hyp. subj., use of 114.
292
SPANISH GRAMMAR
Perf. tenses, 211.
Periphrastic progress tenses,2i2, 121, a.
Sequence of, 101, 116.
In conditions, 106, 115, 116.
tercero: see Numerals.
•than,' 78.
'the ... the* (correlative}, 74, d.
'there,' expletive, 176 c,
lime: expressions of, — with art , 55 (3^;
hours, days, etc., 72, 169, e\ with haber
and hacer, 73, a; with fut. and cond. of
probability, 84; ' for,' 180, c; idioms, 184,
206.
Titles: def art bef. title, 55 (2).
'to'bef. infin , 120; = par or para, 180, b.
todo: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns.
Triphthongs: kinds of, 4; accentuation of,
1 6.
tli: see Personal Pronouns.
u: see Conjunctions.
-uar verbs: accentuation of, 218-219.
-uelo, -ucho : see Qualifying Suffixes.
-uir verbs, 235.
ultimo 66, footnote.
un nna: 26; see Indefinite Article.
lino: see Numerals.
unos, uno y otro: see Indefinite Adjective
Pronouns.
* used to ' : expressed by imperf. ind., 53, a.
listed : see Personal Pronouns.
Tiler: inflection, 251; idioms, 199.
Yario, 61, c.
Yenir: inflection, 248; in periphrastic pro-
gressive tenses, 121, a\ 'come and' =
vfttt'rd, 148, a: idioms, 149.
Ter: inflection, 258; followed by dependent
infin., 187, footnote.
Verbs, 207-271.
Principal parts, 209.
Regular verbs, inflection, 210; perf.
tenses, 211; periphrastic progress, tenses,
212; orthographic variations, 213-219.
Inceptive verbs, 220.
Radical-changing verbs, 221-234.
ist class, 223-228.
2d class, 229.
3d class, 230-234.
-uir verbs, 235.
Irregular verbs, 236-258.
Anomalous past participles, 259—261.
Defective verbs, 262 270.
Alphabetical list, 271.
Refl. construction, 108, 109, in.
Recip. construction, no
Followed by infin. with or without d or
de, 1 20.
Position of subj., 194; of obj., 195 (i);
of pred. adj., 195 2); of adv., 196.
Agreement with subj., 193.
'very,' 177, a.
Yifjo, 61, a.
Voices: reft, for passive voice, 109, d, e.
yolver (a), 184.
vosotros: see Personal Pronouns.
Vowels: pronunciation of, 3; elision of, 3;
quantity of, 3.
weather: idioms, 65.
' will ' : as independent verb or auxiliary,
71, a.
Word Order, 194.
'would': expressed by imperf. indie,,
53, a.
y : see Conjunctions.
ya: see Adverbs.
yo : see Personal Pronouns.
'you,' 90.
-zar verbs, orthographic Tariations of, 214.
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
BY LOUISE REINHARDT, A. M
Instructor in Modern Languages in the High School, Colorado Springs
EXERCISE I
A. — i. Leo la carta. 2. Aprendes a1 hablar. 3. Compra
tinta. 4. Estudiamos mucho. 5. Trabajais y estudiais. 6.
Escribes en espafiol. 7. <{Que (what) comprais? 8. Com-
pramos tinta y papel para escribir una carta. 9. ^Escribis la
carta con un lapiz? 10. No, sefior; escribimos con una pluma.
ii. Escribimos en ingles a un Ingles. 12. Escribimos en es-
panol a una Espanola. 13. £Habla espafiol Juan? 14. Si,
senor; habla ingles y espanol. 15. Antonio trabaja mucho
para aprender a leer. 16. Maria estudia tambien y aprende
bien. 17. <JAprenden a leer en espanol? 18. Si, senor; apren-
den a leer y a escribir en espanol. 19. ^Estudiais tambien?
20. Si, seiiora; trabajamos mucho para aprender. 21. Pero no
aprendemos bien: hablamos muy mal.
B. (It is suggested that in the first five sentences of the
English-Spanish exercises, the verb be used with all persons of
the singular and plural. This may be done orally or in writ-
ing, according to the instructor's judgment).
i. I buy (thou buyest, etc.] an envelope. 2. I am writing a
letter. 3. I speak Spanish. 4. I study. 5. I learn.
6. They work very little. 7. 2Does John speak Spanish?
8. Yes, sir; he reads, writes and speaks Spanish very well.
lln the latest edition of the Grammar of the Spanish Royal Academy there is
no accent on the preposition a and the conjunctions e, o, and u, except that o
between cardinal numerals is accented (as in 10 6 12) to avoid ambiguity. 2Be«
gin the question with an inverted interrogation mark.
293
294 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
9. I-am-going (voy) to (a) write a letter to John in Spanish.
10. I am buying paper and a pen in-order-to write the letter.
11. Do you (sing.) write with a pen? 12. Yes, sir; I do not
write (no escribo) a letter with a pencil. 13. To Mary I write
in English. 14. She reads (the1) English very well. 15. Does
Anthony work and study? 16. Do you (pi.) work and study?
17. Yes, madam; we work and study a-great-deal in-order-to
learn. 18. We speak very badly, but we read and write very
weU.
EXERCISE II
A. — i. En la escuela escribimos con tiza (chalk) en la piza-
rra (blackboard), y con pluma y tinta en el papel. 2. Estudia-
mos mucho para aprender ingles, aritmetica, y gramatica. 3.
Los maestros ensenan tambien la geografia. 4. Juan y Maria
estudian el espanol. 5. Desean viajar por Espafia. 6. Una
Espano^a ensefia el espanol yaprenden a hablar bien. 7. Desean
tambien aprender a leer en frances. 8. Pero la maestra de
espanol no ensefia el frances. 9. ^Escriben cartas en la escuela?
10. Si, senor; aprenden a escribir cartas en ingles y en espanol.
11. Llevan a la escuela muchos libros para estudiar. 12. Lie-
van tambien pan y mantequilla, huevos y manzanas para comer,
y leche para beber. 13. Beben tambien agua. 14. No beben
te ni cafe.
B. Continue (as indicated in Exercise I, B.): i. I drink,
(thou drinkest, etc.) coffee. 2. I do not eat apples. 3. I wish
to learn. 4. I travel through England. 5. I teach Spanish.
6. We wish to-go (ir) to (the) school. 7. What do you
(pi.) wish to learn? 8. We wish to learn Spanish in order to
travel through Spain. 9. We wish to learn French also. 10.
The teacher of Spanish does not teach French, n. But the
Spanish lady speaks French very well, and she teaches to read
JCf. § 55 (4)-
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 295
and write in French. 12. What do you (pi.} take to school?
13. We take books, pencils, pens, and ink. 14. In order to eat
we take bread and apples to school. 15. We drink milk or
water. 16. In (the) school we drink neither coffee nor tea,
and we do not eat much. 17. We work and study.
EXERCISE III
A. — i. <iNo quieres jugar, Maria? 2. No, Juan; no quiero
jugar. 3. Debo escribir un ejercicio. 4. No deseas perder
el tiempo: estudias mucho. 5. No debes trabajar tanto: los
ejercicios no son dificiles. 6. No hallo las lecciones faciles.
7. Estudio mucho, pero no aprendo las palabras. 8. <iEscu-
chas bien cuando habla el maestro? 9. Si; pero tiemblo de
miedo (fear) cuando debo hablar. 10. Pero el maestro no
cuenta los errores cuando hablas. u. No quiero vivir en
Inglaterra: quiero viajar por Mejico. 12. Si (if) quieres viajar
por Mejico, debes estudiar el espanol. 13. Si; pero tambien
hallo el espanol muy dificil. 14. Una muchacha inteligente
escucha bien para aprender las palabras. 15. No tiembla de
miedo cuando el maestro senala los errores con tinta roja. 16.
Halla las lecciones faciles.
B. Continue: i. I tremble with cold. 2. I return. 3. I
wish to buy the white cow. 4. I am buying a blue house.
5. I lose my (el) time.
6. John desires to travel through the United States. 7. He
wishes to learn English. 8. He is (es) an intelligent boy and does
not waste (perder) his (el) time. 9. When an American speaks,
he listens. 10. He learns the words and does not tremble with
fear when he should speak, n. He learns also to write letters
in English. 12. Jane is (es) lazy. 13. She runs and plays
and does not work. 14. She writes badly and does not count
the errors. 15. A girl ought to study if she wishes to learn.
1 6. But she does not wish to learn; she wishes to return to
296 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
Cuba. 17. The pupils of the school study very little. 18.
They should not run and play so much.
EXERCISE IV
A. — i. <i Todavia tienes la casa verde? 2. No, senor; he ven-
dido la casa verde. 3. <;Has vendido el caballo bianco tambien?
4. Si, senor; he vendido el caballo bianco. 5. <fHan perdidc
los libros espanoles? 6. Han perdido un libro, pero todavia
tienen muchos. 7. Debemos empezar, porque (because) tene-
mosprisa. 8. No, Juan; no hay prisa. 9. Si, senor; hay mucha
prisa. 10. Tenemos sueno, y tenemos los ojos cansados. u.
No queremos estudiar: preferimos dormir. 12. Hemos escrito
las cartas, pero todavia tenemos que estudiar la leccion. 13.
<iHabeis escrito las cartas con un lapiz? 14. No, senor; hemos
escrito con una pluma y tinta negra. 15. Las mujeres corteses
no escriben cartas con un lapiz. 16. Maria no ha podido (has
not been able) escribir. 17. Tiene roto un dedo (finger). 18. No
tiene cuidado cuando corre y juega. 19. <jCuantos anos tiene?
20. Tiene doce (twelve) anos. 21. No quiere trabajar: pre-
fiere correr y jugar.
B. Continue: i. I have a white horse. 2. I have sold the
green house. 3. I am hungry and cold. 4. I have to work
in order to live. 5. I am to leave to-morrow.
6. John's leg is broken. 7. He is not careful when he runs.
8. How old is he? 9. He is ten years old, but he neither reads
nor writes. 10. He has begun to study, and he has learned
many words, n. When a boy is hungry, he asks for bread.
12. When he trembles with cold, he cannot write. 13. When
he is in a hurry, he does not wish to correct errors. 14. He can-
not work when he is sleepy. 15. When he has slept and eaten,
he studies and listens. 16. He is not afraid when he has to speak.
17. Finding the lessons easy, he learns to read, write, and speak
well.
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 297
EXERCISE V
A. — i. Yo he vendido mi casa. 2. Tu has perdido tus di-
bujos. 3. El no halla sus libros ni su lapiz. 4. Ella toca
el piano. 5. Usted pide sus libros. 6. Nosotros no hemos
aprendido nuestras lecciones. 7. Vosotros teneis vuestros la-
pices. 8. Ellos no quieren comer sus manzanas. 9. Ustedes no
han escrito sus cartas. 10. Este dibujo es para aquel edificio
alto. ii. Mi tio y mi tia viven en esta casa. 12. Su peque-
fio hijo ha perdido estas bolas. 13. Esta sefiora es su madre,
pero aquel senor no es su padre. 14. Estas sefioras son (are)
americanas; esas ninas son inglesas; aquellos muchachos son
espanoles. 15. <JHay flores en aquellas ventanas? 16. £Hay
muchos Mejicanos en los Estados Unidos? 17. ^Ensefian el
f ranees en aquellas escuelas? 18. No, senor; muchos disci-
pulos prefieren aprender el espafiol.
B. Continue: i. I have sold my (thou hast sold thy, etc.)
house. 2. I play the piano. 3. I take drawing lessons. 4. I
find the lesson easy. 5. I lose my (thou losest thy, etc.) books.
6. This talkative girl does not listen. 7. That boy prefers
to play ball (a la pelota). 8. You ( Usted) have bought that
house. 9. The building is high, and the windows are wide.
10. Jane lives there (alii), n. Her father and mother speak
French very well. 12. They have studied in this school. 13.
But they wish to live in England. 14. Her father is an intel-
ligent man, but he speaks very little. 15. He buys French
books. 16. They play the piano and they sing also. 17. Is
that gentleman her uncle? 18. No, but that lady is her aunt.
EXERCISE VI
A. — i. Soy americano. 2. Tu eres mi amigo. 3. fil es un
hombre muy inteligente. 4. Ella no es fuerte. 5. Usted es
muy preguntona, senorita. 6. Nosotros somos perezosos.
298 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
7. Vosotros sois muy activos. 8. Ellos son severos. 9. Aque-
llas senoras son mis hermanas. 10. Ustedes son muy buenos.
ii. Yo no estoy buena. 12. Usted no esta muy alegre. 13.
Mi hermano esta invalido: esta cojo ahora. 14. Estamos de-
cididos a dejar este pais. 15. Mi hija esta muy triste porque
esta siempre enferma. 16. Es lastima, <mo es verdad? 17.
<jD6nde esta su hijo, sefiora? y <Jc6mo esta el? 18. Ahora esta
en Cuba. 19. Siempre esta trabajando, pero el tambien esta
un poco malo. 20. <iC6mo esta usted, senora? 21. No estoy
muy bien, porque este invierno es muy severo. 22. No puedo
vivir aqui (here) a causa de los vientos frios. 23. <<Quien llama?
24. Soy yo. 25. Tengo un regalo para usted. 26. Muchas
gracias: es usted muy amable.
B. Continue: i. I am a pupil of this school. 2. I am
strong. 3. I am an American. 4. I am not very talkative.
5. I am not tiresome: I am tired.
6. My friends are determined to leave this country on ac-
count of the severe winter. 7. They are always ill here (aqui).
8. Their brother is a soldier. 9. Being disabled and lame, he
is not very strong either (tampoco). 10. He, too, wishes to
live in another country, n. But if he does not find a position,
he must return to Cuba. 12. Who is knocking (llama)? 13. Is
it Julius? 14. Has he arrived? 15. How is he? 16. He is
very well, thank you. 17. He wishes to buy our horses. 18.
But our father does not wish to sell his horses.
EXERCISE VII
A. — i. Pensamos comprar aquella casa de dos pisos. 2. Es
muy grande y comoda. 3. En el primer piso estan la sala
(drawing room), la biblioteca, el comedor, y la cocina. 4. En
el segundo piso hay muchas piezas para dormir (bedrooms) y un
cuarto de bafio (bathroom). 5. El duefio es un senor inteligente
y rico. 6. Ha viajado mucho. 7. Ha comprado muchas cosas
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 299
muy costosas en otros paises. 8. Pero no esta bueno en esta ciu-
dad. 9. Piensa volver a Sevilla. 10. No quiere llevar los mue-
bles a aquella ciudad. 1 1. Tiene la intention de vender todos sus
muebles. 12. La biblioteca contiene libros en ingles, f ranees,
y espanol. 13. En la sala hay cuadros magnificos. 14. Si
usted compra los muebles, yo deseo obtener (obtain) los cua-
dros para Juana. 15. jEsta bien! Usted quiere mucho a
Juana, <mo es verdad? 16. Si, sefiora; ella es mi hermana.
B. Continue: i. I love my mother. 2. I am looking for
the servant. 3. I have not asked favors of Paul. 4. I am at
my uncle's. 5. I intend to buy the picture.
6. John wishes to sell his house. 7. On account of the war
(guerra) he wishes to return to the United States. 8. The
house has two stories. 9. It is very comfortable. 10. The
library and the dining room are large, n. The drawing room
is magnificent. 12. It contains pictures and statues that he has
bought at Garcia's. 13. In that store they do not sell cheap
things. 14. Everything (todo) is costly. 15. I wish to ask
a favor of you. 16. Will you show me (mostrarme) the house?
17. Yes, sir; if I have not the time, I can call my son. 18. Does
your son intend to pass the winter in this city?
EXERCISE VIII
A. — i. Mi primo es profesor de idiomas. 2. Yo hablaba
espanol con el (him) todos los dias. 3. Prometio ensefiarme (to
teach me) el aleman tambien. 4. Pensamos empezar pronto
(soon). 5. El compro un caballo a mi hermano. 6. Dejo el
caballo con mi tio que tiene una tienda en la calle de Alcala.
7. Yo trabajaba en la tienda todos los dias. 8. Vendia
muebles y llevaba (kept) los libros. 9. Pero ayer, estando un
poco malo, no podia trabajar. 10. Estaba en casa descansando.
ii. Leia en un libro. 12. Entro mi primo y ofrecio (offered)
ayudarme (to help me) con los libros. 13. Volviamos a la
300 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
tienda. 14. Y encontramos a un ladron. 15. Llevaba el
caballo de mi primo. 16. Llamamos a mi tio. 17. Mi tio es
un avariento. 18. Queria matar al ladron. 19. Pero el ladron
se escape (escaped) en el caballo. 20. Mi primo tiene que tomar
el tren para volver a casa.
B. Continue: i. I was speaking to John. 2. I did not
buy the bicycle. 3. I used to lose money every day. 4. I
wrote the letter yesterday. 5. I sold the house and bought
another.
6. That German used to live in this city. 7. He had a store
where he sold clothing and many other things. 8. One (un)
day thieves entered (in) the store. 9. They looked for money,
but they did not find any (nada). 10. They were taking sev-
eral bicycles when the owner arrived, n. They departed on
the bicycles. 12. Poor man! He worked hard (mucho) every
day. 13. His sons were (eran) lazy. 14. They did not help
their father. 15. They wasted (perder) their time. But the
daughter helped her father a great deal. She used to keep the
books, and wash, iron and mend his clothes.
EXERCISE IX
A. — i. En Inglaterra y en los Estados Unidos hablan ingles.
2. En Espana y en el Peru hablan el castellano. 3. En la
Suiza hablan tres (three) lenguas: el aleman, el f ranees, y el
italiano. 4. En la America del Norte y en la America del Sur
(South) hablan cuatro (four) lenguas: el ingles, el castellano, el
frances, y el portugues (Portuguese). 5. El general Martinez
tiene mucha ambicion. 6. Creo que la ambicion es peligrosa.
7. Deseamos vivir en paz: no queremos la guerra. 8. La paz
constituye la felicidad de este pais. 9. Debemos amar lo bello
y lo bueno. 10. No debemos dejar lo util y buscar lo vano.
ii. Usted sabe lo rica que ha sido aquella familia. 12. Ahora
es muy pobre: ha gastado todo el dinero. 13. Es muy malo
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 301
el gastar demasiado. 14. El senor Morales esta en Inglaterra
comprando hierro. 15. Llego a Londres el lunes de la semana
pasada. 16. Piensa volver el mes proximo.
B. Continue: i. I love what-is (lo) beautiful. 2. I was
teaching English. 3. I had no ambition. 4. I sold flowers.
5. I lived in Havana.
6. Little Mary is the daughter of Mr. Morales. 7. Her
father and mother used to live in Japan. 8. They have been
in China also. 9. They speak Castilian. 10. We Americans
hate war. n. We wish to live in peace. 12. Peace and health
constitute our happiness. 13. Good morning, Dona Antonia.
14. How is Don Pablo? 15. When did he arrive? 16. He
arrived on Monday of last week. 17. He is here to buy iron.
18. You (usted} know how much we love John. 19. You
(ustedes) love all that-is (lo) good. 20. It is true that he has
lost his money. 21. But misfortune has proved the man.
EXERCISE X
A. — i. Buenos dias, Dona Maria, <ic6mo esta usted esta
mafiana? 2. Gracias, senor doctor; me siento (7 feel) bien.
3. ^Durmio usted bien anoche? 4. Si, senor; dormi toda la
noche. 5. No he podido comprar el vino. 6. Pidieron dos
pesos la botella por el (it) y tres pesos por los medicamentos.
7. Usted sabe lo pobre que soy. 8. [Esta bien! Tengo que
sanar a usted. 9. Voy a mandar otros remedios (remedies).
10. ^Como cogio usted este resfriado? n. Sali a la calle sin
abrigo. 12. jEs lastima! Usted debe tener cuidado. 13. Si
tfene que guardar cama, usted no puede ganar dinero. 14. <{No
tiene usted ni padre ni madre? 15. No; mi padre y mi madre
murieron el ano pasado. 16. Mi padre era (was) comerciante.
17. Tengo una tia en Paris. 18. Esperaba visitar a la buena
senora el mes proximo. 19. Hasta luego, senora. — Adios, senor
doctor.
302 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
B. Continue: i. I did not sleep well. 2. I asked a favor
of Paul. 3. I am a physician. 4. I earn a thousand dollars
a year. 5. I did not lie.
6. This climate (clima, m.) is not healthful. 7. If one (uno)
goes out without an overcoat, one catches a cold. 8. My brother
John is a judge. 9. He is ill, and has to stay in bed. 10. The
physician sent medicine, which John is to take three times a
day. ii. We hope to cure the sick man. 12. He slept well
last night. 13. His illness is not serious. 14. He has a wife
and four children (hijos). 15. He works hard to support his
family. 16. John is not a miser, but he does not wish to spend
all the money that he earns. 17. His daughter Jane died last
year. 18. She lived in Toronto, a city in Canada, when she
died. 19. Good night. I intend to visit your brother to-
morrow.
EXERCISE XI
A. — i. iPiensas viajar por Mejico? 2. No es peligroso
viajar por la Republica (Republic) Mejicana en este momento.
3. En aquel despacho puedes comprar billetes1 directos para
la Ciudad de Mejico. 4. No quiero viajar con aquella mujer.
5. Me dijo (told) cierto amigo que es muy fea y habladora.
6. No, hijo; no es tan mala ella: es muy buena. 7. Su padre y
su madre son tambien muy ricos. 8. Tienen una bella casa
con un bello jardin. 9. Un dia comi (dined} en su casa. 10. La
mesa estaba puesta (set) con cuchillos y tenedores de plata.
ii. Tenian magnificos caballos negros. 12. Una prima visi-
taba a la senora. 13. Era una linda Cubana. 14. Tenia los
ojos negros y las manos y los pies pequenos. 15. iQuieres
tomar el primer tren? 16. Tienes que partir al instante. 17.
Hay dos millas de aqui a la estacion.
B. Continue: i. I have lost my gold watch. 2. I studied
the Spanish and English languages. 3. I used to live in the
ICalled boletos in Mexico.
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 303
yellow house. 4. I departed joyfully. 5. I want a cup of
coffee.
6. Last year we traveled through Cuba. 7. Havana is a
beautiful city. 8. The Cuban ladies are pretty. 9. They
have black hair and eyes. 10. You can buy a through ticket
in that office, n. If you (ustedes) have American gold and
silver, you can travel through beautiful England. 12. We have
authentic news from my mother about the war. 13. Those
poor men have lost all their money. 14. They have also lost
their fine horses. 15. Bring me a cup of coffee and a glass of
water. 16. There are no knives or (ni) forks on the table.
17. The poor lady reads the Holy Bible every day. 18. She
lives in that little white house. 19. It is easy to find the house.
20. There is a beautiful marble statue in the garden.
EXERCISE XII
A. — i. El clima de aquel pais es muy bueno. 2. No hace
ni mucho calor ni mucho frfo. 3. A la salida del sol hace fresco,
y hay neblina. 4. El afio pasado fuimos (we went) a California.
5. Mi padre nos (us) regalo un baul y una maleta. 6. Mi tia
nos envio dinero. 7. Luego que hubimos recibido estos rega-
los, partimos felices. 8. El viaje no era agradable porque habia
mucho polvo y hacia calor. 9. Pero al llegar, tuvimos frio a
causa del viento fresco. 10. El agua de esta fuente esta muy
fria cuando hace calor. n. Teniendo calor la bebemos con
mucho gusto. 12. (iEstuvo usted en mi casa ayer? 13. No
estuve en su casa: no tuve tiempo para ir. 14. Luego que
leimos el primer tomo, pedimos el segundo. 15. Queriamos leer
la historia de Espafia. 16. Un general rico y un sastre pobre
vivian en cierta ciudad. 17. La hija del general regalaba mu-
chas cosas a la hija del sastre. 18. Esta pobre nifia era sorda
y ciega.
B. Continue: i. I was not poor. 2. I had bought the
304 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
house. 3. I was very busy. 4. Yesterday I caUed John at five
o'clock. 5. As soon as I had written the letter, I threw it into
the letter box.
6. The children suffered a great deal during (durante) the
strike. 7. It was very cold and windy, and it snowed every
day. 8. There was no coal. 9. They were cold even in their
houses, and they were hungry. 10. Several families lived to-
gether in one small building, n. One young mother died.
12. The American ladies were kind to the little children. 13.
They gave the poor children many things. 14. They bought
food for them (ellos) and even mended their clothes. 15. We
used to go out when the moon shone and when there was no
fog. 1 6. We would-run, and we were warm even when it was
not warm. 17. As soon as we arrived we had supper. 18. All
the young people returned home very merry and happy.
EXERCISE XIII
A. — i. He gastado diez pesos esta manana. 2. Compre
sesenta huevos a treinta y cinco centavos la docena. 3. Pague
una cuenta que montaba (amounted] a siete pesos y diez cen-
tavos. 4. Una libra y media de cafe me costo setenta y cinco
centavos. 5. Hay treinta discipulos en la clase de espanol.
6. Tenemos tres clases por semana. 7. Necesitamos algu-
nos libros nuevos. 8. dCuanto cuestan los libros? 9. En
Espana se venden (are sold) a cinco pesetas cada uno. 10. La
peseta espanola vale veinte centavos mas o menos en moneda
americana. n. Mi buen padre tiene setenta y un anos de
edad. 12. San Pedro y San Pablo eran hombres santos. 13.
Los meses del ano son: enero, febrero, marzo, abril, mayo, junio,
julio, agosto, se(p)tiembre, octubre, noviembre, diciembre. 14.
Los ninos cu^ntan: "Treinta dias trae (brings) se(p)tiembre, — J
con abril, junio y noviembre; — veinte y ocho cuenta uno; — x
luno (= un tnes) and se(J>)tiembre are subjects of their verbs.
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 305
y los demas treinta y uno." 15. Tambien cuentan: "Lunes y
martes y miercoles: tres; — jueves y viernes y sabado: seis; —
y domingo: siete."
B. Continue: i. I was a good pupil. 2. I must not work
on Sundays. 3. I sold oranges at twenty cents a dozen. 4. I
wasn't in good health. 5. I need a hundred dollars.
6. We have read the first and second volumes. 7. The third
volume has three hundred pages. 8. A good pupil can read
this book in three or four months. 9. On Wednesdays and
Thursdays we study the Holy Bible. 10. Our great friend died
Saturday, the first of June. n. He was only fifty-one years
old. 12. My neighbor has made a thousand dollars buying and
selling horses. 13. If you work six days of the week, you should
rest on Sunday. 14. Yes, sir; but I work not more than five
hours a day, and there are one hundred and sixty-eight hours
in a week. 15. When did they buy the picture? 16. In Jan-
uary or February. 17. It cost sixty-two pesetas, about twelve
dollars and forty cents in American money.
EXERCISE XIV
A. — i. Manana partiremos para el campo. 2. <iA que hora
sale el tren? 3. Sale a las tres y veinte de la tarde. 4. Hay
otro tren a las seis de la manana. 5. Es muy temprano.
6. <iA que hora llegaran ustedes? 7. Llegaremos a las nueve
y media de la noche. 8. <)Desde cuando viven ustedes aqui?
9. Hace dos afios que vivimos aqui. 10. Llegamos el 17 de
marzo de 1913. n. Desde entonces vivimos en esta casa.
12. £Ahora quieren ustedes comprar la casa? 13. Si, senor;
compraremos la casa, si la (it) venden barata. 14. <[Que hora
es en su reloj? 15. Son las dos menos cuarto, pero mi reloj
adelanta. 16. Adios, Don Carlos; tenemos que correr. 17. La
clase de matematicas empieza a las dos y media. 18. £Hacc
306 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
mucho que estudian ustedes el frances? 19. Hacia seis meses la
semana pasada que estudiabamos este idioma. 20. Desde en-
tonces tenemos que escribir ejercicios todos los dias. 21. dPo-
bres nifios! pero de (in) este modo aprenderan ustedes muy
pronto.
B. Continue: i. I shall buy the house. 2. I shall live
at my brother's. 3. I shall leave at four o'clock. 4. Then I
should pay the bill. 5. I have lived in this house ten years.
6. Paul has been here a year. 7. His sister had been here
six months when he arrived. 8. We shall have been here a
fortnight to-morrow. 9. As soon as we arrived, we began to
work. 10. Our father lost a thousand dollars three months
ago. ii. John gives (da) Spanish classes three times a week
(por semana). 12. They begin at a quarter past eight. 13.
Will you call the boys at ten minutes before seven? 14. No, I
cannot; I shall not be here. 15. It will be a month since our
friends left. 16. But they have written us post cards (tar-
jelas postalcs) every day. 17. The last card is dated: Boston,
the 4th of July, 1915. 18. It will not be long before they re-
turn (no tardardn en voher).
EXERCISE XV
A. — i. Pensamos comprar una casa mas grande. 2. La
casa en que vivimos es bonita mas bien que comoda. 3. El
comedor no es tan grande como la sala. 4. En el segundo piso
no hay tantos cuartos como en el primero. 5. Las piezas para
dormir son menos altas de lo que es saludable. 6. La biblioteca
es grandisima. 7. El primer duefio (owner) tenia mas libros de
los que tenemos nosotros. 8. Es cierto que hay algunas de
las mas bellas flores en el jardin. 9. Hay tambien mas de
cincuenta arboles. 10. Pero la mayor parte de ellos son peque-
nos. ii. No son ni bonitos ni utiles. 12. Nuestro tio nos da
mas dinero del que le pedimos, ^no es verdad? 13. No, hijo
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 307
mio; cuanto mas le pedimos, tanto menos nos da. 14. Es mas
pobre de lo que crees. 15. Ha perdido muchfsimo dinero a
causa de la guerra. 16. Quiere vender el negocio lo mas pronto
posible.
B. Continue: i. I have more friends than money. 2. The
more I have the more I want (qnerer). 3. I bought as many
apples as oranges. 4. I have spent less than five dollars. 5. I
have more books than I had last year.
6. The least she will lose is fifty dollars. 7. I am not so
rich as most of my friends. 8. She is poorer than you. 9. But
she is happier than you think. 10. The poorer she is the hap-
pier she seems (to be), n. She is a most faithful woman.
12. She has worked for my sister more than five years. 13. Our
state is as fertile (fertil) as the other states. 14. And it has
mines (minas) that produce (producir) as much gold as silver.
15. Do they employ as many men now as five years ago?
1 6. No, most of the men do not work now on account of the
strike.
EXERCISE XVI
A. — i. <JA que hora llego usted? 2. Serian las once de la
noche. 3. Usted tendria hambre y sed, llegando tan tarde.
4. Los viejos tendrian suefio. 5. Los jovenes nos divertimos
(enjoyed ourselves) mucho jugando y platicando (chatting).
6. ({Cuando estara usted en la Habana? 7. Llegare el martes
de la semana proxima. 8. No es tan lejos como yo creia. 9.
<jTiene usted muchos parientes? 10. Si, senorita; tengo cua-
tro abuelos, mis padres, y seis hermanos y primos. n. jHabra
mayor felicidad en este mundo! 12. Usted era, es, y siempre
sera mi mejor amiga. 13. No lo creo; usted tendra muchas,
y mejores que yo. 14. ^Cuanto dinero habran perdido en esta
empresa los senores Fernandez? 15. Los pobres perderian la
mayor parte de su fortuna. 16. Han tenido que vender todas
308 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
sus casas, las nuevas y las viejas, las grandes y las pequenas.
17. Tendran menos influencia ahora de la que tenian hace cinco
aiios.
B. Continue: i. I shall have time. 2. I shall be ready at
one o'clock. 3. I shall write the letter as quickly as possible.
4. I shall raise my hand. 5. I have four brothers-and-sisters.
6. What time was it when he returned? 7. It-was-probably
ten o'clock. 8. It must-be (serdn) half past eleven now. 9.
Old and young, large and small, all were playing ball. 10. The
children raised their hands, n. Their hands were too (muy]
small to (para) catch the ball.' 12. They prefer small balls
to large ones. 13. Who is that man? 14. He-is-probably one
of John's grandfathers. 15. Has he no brothers-and-sisters?
16. No; he had one brother who died. 17. How old was he
when he died? 18. He was probably seven years of age. 19.
Can-there-be (habrd) a greater misfortune for a country than a
long war? 20. The rich and the poor, the good and the bad,
all will have to suffer.
EXERCISE XVII
A. — i. Tiembla: no tiembles. 2. Que tiemble el malo.
3. No temblemos. 4. Temblad: no tembleis. 5. Tiemblen los
enemigos. 6. No tiemble usted: no hay peligro. 7. Sente-
monos debajo de estos arboles y hablemos. 8. Ninos, levan-
taos. 9. Pierda usted cuidado (do not worry}. 10. Cierre usted
la ventana: hace mucho viento. n. No deje usted entrar
el polvo. 12. Subamos a la biblioteca y leamos los periodicos.
13. Cuenta los lapices: no cuentes las plumas. 14. No vuelvan
ustedes antes del lunes. 15. No pidas dinero a ese hombre:
es un avariento. 16. No dejes de pagar la cuenta. 17. Evita
la compafiia de aquellos muchachos. 18. No tema usted nada:
me quedare en casa. 19. Compremos el caballo bianco y no
el negro. 20. Aprendan ustedes el vocabulario y escriban el
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 309
ejercicio. 21. No lo escriban con un lapiz. 22. Hable usted
mas alto, porque no le (you) entiendo. 23. Compra el reloj
de oro. 24. No compres el reloj de plata. 25. Que lo compre
Juan.
B. (Give all possible forms of the imperative in the first
live sentences): i. Fear the traitor; do not fear the enemy.
2. Buy the house; do not buy the garden. 3. Open the win-
dow; do not open the door. 4. Sleep well! 5. Love thy neigh-
bor (projimo).
6. Open (form, sing.} the door and close the window.
7. Children, (form, pi.) do not run into the garden. 8. Go up
to the library. 9. Study (form, pi.) lesson twenty; do not study
lesson nineteen. 10. Do not (form, pi.) drink coffee; drink
water, n. Ask (form, sing.) your father for money; do not
ask your mother for anything (nada). 12. Let us dine (comer)
at seven and have supper after the theater. 13. Do not (form,
sing.) worry: I shall return before dinner (la comida). 14. Take
(form, pi.) the street car (tranvia, m.) if you are tired. 15. Do not
fail to see the magnificent cathedral (catedral, /.). 16. Visit
also the other public buildings. 17. But do not fail to study
this lesson well.
EXERCISE XVIII
A. — i. (jRecibiste una carta? — Si, sefior. 2. <<Quien la
escribio? — No se. 3. <jLa has contestado? 4. No quiero
contestarla. 5. Contestala luego. jA ver! (let me see it).
6. No puedo dejarte verla: leyendola, te enfadaras tu tambien.
7. La verdad es que Juan me la escribio. 8. <;No quieres a
Juan? 9. No, sefior; debo aborrecerle. 10. No puedo amarle,
conociendole como yo le conozco. n. Le devolvere la carta.
12. No la devuelvas: echala al fuego. 13. ,jHas visto a Maria
csta manana? 14. Si; la vi, pero no le hable. 15. ^Hablaste
a los ninos? 16. No, senora; no los encontre y no les hable.
310 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
17. ,jMe estaran aguardando? 18. Si; estan aguardandote
desde hace una hora. 19. Pues, que no me aguarden mas: no
puedo ir. 20. Nos buscaban por todas partes. 21. No nos
hallaron. 22. ^Quiere listed vender la bicicleta? 23. Si, se-
nor; pero no puedo venderla barata. 24. Si listed no puede
venderla barata, no la puedo comprar yo.
B. Continue: i. I fear her. 2. I love them. 3. I hope
to see her. 4. He gives (da) me (thee, etc.} the flowers. 5. I
wish to pay them what (lo que) I owe them.
6. We do not love her. 7. We cannot love her knowing her
so well. 8. The merchant offered us the tea very cheap. 9. But
having so much, we did not buy it. 10. We were waiting for
him. ii. Call (fam. sing.} him; do not wait for him. 12. No,
wait a moment; do not call him yet. 13. Looking for you, I
found their house. 14. Did they buy the house? 15. No, and
they do not intend to buy it. 16. The owner would lose money
by1 selling it. 17. I must speak to her; to them. 18. Do not
hope (fam. sing.) to see her soon. 19. Will you (form, sing.)
lend me two dollars? 20. Yes, but I will not lend you more.
21. Did he look for us? 22. Yes, he wished to speak to you
(fam. pi.). 23. He wished to ask you a favor. Avoid him.
24. Let us sit down. 25. No, let us not sit down. He will
find us.
EXERCISE XIX
A. — i. Tenga usted la bondad de prestarme su gramatica.
2. Con mucho gusto, senorita. 3. ^Le gusta este libro? 4. Si,
Don Carlos; me gusta mucho. 5. No es tan dificil como el
otro. 6. £Me permite usted que la acompane a la casa? 7. No
quiero molestar a usted. 8. No es molestia: es un gran placer.
9. Convido a usted a comer con nosotros (us). 10. Buenos
dias, Dona Maria; <;c6mo esta usted? n. Muy bien, gracias.
12. Me alegro de verle. Pase usted (come in), 13.
iDo not translate.
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 311
esta su senora madre? 14. Sin novedad1 (she is well) tambien,
gracias. 15. Seriores, ustedes hablan muy a prisa. 16. No
los puedo entender. 17. iQue desean ustedes? 18. Cuen-
tenos las noticias de la guerra. 19. Dicen (they say) que hemos
perdido la batalla (battle) y treinta mil soldados. 20. jDios
no permita que hayamos perdido tantos hombres valientes!
21. No lloren ustedes. 22. <iNo hay motivo para ello? 23.
Dios tendra piedad de las pobres madres, viudas y huerfanos.
B. Continue: i. I wish to pay him what I owe him. 2. I
do not believe it. 3. I love her. 4. I must see her. 5. It is
impossible for me (me es imposible) to see them.
6. Will Don Juan2 dine with you (ustedes)? 7. It is possible
that Mary has (subj.) invited him. 8. Have (form, sing.) the
kindness to tell him that I wish to speak to him. 9. I do not
understand you (form, sing.); you speak too fast. 10. Leave
{jam. pi.} us in peace, n. Let there be peace! 12. It is not
important that they have (subj.) lost this battle. 13. Are
you the daughters of that brave soldier? 14. We are. 15.
Are you orphans now? 16. We are. i>. Do you understand
why we are sad? 18. We have sufficient reason for it. 19.
Will you (ustedes) allow me to accompany you? 20. Thank
you very much; we do not wish to trouble you. 21. It is no
trouble: it is a great pleasure.
EXERCISE XX
A. — i. Deseo que acabes tu carta pronto, hijo mio. 2. Es
necesario que hagamos (pres. subj. of hacer) esta visita. 3. Temo
que no lleguemos a tiempo. 4. Aunque lleguemos a la casa a
las cinco, no encontraremos a Juan. 5. Siento mucho que
nunca pueda quedarse hasta mas tarde. 6. El pobre nifio no
iLiterally, 'without novelty' or 'change.' 2Literally, ' Mr. John.' One may
refer to, or address, an acquaintance, using the given name preceded by Don,
Dona.
312 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
esta bien de salud. 7. Tiene que partir antes que haga fresco.
8. Permita usted que le diga, padre mio, que no es verdad.
9. Ello es que su madre quiere que este en casa temprano.
10. Pienso vender las sillas viejas. n. No las venda usted
antes que las vea yo. 12. Es posible que las compre. 13. No
creo que las compre usted: no son bonitas. 14. Ire a verlas
luego que vuelva de la visita. 15. Le suplico me mande usted
el primer tomo de la obra. 16. Temo que no le guste el libro.
17. Por poco interesante que sea, tengo que leerlo. 18. Estare
contento de que lo lea usted, aunque se (/ know} que usted lo
hallara cansado.
B. Continue: i. However industrious I may be. 2. In
order that I may believe it. 3. He forbids my (thy, etc.] enter-
ing. 4. I want him to write the letter. 5. I am glad to have
read it.
6. It is possible that we shall go to Spain. 7. I want you
(usted) to learn the language. 8. Study it while Don Antonio
is here. 9. Learn it before he leaves. 10. It will be neces-
sary to speak it as soon as we arrive, n. I shall not learn it
even if I study all day. 12. Do you think that it is easy?
13. I do not know any one (nadie) who has learned it so quickly.
14. I know a young man who learned to speak and write Span-
ish in less than a month! 15. Aren't you sorry that it rains
and that we cannot go? 16. We shall wait until the sun shines.
17. I beg of you not to wait. 18. I do not wish you to arrive
late-
EXERCISE XXI
A.— i. Hay una carta para ti en el correo. 2. Vente (come)
conmigo a buscarla. 3. Siento no poder ir contigo en este
momento: estoy ocupado. 4. ^Donde estan los periodicos? 5.
Juan los ha llevado consigo. 6. <:Para quien sera este regalo,
para el o para ella? 7. No es para el ni para ella: es para usted.
8. No creo que sea para mi. 9. Sentiria que (/ should be sorry
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 313
if) fuera para mi. 10. Prefiero que lo reciba ella. n. Prefe-
riria que lo recibiera la pobre nina. 12. £Que noticias tiene
listed de sus primes? 13. Me escribieron que iban (imperf.
ind. of ir) a Filipinas (the Philippines}. 14. Querian que los
acompafiara. 15. No temen morir a causa del clima. 16. Di-
jeron que no temian morir, ni que yo muriera. 17. Esperaban
comprar terrenes (land] muy baratos si llegaban a tiempo.
1 8. Pero yo tendria que vender bienes (property) que tengo
aqui. 19. No queria venderlos, ni mi madre queria que los
vendiese. 20. Dijo que yo perderia el dinero si lo llevaba con-
migo. 21. Dijo tambien que no dormiria mas si yo la dejaba
sola. 22. Entonces rogue a Dios que conservara la vida a mi
madre. 23. Les conteste a mis primos que era imposible que
fuera yo con ellos. 24. Juan deseaba que le prestara mil pesos.
25. Pero su esposa no quiere que le preste ningun dinero. 26.
No quiere que me lo pida siquiera (even). 27. Yo le prestare
el dinero si ella lo permite. 28. Le prestaria el dinero si ella
lo permitiera. 29. Le he prestado quinientos pesos, aunque
ella no queria permitirlo.
B. Continue: i. He bought it for me (for thee, etc.}. 2. I
wished to return. 3. He was afraid that (Tenia miedo de que}
I might not return on time. 4. She wished to see me (thee, etc.).
5. She wished me (thee, etc.}, to write the letter.
6. Will she go with me? 7. She is always satisfied with (de}
herself. 8. He spoke of him, not of her. 9. There was a letter
in the mail for you. 10. I am sorry that I did not arrive in
time. ii. We were sorry that you (usted) were not here.
12. We wanted you to go (fuera or fuese) to the opera with us.
13. We hoped that your mother would sleep although you left
her alone. 14. Write to Anthony to come home. 15. Please
write him to-day. 16. He would prefer that Mary should write
him. 17 They wanted us to buy the islands, and we bought
them. 1 8. The climate is bad. 19. We prayed to God that
314 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
he would protect our brother. 20. We begged John to sell
the land. 21. I copied the letter that Uncle Paul might read
it. 22. Uncle Paul advised him not to depart. 23. But John
was afraid to die, and that his wife would die. 24. Then Uncle
Paul begged him to remain until he could (pudierd) get (llegar}
there. 25. He promised to pay him a thousand dollars if he
would stay (se quedaba). 26. John answered that he would not
stay, if he paid (pagaba) him five thousand dollars.
EXERCISE XXII
A. — i. Damelo. 2. Damelo a mi: no se lo des (§ 87, a.)
a ella. 3. Tengo que devolvertelos. 4. No me los devuelvas:
no me hacen falta. 5. A mi me deben su felicidad. 6. A el no
le deben nada. 7. <iSon tus amigas? 8. Presentame a ellas.
9. Presentamelas. 10. No te las presento. n. No puedo pre-
sentarteias. 12. A su padre no le gusta que se las presente yo
a nadie. 13. ^Quiere usted ensenarme el Palacio Real? 14. Se
lo ensenare con mucho gusto. 15. Se lo ensenaria a su hermana
tambien si pudiera (could) salir ella. 16. jOjala que este bien
de salud pronto! 17. jOjala que estuviera mejor de salud!
1 8. Si usted quiere venderme esta sortija, vendamela. 19. Si
no quiere vendermela, no me la venda. 20. No puedo vender-
sela a usted: se la he prometido a Juana. 21. Me suplico ella
que se la prometiera, y se la prometi. 22. No creia ella que se
la diese. 23. jEsta bien! Desela a ella si usted no quiere ven-
dermela a mi. 24. No se la habria pedido a usted, si hubiera
sabido que queria darsela a otra. 25. ^Quiere usted ir al teatro
conmigo? 26. jMuchas gracias! Iria con usted con mucho
gusto si no lloviese. 27. Le prestare a usted un paraguas.
28. No me lo preste usted: siempre olvido (or se me olvida)
devolverselo. 29. Es imposible que yo le diga una palabra
sin ofenderla. 30. Dijo que era imposible decirle una
palabra sin ofenderla. 31. Si nos amara, no nos trataria
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 315
asf. 32. Cuanto mas la queremos, tanto mas parece aborre-
cernos.
B. Continue: i. He gives it to me (thee, etc.}. 2. He
presents me (thee, etc.] to her. 3. I must return it to him.
4. I should travel if I had money. 5. I wish Paul would sell
me (thee, etc.} his watch.
6. We should all sleep outdoors if there were not so many
flies (moscas). 7. If we do not kill them, they will kill us.
8. If I did not kill them, they would kill me. 9. If we bought
the land (el terrend), we should drain (desaguar] it. 10. They
will not sell it to you (ustedes). n. They would not sell it to
me. 12. They would sell it to me if I paid enough for it. 13. If
we had so much money we should not spend it here. 14. We
should return to America. 15. If you loved us you would not
speak like that (asf). 16. Have you told (dicho) it to him?
17. Have you told it to him or to her? 18. If I had found you
(usted), I should have told it to you. 19. John has lent me a
book which I ought to return to him. 20. Yes sir; you ought
to return it to him at once. 21. He wanted me to read it.
22. Oh, if I could only read Spanish! 23. Give me the book:
I shall send it to him. 24. Send it to her: do not send it to him.
25. I can not send it to her without offending him. 26. Will
you present us to her? 27. Mrs. Garcia has presented her to
me. 28. She said she would present you (usted) to her, if she
knew you.
EXERCISE XXIII
A. — i. <JCon quien se casara aquella linda senorita? 2. <}Se
acuerda usted de un senor que encontramos la semana pasada
en casa de Dona Maria? 3. Pues, se casa con el. 4. |Es
lastima! Se me figura que es un hombre muy vanaglorioso.
5. Siempre se alaba a si y no habla sino de si mismo. 6. Ella
se burla de el. 7. Temo que se la haya de pagar. 8. Pierda
usted cuidado: se las prometen muy felices. 9. Se dice que se
316 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
quisren mucho. 10. Me tomo la libertad de dudarlo. n. Si
tal pensare (piensa), se engafia usted. 12. <jC6mo se llama
ella? 13. Se llama Francisca. 14. ^De que se queja usted?
15. jSi no me quejo! 16. Siento que no haya aqui una casa
donde se cambia dinero. 17. Se me olvido cambiarlo antes de
partir (leaving). 18. Las nirias se levantaron a las siete. 19. Se
lavaron la cara y las manos y se peinaron el pelo. 20. jComo
se parecen una a otra! 21. Las dos van (are) poniendose muy
bonitas. 22. Sirvase usted decirme donde se venden sombre-
ros mejicanos. 23. No se atreva usted a reirse de mi. 24. Me
gustan mucho aquellos sombreros, y quiero comprarme uno.
25. jSi no me rio de usted! Si tuviera dinero, tambien yo
compraria uno. 26. jCallese usted. No hable siempre del
mismo asunto. 27. Se enfadara la gente (people). 28. Dice
un Codigo (Code) Civil: "Si no hubiere mayoria (majority),
decidira el juez." 29. Donde fueres (hyp. subj. of ir), haz
(do) lo que vieres (hyp. subj. of ver. — Cf. 'When in Rome, do
as Rome does'). 30. No hay mal que dure cien anos (Cf. 'It's
a long lane that has no turning').
B. Continue: i. I go to bed early and rise early. 2. I de-
ceive myself. 3. I am dying. 4. It seems to me (thee, etc.).
5. I have to go (irme).
6. Here English is spoken, and money is changed. 7. Paul
bought himself a hat in this store. 8. I am glad that he has
(tenga) a new hat. 9. Please tell me where gloves are sold.
10. They are sold on the second floor, u. If you (usted) feel
tired, sit down a while (rato). 12. I do not dare to sit down in
that chair: it is broken. 13. What is that man's name? 14. He
always speaks of himself. 15. Of what are you complaining?
1 6. Indeed (si) I am not complaining; I only regret that smoking
is not permitted here. 17. I am glad of it (ello). 18. Mary
and Jane resemble each other, but they are not sisters.
19. They love each other dearly. 20. Mary's sister is going to
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 317
be married to an Englishman. 21. It seems to me that they
cannot be very fond of each other (quererse mucho). 22. He
always makes fun of her. 23. He will pay her for it (cf. § in,
&.). 24. If she thinks so, she is mistaken. 25. Her mother
complains that he spends (subj.) so much money. 26. He told
me that if he spent much, he earned much. 27. He would not
spend so much, if he did not earn a great deal. 28. Did you
remember each other? 29. Who? Mary and I? 30. Yes, we
kissed and embraced each other affectionately. 31. When you
are in Rome, do as Rome does. 32. It's a long lane that has
no turning (see Nos. 29 and 30 of the preceding exercise).
EXERCISE XXIV
A. — i. Constituidos en republicas los Estados griegos
(Greek), todos los negocios de general importancia, todas las
cuestiones graves eran debatidas (debated) y resueltas (resolved)
por un pueblo entero; pues segun las leyes nuevamente (re-
cently) establecidas, no habia ciudadano que no tuviese voz
y voto (voice and vote) en aquellas solemnes asambleas (assem-
blies). Al principio se hacian los razonamientos (arguments)
sencillamente (simply), sin arte y desprovistos (bare) de ornato
(embellishment); pero bien pronto se advirtio la fuerza y valer
(value) que a toda proposicion anade (adds) la elocuencia, prin-
cipalmente si depende el fallo (decision) de (on) un auditorio
(audience) apasionado (excitable) y numeroso. Conociendolo asi,
cuantos (all who) pensaban hablar en publico se dedicaban
(devoted) a la oratoria en las escuelas que ya por1 entonces se
abrian en Atenas (Athens) y que, propagandose (extending)
poco despues a muchas ciudades, llegaron (came) a ser tan
celebres y concurridas (well attended) de nacionales (natives) y
extranjeros. La elocuencia, pues, era estudiada con ardor como
el medio (means) mas eficaz (efficient) para adquirir (acquire)
poder y honores, aunque no pocas veces ocasionaba (caused) el
destierro (banishment) y la misma (even) muerte.
318 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
B. Continue: i. I write to a friend of mine (thine, etc.).
2. I shall try to do so. 3. I cut my finger. 4. I left without
saying good-bye. 5. My hands are cold.
6. We should eat in order to live, and not live in order to eat.
7. I am ashamed to ask it; but will you be kind enough to cor-
rect this exercise of mine? 8. I am tired of correcting, my dear
friend. 9. Raise your hands, when you can answer. 10.
Knowledge is useful, and eating is indispensable: but I cannot
study after eating, n. John lost his hat and his watch in1
saving the child's life. 12. Upon reading the paper the boy
exclaimed (gritar): My beloved country! I long (apetezco) to
die for (por) thee! 13. It was not my fault, upon my word!
14. In spite of us and of you he went away (se fue). 15. A
certain friend of mine wishes to study oratory. 16. He has a
good presence (presencia), a good voice, and a clear (clara),
and distinct (distinta) pronunciation (pronunciation}. 17. But
he will have to study a great deal before he can debate (debatir).
1 8. Knowledge is the true spring (la fuente) of good speaking.
19. His arguments are too simple and artless. 20. They need
embellishment to (para) give them force and value. 21. The
decision of an audience often depends on the eloquence of the
orator. 22. My friend will win the confidence (confianza) of
his audience. 23. He enjoys (gozar de) a good reputation in
regard to (en cuanto a) his honesty (honradez) and habits
(costumbres). 24. All who listen to him will know that he
speaks (dice) the truth and defends justice (justicid). 25. We
hope that good schools for oratory will be opened. 26. We
are sure (segur-os de) that they will be attended by natives and
strangers.
EXERCISE XXV
A. — i. Tu tienes mi bicicleta y Juan tiene la tuya. 2. Es
preciso que (he must) distinga el lo tuyo de lo suyo. 3. <iD6nde
iDo not translate.
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 319
esta la de ella? 4. Temo que no cojamos el tren. 5. Busca
tus propios guantes: no busques los mios. 6. Ya los busque
y los halle. 7. Es necesario que averigtiemos los hechos (facts]
del caso. 8. El padre de listed, el mio y el de Carlos lo dijeron.
9. Bien sabe listed que ellos no yerran en lo que dicen. 10. Co-
rrija usted sus mismas faltas y no corrija las mias. n. "No
tema Vuestra Majestad que nos venzan los enemigos." 12. Esto
es lo que dijo el general al rey, y el rey lo creyo. 13. Parece
imposible que lo creyera. 14. Sabia que ya habia perdido la
mayor parte de los suyos. 15. Esta pobre madre quiere que
recemos por sus dos hijos. 16. Estan peleando en la guerra.
17. Ella continua sirviendonos con gran fidelidad (most faith-
fully}. 1 8. El orador arguyo en favor de la contribution.
19. Esperabamos que arguyera en contra de ella. 20. Pague-
mosla. No delincamos aunque los demas delincan, quebrando
la ley. 21. <iQuien ha fumado aqui? Huele a tabaco. 22.
^Donde estan los libros que trajeron ustedes? 23. Quiero que
se apliquen (apply} ustedes este afio al estudio del castellano.
B. Continue: i. This house is mine (thine, etc.). 2. I
prefer mine (thou preferest thine, etc.) to that of Don Carlos.
3. Oh that (ojald que) I may conquer the enemy! 4. I must
(es precise que yo) apply myself to (al) study. 5. John wishes
me (thee, etc.) to continue the work.
6. Is this my bicycle? 7. No, that neighbor of ours has
taken yours (fam. sing.). 8. I hope he will not catch the train.
9. It is necessary that he should distinguish mine from his
own. 10. I looked for my books in the library, n. The boys
did not bring them. 12. Won't you (usted) use (servirse de)
mine? 13. Let us pay these bills. 14. I paid mine and my
mother's yesterday. 15. I hope that our brother pays his own.
16. The general lost more than five thousand of his-men. 17.
The king did not believe it. 18. He thought the news was
false. 19. Do not argue in favor of or against the war. 20.
320 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
You do not know the details (pormenores, m.). 21. That is true;
it is possible (fdcil) that I err in what I say. 22. We have
our plans; our father has his. 23. My mother never speaks of
hers. 24. She does not vary her conduct (conducta) in any
way. 25. Paul is reading the paper now, because he did not
read it yesterday. 26. Last week the enemy destroyed ten
towns and villages. 27. Let us pray for our beloved country
since (ya que) we cannot fight for it.
EXERCISE XXVI
A. — (Verbs not found in the Vocabulary will be found in
§ 271). i. El que no es mejor que tu, mal (hardly} puede in-
struirte. 2. Si quieres que almuerce yo contigo, empecemos
luego. 3. Sientate: empieza tu; en un momento vuelvo. 4. Ya
no piensa el en nosotros. 5. Su conducta me avergiienza.
6. £No se acuerda usted de aquello de la semana pasada? 7.
Apuesto a que ni sabe lo que acontecio esta manana tampoco.
8. No le pierda usted de vista. 9. No tenga usted cuidado:
cuente conmigo (upon me). 10. Si usted no prueba su argu-
mento, no convencera a nadie. n. Me llamaran a mi para
que le defienda a usted. 12. No encuentro el sobre con los
papeles. 13. <;E1 que recibio esta manana? 14. No, sefior;
ese no. 15. Busco aquel que contiene las pruebas. 16. <iEs
cierto lo que dice usted? «jLo perdio? 17. Eso no ha de ser.
1 8. Nosotros somos los que tenemos mas que temer. 19. He
escrito esto sin saber lo que escribia. 20. Lo niego todo. 21.
Lo que dicen no es verdad. 22. Que nos devuelvan los que
les prestamos. 23. <jfistos? — No; aquellos. 24. Me cuentan
que estan en Madrid. 25. Me alegro de que se sientan mejores
en esa que en esta. 26. jQue la felicidad descienda a un afli-
gido corazon! 27. Los que los han metido (drawn) en ello,
que los saquen. 28. Yo arriesgaria (risk) la vida para salvar
la de aquellos dos seres (beings).
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 321
B. Continue: i. I tell them what happened. 2. I do not
remember that. 3. I awake. 4. I like (a mi me gusto) Don
Felipe's speech (discurso) better (mas) than Don Jose's. 5. I
am the one (fern.} he hates.
6. Are you (usted) thinking of (en) that affair of yesterday?
7. Yes, sir; I think that what you said was true. 8. We do
not understand that. 9. I do not approve-of (aprobar) their
conduct. 10. It is possible that their father does not approve-
of it. ii. That man and the one with the beard are brothers.
12. It is too bad that they do not agree (entenderse) . 13. The
older of the two has lost his fortune and his brother's. 14. That
seems impossible. 15. That pretty girl is the one that I meet
at my aunt's. 16. Do (Jam. sing.} not return these books, nor
the ones you received last week. 17. Let us not speak of
that! 1 8. Would it be better to buy this house than that
one? 19. Do (Jam. sing.) not close the window. Close the
door. 20. Do not light the lamp. Light the candle. 21.
Awake (fam. pi.}, children: it is late. 22. Mary, play (jam.
sing.) with these girls. Do not play with those. 23. I have a
head-ache (me duele la cabeza): I cannot write any-more.
EXERCISE XXVII
A. — (Verbs not in the Vocabulary will be found in § 271.)
i. La casa que compraron y en que viven es magnifica. 2. Esta
en medio de un jardin, lo que me gusta muchisimo. 3. En
frente de la puerta del jardin hay un arbol grande, debajo del
cual se sienta la familia a almorzar. 4. Fui convidado a hacer
una visita, a la que no faltare (fail). 5. jNo faltara usted si
no quiere que rinamos! 6. No me rifia (scold) usted. <?Porque
me ha de renir? 7. Me reia de todos los que hablaban de tal
guerra, pero ya no me rio. 8. Ya (indeed) lo creo: antes (rather)
merece que vertamos lagrimas. 9. Esta senora es la unica
(only one) de la cual no he oido hablar mal. 10. El hombre que
322 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
vieron (pret. of ver) ustedes ayer es el a quien querian vender
la casa. n. Se murio una tia suya con la que habia vivido
muchos anos. 12. No concibo que no se case. 13. Pues, no
tendra con quien. 14. Mariana te dare el dinero sin el cual no
puedes viajar. 15. Uno de los cuadros representa al rey que
ha abdicado. 16. El otro representa a su hijo en favor de
quien ha abdicado. 17. La primavera viste de flores la tierra.
18. El agua esta hirviendo: sirvase usted hacer el cafe. 19. Los
tertulianos se despidieron muy tarde. 20. Eligieron por presi-
dente a Don Alfredo, lo que nos agrada mucho. 21. El dia si-
guiente durmieron hasta las nueve. 22. La ciudad, hacia la
cual marchaba el enemigo, ya se rindio. 23. iNo sigas mintiendo!
24. jSi no miento! 25. Sera Carlos el que mintio. 26. El es
quien me refirio el hecho (event). 27. Pido la mayor franqueza.
28. Repito de nuevo que es el quien me lo conto. 29. jEsta
bien! Sigamos la obra.
B. Continue: i. The house in which I live. 2. The rea-
sons on account of (por) which I decided. 3. I laughed at him.
4. I did not sleep last night. 5. I served them faithfully (con
fidelidad).
6. This is the watch that I had lost. 7. I found it yester-
day, which pleases me very much. 8. Here is the tree under
which the miser buried (enterrar) his money. 9. John always
quarrels with us (nos rine) when we want to smoke. 10. The
building in front of which are the beautiful statues is a mu-
seum (museo). n. The city surrendered in order that it should
not be (fuera) destroyed. 12. The women shed bitter tears
over (a causa de) this event. 13. The men did not even groan;
they took leave of their families and followed the king bravely
(valero samente) . 14. The rays of the sun struck their weapons
as they marched toward the coast (costa). 15. They did not
succeed in finding (No lograron hollar) shelter (albergue) for the
night, on account of which they quarreled with the guide.
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 323
16. But they repented and asked his pardon. 17. He begged
(rogar) them not to repeat their charges (acusaciones) . 18. I
do not conceive how you can spend so much money. 19. All
that you bought are things which cost very little. 20. We
did not want the dog to follow us everywhere (por todas
paries). 21. We bought flowers for Mary, which pleased her
greatly. 22. She dressed quickly, and looked very pretty.
23. I admire the good taste with which she dresses.
EXERCISE XXVIII
A. — i. Este es el muchacho que me entrego la cuenta.
2. Me alegro de que usted le conozca. 3. Acabo de encon-
trar a Carlos, quien me dio el recibo. 4. Vimos al general del
ejercito, quien esta hoy en esta ciudad. 5. Parece que tenemos
quien nos defienda en caso de una sorpresa (surprise). 6. Te
ofrezco cuanto dinero tengo. 7. j Cuanto te lo agradezco!
8. Pero no carezco de nada, aunque padezca (suffer] mucho.
9. Sin embargo, te ayudare en cuanto pueda. 10. Los Moros
huyeron de Espana para siempre. 1 1. Un generoso Cristiano me
instruyo en su lengua y en su religion. 12. La desconfianza
(distrust) de los naturales (natives') disminuyo pronto. 13. Dudo
que la conducta del reo (criminal) merezca tan severo castigo.
14. No hay tunante (rascal) que mas lo merezca. 15. No creo
que carezca de razon (sense) lo que dice usted. 16. En cuanto
me diga tendra usted razon. 17. La mala conducta de un dis-
cipulo influye en la de toda la clase. 18. A Pablo no le gusta
que se le atribuyan defectos que no tiene. 19. Cuentenos usted
cuanto sepa (pres. subj. of saber), con tal que no nos entristezca.
20. Conoci al senador cuya vida esta escrita en este libro.
21. El grande hombre nacio en una casa muy humilde (hum-
ble). 22. No importa que nazca un hombre en medio de la
humildad, con tal que se sobreponga a (lifts himself above) ello.
23. En un lugar de la Mancha, de cuyo nombre no quiero acor-
324 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
darme, vivia Don Quijote. 24. Es precise que anianezcamos
(arrive at daybreak) en Nueva York para tomar el vapor (steam-
ship). 25. <jNo es posible que lleguemos antes del anochecer?
26. Quienes gritaban, quienes lloraban de gozo (delight) al
divisar (see) la tierra. 27. Aim los ninos vueltos (recovered)
de su terror, contribuyeron a la algazara (merriment). 28. Vale
mas que no luzcamos todos nuestros talentos en esta ocasion.
B. Continue: i. I instruct these children. 2. I do not
argue the point. 3. John wishes that I should know his friend.
4. I must (es precise que yo) flee from here. 5. No matter, as
long as (con tal que) he does not hate (subj.) me (thee, etc.).
6. In whose favor has the king abdicated (abdicado)? 7. Do
not offer him all the money you have. 8. I fear that he will
not thank you for (omit) it. 9. Is he the man whom I met
at your father's? 10. I have just seen John, who told me
that he is a rascal, n. Is this the place where fine watches
are made? 12. If you are fond of (aficionado a) the fine arts
(bellas artes) , everything relating to them will interest you.
13. I offer to take you through the building. 14. How I thank
you for your kindness! 15. But we must leave before night-
comes-on. 16. I intend to build a house. 17. Do not build
a house that looks-like (subj.) a palace and which lacks (care-
ccr de, subj.) all comforts (comodidades). 18. Don Alfredo in-
structed us in his language. 19. He wishes that our distrust
of his people should diminish (disminuir). 20. Do you think
that the boy deserves such a severe punishment? 21. Do you
know the system against which the great orator argued? 22.
Yes, sir; I attribute (atribuir) to it many defects. 23. I fear
that it will not distribute (distribuir) the public burdens (car-
gas publicas) evenly (uniformemente) . 24. I do not think that
his arguments lack force (fuerza) and sense (razon) although it
may appear-so to you (itsted). 25. What he said last year in
favor of tariff reform (la reforma arancelaria) did not influence
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 325
(influir en) my feelings. 26. Let us not judge (juzgar) by
appearances (apariencias) . 27. Not all that glitters (relucir)
is gold. 28. Are you the lady whose name is on this card?
29. Yes, madam; I should like (quisiera) to obtain (tomar) all
the information (informcs, m., pi.) you can give me about a
servant. 30. The one who has just left me? 31. She is the
best I ever had. 32. Thank you. Good afternoon.
EXERCISE XXIX
A. — i. <!Que es eso? <iQue significa el alboroto (noise)?
2. <i Quien esta a la puerta? 3. dQuien es el barbaro (rude per-
son) que llama asi? 4. ^Que hora es? — Son las diez. 5. <iA
como estamos (what is the date) hoy? — Estamos a 1 1 de mayo.
6. (iCual es la fecha de la ultima carta? — Eli5deabril. 7. <iDe
que habla usted? <Jde quien? 8. £De quien son aquellas casas?
9. £A donde conduce esta calle? 10. <JCual medico quiere
usted? ii. <JCuales remedies le ha enviado a usted? 12. <iDe
que tiene usted miedo? 13. ^Como se siente? 14. <iCuantas
veces ha ido usted a su casa? 15. <jA quien espera usted?
16. <?En que piensa? 17. jQue nina mas preciosa (charming)'
1 8. <iDe quien es hija? 19. <iEn donde vive? 20. <iCual es
el mejor modo de dirigirme a su casa? 21. <jCuanto me paga
usted por conducirle al Escorial? 22. Es lejos y usted es ex-
tranjero. 23. La semana que viene vamos a la sierra (moun-
tains) montados en mulas. 24. Es el modo mas comodo de
viajar por la sierra. 25. <jQue museos ha visitado usted en
Europa? 26. <iQue obras le han gustado mas? 27. Es muy
dificil decirlo. Me encantan las pinturas del Museo del Prado.
28. Hay quien dice que esta galena gana a la del Louvre. 29.
Me parece que el Palacio Real de Madrid, con referencia a su
arquitectura y decoraciones, no tiene superior en Europa.
30. Muchos y magnificos son los edificios que se han levantado
en Madrid. 31. La calle de Alcala es la mejor de la capital.
326 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
32. Principia en la todavfa llamada Puerta del Sol. 33. <{Sabe
usted porque es tan frio el clima de Madrid en el invierno?
34. Sera por su grande elevation. 35. Tambien esta la ciudad
por todas partes abierta a los vientos. 36. Reni con un hoste-
lero (inn-keeper). 37. <» Porque? £cuando? <id6nde? <ic6mo?
38. Porque cuando donde como mal me sirven, me irrito (be-
come angry).
B. Continue: i. I am going to see it. 2. I was riding a
mule. 3. I came. 4. I went away (irse). 5. I shall come to
see her.
6. How much money have you? 7. Who will come and have-
a-ride (pasearse) on horseback? 8. Who were these tourists
(turista, m.)? 9. Where were they going? 10. Whence (de
ddnde) did they come? u. How many were there? 12. Which
ones did you know? 13. How long have you been in this
city? 14. Come and see me. 15. Why did you return so
early? 16. It was growing darker (sec § 149); the wind became
(se puso) cold, and the snowflakes (copo) came flying (volar)
from (del) heaven. 17. Did you (usted) go to Madrid? 18.
What museums did you visit? 19. Did you see the Royal
Palace? 20. Yes; I rode (fu?) through the principal streets
on horseback. 21. 1 think that is the best way to journey
along (caminar por) the streets. 22. There are magnificent
buildings on Alcala Street, and also in La Puerta del Sol. 23.
What pleased me most were the master-pieces (obras maestras)
of Spanish artists (artista, m.) in the Museo del Prado. 24. You
see the works of these illustrious (insigne) painters (pintor, m.)
wherever you may go (dondequiera que i-aya usted). 25. But the
finest, to my mind (en mi concepto), are the ones in the capital
of the country. 26. Shall you visit the Royal Armory (Arme-
ria Real)? 27. Yes, sir; they say the collection of armor
(armaduras) is one of the most complete (complete) in the world.
28. Do not fail (no deje usted de) to go and see the fine paintings
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 327
in the Escurial. 29. It is amusing (diver tido) to see the peas-
ants (campesino) travel along the street riding on mules. 30.
You must go to see a bull-fight (corrida de toros). 31. There
will be one next Sunday. 32. Some Spanish ladies came to
see me. 33, They wished me to go to the Paseo del Prado
with them. 34. We went and enjoyed ourselves (divertirst)
very much. 35. There were many things essentially (esen-
cialmente) Spanish. 36. But I did not see the Spanish ladies
who formerly (antes) dressed so very (de una manera tan} pic-
turesquely (pintoresca) . 37. They no longer (ya no) wear
(ll&oar) the "mantilla."
EXERCISE XXX
A. — i. Tenemos que aprender estos pronombres (pronouns].
2. Son algo dificiles, (ino es verdad? 3. Alguien viene detras
de (behind) nosotros. 4. No; no parece nadie por la calle.
5. Sera Juan. Si de alguno desconfio (distrust), es de el. 6.
Algo mas habra aqui, — algo que has venido a buscar entre
nosotros. 7. Vino el cartero, pero no tenia nada para mi.
8. iNada mas que por eso lloras? 9. No digas nada a nadie.
10. <iHan venido algunos parientes de ustedes? n. Si, senora;
hace unos ocho dias que estan con nosotros. 12. Cada vez
los queremos mas. 13. No hay nada mas lindo que esta
nina. 14. Tiene unos ojos que parecen estrellas (stars). 15.
Puede que vayamos todos a Granada algun dia. 16. Pues,
mas vale tarde que nunca. 17. Esto es cosa de nunca acabar,
como dijo el otro. 18. Cualquiera (any one) haria (cond. oj
hacer) lo mismo en iguales (the same) circunstancias. 19. Quien
de todos es amigo, o es muy pobre, o es muy rico. 20. Cada
uno de los muchachos cree que el puede mas que ninguno.
21. Lo mismo creo yo. 22. Dijo el militar: "Los que quieren
irse, que se vayan: los demas que me sigan." 23. Ninguno se
fue: todos le siguieron. 24. Ponga (pres. subj. of poner)
328 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
usted dos cubiertos (covers], uno para el, otro para mi. 25. Su
padre de usted dijo lo que no podia menos de decir. 26. El mis-
mo nos lo conto. 27. Ni uno de nosotros pudo dormir en toda
aquella noche. 28. Si se amaran los unos a los otros, no se
burlarian los unos de los otros. 29. A mi no me gusta ni uno
ni otro. 30. Miles de personas de uno y otro sexo asisten a la
corrida de toros. 31. <JNo quiere usted ir conmigo? 32.
jMuchisimas gracias! pero no puedo ir: he estado enfermo toda
la semana. 33. Es inutil decir nada. 34. Usted hara (fut.
0/hacer) lo que le parezca. 35. Tal castigo merece quien haya
destruido el tal edificio. 36. Ya no podemos mas. No tene-
mos ni papel, ni plumas, ni fuerzas (strength) para acabar.
B. Continue: i. I can't do any more. 2. I might (po-
dria) fall. 3. I could not help smiling. 4. I do not remember
anything or anyone. 5. I should like to do them this favor.
6. Has anyone come during my absence (ausencia)? 7. No,
sir; no one has been here. 8. Did the postman leave anything
for me? 9. He left a-great-deal, letters and papers, but noth-
ing for you (usted). 10. Everybody must have forgotten me.
ii. The other day you received some ten letters. 12. Yes,
but such days are rare. 13. When one has little money, one
has few friends, it seems. 14. He who loves (querer) well,
never (tarde) forgets, according-to-the-saying (como dijo el otro).
15. Not one of those strangers can (saber) read or write. 16. We
cannot help feeling-sorry-for (compadecer) them. 17. Some one
has to answer for (de) this. 18. Have you any rare books?
19. I haven't any to-day. 20. Mr. Martinez has some forty
that he wishes to sell. 21. Are you going to the Museum?
22. I cannot go. I have no time. 23. I do not see anything.
24. Everybody visits the Museum: not a few go to the bull-
fight. 25. Everyone has his own taste. 26. I have no desire
(gana) whatever (alguna) to (de) see such a diversion (diversion) .
27. That magnificent house must belong to some rich man.
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 329
28. Do you mean the one on (en] the corner (esquina)? 29. No
one lives in it. 30. The owner had a son and a lovely (Undo)
daughter. Both died in that building. 31. He was very fond-
of (querer) them: he will never forget them. 32. Now he wishes
to sell all he has, in order to go away. 33. He himself told me
so (Id). 34. I should do the same under the circumstances.
EXERCISE XXXI
A. — i. Haganme ustedes el favor de repasar los numeros
cardinales desde cero hasta ciento. 2. Se pueden escribir
veintiuno, veintidos, etc. (etcetera), en lugar de veinte y uno,
veinte y dos, etc. 3. Su ultima carta tiene la fecha del primero
del mes de mayo de 1915. 4. Felipe II. y Fernando VII. de
Esparia no fueron buenos reyes. 5. De este dice Emilio Cas-
telar que mancho (stained) la historia de Esparia de su mal
gobierno: aquel era fanatico y muy cruel. 6. Alfonso XIII.
se ha hecho amar de sus subditos (subjects). 7. ({Que se hizo
(became) de aquel pobre Italiano? 8. Esta muy bien. Hace
de portero en una casa de comercio. 9. Es muy trabajador y
gana cada dia diez pesetas (aproximadamenle [approximately]
dos dolor es americanos, o cuatro pesos mejicanos). 10. Su madre
hace construir una casa. n. Un amigo les ha facilitado unos
quinientos pesos al seis por ciento. 12. Esperan pagar la
deuda dentro de dos anos y medio. 13. Voy a hacer un viaje
a la aldea. Pienso llevar a los nifios. 14. Hagan bajar el
cofre: ya me lo hizo mi mama. 15. El tren sale dentro de
tres horas. 16. Cada dos minutos vienen los ninos a preguntar
si ya es hora de partir. 17. Si no quieren hacerme caso, no
puedo viajar con ellos. 18. Dime con quien andas, te dire
quien eres. 19. La lengua espanola tiene miles de refranes.
20. Los refranes, segun Don Quijote, son todos los libros del
mundo en su quinta esencia (quintessence). 21. A Emilia
(Emily] y a Diego (James) les toca (fall) cuatro quintos de los
330 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
quince mil pesos. 22. jOjala que a mi me tocara el resto!
23. A mi me hace mas falta el dinero que a ningun otro. 24.
No te hagas el tonto: todo el rmindo te conoce. 25. <*Que
estan haciendo los muchachos? 26. Temo que no sea nada de
bueno. 27. Digales usted que entren, que (for) ya son las
diez menos cuarto. 28. Mi sala tiene treinta pies de largo por
veinte de ancho. 29. El heroe (hero) nacional de Espana, Ruy
Diaz de Bivar, el "Cid," murio en 1099, y el famoso Poema del
Cid fue compuesto (composed) en el siglo XII.
B. Continue: i. I am going to have a suit made. 2. I
need money. 3. John packs my (thy, etc.) trunk. 4. I shall
say nothing. 5. I am using (me sirvo de) John's book.
6. The train leaves at 3:40 in the afternoon. 7. Send down
(haga bajar) my trunk. 8. Mary is going to pack it for me.
9. We have to travel six hundred miles and shall not reach the
coast before the thirteenth of-this-month (del actual). 10. The
ticket costs forty-three dollars and fifty cents, n. Hundreds
of people (personas) go there every summer. 12. My mother
gave (did) me two pairs of pretty gloves and a dozen handker-
chiefs (panuelo). 13. She told me ten times to tell you to come
and see her. 14. We should like to have a house built. 15.
But we have to borrow a part of the money. 16. Uncle John
will lend you a thousand dollars, I am sure. 17. He will prob-
ably demand (exigir) interest (redito) at the rate of (a la razon
del) six per cent. 18. We shall need it for only a year and a
half. 19. We have been saving (ahorrar) money, every one of
us, for a rainy day (por lo que pudiere tronar). 20. I-should-,
think-we-have about three fourths of the necessary amount
(suma). 21. I shall try to see your uncle to-morrow. 22. It
is too bad: he was here half an hour ago. 23. Please do not
speak of this matter (asunto) to any one. 24. Take half of
my possessions (bienes): take them all, if you restore (devolver)
my (see § 119) health. 25. I paid thirty cents a dozen for the
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 331
eggs. 26. I have bought them cheaper a hundred times. 27.
It is so warm that we must have (mandar hacer] new suits made.
28. A week ago it was so cold that the water froze (helar) in
my room. 29. I did not mind-it (hacer caso}: I went skating
(patinar) every day. 30. This is the eighth month of the
school-year (ano escolar}. 31. We are studying the thirty-
first lesson of the Grammar.
EXERCISE XXXII
A. — i. No hay que asustarse (be alarmed} por nada de lo
que diga yo. 2. Nos han robado mucho dinero. 3. Unos
ladrones entraron por la ventana que da a la huerta (orchard}.
4. El criado acababa de acostarse cuando oyo un ruido arriba.
•5. Al subirse se encontro con ellos que venian escalera abajo.
6. Pugnaron con el por salir, y poco falto para que le mataran.
7. Por poco le mataron. 8. ^No seria el criado mismo el la-
dron? 9. Creo que no. Casi estoy seguro de que no fue el.
10. <jSabe usted que van a casarse Manuel y Teresa? n. Si;
supe hace un mes que ella le dio el si. 12. Francisca va a re-
galarles una maquina de coser. 13. Andres (Andrew) les corn-
pro preciosos vasos para vino y costosas cucharas para sopa.
14. Van al campo por quince dias. 15. Mariana por la ma-
nana partiran para la aldea en donde nacio Manuel. 16. jOye,
Juanito! £d6nde estas? 17. Ahi voy, mama. 18. Pues si;
ven aca, hijo mio: vamos a entrar en la casa, que ya es tarde.
19. Daria mi vida por mi hijo. 20. Pero es precise castigarle
por haber mentido. 21. No quiero que diga mentiras por mi-
nimas (little) que scan. 22. Esta pluma no sirve para nada.
23. Hazme el favor de darme otra. 24. Voy a darle los buenos
dias a mi padre. 25. Esta enfermo. Ya va para un ano que
padece (suffers) de este mal (disease). 26. Este discipulo tra-
baja por alcanzar (win) una beca (scholarship}. 27. Estos
caballos son para el ejercito. 28. Los quieren inmediatamente.
332 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
29. Apreciable Senora (Dear Madam) :
A su tiempo he recibido su favorecida (favor], fecha del 10 del
corriente, y asi mismo (likewise) el giro (draft] por cinco pesos,
oro, que acompano su carta, y que he abonado en su cuenta
(with which I have credited your account}. Escribi a la casa
de Ballesca para que le remitiera (send) a usted los libros que
usted desea. Tambien he pedido para usted, suponiendo que
la quiere, una coleccion de cuentos (stories), titulada (entitled)
Los mejores cuentos de los mejores autores espanoles contempord-
neos, en la cual se hallan obras de los escritores (writers) Perez
Galdos, Blasco Ibanez, Palacio Valdes, Juan Valera, y otros
muchos. Vale el ejemplar (copy) a la rustica (with paper covers)
p. 5.00 (cinco pesetas), o encuadernado (bound) p. 7.00.
Quedo de usted S. S. (seguro servidor = lit., faithful serv-
ant) y amigo (translate: I beg to remain your faithful servant),
Martin Molinar.
30. Muy Sr. mio:
Tengo el gusto de acusar a Ud. recibo (acknowledge the
receipt) de su grata (favor) de fecha 15 de Septiembre ppdo.
(proximo pasado = last), y manifestarle que para cumplimentar
(fill) sus apreciables ordenes, he remitido por el correo, en dos
paquetes certincados, las obras detalladas (itemized) en la ad-
junta (enclosed) factura (statement), cuyo importe (amount) de
Ptas: 39.70 he cargado en su cuenta personal.
Como siempre se reitera (repeat) de Ud. atento (attentive)
y S. S.
Q. B. S. M. (que besa sus manos),
Victoriano Pidal.
31. Toribio Gameros
y Sabina Terrazas de Gameros
tienen el honor de participar (inform) a usted que a las once de
la manana del dia 12 del mes presente tendra lugar (will take
place) el matrimonio (marriage) de su hija
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 333
Carolina Gameros
con el Senor Don Juan Luzan
en el Santuario (Sanctuary} de Nuestra Senora de Guadalupe
( = the name of a church] y a cuyo acto (act) le suplican se sirva
concurrir (be present).
Guadalajara, Enero 2 de 1914.
32. Senorita Dona Ana Garcia.
Muy Senorita mia (My dear Miss Garcia) :
Por conducto de (from) mis padres he sabido la triste noti-
cia del fallecimiento (death) de su senor padre. Siento mucho
la muerte de tan carifioso (loving) padre, tan fiel esposo y tan
afectuoso (affectionate) amigo, y la acompano a usted (sympa-
thize with you) y a toda su familia en su sentimiento (grief).
Su servidor y amigo,
Pablo Ortiz.
33. Maria Selles de Ahumada desea a la apreciable senora
Merino un feliz ano nuevo, y la suplica tenga la bondad de
aceptar este pequeno obsequio (present).
34. Sr. Don Antonio Villar.
Muy Senor mio (Dear Sir) :
Le puedo arrendar (rent) la casa por sesenta pesos men-
suales (a month) y por el termino (term) de dos afios, siempre
que (provided that) usted haga a su cuenta (at your expense) las
reformas (changes, repairs) que me indica (point out) en su grata
de ayer; o por setenta pesos teniendo yo que hacer las dichas
reformas.
Con este motivo me ofrezco a las ordenes de usted como
S. S. Q. B. S. M. (/ beg to remain your obedient servant),
Juan Fernandez.
B. Continue: i. I am comfortable here. 2. I had just
gone out. 3. I give it up. 4. I haven't anything to do with
it. 5. I hit the mark.
334 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
6. For whom are you looking? 7. For Mr. Martinez. I
know that he lives here-somewhere (por aqui). 8. I cannot
find (dar con} the house. 9. Let us take ( Vamos a dar] a walk.
10. We shall have to start immediately: it is already late.
11. Where is my hat? 12. It is there somewhere (por ahi
anda). 13. Give me another pair of gloves: these are good for
nothing. 14. The children are starting for school. 15. They
will take some books for you. 16. What time is it? It has
just struck two o'clock. 17. It is about to strike two. 18.
Parents make sacrifices for their children. 19. Where is Paul?
There he is. 20. Tell him to come here. 21. Listen, Paul.
22. May I go out? 23. I heard it yesterday. 24. I paid all
the money I had for the typewriter. 25. I haven't a cent now
(ya). 26. Don Luis says he will pay you by the first of Jan-
uary. 27. In the meantime (entre tanto] he pays you eight per
cent, interest. 28. Candles are sold here at wholesale (por
mayor] and at retail (por menor). 29. The room has four win-
dows that face the street. 30. Have you fed the chickens
(polios}'? 31. I remember the inn (fonda). 32. I remember
that they served us an excellent (excelente) dinner (comida)
there. 33. Did you (usied) see your cousin? 34. I saw her
yesterday: I have not seen her to-day. 35. I am sure that he
did it in order to save his brother. 36. Hours afterward they
told his mother what had happened. 37. We did not hear
(saber) of-it until months afterwards. 38. We knew the
young man, and we knew that he was honest (honrado).
Vera Cruz, November 30, 1914.
39. My dear Sir:
I have received your favor of the i3th inst., and beg to say
(manifesto a usted] that I cannot pay seventy dollars a month
for the house. I will rent (jut. ind.} it for a term of three years,
provided that you reduce (bajar) the price (precio) to fifty-five
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 335
dollars, if I make the repairs at my expense, or to sixty-five, if
you make them at yours.
I beg to remain your obedient servant,
Antonio Villar.
40. Dear Sir:
I have just received your favor of the 3ist of last month,
and hasten (apresurarse a) to say that I should like to have the
complete (complete) works of B. Perez Galdos, provided that you
can get them for me at $1.00 a copy, with paper covers. Could
you send me also a copy of Juan Valera's Pepita Jimenez, well
bound? You may pay up to (hasta) four dollars for the book: I
want it for a present.
If you will send me your bill at once, I shall remit (you)
a draft for the amount by return mail (a vuelia de correct) .
I beg to remain sincerely yours
(Quedo de usted S. S. Q. B. S. M.).
41. Dear Sir:
Various payments (pago) which I have to make (verificar)
in these days, oblige me to collect (cobrar) the small amounts
(cantidad, /.) I have out-standing (desparramadas) here and
there (por un lado y otro). I beg (rogar) you therefore (pues),
to have the kindness to deliver (enlregar) the amount of your
last bill (faclura) to the bearer (dador) of this letter (la pre-
sente) who will give you a receipt in my name.
Believe me that only urgent (urgente) necessity (necesidad,
/.) to (de) collect (reunir) some funds (fondo) has been able to
decide (determinar) me to trouble (molest ar) you.
I am very truly yours.
EXERCISE XXXIII
A. — i. Ten cuidado: tu lengua corta y hiere. 2. Padre
e hijo, el uno y el otro son buenos hombres. 3. Hace diez u
336 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
once afios que los conocemos. 4. Miguel Angelo no solo era
un gran pintor, sino tambien escultor y arquitecto. 5. He
visto siete u ocho de sus obras maestras en Italia. 6. A Juan le
cupo (fell) el honor de hacer el discurso en la fiesta. 7. Habia
venido tanta gente (people) para oirle que no cabia en el teatro
(the theatre would not hold them) principal. 8. Es lastima que
tu y yo no pudieramos asistir. 9. Dice todo el mundo que
hablo docta y distintamente. 10. Si; lo diran, mas yo no lo
puedo creer. n. ^Porque no vino usted ayer? 12. No fue por-
que no queria, sino porque no podia salir. 13. El medico no
quiere que saiga cuando haya viento. 14. Un comerciante me
trajo una carta escrita en castellano. 15. Queria que se la
tradujera al ingles. 16. No solo el pueblo sino el rey mismo
exaltecia (exalted) el nombre de este escritor (writer). 17. Jamas
dice sino lo que piensa. 18. Contento (satisfaction) dieron sus
palabras a cuantos las oyeron. 19. Se cayo la nina y se puso a
llorar. 20. El libro no saldra a luz antes del mes que viene.
21. Compraremos otro, que no vale la pena aguardar tanto
tiempo. 22. Como no me caia el traje, se lo di a mi hermano.
23. Ahora estan caros los huevos, porque las gallinas no ponen.
24. No tiene remedio. 25. O tenemos que pagar lo que valen,
o cesar de (cease to) comerlos. 26. <? Tiene usted escrita la carta?
27. No, serior; todavia no. 28. De que le vale el tanto estu-
diar a este muchacho debil e incapaz (weak and incapable) ? El
otro no trabaja tanto, y sale con la calificacion de "sobresa-
liente." 29. Si tu vas a caballo, yo voy a pie. 30. Me gusta
mucho ir a pie de dia: de noche prefiero ir en coche o en automo-
vil (motor car). 31. No vuelvo a ir alia: nunca esta ella en casa.
32. Eso no tiene nada de particular. 33. Esta sala huele a
violetas. 34. No puede ser: ahora no las hay. 35. Tengo
que ir a casa: el sol se esta poniendo. 36. Tenga usted la bon-
dad (o, hagame usted el favor) de conducir a estos caballeros a
la finca del general. 37. Vale mas que los conduzca mi her-
mano: yo no conozco el camino.
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 337
B. Continue: i. I have set the table. 2. I lost seven or
eight dollars. 3. I brought the coffee. 4. I do not like (no
me gusta; no te gusta, etc.} to go. 5. I fell down.
6. They speak Spanish and English. 7. Not only the king,
but also the queen was present at the bull-fight. 8. But the
queen became (ponerse} ill, and had to return to the (omit)
palace. 9. Are you from the country? 10. Do you know to
whom this plantation belongs? 1 1 . When will the book be pub-
lished? 12. I do not know (tQuien sabe?) ; perhaps next month.
13. I am afraid that it is not worth while to go to the city.
14. Do you know why eggs are so dear now? 15. It is very
cold and the hens have ceased laying. 16. Ours haven't laid
any eggs for weeks. 17. What do these mines (minas) pro-
duce (producir}, silver or gold? 18. Did you (usted} hear Mr.
Blank's (Fulano) speech? 19. Yes; I heard it. It was good
for nothing. 20. There is nothing strange about that. 21.
He is not only not intelligent, but does not always speak the
truth either (tampoco}. 22. Has Antonia set the table? 23.
Yes, madam; the coffee will get cold. 24. Let us be seated,
you (tu) and I. 25. I have only (no ... sino) two five- dollar
(de a cinco pesos} bills. 26. I have the letter written: what am
I to do now? 27. Translate (traducir} this paper into French.
28. To whom belongs (caber} the honor of presenting the orator
(orador} of the day? 29. There were so many people that the
theater would not hold them. 30. They came on foot, on
horseback, in carriages and in motor cars. 31. This speaker
is beloved by everybody. 32. He comes here from time to
time (de cuando en cuando}. 33. I have known him for ten or
eleven years. 34. We must reach the other side of the river
before the sun sets. 35. We cannot cross (atravesar) it by
night. 36. They are anxious to visit England. 37. Why?
Because they were born there. 38. I have seen the hcuse in
which their parents lived. 39. Be kind enough to tell me
what time it is. My watch does not go. 40. Why are you
338 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
growing pale? 41. Because I dropped it, and it is John's.
42. Now I understand.
EXERCISE XXXIV
A. — i. Tu, picarona, lo has de saber. 2. No, amiguito
mio, no se nada, de veritas (truly}. 3. Ahi esta la viejecita.
Toditos los dias viene a pedir limosna. Dice: "Una limosnita,
senorita, por el amor (love) de Dios." 4. Mi hermanita se
llama Anita. 5. En la casita de su munequita (dolly) hay una
mesita, cuatro silloncitos, un sofa, dos espejitos (looking-glasses)
y una jaulita (cage) con un pajarillo. 6. Cada pueblecito tiene
su plazuela. 7. En nuestra plazuela habia un circo (circus)
ayer. 8. Llevamos a los chiquillos. 9. Habia muchos ani-
malitos. 10. Vimos a un hombrachon con su mujerota, muy
chistosos (funny) los dos. n. Habia tambien dos enanitos
(dwarfs) muy caballeretes. 12. ^Se fue el circo? — No; to-
davia no. 13. jQue ganillas tengo de asistir a una funcion
(performance) I 14. Pero lo veo dificilillo. Tengo muchos
quehacercitos (little things to do) en casa. 15. Que los haga
Mariquita (dim. of Maria), quien es muy hacendosilla (indus-
trious). 16. No pierdas el tiempo leyendo ese librejo. 17. No
seas burlona (a tease). Ademas de ser muy divertido (amusing),
contiene unas tonadillas (little songs) que han de cantarse ma-
fiana. 18. Ayer fuimos a pie a la fiesta de la aldea. 19. Un
jovencito nos sirvio de guia. Cada ratito (moment) nos dijo:
"Ahorita llegamos," lo que nos puso un poquillo enfadaditos.
20. Un padre predicaba (preached) un sermon debajo de unos
arboles grandes. 21. La reverente multitud se cayo de rodillas
al oir tan dukes palabras. 22. El senor Jordan es un autor-
cillo de ninguna importancia. 23. Desde lueguito (at once)
se conoce que no es sino un politiquejo. 24. Ha de notarse
que no se puede ganar gran cosa trabajando de portero. 25. A
los dos meses de estar en Londres se moria de hambre el bueno
ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES 339
de Francisco. 26. A principles de mayo todos se fueron a
Guadalajara en Mejico. 27. jGracias a Dios! estan ahora
mejores de salud. 28. De punaladas y fusilazos mataron los
bandidos (bandits) a dos valientes Americanos. 29. Despues
se juntaron con (joined) sus amigotes ("pals") para repartir
(distribute) el botin (booty). 30. <{En cuanto se vende esta
telita? — A peso la vara, senorita. 31. Al otro lado del jar-
dincito hay a lo menos veinte arbolitos. Los ha plantado
mi abuelito uno a uno. 32. No valia la pena el llevar en cau-
tiverio a aquel reyezuelo. 33. No le gustaba que se le dijeran
palabrotas. 34. £ A como estamos hoy? — Estamos a media-
dos de mayo (o, a 16 de mayo). 35. Creia que teniamos el
quince. 36. De esta manera vamos a acabar la obra a fines del
ano.
B. Continue: i. I am going to a neighbor's. 2. I am in
better health. 3. I was standing up during the whole per-
formance. 4. I was blind with anger. 5. I live on the other
side of the river.
6. Little- Anna1 is a rather-large-girl1 now. 7. Johnny1 is
her little-cousin.' Mary1 is her little-sister.1 8. We are going
to visit our grand-daddy1 to-day. 9. He is always praising
his little-grandchildren. 10. He says smiling: There is no
doubt (no cabe duda)', they have (an) extraordinary great-
talent.2 ii. A little-boy1 brought a little-dog.1 12. But Fanny
(Panchita) would not take it. 13. She said its little yellow-
ish eyes1 were ugly. 14. She would rather (antes bien) have a
kitten.1 15. It is rather-arduous1 for her little-tongue1 to
pronounce such big- words.2 16. The poor-little-girl is some-
what-frightened (asustadita) . 17. The elephant may be called
a huge-ugly-animal (animalote). 18. How can anyone (nadie)
live in that hut? 19. Those people go-about (andar) dressed
in (de) dirty-rags.2 20. In the city they dress in French fash-
ion.3 21. You inquisitive-little-fellow,1 run home (vete a casa
340 ALTERNATIVE EXERCISES
corrienditd) . 22. Go to my house; it is a little-nearer.1 23.
Blind with anger the big-ugly-fellow2 struck the little-boy?1
a blow-with-his-cane. 24. Poor Juan Neira had sixty knife-
thrusts in his body (el cuerpo). 25. Tell the shoemaker (zapa-
tero) to send my shoes at once (luego lueguito). 26. The poor-
little-man1 said that he could not mend them to-day. 27. He
has another little-job (quehacercito). 28. The work will be pub-
lished soon. But I know that it will be a worth-less-book.2
29. Seeing the shipwreck (naufragio), some fell on their knees
to pray, others began to shout (gritar] for-help (auxilio). 30.
You little-rogue,1 you (tu) have the penny1 in your wee-hand.1
31. It will be somewhat-difficult1 to get seats (asiento) for the
performance. 32. We began these exercises in the middle of
September.
!Use diminutive. 2Use augmentative. 8Do not translate.
RETURN TO DESK BKOM WHICH BORROWED
LOAN DEPT
LD 2lA-60m-2,'67
(H241slO)476B
General Library
University of California
Berkeley
YB 01 006
JV.186416
THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11